HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2004-R0015 - Agreement To Provide Bio-Safety Laboratory Facility Construction - Pharr & Co. - 01/08/2004Resolution No. 2004-R0015
January 8, 2004
Item No. 30
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and
directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Contract per ITB 9224-
03/RS to provide for the Bio -Safety Level 3 Laboratory Facility Construction, by and
between the City of Lubbock and Pharr & Company of Lubbock, Texas, and related
documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully
set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council.
Passed by the City Council this 8th
ATTEST:
Re cca Garza, City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
vak*C
Victor Kilman, Purch sing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
J,pEM. Knight
Assistant City Attorney
ke/Public Works Contract.Pharr & Co ... res
December 24, 2003
day of January , 2004.
Resolution No. 2004-R0015
January 8, 2004
Item No. 30
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and
directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Contract per ITB #224-
03/RS to provide for the Bio-Safety Level 3 Laboratory Facility Construction, by and
between the City of Lubbock and Pharr & Company of Lubbock, Texas, and related
documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully
set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council.
Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January , 2004.
ATTEST:
RehWrca Garza, City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
C
Victor Kilman, Purch sing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
J M. Knight
Assistant City Attorney
ke/Public Works Contract.Pharr & Co ... res
December 24, 2003
BOND CHECK
BEST RATING
-4--
LICENS D I TEXAS
DATE ,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
ITB #224-03/RS
"A City Of Planned Progress"
CITY Or LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
ITB #224-03/RS, Addendum #3
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13TM STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH:(806) 775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164
http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
ADDENDUM #3
ITB #224-03 / RS
Bio-Safety Level 3 Laboratory Facility
Construction
MAILED TO VENDOR: December 17, 2003
CLOSE DATE: December 23, 2003 @ 4:00 p.m.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where
any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find enclosed Addendum #3 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to (806) 775-2164 or Email to rshuffieid@mylubbock.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF ::•
Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's
responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager if any language requirements etc or any combinations
thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be
submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Manager no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid
close date. A review of such notifications will be made.
224-03RSAdd3
t2• tfi•zco'3
ADDENDUM NO.$ Vxp oz.-zq.see4
TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders
PROJECT: Bio-Safety Level 3 Laboratory Facility Construction
DATE: December 16, 2003 PSC Job No: 03.8798.03
Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans
and Specifications. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies
the original Bidding Documents dated November 17, 2003 as noted below:
This Addendum consists of 4 pages, plus 0 attachments
Specifications
Section 15090 Chilled and Heating Water Systems
1. Add the following paragraph:
Chilled Water Storage Tank: Steel construction with man -way for cleanout, drain, and
manual vent at top. Note that the chilled water tank shall be insulated as specified in
15180. Coordinate openings as required by field conditions.
2. Delete paragraph 3.4 in its entirety.
Section 15800 Air Distribution
1. Paragraph 2.6 D. Note that three total sets of filter media is required; One set for testing,
and two sets to be turned over to the owner at final acceptance.
Section 15900 Temperature Regulation / Building Automation System
1. Part 2, Products. Note that the valve and damper actuators shall be pneumatic where
possible; unless speed or torque requirements dictate an electric device. Note that fail
position on all valves and dampers shall be carefully coordinated. Note that the
temperature control air compressor shall fed from an emergency power circuit. The
temperature control contractor shall select compressor and power requirements shall be
coordinated with Division 16 contractor.
2. Part 2, Products. Note that at each filter bank, a magnahelic gauge with appropriate scale
is required for maintenance purposes. These gauges are in addition to the Building
Automation System sensors that provide filter change alarms.
Section 15905 Facility Management System
A Technical Proposal has been received from Control Technologies of Lubbock, Texas
The Technical Proposal has been reviewed and is acceptable. Therefore, the approved
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
4222 85th Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
vendors for the building automation system / temperature control system are Johnson
Controls, Inc. and Control Technologies (Seibe).
Section 15910 Room Pressure Control Monitor
1. Revise paragraph 1.11. To read as follows:
Provide room pressure sensors in the locations shown on the drawings in Ante 1, Ante 3
and Ante 4. Install the pressure sensors high on the wall above the door, measuring the
pressure difference between the referenced space and the adjacent space. There are a
total of three sensors required under the contract.
Section 16995 Electrical, Facility Startup/Commissioning
1. Under Section 1. 1, B, Replace the sentence, "The Contractor is responsible to
provide a Test Engineer..." with "The Commissioning Agent is responsible to
provide a Test Engineer to commission the facilities."
2. Under Section 1.2, B, 3, Delete, "17800 — Commissioning: Life Safety Systems"
Section 16211 Wiring Devices
1. Under Section 3. 1, A, Replace the sentence, "At each wiring..." with "Each wiring
device shall be identified with panel and circuit number to which the device is finally
connected. Devices mounted in aluminum raceway shall have the aluminum raceway
engraved. Other devices shall have a chemical resistant label (resistant to typical
cleaning agents) attached to the coverplate and also have the panel and circuit
number recorded on the inside of coverplate.
Drawings
Sheet M-101
1. In Sampling 104, change the S2 grilles to 10" round neck size.
2. In Vault 105, change the return grille from R2 to RL
3. In Culture Lab 107, change the three supply air grilles to 3-10"rd/S2.
4. At Ante 4 108, add a room pressure control monitor on the door to General Lab 103.
Sheet M-106
1. Section A/M-106. Note that the exhaust stacks discharging 10' above the roof from EF-
1 and EF-2 shall be constructed of 16 gauge, type 316 stainless steel, all welded
construction. Carefully select the springs for these fans to bear the weight of the
discharge stacks. Provide 2" springs as required.
2. Return Air Boot Detail: Delete this detail. All exhaust ducts shall be hard -ducted.
Sheet M-108
1. Add the following Air Distribution Schedule
Grille Type S1: Ceiling supply, perforated face, aluminum construction, white finish,
surface mount, star pattern deflection, round neck, spin -in tap connection with butterfly
damper. Titus PSS-AA. OBD not required.
Grille Type S2: Ceiling supply, lab air grille with high volume, low velocity, radial air
diffusion technology, fixed pattern. The face shall be perorated, 304 stainless steel
construction. Back pan shall be aluminum construction. Mill finish, surface mount,
round neck, spin -in tap connection with butterfly damper. Titus TriTec-AL. Grilles shall
be 24"x24" with 10" round necks.
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
4222 85'h Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473.2200 ■ FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
Grille Type R1; Ceiling return air grille, perforated face, aluminum construction, white
finish, surface mount, square neck. OBD not required. Titus PAR -AA.
Note that all drops through the ceiling shall be hard -ducted, air tight. The grilles shall be
sealed air -tight to the ceiling, and the duct connection to the grilles shall be air -tight.
Provide air -tight seal where hard duct penetrates the metal deck to the grille neck. Note
that the BSL-3 barrier is at the ceiling plane.
2. Add the following notes to the Filter Bank Schedule:
3. Note that HF-E1 shall be Bag-in/Bag-out type filter bank suitable for bio-hazardous
material.
4. Note that HF-S 1 is a side access type filter and shall be mounted where filter change
accessibility is achieved from the ships ladder. This filter is not a bag-in/bag-out type.
3. Fan Schedule:
J
Note 2 in the footnotes to the schedule refer to ONLY EF-1 AND EF-2. All other fans
shall have standard manufacturer's finish as specified.
Sheet P-101
1. At Mechanical Room 112, relocate the water heater approximately 3' south and l' west
to avoid electrical panels. Revise piping accordingly.
Sheet E-100
1. On the Aluminum Raceway Detail, indicate that the panel and circuit number shall be
engraved on the aluminum raceway.
Sheet E-103
1. Provide a lens for the camera that will focus on all items under the hood. Provide an
extension arm and bracing to mount the camera at the height as directed by owner.
Sheet E-110 & I I I
1. On Panel EE, change feeder for elevator shunt trip breaker to 4 #3/0 and #6 GND in
2" C.
Clarifications
Addendum Number 1:
1. Item No. 10, referring to paragraph 15905 — A-2; Change the first sentence to read as
follows: " For temperature control, building automation and facility management systems,
factory training for three (3) designated owner's representatives/operating personnel shall be
conducted at the jobsite. This training is to be performed by a factory -certified professional
trainer...
2. The Panel Schedules shall be revised for the following available Fault Current (RMS Sym.
Amp): Panel DPA 35,000; Panel LS 10,000; Panel XA 10,000; Panel XM 13,500; Panel
GEN 5,300; Panel XR 12,400; Panel EE 16,800; Panel EB 6,200; Panel EC 6,900; Panel
EDP 35,000.
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers • Architects ■ Planners
4222 85th Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 ■ FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
W
3. Conduits leaving the BSL3 Lab shall be sealed inside and out. We have indicated a few
conduits to be run in the slab. These conduits originate in the knee space of the millwork.
The remaining conduits shall be run overhead.
4. The Homogeneous Sheet Vinyl specification should be equivalent or greater than Armstrong,
Medintech Tandem.
5. VCT specificiation is based on being equivalent or greater than Armstrong, Standard
Excelon, 51811 "Antique White".
6. Rubber base specification is based on being equivalent or greater than Roppe, P110 Brown.
END OF ADDENDUM NO. a
Respectfully submitted,
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
By.
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
4222 85'' Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 ■ FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
ITB #224-03/RS, Addendum #2
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13TH STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164
http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
ADDENDUM #2
ITB #224-03/RS
Bio-Safety Level 3 Laboratory Facility
Construction
MAILED TO VENDOR:
December 15, 2003
OLD CLOSE DATE:
December 16, 2003 @ 2:00 p.m.
NEW CLOSE DATE:
December 23, 2003 @ 4:00 p.m.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where
any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. The closing date has been changed from December 16, 2003 at 2:00 p.m. to the new closing date of
December 23, 2003 at 4:00 p.m.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to (806) 775-2164 or Email to rshuffield@mylubbock.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
?RonShu�f ield
Senior Buyer
It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's
responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations
thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be
submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Manager no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid
close date. A review of such notifications will be made.
224-03RSAdd2
ITB #224-03/RS, Addendum #1
.J
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13TH STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806) 775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164
http://purchasing.ci.iubbock.tx.us
ADDENDUM #1
ITB #224-03 / RS
Bio-Safety Level 3 Laboratory Facility
Construction
MAILED TO VENDOR: December 9, 2003
CLOSE DATE: December 16, 2003 @ 2:00 p.m.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where
any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find enclosed Addendum #1 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer, City of Lubbock, P.O. Box 2000, Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to (806) 775-2164 or Email to rshuffield@mylubbock.us
THANK YOU,
Senior Buyer
It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permits competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's
responsibility to advise the City of Lubbock Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any combinations
thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be
submitted in writing and must be received by the Purchasing Manager no later than five (5) business days prior to the bid
close date. A review of such notifications will be made.
224-03RSAdd1
L1
LI
D0
/C
a�
ADDENDUM NO.1 �z-9.2aoo3
t� P 2 • ?j1 •?Apc{
TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders
PROJECT: Bio-Safety Level 3 Laboratory Facility Construction
DATE: December 9, 2003
PSC Job No: 03.8798.03
Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans
and Specifications. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies
the original Bidding Documents dated November 17, 2003 as noted below:
This Addendum consists of 6 pages, plus 5 attachments consisting of 7 pages.
Specifications
Section 08000 Door Schedule
1.
Replace the Door Schedule at the end of this section with the attached Door
Schedule.
2.
Under Section 2.3 Remarks, A Door Remarks, 3 Miscellaneous, b; Add to the
beginning of this sentence M2.
3.
Under Section 2.3 Remarks, A Door Remarks, 3 Miscellaneous, d; change the remark
to read "Fiberglass reinforced door."
Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames
1.
Under Section 2.1, D, 4, a. change to the following: Acceptable product: Anemostat
Model No. FGS-75.
2.
Under Section 2.2, A, 1, change to the following: Fabricate doors and frames to sizes
and profiles indicated and in conformance with, except as otherwise specified, ANSI
A250.8 for non -rated assemblies and NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for rated assemblies.
3.
Under Section 2.3, B, add the following: Where steel doors or frames are scheduled
to have a high-performance epoxy coating, and are not shop finished, each door and
frame shall be commercially blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP6 and then field
painted per section 09960.
Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors
1.
Under Section 2.2, C, 1; change to the following: Transparent Finish:.050 inch thick,
NWWDA Custom, A grade, Red Oak, rift cut.
2.
Under Section 2.2, C, delete paragraph 2.
3.
Under Section 2.2, D, delete paragraph 1.
4.
Under Section 2.2, D, 2, change to the following: 1. Rolled Steel, mitered comers;
prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws; designed to conform to UL
requirements.
5.
Under Section 2.3, B, 1; edit the number of plies as follows: remove brackets around
"5" and delete brackets and the number "7". Number of plies shall be 5.
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
4222 8Vh Street • Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
6. Under Section 2.4, add the following: B. Finishes on metal door lite frames shall be
with a high-performance epoxy coating. Where metal door lites are scheduled to
have a high-performance epoxy coating, and are not shop finished, each frame shall
be commercially blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP6 and then field painted per
section 09960.
Section 09915 Color Schedule
1. Add the attached Finish Schedule to the end of this section. See attached Finish
Schedule
2. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Schedule, C Wall Finishes, 1; Change note to the
following: W 1- GWB, no texture, high performance epoxy coating.
3. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Selection, C Wall Finishes, 4; Change note to the
following: W4 - Block filler printer; latex paint finish.
4. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Schedule, D Ceiling Finishes, 1; Change note to the
following: Cl - GWB, no texture, high performance epoxy coating.
5. Under Section 2.2, Interior Color Selection, D, Ceiling Finishes, add the following:
C5 - Exposed Concrete Epoxy Paint Finish.
6. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Schedule, E Miscellaneous, 1; Add the following to
note: Color to be selected from MFR Standard color range.
7. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Schedule, E Miscellaneous, 2; Add the following to
note: High performance epoxy coating; Color to be selected by Architect.
8. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Schedule, E Miscellaneous, 3; Add the following to
note 1: Transparent stain finish.
9. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Schedule, E Miscellaneous, 4; Add the following to
note 1: Paint finish; color to be selected by Architect; Exterior doors to match
existing.
10. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Schedule, E Miscellaneous, 5; Add the following to
note: Clear anodized aluminum finish.
11. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Schedule, E Miscellaneous, add the following:
6. P6 - Door Vision Lite Metal Frame; high performance epoxy coating,
color as selected by Architect from MFR standard color range.
7. P7 - Hollow Metal Window Frame; high performance epoxy coating,
color as selected by Architect from MFR standard color range.
8. P8 - Louver; paint finish, color as selected by Architect from MFR
standard color range
9. P9 - Metal shelving; high performance epoxy coating, color as selected
by Architect from MFR standard color range.
10. P10 - Fiberglass reinforced doors, color as selected by Architect from
MFR standard color range.
11. Pll - Hollow Metal Door Frames; paint finish, color as selected by
Architect from MFR standard color ranges; exterior door frames to
match existing.
12. P12 - Wood Door; Paint finish to match existing in corridor only.
12. Under Section 2.2 Interior Color Schedule, Add the following: F. Remarks
a. M1 - Patch floor tile at door 19 where removed for new door opening
b. M2 - Patch rubber base between door 19 and west wall
c. M3 - Remove pre -fin GWB panels at new door opening and cut for opening.
d. M4 - Replace ceiling tile and grid if damaged during construction
e. M5 - New ceiling the to match existing
Section 09960 High -Performance Coatings
1. Under Section 3.5, add the following:
C. Steel Door Frames, Door Vision Lite Frames and Steel Shelving in Vault.
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects • Planners
4222 8e Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
1. Each steel item to have a high-performance epoxy coating shall be
commercially blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP6. Prime Coat:
TNEMEC Series 66 Hi -build epoxyline. Thinning: Thin Series 66 by
20% with TNEMEC 41-4 thinner (required) thin Series 291 up to 5% if
needed with TNEMEC 41-39 thinner. Each coat to be min, 4 mils thick.
Section 15900 Temperature Regulation / Building Automation System
1. Replace Section 15900 Temperature Regulation/Building Automation Control; Part 1
General; 1.1 Scope; Paragraph B with the paragraph below:
These Contract Documents are based on providing and installing Johnson Control
Metasys Extended Architecture controls, controllers and software as described in
these specifications for the City of Lubbock Health Department BSL-3 Lab. Other
manufacturers will be considered upon completion and evaluation of the technical
proposal process described in Section 15905 — Facility Management System: Part 1.1
Related Documents: Paragraph C. Technical Proposal Successful Technical
Proposal evaluations will be added to the Approved Vendor List by Addendum
2. Replace Section 15900 Temperature Regulation/Building Automation Control; Part
General; 1.1 Scope; Paragraph C with the paragraph below:
Note that the specifications herein describe specifically the methods and materials
employed by the Johnson Control Metasys Extended Architecture control system.
The intent of the specification is to allow equivalent equipment, methods and systems
provided by other manufacturers ca able of communication via N2 BACnet and
LonMark protocols from a single LAN/WAN connected supervisory controller.
Control sequences, technical provisions. on board g[Uhics (supervisory Controller)
and embedded software (supervisory controller) must also be met
3. In Section 15900 Temperature Regulation/Building Automation Control; Part 2
J Products; 2.1 Materials; add Paragraph S:
S. Safety Controls: All safety controls of every type and every description shall be
dual circuited devices. Both circuits shall react to the action created by each single
control device. Circuit one shall be physically hard wired to the safety circuit of the
equipment being served. This circuit shall shut down the selected piece of equipment
upon sensing an unsatisfactory condition. Circuit two shall be physically wired to the
Building Automation System to provide the status of the single control device
Separate devices sensing the same medium to create two circuits is not acceptable
4. Replace existing Section 15900 Temperature Regulation/Building Automation
Control; Part 3 Energy Management And Control System Hardware; 3.5 Final Test
and Adjustment; Paragraph C with the paragraph below:
See Training Requirements listed in Section 15905 Facility Management System:
Part3.3 Training.
5. Replace existing Section 15900 Temperature Regulation/Building Automation
Control; Part 3 Energy Management And Control System Hardware; 3.8 Final Test
and Adjustment; Paragraph B with the paragraph below:
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
4222 851" Street • Lubbock. Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 ■ FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
No Text
J
_l
J
See Training Requirements listed in Section 15905 Facility Management System:
Part3.3 Training. Refer to 15920 COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL
CONTROL SYSTEMS. Note that full commissioning of the control system is the
responsibility of the Temperature Controls Contractor.
6. In Section 15905 — Facility Management System; Part 1.4 Quality Assurance: Delete
paragraph A-5:
• Y.
7. Replace existing Section 15905 — Facility Management System; Part 2.2 Operator
PC's with the following:
An existing computer located in the Engineering workroom of the Municipal
Building (City Hall) will be utilized as the Operator PC. Coordinate with exact
location with George Lisenbe, City of Lubbock Maintenance Dept. No permanent,
fixed PC's will be required under this contract.
8. In Section 15905 — Facility Management System; Part 2.2 Operator PC's; Delete
Paragraph C. Note that an existing PC will be utilized.
9. In Section 15905 — Facility Management System; Part 2.2 Operator PC's; Paragraph
F; replace the existing paragraph with the following:
Portable PC's shall have the same configuration as the fixed PC and operate
identically to the fixed PC. Note that a portable PC is not required to be provided
under the contract.
10. In Section 15905 — Facility Management System; Part 3.3 Training; Paragraph A-2
and A-3; Delete these paragraphs and add the following:
2. Factory training for three (3) of the owners representatives/operating personnel in
a factory training lab brought to jobsite. This training is to be performed by a
factory -certified professional trainer and at a minimum, shall consist of-
a. Two days training covering basic system operation.
b. One day training covering system reporting and alarm management.
c. One day training covering scheduling and point trending.
3. An additional six (6) hour instruction period shall be given at the beginning of
the next heating or cooling season. Factory representatives under the direct
employ of the Temperature Control Manufacturer shall conduct this training
session.
4. The owner's representatives/operating personnel shall be issued Continuing
Education Credits (C.E.U.$) for the factory training.
Section 16860 Automatic Transfer Switch and Controls
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
4222 8e Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
1. Add the attached Specification Section 16860.
Drawings
Sheet A-201
1. At drawing D2, change the dimension of the handrail and the length of the ramp from
5'-0" to 5'-6".
Sheet A-202, A 1 Door Types/Frames
1. Add a door frame HM04. See attached elevation of this frame to be used in masonry
partitions at doors 05, 12, 13, 14, 19 and 31.
2. Add a door frame HM05. See attached elevation of this frame to be used in masonry
partitions at door 30.
Sheet E-100
1. On the Electrical Legend, the designation "FIRE ALARM HORN/STROBE" without
the "F" on the symbol, shall be changed to read: "FIRE ALARM STROBE".
Sheet E-106 & E-107
1. The receptacles shown on the attached two drawings shall be converted from normal
power to emergency power. Connect two receptacles to a circuit and connect to
circuits EE-21 through EE-32.
Sheet E-I I I
1. Provide 12 additional 20A/1 pole breakers for "Panel EE".
Clarifications
1. Based on comments during the pre -bid meeting, it is necessary to notify all bidders that the
BSL-3 laboratory is a self contained, air -tight facility. All penetrations through the walls,
floors and ceilings into the laboratory are to be sealed air tight so that ultimately
commissioning will be achieved. Sub -contractors who are unsure who will be responsible for
any item in question should contact the general they are preparing the bid for to ask who will
cover the items. This shall be done before the bids are submitted. In the end, ultimate
responsibility will be on the general to ensure the envelope of the lab is sealed properly to
achieve the. commissioning of Division 17.
2. The handrails in Storage 123 are to be painted 1 '/4" OD steel tube. Delete all references to
aluminum at these conditions.
3. General contractor is to provide bond beam lintels at doors in new masonry and steel lintels at
doors in existing masonry partitions.
4. On the electrical sheets, convert the existing receptacles and lighting circuits from normal to
emergency power (indicated by new circuit to an emergency panel). Rework circuits as
required to separate normal power conductors from emergency power conductors. Field
verify existing conditions to determine complete scope of work.
END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects • Planners
4222 8e Street • Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
. _J
Respectfully submitted,
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers a Architects ■ Planners
4222 851° Street! Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806)473-2200• FAX (806)473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo Odessa
j L—J
L_-_-; ---rJ
Door Schedule
Door
Fir Mark PR Size
Frame Details
Const Const Size Head Jamb Sill
Remarks
3-Ox7-Oxi 3/
3-Ox7-Ox1 34
3-Ox7-Ox1 34
3-6x7-Oxl 34
3-Ox7-Ox1 34
3-6x7-Ox1 34
3-6x7-Oxi 3/4B
3-6x7-Ox1 34
B
B
A
B
A
B
D
SCTF
SCTF
SCTF
SCTF
HMPF
SCTF
SCTF
SCTF
HMPF
HMPF
HMPF
HMPF
HMPF
HMPF
HMPF
HMPF
5 7/8
5 7/8
5 7/8
5 7/8
13 1/8
5 7/8
5 7/8
FV
A3/A501
A3/A501
A3/A501
A3/A501
B3/A501
A3/A501
A3/A501
D2/A501
A3/A501 SIM
A3/A501 SIM
A3/A501 SIM
A3/A501 SIM
B3/A501 SIM
A3/A501 SIM
A3/A501 SIM
D2/A501 SIM
C1/A501
G2 M2 M3
G2,M2 M3
M2
G2 M3
M2
G2 M3
G2,M3
G2 M1 M2 M3
1
0M1
1
02
1
1
03
p4
05
1
1
1
06
07
08
1
1
1
09
10
3-Ox7-Oxl A
3-Ox7-Ox1 34
A
A
SCTF
SCTF
HMPF
HMPF
5 7/8
5 7/8
A3/A501
A3/A501
A3/A501 SIM
A3/A501 SIM
M2
M2
1
10A
1-6x7-Oxi 34
A
SCTF
HMPF
5 7/8
A3/A501
A3/A501 SIM
1
1013
2-6x7-Oxl 34
A
SCTF
HMPF
5 7/8
A3/A501
A3/A501 SIM
1
11
3-Ox7-Oxl 3A
A
FIBER
FIBER
5 7/8
D1/A501
D1/A501 SIM
DVA501
M2,M4
1
11A
3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4
A
FIBER
FIBER
5 7/8
D1/A501
D1/A501 SIM
D1/A501
M2,M4
1
12
3-Ox7-Oxi %
A
HMPF
HMPF
FV
C3/A501
C3/A501 SIM
M1,M2
1
13
3-Ox7-Ox1 -%
A
HMPF
HMPF
7 5/8
D3/A501
D3/A501 SIM
L1
1
14
3-Ox7-Ox1 V4
A
HMPF
HMPF
FV
A2/A501
A2/A501 SIM
M1,M2
1
15
3-Ox7-Oxl 3A
A
SCTF
HMPF
5 7/8
A3/A501
A3/A501 SIM
L1
1
16
3-Ox7-Oxi -%
A
SCTF
HMPF
5 7/8
A3/A501
A3/A501 SIM
L1
1
17
3-6x7-Oxi 3/4
C
SCTF
HMPF
3 3/4
C2/A501
C2/A501 SIM
B1/A501
Li IM2
1
19
3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4A
SCTF
HMPF
FV
B2/A501
B2/A501 SIM
AV"
Li M1,M2
1
23
3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4
A
SCTF
HMPF
5 7/8
A3/A501
A3/A501 SIM
L1,M2
1
30
•
6-Ox7-Ox 1 3/4A
HMPF
HMPF
175/8
FV
C3/A501
C3/A501 SIM
L1 M1 M2
1
31
3-Ox7-Ox1 3/
A
HMPF
HMPF
D3/A501
D3/A501 SIM I
L1,M2
R-\PROJECTS\2003\8798.03WRCH\8798-03 DOOR SCHEDULE.DOC
LA
' Q,RIM
Finish Schedule
Room Walls Ceilings Miscellaneous Colors
Fir No Description Floor Base N E S W Type Ht (ft-in) Remarks
1
1
1
1
1
101
102
103
104
105
1 STAGING
1 ANTE 1
IGENERALLAB
SAMPLING
VAULT
F1
F1
F1
Fi
F1
Bi
Bi
B1
B1
B1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
Wi
W1
W1
Wt
W1
W1
W1
W1
W1
Wi
W1
Cl
Cl
Cl
Cl
C5
9-0
9-0
9-0
9-0
9-0
-
-
P1 P2P3 P6 P7
P2 P3 P6
P2 P3
P1 P2 P3 P6 P7
P2,P3,P9
1
106
ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY LAB
F1
B1
W1
W1
w
I W1
Cl
9-7
P1 P2 P3,P6
1
107
CULTURE LAB
F1
61
W1
W1
Wi
Wi
Cl
9-0
P1 P2 P3 P6
1
108
ANTE 4
F1
B1
W1
Wi
W1
Wi
Cl
9-0
P2,P3
1
109
ANTE 3
F1
Bi
W1
W1
W1
W1
Cl
9-0
P2 P3
1
110
ANTE 2
F1
Bi
W1
Wi
W1
W1
Cl
9-0
-
P2P 3
1
111
SHOWER
F4
B3
W3
W3
W3
W3
C4
9-0
P2 P10
1
112
MECHANICAL
F3
—
W4
W4
W4
W4
C3
P2,P4,P5,P8
1
113
ELECTRICAL
F3
--
W4
W4
W4
W4
C3
P2 P4
1
114
HALL
F2
B2
W2
W2
W2
W2
C2
X
M5
P3 P11
1
115
STORAGE
F2
B2
W2
W2
W2
W2
C2
X
P3,P4,P11
1
116
JANITOR
F2
B2
W2
W2
W2
W2
C2
X
P3.P11
1
117
HALL
F2
B2
W2
W2
W2
W2
C2
X
P3,P11
1
118
HALL
F2
B2
W2
W2
W2
W2
C2
X
P3 P11
1
119
CORRIDOR
F2
B2
W3
M1 M2,M3
P3 P11 P12
1
120
OFFICE
-
-
-
C2
X
M4
1
121
OFFICE
-
-
-
C2 ix
M4
-
1
122
OFFICE
-
C2
X
M4
1
123
STORAGE
F2
B2
W2NV4
W2
W2/W4
W4
P3 P11
1
130
GENERATOR
F3
W4
W4
W4
W4
C3
P4 P6 P8
1
131
ELECTRICAL
F3
-
W4
W4
W4
W4
C3
-
P4 P6,P8
R.\PROJECTS\200318798.03V1RCFM798-03 FINISH SCHEDULE.DOC 4V40, 01
SECTION 16860
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS
PART GENERAL
1 1.1 SCOPE
A. Provide automatic transfer controls enclosed in code gauge NEMA 1 wall mounted steel
cabinet. Cabinets shall be of the size shown or smaller to fit into electric room. The
engine -generator set shall be equipped with the necessary engine mounted devices for
automatic starting and stopping of the engine.
J
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1
2.1 STARTING CONTROLS
A. Engine starting control shall operate from a single pole contact that closes for engine start
and opens for engine stop. When engine fires, cranking controls shall be automatically
disconnected. Cranking disconnect shall prevent recranking for a definite time if voltage
falls to a low value. If engine fails to fire, or if any safety device operates while the engine
is running, engine shall stop immediately and starting controls shall lock out, requiring
manual reset. Cranking shall be continuous for 45 seconds before lockout.
2.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A.
Transfer switch shall close pilot contact to start engine 1 second after normal source failure
or 1 second after drop in voltage on any phase to 85% or less of normal voltage. When
-,
generator is delivering not less than 90% rated voltage and 95% of nominal frequency, the
main transfer switch shall transfer load from normal to emergency generator. Upon
restoration of normal source to not less than 95% of rated voltage on all phases, load shall
be retransferred to normal source after a time delay of 30 minutes (job adjustable). After
retransfer, engine shall run for 5 minutes unloaded and then shut down, ready to restart on
next power failure. If standby plant should fail while carrying the load, retransfer to normal
source shall be instantaneous upon restoration of normal source. Means shall be provided
to start the engine manually for test purposes without transferring the load, and also to
simulate a power failure and actually transfer the load as in a real failure. The switch shall
contain pilot lights to indicate the source to which the switch is connected.
B.
A job -adjustable clock exerciser shall be provided, to exercise the plant automatically at full
load at regular intervals for a pre -selected period of time.
C.
The switch shall be rated as scheduled, 3 pole 120/208 volts, three phase, 4 wire service
with neutral terminal lugs. The switch shall utilize solid-state sensing on normal and
emergency for automatic, positive operation.
D.
Close differential voltage sensing shall be provided on all live lines. The pickup voltage
shall be adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and the dropout voltage shall be
adjustable from 75% to 98% of the pickup value. Provide open -transition transfer switches.
E.
The time delay to override momentary normal source outages shall be field adjustable from
0.5 to 6 seconds and factory set at one second.
F.
The time delay on retransfer to normal shall be field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and
factory set at 30 minutes.
G.
The unloaded running time delay for generator cooldown shall be field adjustable from 0 to
5 minutes and factory set at 5 minutes.
02092 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 16860 -1
10/03
A�r- 1
1
} H. Independent voltage and frequency sensing shall be provided for the emergency source.
The pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal (factory set at 90%)
and pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90% to 1000/6 of nominal (factory set at 95%).
2.3 DESCRIPTION
A. Transfer switch shall be a double throw switch operated by momentarily energized solenoid
mechanism. It shall be inherently interlocked mechanically and electrically, with no neutral
position possible. Operating current for transfer shall be from source to which it is
transferring load. Main contacts shall be silvered. All contacts and coils shall be easily
' replaceable from front of panel without major disassembly. Switch shall be suitable for all
classes of loads. It shall conform to the latest UL Standard 1008 and the additional
} requirements herein.
B. The control module shall be supplied with a protective cover and shall be separately
mounted inside the transfer switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall
be solid state and mounted on plug-in circuit boards.
END OF SECTION
02092 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS 16860 - 2
10/03 All 4 vwA A #� i
O
I
n
r VC1-on r
d
O
HM04
HM05
eo,�4. ol
c? _ S'7q&--o3 t3Sc. -3
L_ - '. 1 ' 3
,4- A e, l
LUBBOCK HEALTH
DEPARTMENT
BUILDING
BSL-3 LABORATORY
1102 TEXAS AVENUE
lU800CK. TEXAS
NEW ELECTRICAL
FLOOR PLAN
POTTER
E-106
C I W.■T=
GENERATOR ROOM DETAIL
B
A
RRtI��
LUBBOCK HEALTH
DEPARTMENT
BUILDING
BSL-3 LABORATORY
1902 TEXAS AVENUE
LUBBOCK. TEXAS
Mx.IN�-
w.Ml -
NEW ELECTRICAL
FLOOR PLAN
POKER
E-107
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INVITATION TO BID
FOR
TITLE: BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
ITB NUMBER: 224-03/RS
PROJECT NUMBER: 90244.8302.20000
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
L
I
LJ
INDEX
a
1.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
2.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3.
BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
4.
PAYMENT BOND
5.
PERFORMANCE BOND
6.
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
7.
CONTRACT
8.
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
9.
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
10.
SPECIFICATIONS
L
0
C
I
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
I
I
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
ITB #224-03/RS
Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the
office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00
o'clock .m. on the 16th dayof December. 2003, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planhol ers, to
urnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
"BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION"
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the
Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in
the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written.
Bids are due at 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 16th day of December, 2003, and the City of Lubbock City Council will
consider the bids on the 8th day of January, 2004, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as
soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities.
The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government
Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the
successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the
amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds
should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a
guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after
notice of award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local
conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been
thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid
conference on 3rd day of December, 2003 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Planning Conference Room 107, Lubbock,
Texas.
Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13'h Street, Lubbock,
Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00
refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, 4222 85th
Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, Phone: (806) 473-2200. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's
expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping
charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is
specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a,
Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the
contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to
this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in
consideration for an award.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and
bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more
accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock ADA Coordinator at (806) 775-2018 at
least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
� C�'` 1 { �►f� mot'. t" �G.c -._._
VICTOR KILMAN
PURCHASING MANAGER
li,
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
F!,
F
I
L
I
r
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
# i 1 BID DELIVERY, TIME & DATE
i 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3
LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION per the attached specifications and contract documents.
Sealed bids will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 16th day of December, 2003 at the office
listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to
the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly
a labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #224-03/RS, BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY
FACILITY CONSTRUCTION" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their
company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to:
a Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager
City of Lubbock
1625 13th Street, Room L-04
Lubbock, Texas 79401
1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a
bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver
bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt.
1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier
service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic
transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS.
1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an
addendum.
2 PRE -BID MEETING
2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda
as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre -bid meeting
will be held at 10.00 a.m., December 3rd 2003 in Planning Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas. All
persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they
represent.
I
2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The
City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do
not attend the pre -bid meeting.
3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS
3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda.
3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may
request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the
event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be
made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the
Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will
become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO
VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for
interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of
Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date.
3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock
shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information
supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in
preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with
any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in
any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in
preparing responses.
3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders.
�, 1
4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all
requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications.
4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations
that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to
Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to
comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid.
4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents,
shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received,
and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it
shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided
sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications.
If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions,
then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and
adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must
be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids.
5 BID PREPARATION COSTS
5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the
preparation and submission of a bid.
5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or
equipment.
5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder.
6 TRADE SECRETS, CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT
6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision,
including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions.
6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to
release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular
portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from
public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the
event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being
confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal
position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In
the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent
jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the
Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be
made available to the requester.
t 6.3 Marking your entire bid CON FIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open
Records Act.
7 LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES
The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may
be required to pay.
8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES
Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local
resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources.
CONFLICT OF INTEREST
9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any
employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock.
2
R 9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered,
conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment,
advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion
concerning this bid.
10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the
General Conditions.
10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for
the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work
contemplated by said contract documents.
11 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by
the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without
j charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice
to Bidders.
12 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS
12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the
bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any
combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source.
Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing
Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be
made.
j 12.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE
SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID
CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO:
RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER
City of Lubbock
1625 13t' Street
Lubbock, Texas 79401
Fax: (806) 775-2164
Email: RShuffield@mylubbock.us
13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be substantially completed within THREE
HUNDRED (300) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed
issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder.
13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided,
however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work
contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be
submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the
progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems
necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified.
14 PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the
contract documents.
15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute
an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements
16
18
19
contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the
Contractor has been notified.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will
be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until
incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve
the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods
set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to
procure a satisfactory project.
GUARANTEES
17.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against
defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner,
a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work,
and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects
appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or
workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock).
17.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and
warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data
(including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and
firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as
the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be
recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure.
The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the
procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein.
17.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub-
contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be
delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations
contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and
under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default.
17.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this
Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the
Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or
any document incorporated in this Contract by reference.
PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use
during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or
others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor.
PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials,
supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any
and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the
date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have
been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by
the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
4
20 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
20.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions
of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
20.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the
materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
21 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a
way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or
other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the
project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the
location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve
the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by
Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by
Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense.
22 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and
shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be
necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs,
and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and
replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of
barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
23 EXPLOSIVES
23.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the
Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of
the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use
utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods
as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
23.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
23.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this
contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or
below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such
notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may
deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations.
24 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the
work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and
telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by
this contract is in progress.
25 INSURANCE
25.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as
required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do
business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City
and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of
cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right
to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this
contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also
shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact
business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether
performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the
operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be
submitted before contract execution.
25.2 PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE
CITY OF LUBBOCK AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN
FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE
ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK
ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE
INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH
SUBCONTRACTOR.
26 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
26.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less
than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The
bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil
Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations
j thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract
documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable.
Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or
holidays unless the following conditions exist:
26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary
service to its citizens.
26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a
diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time.
{ 26.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the
Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the
weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative
to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on
weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative.
26.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done
under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately
commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such
condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life.
27 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount,
not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the
work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or
Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his
classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the
copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made,
or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees
according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which
schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on
whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each
calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his
particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these
contract documents.
6
28 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the
bidder without being considered.
29 PREPARATION FOR BID
29.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be
correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to
do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly
and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written
in figures, the price written in words shall govern.
29.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a
bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be
given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If
the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address
must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing
agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid.
The bid shall be executed in ink.
29.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and
endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner:
28.3.1 Bidder's name
28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project).
? 29.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids,
but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
29.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been
opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE,
ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR
TO BID OPENING.
30 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the
following:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Submittal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
Q) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
31 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of
Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein
in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy
the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations
7
deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall
furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The bidder's bid may be
} deemed not to meet specifications or the bid may be rejected if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the
l bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the
contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include:
(a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required.
(b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified,
without delay or interference.
(c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder.
_ (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services.
32 BID AWARD
I
32.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to
waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole
discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the Total Bid Amount.
32.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to
specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may
result in disqualification of the bid.
32.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be
cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to
determine possible Anti -Trust violations.
32.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than
lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder
would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state.
32.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the
State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the
Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all
other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the
same may be applicable.
32.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR
FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR
GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS
INVITATION TO BID.
li,
El,
BID SUBMITTAL
* Xt U� r�e=I
General Contractors
Commercial Construction
December 23, 2003
City of Lubbock
1625 13`h Street, Room L-04
Lubbock, Texas 79401
ATTENTION: VICTOR KILMAN, PURCHASING MANAGER
REFERENCE: BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY
CONSTRUCTION
Victor,
Our base bid price includes the following price for sterilizing equipment.
PO. Box 2791
Lubbock, Texas 79408
(806) 763-5263
Fax (806) 763-5843
Getinge USA, Inc. Model 533LS recessed two walls, Integral steam generator, stainless
chamber and jacket piping $64,003.00
The following price would be an add.
The Optional Effluent Decontamination Cycle for BL-3 applications is available for an
additional price $11,000.00
Also, it is our understanding that the Commissioning and Testing & Balancing will be bid to the
owner at a later date. Therefore, this is excluded from our bid.
If you have any questions or need further information, please contact our office.
JKP/j s
Respectfully Submitted,
PHARR & COMPANY
ZiOhn K. Pharr
Vice President
UN
c
�A C
• Gf I ME1.\6� .
f K I l T+ •, ..• •' a INTEGRITY
� �ONfi�\,fit
BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
DATE: Member 23, 2003
PROJECT NUMBER: #224-03/RS - BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
Bid of Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY
FACILITY CONSTRUCTION having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders
and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions
., surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to
furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and
contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses
incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. /
MATERIALS: �� $ 7(O 000, e�V i
SERVICES: C�' .� ,c�� �� t�t°./�5 (� 7`, nu0, OQ
TOTAL
(Amour
the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the project within 300 (THREE HUNDRED) consecutive
calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to
pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $750 (SEVEN HUNDRED FIFTY) for each consecutive calendar day in
excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions
of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on
which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable
without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the
bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all
necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% of total amount bid Dollars
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the
event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of
receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a
competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be
changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid
price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID
PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM
PRIOR TO BID OPENING.
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
nESfT:
ri i 2�� -./
Secre ry
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda No. one Date 12-09-03
Addenda No. �_ Date 12-15-03
Addenda No. YIYPP Date i 2-1 g-03
Addenda No. Date
MIWBE Finn:
Date: December 23 2001
Auth ed Signature
John K. Pharr
(Printed or Typed Name)
Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba
Pharr & Company
Company
P.O. Box 2791
Address
Lubbock
Lubbock
City,
County
Texas
79408
State
Zip Code
Telephone: 806
- 763-5263
Fax: 806 -
763-5843
2
Minority Owned
/l Yes No
,in at O
I �
3. r nC. ❑ [
4. DES, I ri ❑ mIll,
6. ❑ ❑
7. ❑ ❑
8. ❑ ❑
9. ❑ ❑
10. _ ❑ ❑
L`' 3
11
-
-..._---- -_.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To Be Completed by Bidder
And Attached to Bid Submittal
I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been
reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of
Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock,
furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal.
+Contrctorgnature)
John K. Pharr
Contractor (Print)
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company__
(Print or Type )
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS:
P.O. Box 2791
Lubbock, Texas 79408
Name of Agent/Broker: Boley-Featherston Insurance
Address of Agent/Broker: P.O. Box 97513
City/State/Zip: Wichita Falls, Texas 76307-7513
Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 800 ) 234-1167
Date: December 23, 2003
NOTE TO CONTRACTOR
If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and
award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements,
please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165.
BID #224-031RS - BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
4
-1 0
1b
CITY OF LUBBOCK
CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM)
The purpose of this document is to advise the contractor/bidder of the presence and
location of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of Lubbock makes this
notification in our continuing effort to comply with all environmental, health, and safety
regulations associated with asbestos.
Health Department, located at 1902 Texas Avenue in Lubbock. contains Asbestos
Containing Building Materials (ACBM). The description of known materials and
locations are listed below.
Type / Location:
Mastic under 12" x 12" floor tile, tan with light & dark spots/ Rm. #'s
16-20, 22-24, 29-32, 51, 75, 76, 77, 79, 82, 83 ' ECIC�-A _j j q
Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" floor tile, gray with light & dark spots[
Rm. # 21
Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" ceiling tile, regular perforations/ Rm. #50
The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of ACBM in this
structure. Materials can be encased behind walls and not readily visible or accessible.
Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following:
1) You have been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM,
2) You will avoid the disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and
authorized to do so, and
3) You will advise a City representative in the event of any accidental disturbance of the
ACBM listed above.
Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal.
Contractor Name: Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company
Contractor Representative: John K.
Contractor Signature:
Date: 12-23-03
Attention Purchasing dept: Please f4ard the signed document to the Facilities Management department, Attn: Asbestos
Coordinator.
-.J
THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS
J
AIA Document A310
Bid Bond
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we
} Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company, 907 North Avenue Q Dr., Lubbock, TX 79403
as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
8144 Walnut Hill Lane, Suite #440
Dallas, Texas, 75231-4345 (Here insert full name and address or legal titre of Surety)
- . a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin
as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
City of Lubbock (Here Insert full name and address or legal title of Owner)
as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of
*** FIVE PERCENT OF BID AMOUNT *** Dollars( 5%
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind
ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for (Here insert full name, address and description of project)
BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee, shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee,
in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with
good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in
the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the
Principal shall pay to the Obligee, the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such
larger amount for which the Obligee, may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this
obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
Signed and sealed this 23rd day of December, 2003
' Pharr Construction Co. Inc. dba Pharr 8r Company
(Princip (Seal)
J�- (Witness) UL 0'�.
K. Pharr (Title)
Inc.
(Witness)
Gross (Title)
AIA DOCUMENT A310 - BID BOND - AIA ® - FEBRUARY 1970 ED - THE AMERICAN
INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS,1735 N.Y. AVE., N.W., WASHINGTON, D. C. 20006
(Surety) (seal)
Printed on Recycled Paper 9/93
.a
7heStPaul
Power of Attorney No.
POWER OF ATTORNEY
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
20290
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Com
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Compan
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underw.
Certificate No. 1931059
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under
the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and
that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do
hereby make, constitute and appoint
Donal Boley, Steve Deal and Staci Gross
of the City of Wichita Falls , State Texas , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,
each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings,
contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the
performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
R th
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and sealed: this 6 day of
December
2002
;' '—United
v
Seaboard Surety Company ���5 SL United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company rl Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Cimpa y ^�t�11'
Stwrry J F1FE 6 y\�M �RrG9 4+p+,MS4ggq 4�t Y WO
PETER W. CARMAN, Vice President
O
1977� 1951
�yt „~S�R�HCF �� �'•IS.AN+a! yo_._.••��+ AIN � tl� �� �/RR�.__ ��,. ��
State of Maryland
City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary
On this 6day of December 2002 before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared Peter W. Carman and
Thomas E. Huibregt e, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and
Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of
said Companies; and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the
corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers.
�0�4Gp FAS�`�
In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. a BTAAY
4C
My Commission expires the 1 st day of July, 2006. +1 C14 �o
REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA, Notary Public
86203 Rev. 7-2002 Printed in U.S.A.
This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul
Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. on September 2, 1998, which resolutions are now in full force and
effect, reading as follows:
RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating
to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorneys) -in -Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in
accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the
Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or any Vice President, or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary,
under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and
the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes
only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any
such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so
executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to
which it is validly attached; and
RESOLVED FURTHER, that Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of
Attorney issued them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other
writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an
Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company.
I, Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company,
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force
and effect and has not been revoked.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand this 23rd day of December _ , 2003
92/ y U>+EGItVNRA>f.�, =:,pM1�ORRlf i�^ � wymw._ g-"^^vyRRtFD
* �lSEAL o" 3,S81CLp �,—'t�""'t1 7c 1977 1951 /
mot! AtNd 17�' Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary
To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 and ask for the Power of Attorney clerk. Please refer to the Power of Attorney number,
the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached.
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
StPaul Surety St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Seaboard Surety Company St. Paul Medical Liability Insurance Company.
BID BOND
Bond No.
I RIDER CONTAINING
DISCLOSURE NOTICE OF TERRORISM COVERAGE
This disclosure notice is required by the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002. No
action is required on your part. This Disclosure Notice is incorporated in and a part
of the attached bond.
You should know that, effective November 26, 2002, any losses caused by certified
acts of terrorism would be partially reimbursed by the United States under a formula
established by the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002. Under this formula, the
United States reimburses 90% of covered terrorism losses exceeding the statutorily
established deductible paid by the insurance company providing the coverage.
There is a cap on our liability to pay for such losses if the aggregate amount of
insured losses under the Act exceeds $100,000,000,000 during the applicable
period for all insured and all insurers combined. In that case, we will not be liable for
the payment of any amount which exceeds that aggregate amount of
$100,000,000,000.
The portion of your premium that is attributable to coverage for acts of terrorism is
0.00.
IMPORTARNT NOTE: THE COST OF TERRORISM COVERAGE IS SUBJECT TO
CHANGE ON ANY BOND THAT PREMIUM IS CHARGED ANNUALLY.
SIGNED AND SEALED this 23rd day of December, 2003.
SURETY: Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. [SEAL]
Signatu
r� Staci Gross Attorney -in -Fact
CITY OF LUBBOCK
CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
of the presence of asbestos containing building materials (ACBM)
The purpose of this document is to advise the contractor/bidder of the presence and
location of ACBM in the building(s) indicated below. The City of Lubbock makes this
notification in our continuing effort to comply with all environmental, health, and safety
regulations associated with asbestos.
Health Department, located at 1902 Texas Avenue in Lubbock, contains Asbestos
Containing Building Materials (ACBM). The description of known materials and
�j locations are listed below.
Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" floor tile, tan with light & dark spots/ Rm. #'s
- 16-20, 22-24, 29-32, 51, 75, 76, 77, 79, 82, 83
Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" floor tile, gray with light & dark spots[
Rm. # 21
Type / Location: Mastic under 12" x 12" ceiling tile, regular perforations/ Rm. #50
• of ACBM in this
The above should not be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list C
structure. Materials can be encased behind walls and not readily visible or accessible.
Your signature below indicates your acknowledgement and agreement of the following:
1) You have been notified of the presence and location of known ACBM,
2) You will avoid the disturbance of known ACBM unless trained, licensed, and
authorized to do so, and
3) You will advise a City representative in the event of any accidental disturbance of the
ACBM listed above.
Please return the original, signed version with your bid submittal.
Contractor Name:
Contractor Representative:
Contractor Signature: Date:
Attention Purchasing dept: Please forward the signed document to the Facilities Management department, Attn: Asbestos
Coordinator
[A
G
r
I
PAYMENT BOND
P
Ell
c
f i
Bond #SW8485
STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(PUBLIC WORKS)
(Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount)
_ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That
Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company
(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
(hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
j City of Lubbock
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of
ONE MILLION FOUR THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED DOLLAR $ ) $1,004,500.00 )
AND NO/100THS
for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs,
administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
J WIUREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee,
Dated the 8th day of January 2004 to
BID #224-03/RS-BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
1
.a
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same
extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCK that if the said Principal
shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the
prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then this obligation shall be void;
otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of
Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions, conditions and limitations of said
Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed this instrument this
9th day of January 2004
Pharr C struction Co., Inc ba Pharr & Company
(Principal)
By
r-,
Fidelitond Guaranty insurance Underwriters, Inc. (Surety)
By
j Staci Gross Attorney -in -Fact
.1
J
The,%Fdul POWER OF ATTORNEY
Seaboard Surety Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Power of Attorney No. 20290 Certificate No. 1985569
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under
the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and
that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do
hereby make, constitute and appoint
I Donal Boley, Steve Deal and Staci Gross
J
of the City of Wichita Falls , State Texas -- , their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact,
each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings,
contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the
,^ performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and sealed this 6th day of December 2002
• y
Seaboard Surety Company [' y United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company t�■� Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company \ Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company V
l�
���, , `,\RF 4 y'' eO�►Y.^NS�j9 `JP�.�s�'o1,`c �Y�•
�927 z ;;SEAL to48xz �, ' 19� PETER W. CARMAN, Vice President
CkNEW ����"ccG vfS. AN�a +p.._.-� At[t •!
State of Maryland
City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary
On this 6th day of December , 2002 , before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared Peter W. Carman and
Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and
Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of
said Companies; and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the
corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers.
In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal.
My Commission expires the 1st day of July, 2006.
N OTgr,
�f UgyC
C1V REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA, Notary Public
qE
86203 Rev. 7-2002 Printed in U.S.A.
I
This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul
Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. on September 2, 1998, which resolutions are now in full force and
effect, reading as follows:
RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating
to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorney(s) in Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in
accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the
Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or any Vice President, or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary,
under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and
the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes
only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any
such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so
executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to
which it is validly attached; and
RESOLVED FURTHER, that Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of
Attorney issued them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other
writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an
Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company.
I, Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company,
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force
and effect and has not been revoked.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand this 9th _ day of January 2004
SWErY F\RE a \Ry MSG a•Y ,xayoy �1Y4,yQ /
19Z7 Z tvi�ORT-O'R^>f m z.4pRN0i�Tfi.P W't�yela.,,_ O IYi�RitED19%%
Na t ��SEALfio" 'aoSBbLap N � 1951
�0 R s�FwHcca +'s';'id+° �l`% a �M► ANta<`� f� Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary
To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1-800-421-3880 and as fo the tPow r of Attorney clerk. Please refer to the Power of Attorney number,
the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached
�1►' 2 8
Nam'
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
StPaul Surety St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Seaboard Surety Company St. Paul Medical Liability Insurance Company.
Bond No. SW8485
RIDER CONTAINING
DISCLOSURE NOTICE OF TERRORISM COVERAGE
This disclosure notice is required by the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002. No
action is required on your part. This Disclosure Notice is incorporated in and a part
of the attached bond.
You should know that, effective November 26, 2002, any losses caused by certified
acts of terrorism would be partially reimbursed by the United States under a formula
established by the Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of 2002. Under this formula, the
United States reimburses 90% of covered terrorism losses exceeding the statutorily
established deductible paid by the insurance company providing the coverage.
There is a cap on our liability to pay for such losses if the aggregate amount of
insured losses under the Act exceeds $100,000,000,000 during the applicable
period for all insured and all insurers combined. In that case, we will not be liable for
the payment of any amount which exceeds that aggregate amount of
$100,000,000,000.
The portion of your premium that is attributable to coverage for acts of terrorism is
0.00.
IMPORTARNT NOTE: THE COST OF TERRORISM COVERAGE IS SUBJECT TO
CHANGE ON ANY BOND THAT PREMIUM IS CHARGED ANNUALLY.
SIGNED AND SEALED this 9th day of January, 2004.
SURETY: Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. [SEAL]
Signatu
Staci Gross Attorney -in -Fact
StFbul Surety
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
ITo obtain information or make a complaint:
You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies,
coverages, rights or complaints at:
1 1-800-252-3439
You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at:
P.O. Box 149104
Austin, TX 78714-9104
FAX # 1-512-475-1771
Your notice of claim against the attached bond may be given to the surety company that issued
the bond by sending it to the following address:
-r
Mailing Address: St. Paul Surety Claim
_J
P.O. Box 4689
-, Federal Way, WA 98063-4689
Physical Address: St. Paul Surety Claim
31919 First Avenue South
Suite 100
J Federal Way, WA 98003
You may also contact the St. Paul Surety Claim office by telephone at:
Telephone Number: 1-253-945-1545
PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES:
If you have a dispute concerning a premium, you should contact the agent first. If you have a
dispute concerning a claim, you should contact the company first. If the dispute is not resolved,
you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance.
ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND:
This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached
document.
I
I
PERFORMANCE BOND
k
I
11
fl
11
11
Bond #SW8485
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO CHAPTER 2253
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(PUBLIC WORKS)
(Penalty of this Bond must be 100% of Contract Amount)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That
Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company
(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
1 (hereinafter called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
City of Lubbock
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of
ONE MILLION FOUR THOUSAND FIVE HUNDRED DOLLAR $ ) $1,004,500.00 )
AND NO/100THS
for the payment whereof the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs,
administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
J VAUREAS,the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee,
dated 8th day of January 2004 to
BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same
extent as if copied at length herein.
NOW TBEREFORE, TBE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal
shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and
contract documents, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise to remain in full
force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of
Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code and all liabilities on this bond shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions, conditions and limitations of said
Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed this instrument this
9th day of January 2004
Pharr
By _
Fidel
By
:ion Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company
Al. (Principal)
Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. (Surety)
Staci Gross
n-Fact
if
ri
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
f.
p
u
No Text
CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
(1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on
proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity
prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the
contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of
any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide
coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words
or changes:
PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A CERTIFICATE OF
INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF LUBBOCK AS AN
ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK, OR
IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT
THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE
DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR.
III
El
F
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the
legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to
report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing
of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this
rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during
the duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days
after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services.0
I
I
}
A
I
P
r
is
CONTRACT
L
J CONTRACT
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 8th day of January, 2004 by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so,
hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Pharr & Company of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of
Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
W ITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements
described as follows:
BID #224-03/RS - BIO-SAFETY LEVEL 3 LABORATORY FACILITY CONSTRUCTION - $1,004,500.00
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance
and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract
documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement.
J
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with
the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make
payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County,
Texas in the year -and day first above written.
CITY OF BOCS (OWNER): CONTRACTOR:
By: K, T XAk6 rr
f f 1A A OR & 1v
ey:
ATTEST: PRINTE NAME: Tb h vt r . t? h Q/Y-
kA- " 4 --�
TITLE: UiCL frr0-5>dg-r\f
City Secretary
4sR—eprese
D Wtative
caner
=0V:T FO M:
C St—
mey
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
Pharr & Company
P.O. Box 2791
Lubbock, Texas 79408
ATT
-t Lk�.U—
Corpor Secretary
F]
It
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of
Lubbock, Texas.
2. CONTRACTOR
' Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co-
partnership or corporation, to wit PHARR & COMPANY who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this
contract, or their legal representative.
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
J referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative HARLAN STAUFFER, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated
who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors
as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or
inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the
Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
' The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the
Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder
for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to
herein as the "contract" or "contract documents".
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or
words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation
or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable,"
"Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's
Representative.
8. SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor.
7. WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of
the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last
business address known to the party who gives the notice.
8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
9.
10.
11
12
13.
14.
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or
work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such
recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents
has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still
may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and
Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the
Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the
Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems
said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract
documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary,
Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but
such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore.
The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades
will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless
destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be
replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense.
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority
to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The
Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work
which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work
and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the
execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be
_ conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15)
calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection
by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may
deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said
material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall
furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the
proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and
instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and
instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications
provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or
inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's
Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any
and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory
to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions
given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate
supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance
of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the
Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and
location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the
contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or
Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms
or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all
modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's
Representative and Contractor.
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work
to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of
work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall
inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion,
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or
men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's
Representative's written consent.
19.
20
21.
22.
CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and
completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is
also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of
any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such
structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be
approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at
any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any
observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the
time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any
such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its
completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has
previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval
or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination
at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location
where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require
testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish
Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to
perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests
will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other
applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative,
be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective,
and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such
inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance
with the requirements of the contract documents.
DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not
in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written
notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy
such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial
action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
4
I
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either
before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a
claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of
work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual
expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
j required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered
by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of
the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
�._ methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced,
then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the
extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by
a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for
performance of the extra work.
t . In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for
the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred,
together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age
Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other
insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by
them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be
kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership
Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for
the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent
(15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit,
overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not
embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office
must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall
be included in the "actual field cost."
5
25.
26
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra
work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should
a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and
the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making
written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as
provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of
any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived.
DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the
specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that
such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in
these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a
clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's
Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands
the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance
with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding
of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and
specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any
request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of
bids.
RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of
work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the
Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall
comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
11-1
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY 0
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment
and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or
municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold
harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages,
expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or
contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection
with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any
manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject
matter of this contract.
11
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an ri
Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given 1 j
by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses,
6
�l
are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to
supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors.
28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change.
All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and
its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance,
rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of
payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in
conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.
The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor,
or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance
specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
PROOF OF COVERAGE SHALL BE FURNISHED TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK IN THE FORM OF A
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. THE INSURANCE CERTIFICATES FURNISHED SHALL NAME THE CITY OF
LUBBOCK AS AN ADDITIONAL INSURED AND PROVIDE A WAIVER OF SUBROGATION IN FAVOR OF THE
CITY OF LUBBOCK AS REQUIRED BELOW, OR IN THE ALTERNATIVE, SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY A
STATEMENT FROM THE CONTRACTOR TO THE EFFECT THAT NO WORK ON THIS PARTICULAR
PROJECT SHALL BE SUBCONTRACTED. IT SHALL BE THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO
PROVIDE TO THE OWNER ALL PROOF OF COVERAGE INSURANCE DOCUMENTS INCLUDING WORKERS
COMPENSATION COVERAGE FOR EACH SUBCONTRACTOR.
A. General Liability Insurance (Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required)
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00
Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
j Premises and Operations
l Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury
Advertising Injury
B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance.
L For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, f0 Combined Single Limit. This
r policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance (Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation Required)
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit,
0
E.
to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non ownership Liability Hired and
Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job t�
and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. l
Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance.
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100%
of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
Umbrella Liability Insurance (Additional Insured and Waiver of Subrogation required)
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of f0 on all contracts with coverage
to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages.
Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance (Waiver of Subrogation required)
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. Q
1. Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority
to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-
83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's
or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental n
entity. U
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 0406.096, Texas Labor
Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with
the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without
limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -
operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to
provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or
delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a
project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of
Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on
the project, for the duration of the project.
3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
C
F
t
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project.
6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
for one year thereafter.
7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by
the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the
project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and
report lack of coverage.
9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
on the project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will
G.
provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the
duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance
carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance
Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to
administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the
Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity.
Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner
for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence
of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the
insurance company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at
the address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. 0
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of
any coverage agreements;
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental
entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so
the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing
coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
I
u
11
U
10
0
L.
U
L
(a) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type
and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any
other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the
following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services
related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation
insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or
materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the
project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive
information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your
employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to
provide coverage;" and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language:
"By signing this contract or providing or causing to be
provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this
contract is representing to the governmental entity that all
employees of the person signing this contract who will
provide services on the project will be covered by workers'
compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that
the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of
classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the
commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the
Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties,
civil penalties, or other civil actions.";
(iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
11
29.
M
31.
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the
project;
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter;
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
required by paragraphs (I)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to
the person for whom they are providing services.
DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of
1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.
PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN, AND FURNISHERS
OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Without limiting, in anyway, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless
against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way,
manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of
machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract
and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish
satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or
waived.
PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material
or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof.
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and
save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except
that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or
required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material
or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers,
agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's
Representative prior to bidding.
M
I
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form,
the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such
laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor
observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in
writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the
work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within
said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or
local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors
perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's
Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as
the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may
enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as
though embodied herein.
d 33. SUBCONTRACTING
The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this
' contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required
in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as
provided by the contract documents.
... 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are
essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in
this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified,
then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner
may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $750 (SEVEN HUNDRED FIFTY)
PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each
and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing
the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial
completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages
the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount
agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and
is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach.
IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS
OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT.
35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall
be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as
shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution
shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this
13
36.
37.
38.
39
m designated `
contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion g nated in the bid; provided, also, that
when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may
direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the
construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. 0
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the
Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
TIME OF PERFORMANCE
The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this
project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and
has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that
it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been
delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors
employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public
enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all
justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days
of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the
extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial,
and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided
herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived.
HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such
work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in
securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except
where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in
which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such
stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated
to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they
are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing
their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are
expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ
somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method,
payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project.
PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way
encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be
liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without
limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees,
F1
11
I
I1
14
40.
41.
42.
against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising
from or growing out of the performance of this contract.
PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by
the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to
receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all
expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner
and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of
Owner's Representative.
PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective
work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's
agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application
for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall
determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial
payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall
prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the
Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by
the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the
Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by
Owner under the terms of the contract documents.
Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to
enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work
performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said
partial payment is attributable.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31)
working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time,
if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's
Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding
the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete
the work within the time provided in this contract.
15
44.
45
46.
47.
FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT
The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final
completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final
completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's
Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion,
Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final
completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the
obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or
warranties implied by law or otherwise.
CORRECTION OF WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative
on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and
Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming
to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of
other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative,
Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the
contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and
Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which
shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's
Representative.
PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify
the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the
amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
CLAIM OR DISPUTE
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's
Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner
shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right
under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by
Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative,
said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the
Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the
acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and
constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's
Representative, by Contractor.
16
48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after
written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the
written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety
on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be
delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no
further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required.
After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and
equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
' Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or
credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for
under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice
hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with
' diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract
documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or
otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective
manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall
be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time
become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than
the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the
Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the
sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said
Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper
having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of
the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of
any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost
under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain
bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which
would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be
credited therewith.
In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall
have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as
provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract
accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be,
shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would
have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract,
or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the
Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over
ri to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price,
and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated
hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work,
notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and
17
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual
written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such
property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the
Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said
notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived
from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public
or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery,
equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor
or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners.
The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted
by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this
paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its
exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies
available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in
paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth.
LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY
The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually
performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be
liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the
project which is the subject matter of this contract.
BONDS
The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in
the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the
Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the
amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall
be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do
business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so
furnished.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
�1
0
0
J!,
fl
fl-
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions f
conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall
control.
LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR 0
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to
direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's
work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and
vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or
effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's �}
Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 1
18 U
c
54. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition.
In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS
Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same
may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in
any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the
Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the
City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a
Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in
the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project
or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts
and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least
twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and
provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If
the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5)
days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied.
In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper
performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage,
disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or
asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective
gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum
products or byproducts and/or asbestos.
19
I
0
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
11
r
0
D
RE: RESOLUTION NO.2002-R0483, NOVEMBER 14, 2002
Craft
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
Air Conditioner Installer
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
Asbestos Worker
Asbestos Supervisor
Bricklayer
Bricklayer -Helper
Carpenter
Carpenter -Helper
Cement Finisher
Drywall Hanger
Electrician
Electrician -Helper
Equipment Operator -Heavy
Equipment Operator -Light
Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Journey
Fire Sprinkler Fitter -Apprentice
Floor Installer
Glazier
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
Insulator -Helper
Iron Worker
Laborer -General
Mortar Mixer
Painter
Plumber
Plumber -Helper
Roofer
Roofer -Helper
Sheet Metal Worker
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
Welder -Certified
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Hourly Rate
11.50
12.00
7.50
9.00
12.50
12.50
7.00
11.00
7.00
9.00
11.00
15.00
8.00
10.00
9.00
18.00
10.00
9.50
10.50
10.50
7.00
11.00
6.00
6.00
9.50
12.50
7.00
9.00
7.00
10.00
7.00
11.00
t
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Asphalt Heaterman
9.00
Asphalt Shoveler
7.50
Concrete Finisher
9.00
Concrete Finisher -Helper
7.50
Electrical Repairer -Equipment
12.50
Flagger
6.50
Form Setter
8.00
Form Setter -Helper
6.50
Laborer -General
6.00
Laborer -Utility
6.75
Mechanic
9.00
Mechanic -Helper
7.00
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
9.00
Bulldozer
9.00
Concrete Paving Machine
9.00
Front End Loader
9.00
Heavy Equipment Operator
9.00
Light Equipment Operator
8.00
Motor Grader Operator
10.25
Roller
7.00
Scraper
7.50
Tractor -Trailer
8.50
Truck Driver -Heavy
8.00
Truck Driver -Light
7.00
2
EXHIBIT C
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act.
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Legal Holiday Rate
UThe rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act.
I
C
I
r
I
SPECIFICATIONS
k
11
0
I
u
Specifications
City of Lubbock, Texas
BSL — 3 Facility
November 2003
PSC Project # 03879803
_�; o Inc Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc.
e::;:;d Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
L
Specifications
City of Lubbock, Texas
BSL — 3 Facility
November 2003
PSC Project # 03879803
o �� Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc.
d====9C4 Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following:
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01300
Administrative Requirements
01330
Submittal Procedures
01400
Quality Requirements
01600
Product Requirements
01650
Starting of Systems
01700
Execution Requirements
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02072
Minor Demolition for Remodeling
02521
Concrete Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300
Cast -In -Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04200
Unit Masonry
DIVISION 5 - METAL
05120
Structural Steel
05310
Steel Deck
05500
Metal Fabrications
05517
Alternating Tread Steel Stairs
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06114
Wood Blocking and Curbing
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210
Building Instulation
07550
Modified Butumen Roofing
07600
Sheet Metal
07900
Joint Sealers
II-17•?03
03879803 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY Page 1
i 11/03
0
0
0
0
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08000
Door Schedule
08110
Steel Doors and Frames
08211
Flush Wood Doors
�Ep qRc
08220
FRP Doors and Fiberglass Resin Transfer Molded Door Frames
a N y
°Oti9y
08700
Hardware
08800
Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
14746 Q�
9TF �
09220
Portland Cement Plaster
OF
09250
Gypsum Board Systems
Tile
N • 11' ZG��
09300
09510
Acoustical Ceiling
Z
09650
Resilient Flooring and Base
09900
Painting
09915
Color Schedule
09960
High -Performance Coatings
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10210
Metal Wall Louvers
03879803 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY Page 2
11/03
DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY
The specification sections authenticated by my seal and signature are limited to the following:
L1
DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT
D11609
Sterilizing Equipment
11610 Biological Safety Cabinets Class II
!
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
0
L
12345 Modular Steel Casework
r
g z0i
A CO3
03879803 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY Page 3
11/03
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 15 —MECHANICAL
j� 15010
General Provisions for Mechanical
u 15042
Commissioning, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems
(Not in Contract — Information Only)
15047
Marking and Identification
15060
Piping System Accessories
15070
Plumbing Piping Systems
15080
Pure Water Piping System
15085
Pure Water System Equipment
15090
Chilled and Heating Water Systems
15180
Insulation
t 15220
Hangers and Supports
I 15240
Vibration Isolation
15402
Domestic Water Systems
15414
Drainage Systems
15450
Plumbing Fixtures
15490
Natural Gas Systems — Interior
15650
Air -Cooled Liquid Chiller
15744
Variable Frequency Drives
15750
Hot Water Boiler
15760
GTS® Gas -Fired Evaporative Steam Humidification System
15800
Air Distribution
15840
Ductwork
15848
Apparatus Casing, Duct and Plenum Lining
15900
Temperature Regulation/Building Automation System w/Point Charts
15905
Facility Management System
15907
Lab Airflow Control System
15910
Room Pressure Control Monitor
15920
Commissioning Environmental Control Systems
15995
Mechanical, Facility Startup/Commissioning
16010
Raceways and Fittings
16110
Conductors
16211
Wiring Devices
16310
Electrical Service
16411
Grounding
16510
Electrical Distribution
16611
Lighting
16710
Motors and Equipment Controls and Wiring
16810
Emergency Power Generation and Controls
16860
Automatic Transfer Switch and Controls
16911
Fire Alarm and Detection System
16995
Electrical, Facility Startup/Commissioning
17100
Commissioning, General Requirements
17400
Commissioning, Plumbing Systems
17410
Commissioning, Pure Water Systems and Piping
17500
Commissioning, HVAC Systems
17510
Commissioning, Supply Air Systems
17520
Commissioning, Exhaust Air Systems
t 17530
Commissioning, Hot Water Heating Systems
17540
Commissioning, Chilled Water Systems
17600
Commissioning, Electrical Systems
END OF DOCUMENT
? 02092
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I
H
C
p
34307
All
p
61441.g "V
�f/o3
L
I
I
11
SECTION 01300
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Coordination.
B.
Preconstruction meeting.
C.
Site mobilization meeting.
D.
Progress meetings.
E.
Preinstallation meetings.
F.
Cutting and patching.
G.
Alteration project procedures.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to
assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements.
B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with
building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities
for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are
indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit,
as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to
maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the
building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be
brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing
structure is completed.
F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for:
1. Voltage
2. Phase
3. Ampacity
4. No. and size of wires
5. Wiring diagrams
6. Starter size, details and location
7. Control devices and details
G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial
Completion.
03879803 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 1
11/03
H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site with Owner for correction of
defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption
of Owner's activities.
1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed.
B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Contractor and major Subcontractors.
C. Agenda: To be determined by Owner.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants with two
copies to Architect and those affected by decisions made.
1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Owner shall establish schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at
minimum monthly intervals.
B. Owner will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants,
preside at meetings.
C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Architect, as
appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D. Agenda: To be determined by Owner
E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days to Architect, participants, and those
affected by decisions made.
1.6 DOCUMENTS
A. Contractor shall use Architect's standard form when submitting Requests For Information
(RFI). Architect will issue a copy of this form to Contractor in both hard copy and electronic
media. Only Contractor can submit RFIs to Architect. RFI requests from subcontractors or
material suppliers will not be considered.
B. All information indicated on the form to be provided by Contractor shall be complete before a
request can be submitted to the Architect's office. Requests with incomplete information will
be returned to the Contractor. Submission of a complete RFI request by Contractor does not
constitute an RFI until Architect makes the determination. If Architect determines that request
can not be answered with the information provided in the Contract Documents, Architect will
then assign an RFI tracking number. Requests determined by Architect not to be an RFI will be
returned to Contractor without being assigned an RFI tracking number. A transmittal document
returning the denied RFI request will be provided with a response indicating action to be taken
by Contractor.
C. If request and proposed solution cannot fit on the form, an attachment may be identified in the
Request or Contractor Proposed Solution areas, then attached to the form and submitted to
Architect. RFIs may contain more than one item when the items are related issues. Otherwise,
only one item shall be addressed on each RFI request.
D. Architect's response to the RFI will be in writing on the same form, or by attachment and
issued to Contractor and Owner.
E. Responses from Architect will not change any requirement of the Contract Documents. Should
Contractor believe an RFI response to cause a change to the Contract, Contractor shall give
written notice to Architect in accordance with the requirements in the Contract. Written notice
shall include specific reasons and an order of magnitude of Cost and/or Time that Contractor
deems appropriate based on the Architect's RFI response. Contractor's written notice does not
03879803 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 2
11/03
C
t
constitute a Change Order, but provide a basis for further review and discussion with the
Architect.
1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work
site prior to commencing work of the Section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section.
C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting.
1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with three
copies to Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections.
B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box.
C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for
connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual
specification sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work.
Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural attachment of new Work being applied or
attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct
location.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior
to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
03879803 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 3
11/03
3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching.
B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects:
1. Structural integrity of element.
2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.
4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to:
1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work.
2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work.
3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work.
4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing.
5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical
Work.
D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces
to receive patching and finishing.
E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.
F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.
I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest
intersection. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for
decision or remedy.
3.4 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
A. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and
extending work.
B. Employ skilled and experience installer to perform cutting and patching.
C. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of
temperature and humidity.
D. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of
restoring products and finishes to original condition unless otherwise specified.
E. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified
condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.
F. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched
work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance.
G. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible,
terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit
recommendation to Architect for review.
H. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a
smooth transition for Architect review.
I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing
other imperfections.
J. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections.
END OF SECTION
0
0
I
I
0
I
0
0
03879803 ADMIMSTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 4
11/03
REQUEST
FOR INFORMATION
DATE:
RFI #: (# assigned by PSC)
TO: Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc.
FROM: (General Contractor's Name)
(Office Location), Texas
Address:
PROJECT:
('I
Phone:
t�JJ
PSC PROJECT #:
Fax:
'items to be completed by Contractor before submittal to PSC for review.
*Specification Section/Paragraph No.:
*Drawing Reference/Detail No.:
*Request:
s
*Contractor Proposed Solution:
*Signed by:
*Response needed in days
❑ No RFI tracking number assigned
i
Response:
❑ Attachments:
Response From:
To:
Date Rec'd:
Date Ret'd:
Signed by:
Copies: ❑ Owner ❑ Consultants
❑ ❑
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
4222 85'" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo Odessa
L
F
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittal procedures.
B. Construction progress schedules.
C. Proposed products list.
D. Shop drawings.
E. Product data.
F. Samples.
G. Design data.
H. Test reports.
I. Certificates.
J. Manufacturers' instructions.
K. Manufacturers' field reports.
L. Erection drawings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers' field services and reports; Testing
Laboratory Services.
B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract Closeout: Contract warranty, manufacturer's
certificates and closeout submittals.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
B. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and for
record documents purposes described in Section 01700.
C. Transmit each submittal with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including Contractor's
name, address and phone number.
D. Sequentially number transmittal forms using Section number or Contractors other
sequential numbering system.
E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and specification Section number, appropriate to submittal.
F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products
required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in
accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
03879803 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1
11/03
G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect at business address.
Coordinate submission of related items.
H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the
Contractor.
I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be
detrimental to successful performance of completed Work.
J. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Architect Engineer review stamps.
K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report
any inability to comply with provisions.
L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
M. Format
1. Submit all submittals using an 81/2 x 11 inch format.
2. For submittals larger than 81/2 x 11 inches, prefold to an 81/2 x 11 format. Submittals not
pre -folded will be rejected.
N. At Architect's Engineer's option, submittals will not be individually marked, but will be
reviewed using Architect's Engineer's standard submittal review form.
O. Copies Required
1. Structural and Architectural Submittals: Number of copies Contractor requires plus three
copies which will be retained by Architect.
2. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Submittals: Number of copies Contractor requires
plus four copies which will be retained by Architect.
1.5 RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Revise and resubmit submittals, as required, and resubmit to meet requirements as specified and
as noted on submittal reviews.
B. Mark as RESUBMITTAL.
C. Re -use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical or numeric
suffix for each re -submittal.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate for Architect's review within 15 days after date
established in Notice to Proceed.
B. Revise and resubmit as requested, but at a minimum once a mouth at progress meeting.
C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since
previous version.
D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first work
day of each week.
E. Submit computer generated network analysis schedule as specified in Section 01323.
F. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and
other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float
dates, and duration.
G. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.
H. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, and
dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect Engineer. Indicate decision dates for
selection of finishes.
I. Revisions To Schedules:
1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of
each activity.
0
0
I[
0
If
I
0
U
11
03879803 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 U
11/03
2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other
identifiable changes.
3. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on
Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect including effect of
changes on schedules of separate contractors.
1.7 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed
for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or
catalog designation, and reference standards.
1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
B. Drawing Size: Minimum 8'/z x 11 inches and maximum 30 x 42 inches.
C. Form
1. For drawings larger than 11 x 17 inches, submit in the form of one reproducible
transparency and one opaque reproduction.
2. For drawings 11 x 17 inches and smaller, submit opaque reproductions.
D. Draw details to a minimum size of V2 inches equal to 1 foot.
E. Draw site plans to same scale indicated on contract drawings.
F. Draw all other plans to a minimum size of 1/8 inch equal to 1 foot.
G. At Architect's Engineer's option, depending on extent of review comments, either all opaque
copies will be marked or only the reproducible will be marked and returned to the Contractor to
make copies required.
1.9 PRODUCT DATA
A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement
manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.
B. Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified
standards of trade associations and testing agencies.
C. Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work and
building utilities where applicable.
D. After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for
Record Documents described in Section 01700 — Execution Requirements.
1.10 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
B. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples of finishes from manufacturers' full range of
standard colors, textures, and patterns, for Architect's selection.
C. Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in the material or product, submit
multiple samples to indicate the approximate range or variations.
D. Include full Project information and identification of manufacturer, model number, type, style
and color on each sample.
03879803 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3
11/03
E. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will
be retained by Architect.
F. Reviewed samples which may remain as part of the Work are indicated in individual
specification Sections.
G. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in individual
specification section.
1.11 DESIGN DATA
A. Submit for Architect's Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given
and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.12 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit for Architect's Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.13 CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer,
installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect Engineer, in quantities
specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting
reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be
acceptable to Architect Engineer.
1.14 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions
for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing.
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents.
C. Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special environmental
criteria required for application or installation.
1.15 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS
A. Submit reports for Architect's Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect Engineer for information.
C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given
and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.16 ERECTION DRAWINGS
A. Submit drawings for Architect's Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given
and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
a
0
11
� I
11
0
0
U
03879803 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4
11/03
0
V
C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect
Engineer or Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03879803 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 5
11/03
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
FPART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality control and control of installation.
B. Tolerances.
C. References.
D. Testing and Inspection services.
E. Manufacturers' field services.
F. Examination
G. Preparation
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and
Certificates.
B. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
C. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Starting of Systems.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C.
Should manufacturers'instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect Engineer before proceeding.
'u D.
Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E.
Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F.
Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer.
G.
Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
1.5 TOLERANCES
A.
Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B.
Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Architect Engineer before proceeding.
03879803
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1
11/03
C.
Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing in place.
1.6 REFERENCES
A.
For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards,
comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or
are required by applicable codes.
B.
Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except
where a specific date is established by Code.
C.
Obtain copy of standards when required by specification section.
D.
Neither contractual relationship, duties nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of
the Architect Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference
(�
otherwise in any reference document.
1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
a
A.
Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to
Owner and Architect Engineer to perform specified inspection and testing.
1. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number,
and names of full time registered Engineer or specialist and responsible officer.
2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference
py
Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with
ICI+
memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection.
B.
The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual
specification Sections and as required by the Architect Engineer or the Owner.
1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate 1902 Texas Ave, Lubbock at Project location in State
of Texas.
2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.
3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy
traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical
constants.
Q
C.
Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off -site
testing as required by Architect Engineer or Owner.
(�
D.
Submitted independent firm's reports to the Architect Engineer, in triplicate, indicating
observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract
u
E.
Documents.
Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools,
storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested.
1. Notify Owner, Architect Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time
for operations requiring services.
2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests
required for Contractor's use.
F.
Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory does not relieve Contractor from
performing Work to contract requirements.
G.
Perform re -testing and/or re -inspection required because of non-conformance to specified
requirements using the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect Engineer or
Owner. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or
testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price.
H.
Agency Responsibilities:
1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
03879803
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2
11/03
2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect Engineer and. Contractor in
performance of services.
3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.
4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Promptly notify Architect Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-
conformance of Work or products.
6. Perform additional tests required by Architect Engineer.
7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.
I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect Engineer
and to Contractor. When requested by Architect Engineer, provide interpretation of test results.
Include the following:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name of inspector.
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications section.
6. Location in Project.
7. Type of inspection or test.
8. Date of test.
9. Results of tests.
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
J. Limits On Testing Authority:
1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of
Contract Documents.
2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor.
4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.8 MANUFACTURERS'FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and
balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect Engineer 30 days in advance of required
observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect Engineer.
C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
D. Refer to Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, MANUFACTURERS' FIELD
REPORTS article.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
03879803
11/03
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
01400 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work.
Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being
applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying new material or substance in contact or bond.
END OF SECTION
03879803 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4
11/03
1. l
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products.
B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling.
C. Product options.
D. Substitutions.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. Testing Laboratory
Services.
t1.4 PRODUCTS
A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems
forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,
fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials
or components required for reuse.
B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically
permitted by the Contract Documents.
C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.
D. Materials required to match existing work and not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the
existing work in quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be comparable to
adjacent existing work. The Architect Engineer shall be the sole authority in determination of
acceptable work.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery
1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original,
unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct, and products are undamaged.
3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
4. Arrange deliveries in accord with the construction schedule and in ample time to
facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction
process.
03879803 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1
11/03
B. Storage
1.
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible.
2.
Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures.
3.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
4.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products.
5.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
6.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
7.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
8.
Materials, products and equipment may be stored off site in a bonded and insured
warehouse approved by the Architect Engineer and Owner. Pay all costs incurred for off-
site storage facilities. Products properly stored in off -site storage facilities may be
�J
included in progress pay requests with written approval of the Architect.
C. Handling
1.
Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or
specified to protect from damage during storage and installation.
1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those
standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named
and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the
following article.
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Architect Engineer will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date
established in Notice to Proceed.
B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the
Contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution
with Contract Documents.
D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality
level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for
the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect and Engineer for review or redesign services
by authorities.
I�
associated with re -approval
03879803 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2
11/03
L.
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require
A revision to the Contract Documents.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to
one proposed Substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. The Architect Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject
request.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03879803 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3
11/03
C
L
SECTION 01650
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Starting systems.
B.
Demonstration and instructions.
C.
Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials.
C.
Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing.
1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item.
C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage.
D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by the equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and
Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system
installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been
properly installed and is functioning correctly.
1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to
date of final inspection.
B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season.
C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual
with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance,
and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location.
03879803 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1
11/03
E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03879803 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2
11/03
SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Closeout procedures.
B. Final cleaning.
C. Adjusting.
D. Project record documents.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Warranties.
G. Spare parts and maintenance materials.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Progress cleaning.
B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been
inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Architect's inspection.
B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities.
C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.
1.5 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains
and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft
surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.
D. Replace filters of operating equipment.
E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
H. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes.
I. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction.
03879803 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1
11/03
1.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the
Work:
1. Contract Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.
C. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
6. Changes made by addenda and modification.
F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit one copy 15 days prior to final inspection, 8 % x 11 inch text pages, bound in three
D-ring binders with durable plastic covers.
B. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of
documents as required prior to final submittal.
C. Submit two final volumes revised within ten days after final inspection.
D. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are
required.
E. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system
description identified, type on 24 pound white paper.
G. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor,
Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
03879803 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2
11/03
r
U
0
G
H. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
1. Significant design criteria.
2. List of equipment.
3. Parts list for each component.
4. Operating instructions necessary for Owner to make full and efficient use of equipment
including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures for HVAC
systems.
5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and
materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
I. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
1. Shop drawings and product data.
2. Air and water balance reports.
3. Certificates.
4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
1.9 WARRANTIES
A. Provide duplicate notarized copies.
B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation
cover.
D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal
within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification Sections.
B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03879803 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 3
11/03
fl
SECTION 02072
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1- General Requirements apply
to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Construction of temporary barriers.
B. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures.
C. Removal of designated construction.
D. Disposal of materials.
E. Salvage of removed materials. Refer to items as indicated on drawings.
F. Storage of removed materials. Refer to items as indicated on drawings.
G. Identification of utilities.
' 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01300 — Administrative Requirements
B. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary enclosures, dust
control barricades, security at Owner occupied areas, and cleanup during construction.
C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 01330 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B. Submit proposed location for dumpster or other demolition material container(s).
C. Submit proposed route for movement of demolition materials within the existing building.
1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface
obstructions.
1 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical
disconnection and re -connection.
B. Obtain required permits from authorities.
C. Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit.
D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notice
to Owner.
E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.
03879803 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 1
11/03
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Section 01330 - Submittals: Work schedule.
B. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction.
C. Perform noisy, malodorous, dusty, or work:
1. Coordinate with building occupants
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.
B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect
Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers insulated partitions at locations indicated.
B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.
C. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit
continued Owner occupancy.
D. Where demolition occurs immediately adjacent to occupied portions of the building, construct
dust -proof partitions of minimum 4-inch studs, 5/8-inch drywall (joints taped) on occupied side,
1/2-inch fire -retardant plywood on demolition side. Fill partition cavity with sound -deadening
insulation.
E. Protect existing materials equipment and fixtures which are not to be demolished.
F. Provide protective covers over existing carpet vinyl composition.
G. Provide elevator manufacturer's standard protective padding on elevator walls.
H. Provide temporary protective corner protection at all outside corners along route for removal of
refuse.
I. Do not store nor pile demolition materials or equipment on any part of the structure in a manner
that would cause permanent damage.
J. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring.
K. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.
L. Mark location and termination of utilities. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain
continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance
notice to Architect Engineer if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover.
M. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.
N. Set refuse containers at location approved by Owner.
O. Environmental Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other methods to
limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental
protection.
03879803 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 2
11/03
M
P. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding, and pollution.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect remove, cap, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas.
B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members.
C. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable
materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of
hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression
devices during flame -cutting operations.
D. Maintain fire protection services during demolition operations.
E. Remove temporary Work.
F. Demolish plaster in small sections. Cut plaster at junctures with construction to remain using
power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools.
G. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid
imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
1. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local
authorities having jurisdiction.
H. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the
conflict. Submit report to Architect Engineer in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of
directive from Architect Engineer, rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue
overall job progress without undue delay.
I. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable
regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against
exposure or environmental pollution.
3.3 DISPOSAL
A. Coordinate route for movement of refuse within the existing building with the Owner to create
the least amount of interference with Owner's continuing occupancy and operations.
B. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn
or bury materials on site.
C. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted.
D. Remove materials as Work progresses.
3.4 SALVAGED MATERIALS
{ ` A. Salvaged Items:
1. Carefully remove, clean, and deliver to Government at location as directed by the
Owner, the items indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section.
2. Carefully remove, clean, store and protect for re -use the items indicated in the schedule
at the end of this Section.
3.5 CLEANUP
A. Repair damaged pavement landscaping under refuse containers or damaged during contraction
by equipment and return to original condition.
03879803 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
11/03
02072 - 3
V�
B. Repair existing finishes to remain, which are damaged during demolition, to match adjacent
finishes.
C. Shampoo all soiled carpet along the refuse removal route. Repair or replace carpet along the
refuse removal route which has been damaged. Make repairs to satisfaction of Owner.
D. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from
site.
E. Remove protections and leave exterior areas broom clean.
F. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and
surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations.
G. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work.
END OF SECTION
U
03879803 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 4
11/03 a
I,
uPART 1- GENERAL
C
SECTION 02521
CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract For Construction and Division 1 General
Requirements apply to the work of this section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900 — Joint Sealers: Joint sealants used in concrete sidewalks.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 185 -
B. ASTM A615 - Deformed Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
C. ASTM C-33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
D. ASTM C-40 -
E. ASTM C 94- Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete.
F. ASTM C-150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement
G. ASTM C-309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete.
H. AASHTO T-104 -
I. AASHTO T-96 -
J. ACI Manual of Standard Practice
K. ACI Detailing Manual
L. ASTM D1557 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Said
M. ASTM D 1751- Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Concrete shall not be placed when the temperature is less than 40° F. and under no
circumstances shall it be placed on frozen ground.
B. All reinforcement shall be permanently marked with grade identification marks or shall, on
delivery, be accompanied by a manufacturer's guarantee of grade and compliance with these
specifications.
C. Templates shall be maintained in good condition and warped or bent templates shall not be
used
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Cement delivered in bags shall be marked plainly with the brand name of the manufacturer and
a bag shall contain ninety-four (94) pounds of cement. Cement from different mills, though
tested and approved, shall not be mixed. Cement shall be stored and handled in manner which
03879803 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 1
11/03
will protect it from dampness and any cement which has become partially set or which contains
hard lumps or cakes shall not be used.
B. Reinforcement stored on the site shall be protected for accumulations of grease mud or other
foreign matter and from rust producing conditions. Bars shall be free from rust, scale, oil, mud
or structural defects when incorporated in the structures.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 FORMS
A. Sidewalk Forms
2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C-150, Type I or ASTM C-150, Type III, High Early Strength Cement with
approval by the Engineer.
B. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand or mixture of such sands, consisting of clean, hard, durable
uncoated grains, free from lumps. Deleterious substances shall not exceed the following
percentages by weight:
Material removed by decantation ....................3.0%
ClayLumps.....................................................0.5%
Other deleterious substances such as coal,
shale coated grains and soft flaky particles ...... 3.0%
1. The aggregate shall be free from a harmful amount of salt or alkali and, when subjected
to the color test for organic impurities shall not have a color darker than Fig. No. 2 (Test
in accordance with A.S.T.M. Designation C-40).
2. Material which contains frozen lumps or wood, hay, burlap, paper, dirt or other foreign
matter mixed with the aggregate in stock piles or in handling shall not be used
3. Fine aggregate shall be well graded from fine to coarse and shall meet the following
requirements (ASTM C-33):
Passing 3/8" Sieve........................................100%
Passing No. 4 Sieve ..............................
95 - 100%
Passing No. 8 Sieve ..............................
80 - 100%
Passing No. 16 Sieve ..............................
50 - 85%
Passing No. 30 Sieve ..............................
25 - 60%
Passing No. 50 Sieve ..............................
10 - 30%
Passing No. 100 Sieve ..............................
2 - 10%
C. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed stone, gravel, or crushed gravel, or any combination of them,
composed of hard, tough and durable particles free from adherent coating, free of salt, alkali,
vegetable matter and soft, friable, thin or elongated particles and the substances listed below
shall not be present in excess of the amounts indicated:
Soft Fragments ........................................... 5% by weight
Clay Lumps ........................................... 0.25% by weight
Removed by decantation ......................... * I % by weight
03879803 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 2
11/03
(* 1/z ? percent if consisting essentially of crusher dust)
The total deleterious substances shall not exceed 5% by weight
1. Gradingof coarse aggregate shall conform to the following requirements (ASTM C-33
y Size No. 57):
' Maximum size - 1?-inch sieve
Passing 1-inch sieve .............................. 95 - 100%
Passing 1/2-inch sieve ............................. 25 - 60%
Passing No. 4 sieve ................................... 0 - 10%
2. The coarse aggregate shall not show evidence of disintegration, nor show a total loss
greater than eighteen (18) percent when subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulphate
accelerated soundness test using AASHTO Designation T-104.
3. The percentage of wear shall not be more than 45 at 500 revolutions as determined by
AASHTO Designation T-96.
D. Water: Fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali or organic matter. The
Contractor will provide at his expense the transportation of the water from the City mains to the
places where it is to be used.
E. Reinforcing
1. Fiber Reinforcing: "Fiber Mesh" or "Caprolan RC" or approved equal.
F. Expansion joint material shall be an approved preformed bituminous impregnated
non -extruding type jointing material, 1/2" thick (3/4" thick for machine laid curb and gutter),
�. and shaped to the section of the curb and gutter, or concrete drainage apron.
G. Fabrication and Placing
1. Accurately fabricate to the dimensions and shapes shown on the drawings in accordance
with ACI Manual of Standard Practice unless variations are specifically shown on the
drawings.
2.3 PROPORTIONING
A. The exact amounts of all material entering into the concrete shall be determined in the field in
order to produce the desired durability, density, uniformity, workability and the specified
strength. All materials shall be measured separately by methods, satisfactory to the Engineer,
which will permit control of the concrete and production of a product of uniform quality.
tParticular care shall be used in measuring cement and water. One bag of cement will be
considered as ninety-four (94) pounds and one gallon of water as eight and thirty-three
one -hundredths (8.33) pounds. Water contained in the aggregates shall be taken into account in
calculating the amount of water to be added to the mixture. The percentage of fine aggregate to
total aggregate shall be between 33% and 45%.
B. Concrete for the designated uses shall conform to the following:
03879803 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 3
' 11/03
1,
Max. Water Content Min. Cement Content Compressive
U.S. Gallons 94-lb. Sacks Strength, Lbs.
Per Sack of Cement Per Cu. Yd. Per Sq. In.
Curb and Gutter,
Gutter, Concrete
Valley Gutters
and Misc. Concrete
Work 6.5 5.0 3000 at 28 days
2.4 MIXING
A. Mix concrete in an approved batch type mixer equipped with a device for measuring the water
which is accurate to within two percent (2%).
B. Minimum time for mixing each batch after all ingredients are in the mixer: One and one-half (1
1/2) minutes.
C. The speed of the mixer shall not exceed that recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Excessive overmixing, requiring the addition of water to preserve the required consistency, will
not be permitted.
E. Discard concrete not in place within 45 minutes from the time of charging the drum, or which
has developed initial hardening.
F. Transit mixed concrete confomung to ACI 94 will be acceptable.
G. Mix concrete for use in a curb and gutter laydown machine as specified above, and as required
to form curb and gutter section with the laydown machine. Accurately control slump of
concrete to prevent sagging or slumping of curb section behind laydown machine. Batches with
excessive slump will be rejected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before placing concrete, sprinkle subgrade or base surface so that it is in a thoroughly
moistened condition (but not muddy).
B. Complete preparation of curb and gutter subgrade at the time subgrade is constructed for
adjacent street section.
C. Oil forms with a light oil before each use and clean forms which are to be reused immediately
after use.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND GRADING
A. Conform to lines and grades shown on drawings or as established in field for excavation or
embankment for curb, gutter, combined curb and gutter, and other miscellaneous concrete
work.
B. Extend street subgrade six (6) inches beyond the back of curb and compact to 95% of
maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557.
C. Where finished street subgrade is more than three (3) inches below bottom of proposed curb
grade, fill with compacted caliche base to bring subgrade up to required bottom of curb
elevation.
03879803 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 4
11/03
i
1
D. Where curb, gutter and combined curb and gutter pavement is on fill, place material - ? in
layers and compact, by appropriate methods, equal to that specified in Section -- 02230 -
Aggregate Base Course.
3.3 FORMS
A. Construct forms accurately to line and grade as established in the field and adequately brace so
that they will not move during placing of the concrete.
B. Leave forms in place at least twelve (12) hours after placing of concrete.
C. Use flexible sheet steel forms for curb and gutter on curves with a radius of 130 feet or less.
D. Forms for concrete paving shall also conform to provisions of this paragraph.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Expansion Joints: Provide an expansion joint at tangent point of each return at intersections, at
intervals of not more than forty feet (40) between intersections (odd length sections as directed
by Architect), and at end of each day's concrete pour.
B. Construction or Contraction Joints
1. Locate at 10-foot intervals, or at each template or as directed by Architect.
2. Form construction or contraction joints for curb and gutter poured in metal forms using
metal template plates accurately shaped to cross-section shown on drawings plans and so
constructed that they can be removed during finishing operations.
C. Place all joints perpendicular to surface of concrete and to axis of section.
D. In machine laid curb and gutter make contraction joints at 10-foot intervals by cutting into the
curb and gutter sections with a trowel a depth of approximately 2"; finish joints as specified
under finishing. Place expansion joints at end returns, but not to exceed a maximum spacing of
three hundred feet (300), and at the end of each day's concrete pour.
3.5 REINFORCING
A. Fiber reinforcing may be used in lieu of wire mesh for pedestrian sidewalks with material and
rate of application approved by Architect.
3.6 CONCRETE
A. Deposit in place in such a manner as to require minimum of re -handling and place in a manner
which will produce a uniformly dense section, free of honeycomb or other voids, conforming to
grade, thickness, and shapes shown on drawings.
B. Thoroughly spade or vibrate concrete adjacent to forms or joints in order to eliminate
honeycombing.
C. Accurately shape curb and gutter, gutter, concrete valley gutters, fillets, and other miscellaneous
concrete work to cross section shown on drawings or approved by Architect.
3.7 FINISHING
A. Finished to a surface of uniform texture by floating with a wood float and troweling.
B. Finish both sides of all joints, lip of gutter, and back edge of curb with an approved edging tool
before final brushing.
C. Provide final finishing with a brush using a continuous stroke from back of curb to lip of gutter.
03879803 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 5
11/03
D. Accurately shape and finish curves at top and bottom of curb sections to present a uniform
appearance without "waves" in face of curb or "pockets" in gutters or slabs.
E. Exercise particular care at valley gutters, both in setting forms and finishing, to insure that
shape of gutter conforms to details of drawings and that no water pockets will be formed in
gutter of pavement.
F. At construction and contraction joints cut mortar full width of joint, and neatly finish with an
approved edging or grooving tool of such design to groove the joint approximately 2" in depth.
G. Neatly form and finish construction and contraction joints in machine laid curb and gutter with
an approved edging or grooving tool of such design to groove the joint approximately 2" in
depth.
3.8 PROTECTING AND CURING
A. Burlap Method
1. Cover all concrete work with burlap or other suitable material as soon as it has set
sufficiently to prevent marking and keep wet continuously for at least four (4) days.
B. Care shall be taken to prevent mechanical injury to concrete work during this period and until
the work is accepted.
C. All work damaged prior to acceptance shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
D. Curing compound method
1. In lieu of the above method of curing, the curb and gutter may be cured by applying a
liquid membrane coating, conforming to ASTM C-309, to all exposed surfaces as soon
as concrete has set sufficiently.
2. Apply membrane to back and front of concrete curb and gutter as soon as forms have
been removed.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Provide suitable means to prevent concrete from freezing for not less than 72 hours after
placing. Remove and replace all concrete damaged by freezing. The addition of any admixture
of chemicals to the concrete to prevent freezing shall not be allowed, unless specifically
approved by the Architect.
B. Provide suitable means to protect freshly poured concrete from rain damage. Keep such means
readily accessible at all times during placement of concrete.
C. Care shall be taken during the backfill and cleanup process not to scrape, chip, crack or
otherwise damage the concrete including tire marks from equipment or trucks. All damaged
concrete will be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
3.10 REMOVAL OF CONCRETE CURB, GUTTER, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS
A. The removal of all curbs, gutters, sidewalks and driveways that are required for the construction
of the improvements as shown on the plans or as directed by the Architect shall be removed and
disposed of by the Contractor and no separate payment will be made for this item of work.
B. Remove sidewalks, driveways, curb and gutter to the limits as directed by the Architect, and
saw cut with a concrete saw unless the concrete is being removed to an existing construction
joint.
3.11 DEFECTIVE WORK
A. Removed and replace all defective work disclosed after forms have been removed.
03879803 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 6 U
11/03
1A
B. Defective work includes, but is not limited to deficient dimensions, section not constructed to
the proper grade, concrete surface bulged, uneven, or shows honeycomb, which in the opinion
of the Architect cannot be repaired satisfactorily.
3.12 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill behind and adjacent to all concrete work including curb, gutter, sidewalks, drives,
drainage structures and other miscellaneous concrete work using good quality topsoil free from
organic material such as leaves, grass, roots and other unsuitable materials and free of rocks or
stones.
B. Provide a smooth, even slope between property line grade and top of curb or other concrete
structure.
C. Compact backfill behind curb and gutter to at least density of undisturbed natural ground in
adjacent area.
3.13 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Patch all honeycombed places in the back of the curb or face of gutter as directed by the
Architect.
END OF SECTION
03879803 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS AND SIDEWALKS 02521 - 7
11/03
I
SECTION 03300
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
f PART 1 - GENERAL
�J 1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
u C. Shop Drawings: For steel reinforcement.
D. Material test reports certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities
and equipment.
B. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM -FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true,
and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of
joints.
B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.
Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs or spacers, for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing
bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire,
plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
03879803 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1
11/03
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand,
and source, throughout Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Supplement with the following:
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C.
B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum
coarse -aggregate size.
1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.
D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing
calcium chloride.
1. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
2.4 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.
B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene
sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Clear, Waterbome, Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,
Class B, dissipating.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic
fiber.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis
of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio:
a. For Footings: 0.55.
b. For Slab: 0.45.
3. Slump Limit:
a. For Footings: 3 to 7 inches.
b. For Slab: 8 inches (200 nun) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches
(50 to 100 mm) before adding high -range water -reducing admixture or
plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).
4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3
percent.
2.7 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
03879803 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 U
11/03
Ti
L
2.8 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing
and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90
deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI301 to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,
until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
that is attached to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form construct contraction joints for a depth equal
to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: Sectioning concrete into areas as
indicated.
1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into
concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and
before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at
slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
03879803 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3
11/03
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no
new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes
of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as
indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to
ACI 301.
C. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
D. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie
holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed
specified limits on formed -surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material,
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits
on formed -surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces to be covered with a coating or covering material applied
directly to concrete.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull -
floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4
inch (6 nun) in 1 direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power -driven floats or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low
spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,
granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete
by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is
free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface
defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient
flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or
another thin -film -finish coating system.
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an
unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots
and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch (6 nun)
03879803 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4
11/03
I
I
I
3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot -
weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot,
dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. in x h)
before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float
finishing.
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.
2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends
lapped at least 12 inches (300 min), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure
for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing
period using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. After moisture curing: Apply curing compound uniformly in continuous operation
by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat
areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting
agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Testing Services: Tests shall be performed according to ACI 301.
END OF SECTION 03300
03879803 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5
11/03
hSECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
B.
Concrete masonry units (CMU).
Mortar.
C.
Grout for masonry.
D.
Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
a
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control:
B.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels, fabricated steel items.
C.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
C
B.
ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
C.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
D.
ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
C
E.
ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
F.
ASTM A641 - Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
n
G.
ASTM C5 - Quicklime for Structural Purposes.
H.
ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete.
I.
ASTM C129 - Non -Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
LK.
J.
ASTM C144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
L.
ASTM C 199 - Test Method for Pier Test for Refractory Mortar.
M.
ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
D
N.
ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
O.
ASTM C387 - Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials, for Mortar and Concrete.
P.
ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
Q.
ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry.
R.
ASTM C780 - Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and
Reinforced Unit Masonry.
S.
ASTM C1019 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
T.
ASTM C1072 - Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength.
03879803
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 1
11/03
U. ASTM E447 - Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms.
V. ASTM E518 - Test Method for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry.
W. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting
schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement, accessories.
B. Product Data
1. Include design mix complying with the Property specification of ASTM C270, required
environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.
2. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, masonry unit assembly strength in all
planes, supportive test data.
C. Reports
1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of mortar to property requirements of
ASTM C270 component mortar materials to requirements of ASTM C270 and test and
evaluation reports to ASTM C780.
2. Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to
requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C1019.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for requirements for masonry construction.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign
matter.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum
40 degrees F (5 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. Hot Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum
90 degrees F (32 degrees C) prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
0
I
0
I
I
u
03879803 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2
11/03 U
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Coordinate the masonry work with other sections as required.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Concrete Masonry Units
1. Featherlite Block Co.
B. Portland Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime
1. Essroc Materials, Inc.
2. Glen-Gery Corporation.
3. Lafarge Corporation.
4. Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
5. Riverton Corporation.
C. Mortar Pigments
1. Davis Colors.
2. Lafarge Corporation.
3. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc.
D. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors
1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
2. Heckman Building Products, Inc.
3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
4. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
5. National Wire Products Industries.
6. Southern Construction Products.
L2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type II - Non -moisture Controlled;
normal weight, with integral water-repellent admixture.
B. Hollow and Solid Non -Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C129, Exterior Type I -
Moisture Controlled and interior Type II - Non -moisture Controlled; normal weight, with
integral water-repellent admixture.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
ri A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641
u Class 1 after fabrication.
B. Reinforcing Steel: As specified in Section 03300 and as indicated on drawings.
! C. Reinforcing Steel Positioners: 9 gage steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 1
after fabrication.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, gray color.
B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.
03879803 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3
11/03
FAI
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D. Water: Clean and potable.
E. Bonding Agent: Epoxy type.
F. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N using the Property specification with maximum 2
percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight, sand aggregate.
G. Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment color to match existing.
ADMIXTURES
A. Plasticizer:
B. Water Repellent: Liquid type; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture.
C. Accelerator: Accelguard 80 or Morset.
MORTAR MIXES
A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: Portland cement and lime, ASTM C270, Type S
using the Proportion specification.
B. Mortar For Non -Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: Portland cement and lime, ASTM C270,
Type S using the Proportion specification.
C. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N using the Property specification with maximum 2
percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight.
GROUT MIXES
A. Bond Beams: 2,000 psi (13.8 MPa) strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches (200-250 mm) slump; with
mixed in accordance with ASTM C476 Fine grout.
GROUT MIXING
A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94.
******OR******
B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
C. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
MIX TESTS
A. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C270.
******OR******
B. Testing of Grout Mix: In accordance with ASTM C1019 for slump.
03879803 UNif MASONRY 04200 - 4
11/03
if]
i
It�
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent bracing.
C. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. MORTAR MIXING
1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed
for immediate use.
2.
Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
3.
Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Provide uniformity of mix and coloration.
4.
Provide water-repellent admixture in mortar for all exterior exposed masonry and all
masonry backup for exterior stucco.
5.
Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
6.
If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing.
7.
Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F
(32 degrees . C), or two -and -one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F
(5 degrees Q.
B. Coursing
1.
General
a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
b. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal
joints of uniform thickness.
2.
Concrete Masonry Units:
a. Bond: Running.
b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches (200 mm).
C. Mortar Joints: Concave.
C. Placing and Bonding
1.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed
with other work.
2.
Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
3.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive farrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
4.
Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
5.
Interlock intersections and external corners.
6.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment
must be made, remove mortar and replace.
03879803
UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5
11/03
a
3.4
7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,
unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
8. Cut mortar joints flush where steel furring is scheduled.
9. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint
as indicated.
10. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and
slabs or decks with compressible joint filler.
D. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry
1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches (400 mm) oc.
2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches (400 mm) each side of opening.
3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches (150 mm).
5. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches (400 mm) oc.
GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Reinforce bond beam with 2, No. 4 bars, 1 inch from bottom web.
B. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
C. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2 inch
(13 mm) of dimensioned position.
D. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
E. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches (300 mm) either
side of opening.
3.5 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.
D. Form expansion joint as detailed.
3.6 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames, louvers, anchor bolts, plates, and other
items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb and level.
C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout.
Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches (300 mm) from framed openings.
D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.
3.7 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch (1.5 mm).
B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft (6 mm/3 m) and 1/2 inch in 20 ft
(13 mm/6 m) or more.
C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story non -cumulative; 1/2 inch (13 mm)
in two stories or more.
0
11
0
I
n
, I
u
03879803 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6
11/03 U
I
I
r
1J,
I
I
D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3 mm/in) and 1/4 inch in 10 ft
(6 mm/3 m); 1/2 inch in 30 ft (13 mm/9 m).
E. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft (3mm/m).
F. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
G. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) and minus
0 inches (0 mm).
H. Maximum Variation from Plane of Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch (1 mm).
I. Maximum Variation of Panel from Plane: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3.8 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work
to provide correct size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Inspect and test all masonry work.
C. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780.
D. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
F. Do not scratch or deface units.
3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners
which may be damaged by construction activities.
C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging
completed work.
3.12 SCHEDULES
A. Exterior Wall: Concrete block units with an exterior veneer of aggregate plaster.
B. Interior Partitions: Single wythe concrete block units.
END OF SECTION
03879803
11/03
UNIT MASONRY
04200 - 7
L�
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
s
PART 1-GENERAL
y
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
D1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Structural steel.
2. Grout.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and
other metal items not defined as structural steel.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads.
i 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
L A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract
Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator to withstand ASD-
service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified
professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural -steel
connections.
B. Construction: Type 2, simple framing.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
2. Include embedment drawings.
3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.
Identify pretensioned and slip -critical high -strength bolted connections.
5. For structural -steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include
structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Welding certificates.
03879803 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 1
11/03
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has successfully completed projects
similar in size and complexity.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who has successfully completed projects
similar in size and complexity.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DLL, "Structural Welding
Code --Steel."
D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and
Plastic Design."
3. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections."
4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members
off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect
steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.
1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become
dry or rusty before use.
2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage,
or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged
materials or structures as directed.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without
delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and
directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B. Angles -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade [B] [C], structural tubing.
E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy
hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon -steel washers.
1. Finish: Plain
03879803 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2
11/03
0
0
I
I
I
I
I
� I
11
11
11
U
I
B. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Configuration: Straight.
2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy hex carbon steel.
3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.
4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M) hardened carbon steel.
5. Finish: Plain.
2.3 PRIMER
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate -free, nonasphaltic, rust -inhibiting primer.
2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage- Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic
aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for
aapplication and a 30-minute working time.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and
AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic
Design."
1. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly.
2. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting
shop -priming operations.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular
to metal surfaces.
D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing
loads.
E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-
SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of
other work through steel framing members.
1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt
holes or enlarge holes by burning.
2. Base -Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular
to steel surfaces.
3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other
C work.
2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
L 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
03879803 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3
11/03
2.7
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS DLL for welding procedure specifications,
tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding
work.
1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth.
SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches (50 nun).
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications
and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of
joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection.
Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
B. Welded Connections: Shop -welded connections will be visually inspected:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods,
bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with
requirements.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep
structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and
loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent
structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for
Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design."
0
11
�1
I
Q�
11,
III
I
0
u
03879803 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4
11/03 U
I
B. Base Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials,
and roughen surfaces prior to setting base plates. Clean bottom surface of base plates.
1. Set base plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
�+ 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate.
3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge
of base plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base [or bearing] plates
a so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.
Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant
grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before
permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will
be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
n 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.
j I 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
lll���111 temperature when structure is completed and in service.
E. Splice members only where indicated.
F. Remove erection bolts on welded, architecturally exposed structural steel; fill holes with
plug welds; and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
G. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.
H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that
must be enlarged to admit bolts.
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high -strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification
for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications,
tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding
work.
1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"
and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and
Plastic Design" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and
removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
B. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1.
C. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply
with the Contract Documents.
03879803 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 5
11/03
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists and accessories and
abutting structural steel.
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power -
tool cleaning.
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
END OF SECTION 05120
03879803 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 6
11/03
U
SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
a channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other
construction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding
Code - Sheet Steel."
[ 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,
and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
R 2.2 ROOF DECK
A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with
"SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and
with the following:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33
(230), G60 (Z180) zinc coating.
2. Deck Profile: Type NR, narrow rib.
3. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).
4. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0358 inch (0.91 min).
5. Span Condition: Triple span or more.
6. Side Laps: Overlapped.
03879803 STEEL DECK 05310 - 1
11/03
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low -velocity, power -actuated or pneumatically
driven carbon -steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws.
C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel
screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.
D. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of
33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of
same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
0
0
0
0
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 0
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary
in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this
Section.
B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection
limitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch
or contract side -lap interlocks.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting
through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.3 ROOF -DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the
surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than
1-1/2 inches (38 mm) long, and as follows:
1. Weld Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 nun), nominal.
2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two
welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds as indicated.
I
15
u
u
03879803 STEEL DECK 05310 - 2
11/03 U
!^,
B.
Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 18 inches (450
i
mm), and as follows:
1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon -
steel screws.
C.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-
1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:
1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum or butted at Contractor's option.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field welds will be subject to inspection.
B.
Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.
3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
aA.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of
deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written
B.
instructions.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05310
F
E
U
11
03879803 STEEL DECK 05310 - 3
11/03
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART1-GENERAL
r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1J A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
D A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, prime painted.
B. Aluminum ladders.
C. Steel pipe handrails and fittings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete.
B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors in masonry.
C. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural bearing plates, angles and miscellaneous items,
including anchorage.
D. Section 09900 - Painting: Field preparation and paint finish.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Stairs
1. Prefabricated stair assembly to support live load of 1001b/sq ft and a concentrated load
of 300 lb/sq ft with deflection of stringer or landing framing not to exceed 1/180 of span.
B. Railings
1. Railing assembly including wall rails, and attachments to resist loads as defined in
ASTM E985 without damage or permanent set as tested in accordance with ASTM
A935.
C. Ladders
1. Conform to OSHA/ANSI A14.3 for fixed wall ladders.
D. Bollards
1. Prime and paint bollards to match exist.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Prepare shop drawings for stairs under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer
experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
B. Welders' Certificates: Submit certificates certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying
AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
C. Design railing work to resist loading requirements in accordance with ASTM E985.
03879803 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1
11/03
a
1.6 REFERENCES
A. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
B. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic
Coatings on Extruded Aluminum.
C. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels.
D. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
E. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
F. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color
Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
G. AASHTO - Standard Specification for Highway Bridges.
H. ANSI A14.3 - Ladders, Fixed, Safety Requirements.
I. ANSUNAAMM MBG 531 - Metal Bar Grating Manual.
J. ANSUNAAMM MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Graring Manual.
K. ANSI/NAAMM - Metal Stair Manual.
L. ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
M. ASTM A48 - Gray Iron Castings.
N. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless.
O. ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
P. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
Q. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.
R. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
S. ASTM A386 - Zinc -Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
T. ASTM A500 - Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round
and Shapes.
U. ASTM A501 - Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
V. ASTM A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent) Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip,
Commercial Quality.
W. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process.
X. ASTM A666 - Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar.
Y. ASTM A786 - Rolled Steel Floor Plates.
Z. ASTM B26 - Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings.
AA. ASTM B30 - Copper -Base -Alloys in Ingot Form.
BB. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
CC. ASTM B85 - Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings.
DD. ASTM B 177 - Chromium Electroplating on Steel for Engineering Use.
EE. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate.
FF. ASTM B210 - Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes.
GG. ASTM B211 - Aluminum -Alloy Bar, Rod, and Wire.
HH. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and
Tubes.
11. ASTM B241 - Aluminum -Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube.
JJ. ASTM B632 - Aluminum -Alloy Rolled Tread Plate.
KK. ASTM E985 - Performance of Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.
LL. ASTM E985 - Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings.
MM. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
03879803 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2
11/03
0
n_
0
Li
LIB
NN. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code.
00. FS-S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring,
Masonry).
PP. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories.
2. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.
3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net
weld lengths.
4. Indicate adjacent construction and required anchorages to be provided by other sections.
5. Submit manufacturer's standard printed descriptive product literature for manufactured
items.
B. Design Data
1. Submit span and deflection tables for specified grating loads.
2. Submit design calculations for metal stairs.
C. Certification: Submit Welder's certificate verifying AWS qualification within the previous
12 months.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Railing Accessories
1. Julius Blum & Co., Carlstadt, NJ.
2. J.G. Brown, Skokie, IL.
3. Blumcraft, Pittsburgh, PA.
B. Ladders
1. Lapeyre Stair, Inc. New Orleans, LA.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General
1.
Aluminum Sections: ASTM B221.
2.
Steel Sections: ASTM A36.
3.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
4.
Steel Plates: ASTM A283.
5.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40.
6.
Aluminum Pipe: ASTM B241
7.
Fasteners: FS-S-325, type as required by condition indicated.
03879803
11/03
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 3
0
Bolts Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized 1-1
8
components.
9. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
10. Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.
11. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich type.
B. Railings
1. Steel System
a. Rails and Posts: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40, seamless, 1 1/4 inch outside
diameter steel pipe; welded joints.
b. Posts: 1 1/4 inch diameter steel pipe; welded joints.
C. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, escutcheons; cast steel.
d. Floor brackets: At Mechanical Mezzanine.
e. Mounting: Adjustable brackets and flanges, with steel inserts for casting in
concrete and with steel brackets for embedding in masonry.
f. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of
railing.
g. Splice Connectors: Concealed spigots.
C. Aluminum system
1. Rails and Posts: ASTM B22 1-1/2 inch diameter, extruded tubing.
2. Posts: 1 V2 inch diameter extruded tubing.
3. Fittings: Elbows, T-Shapes, escutcheons; machined aluminum.
4. Facia Flanges: Julius Blum #758.
5. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing.
6. Splice Connectors: Concealed spigot machined.
D. Floor Plate
1. ASTM A786, 3/16 inch thick, pattern no. 5.
2. Prime for field painting as Specified in Section 09900.
E. Aluminum Ladder: Equal to Lapeyre 68° alum as indicated on drawings.
F. Pipe Bollards: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40, 8 inch outside diameter, unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Resin Filled/Screen Anchors: Acceptable product, Hilti HIT C-20.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site.
2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
3. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
4. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent fnish surface. Make exposed joints
butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively
located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
6. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
n_
I
0
I
0
I
u
03879803 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4
11/03 U
L�
B. Railings
1. Fabricate with all joints welded and ground smooth.
2. Return rails to within 1/4 inch of wall surface.
3. Finish rail end with terminal caps.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
C. Prime paint items Specified or Scheduled to be field painted as Specified in Section 09900 with
two coats.
D. Galvanized items Specified or Scheduled to be galvanized with 1.25 oz/sq ft zinc coating in
accordance with ASTM A386.
UPART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
(� B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates,
to appropriate sections.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
G. Mechanically cut galvanized finish surfaces. Do not flame cut.
H. Anchor grating by bolting through flange blocks.
I. Anchor handrail brackets to concrete with expansion bolts and to with resin filled screen
anchors.
J. Steel System Railing Posts
1. Set posts in steel sleeves cast into concrete.
2. Interior diameter of sleeve: Minimum 1 inch larger than outside diameter of post.
3. Fill sleeve with non -shrink grout.
K. Aluminum System
1. Set posts in facia flanges.
2. Flanges to have open buttons to allow debris to fall through
03879803 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5
11/03
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. General
1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
B. Gratings
1. Conform to ANSI/NAAMM M 3G 531.
2. Maximum Space Between Adjacent Sections: 1/4 inch.
3. Maximum Variation From Top Surface Plane of Adjacent Sections: 1/16 inch.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically
scheduled.
1. Roof Access Ladder: At locations indicated, prime paint finish.
2. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.
3. Ladder: Aluminum 68" prefabricated as specified in Section 05517.
4. Railing Steel System: 1 '/a" o.d. pipe rail as detailed, prime and paint finish aluminum
system 1 ih" o.d. milled finish rail as detailed, factory finish.
END OF SECTION
03879803 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6
11/03
c
B
I
C
I.,
SECTION 05517
ALTERNATING TREAD STEEL STAIRS
PART1- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general conditions of Contract, for construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
.2 SUMMARY:
A. Provide all material, labor, equipment and services and perform all operations
necessary or required for the work of this section, in accordance with the Drawings
and Specifications, and including fabrication and installation of Alternating Tread
Steel Stairs.
.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Metal Fabrications Section 05500.
B. Painting Section 09900.
.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:
A. Stair Treads: be capable of withstanding a concentrated 1000 pound load without
deformation
B. Handrail: be capable of withstanding a load of 200 pounds applied in any direction
at any point on the rail.
.5 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:
A. Landings, Treads, and Mounting Base: shall be stamped and formed from single
piece material. Stock shapes, hand forming, or welded remnants shall not be
permitted. All stamped parts shall have integrally formed rigidizing bends and shall
be spot welded to stringers of like material.
B. Welds: shall be a minimum of 8 welds per tread, and 12 welds each on the landing
and mounting base. Each weld shall be quality controlled and be capable of
withstanding a minimum of 28001bs. in shear.
C. Pedestrian Surfaces: shall be punched through with upset non-skid openings.
D. Riser Spacing: shall be equally spaced to within 3/16" for adjacent risers and to
within 3/8" for any two non -adjacent risers on a stair.
E. Handrails: shall be contoured for body guidance and underarm support and shall be
attached to the outside stringers and landings by bolting.
F. Landing Reinforcement: shall be with 1/4" steel angle notched and punched and
factory welded to the landing at the points of a handrail attachment.
G. Rubber Foot Divider: shall be affixed to the central portion of the landing. A rubber
bumper strip shall be attached or will be provided for field attaching to the central
stringer.
03879803 ALTERNATING TREAD STEEL STAIRS
11/03
05517 - 1
6 DIMENSIONS:
A. Stair Angle: 68 degrees from horizontal.
B. Vertical Drop: the change in elevation, as shown in the drawings, between the upper
finished floor surface where the top landing will be attached and the lower finished
floor surface where the base of the stair will be secured. Refer to the drawings.
C. General contractor shall be responsible for verification of dimensions to the stair
manufacturer and for providing all necessary hardware and anchoring devices for a
complete installation.
7 SUBMITTALS:
Dimensional Prints: shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER:
A. Lapeyre Stair, Inc.
220 Laitram Lane
Harahan, LA. 70123;
1-(800)-535-7631 or
1-(504)-733-6009.
B. Substitutions: Under provision of Section 01600.
.2 MATERIALS:
A. Carbon Steel:
I. Treads: 13 Gauge 1010/15 HRPO per ASTM A569
2. Landing & Foot Stampings: 11 Gauge 1010/15 per ASTM A569
3. Stringers:
a. 2" x 1 3/4" x 11 Gauge 1010115 per ASTM A569 for 68 degree stairs
under 12 vertical feet.
b. 3" x 1 3/4" x 11 Gauge 1010/15 for 68 degree stairs over 12 vertical
feet.
4. Handrails: 1 1/2" OD x 0.083" 1010/15 CS per ASTM A569 cold drawn,
fully annealed tube per ASTM 513.
B. Stainless Steel:
1. Treads: 13 Gauge 304 SS
2. Landing & Foot Stampings: 11 Gauge 304 SS
3. Stringers:
a. 2" x 1 3/4" x 11 Gauge 304 SS for 68 degree stairs under 12 vertical
feet.
b. 3" x 1 3/4" x 11 Gauge 304 SS for 68 degree stairs over 12 vertical
feet.
4. Handrails: 1 1/2" OD x 0.065" 304 SS cold drawn, fully annealed tube per
ASTM 513.
C. Miscellaneous Material:
1. Rubber Spine: Hollow neoprene
03879803 ALTERNATING TREAD STEEL STAIRS 05517 - 2
11/03
r
I
C
2. Rubber Foot Divider: Solid neoprene
.3 FINISHES:
A. Stainless Steel: Natural finish
.4 FABRICATION:
General: Fabricate alternating tread steel stairs to conform with performance and construction
requirements, and in accordance with approved shop drawings or dimensional prints. Fabricate
and shop- assemble to greatest extent possible.
A. Carbon Steel: gas metal arc welded with treads spot welded to stringers and bolt -on
handrails with included bolts using the specified materials.
B. Stainless Steel: gas tungsten arc welded and/or gas metal arc welded with treads
spot welded to stringers and bolt -on handrails with included bolts using the
specified materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
.1 PREPARATIONS:
A. Coordination: Coordinate start and installation of steel alternating treads with all
other related and adjacent work. Installation shall not start until the construction has
progressed to the point that weather conditions and remaining construction
operations will not damage stair installation.
B. Verification: Verify that dimensions and angle are correct and that substrate is in
proper condition for stair installation. Do not proceed to install until all necessary
corrections have been made.
2 INSTALLATION:
A. If bumper has not been installed at the factory, install the bumper in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions using glue supplied with the stair.
B. Prepare mounting holes.
C. Position stair with top tread at same elevation as upper finished floor or roof
surface.
D. Secure stair with not less than 2 bolts or studs at top and with not less than 2 at
bottom of stair.
E. Touch up any damage to galvanized surfaces using galvanized repair paint in
accordance with ASTM A780.
.3 CLEAN:
Leave work area clean and free of debris.
END OF SECTION
03879803 ALTERNATING TREAD STEEL STAIRS 05517 - 3
11/03
vi. SECTION 06114
WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
{
?
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Constriction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Nailers.
B.
Roof curbs.
C.
Blocking in wall and roof openings.
D.
Wood furring and grounds.
E.
Concealed wood blocking for support of wall cabinets, TV brackets and all other wall mounted
equipment and accessories requiring support or other sections referencing this section.
F.
Telephone and electrical panel back boards.
G.
Preservative treatment of wood.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Concrete openings to receive wood blocking.
B.
Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry openings to receive wood blocking.
C.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of steel fabrications embedded into masonry.
D.
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Door openings to receive wood blocking.
E.
Section 09250 — Gypsum Board: Gypsum board systems.
F.
Section 15710 - Fans: Prefabricated curbs furnished with rooftop mechanical equipment.
1.4 REFERENCES
A.
ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards.
B.
ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard.
1
C.
D.
APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) - Certification.
ASTM A 153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware.
E.
ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
F.
ASTM F568 Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners.
G.
AWPA Cl (American Wood Preservers Association) - All Timber Products - Preservative
Treatment by Pressure Process.
H.
AWPA C9 Plywood, Pressure Treatment.
I.
AWPA C20 (American Wood Preservers Association) - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant
Treatment by Pressure Process.
J.
AWPA C27 Plywood, Fire -Retardant Pressure Treatment.
K.
FS FF-N-105B Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought.
L.
SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules.
M.
WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules.
S
N.
NLGA (National Lumber Rules Authority)
03879803
WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 1
11/03
1.5
O. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association).
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies:
1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
2. Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA - The Engineered
Wood Association.
3. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA.
B. Factory grade stamp each piece of lumber and each wood structural panel. In lieu of grade
stamping, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
C. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved
by ALSC's Board of Review.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit following in accordance with Section 01330:
1. Product Data
a. Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application
instructions.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products conform to specified requirements.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Protect all wood materials from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position,
braced to resist movement.
C. Keep all wood materials covered and dry. Provide air circulation within and around stacks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Nailers and Miscellaneous Framing: Yellow Pine species, No. 2 and better grade, 19 percent
maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat.
C. Plywood: APA C-D, Exposure Durability 1 2; sanded.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Fasteners: ASTM F568 and FS FF-N-105B, Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel.
2. Decking Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times
thickness of sheathing cadmium plated or zinc coated.
0
0
0
P,
9
51
r�
0
u
03879803 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 2
11/03 U
I!,
I
I
3. Anchors:
a. At Metal Studs: Flat or oval head sheet metal screws as required by project
conditions.
b. At Face Brick: Self tapping masonry anchors equal to Hilti Kwik-Con.
C. At Mortar Joints: Expansion type anchors equal to Rawl wedge anchors.
d. At Hollow Masonry: Resin injected screen anchors equal to Hilti HIT C20.
e. At Grout Filled Masonry and Concrete: Expansion bolts or self tapping masonry
anchors as required by project conditions.
f. At Drywall: Equal to Hilti Togglers.
Structural Framing Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.
2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Shop pressure treat and deliver to site ready for installation, wood materials requiring pressure
impregnated preservatives.
B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment Cl using waterborne preservative
with 0.25 percent retainage.
C. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious
materials, roofing and related metal flashings and other exterior locations.
D. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure
site -sawn ends are similarly treated.
E. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious
materials, roofing and related metal flashings and all other exterior locations.
B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Treat site -sawn ends.
D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position.
B. Place horizontal members, crown side up.
C. Space framing and furring 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
D. Curbs
1. Curb all roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided.
2. Form corners by lapping side members alternatively.
3. Construct curb members of single pieces.
4. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings.
E. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing material where
required. Size the back board by 12 inches beyond size of electrical panel.
END OF SECTION
E
03879803 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 3
f 11/03
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General
Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Batt insulation in exterior wall construction.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Rigid insulation at roof system.
B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Vapor barrier and acoustical sealant. Supporting
construction
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C208 - Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board.
B. ASTM C240 - Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block.
C. ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
D. ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
E. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation Board.
F. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and
Manufactured Housing.
G. ASTM C1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
H. ASTM D2842 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
I. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
J. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building
Partitions.
K. ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
L. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
M. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class.
N. NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
O. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Insulation k Values
1. k values indicated are based on 75 deg. F.
2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with
RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure.
03879803 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1
11/03
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Uniform Building Code - 1997 for combustibility and smoke development
requirements for materials as follows:
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
B. Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate
1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful
installation.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Flexible Insulation
1. Owens/Coming Corporation
2. CertainTeed
3. Manville Corp.
4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600
B. Accessories
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Flexible Thermal Insulation
1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type II, glass fiber batt.
2. Thermal Resistance: R 19
3. Size: To fit framing spacing
4. Facing: Unfaced.
03879803 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2
11/03
C
4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.
B. Verify insulation is dry.
C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, materials or substances
that may impede adhesive bond.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions.
2. Install insulation without gaps or voids.
3. Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and
around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items
passing through partitions.
4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.
B. Flexible Thermal Insulation
1. Place between and tight to framing members.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. Thermal Insulation
1. Walls: Install in stud space from floor to bottom of ceiling deck above in all exterior
walls
END OF SECTION
03879803 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3
11/03
r"
U
r
r
SECTION 07550
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
PART 1-GENERAL
A. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General
Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Modified bitumen membrane roofing with protective coating.
B. Roof insulation.
C. Base flashings.
D. Cant strips.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Roof deck substrate.
B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood nailers and curbs.
C. Section 07600 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal flashings associated with roof
system.
D. Section 07900 — Joint Sealers: Joint sealers.
E. Division 15 and 16 Sections: Roof mounted equipment and penetrations.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C177 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
Guarded Hot Plate.
B. ASTM C208 - Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber), Structural and Decorative.
C. ASTM C518 - Test Method for Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the
Heat Flow Meter.
D. ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
E. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation Board.
F. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board.
G. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board.
H. ASTM C 10 13 - Membrane Faced Rigid Cellular Polyurethane Roof Insulation.
1. ASTM C1177 - Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.
J. ASTM C1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
K. ASTM D41 - Primer, Asphalt, Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.
L. ASTM D312 - Asphalt Used in Roofing.
M. ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for
Roofing.
N. ASTM D1863 - Mineral Aggregates Used on Built-up Roofs.
O. ASTM D2178 - Asphalt, Glass Felt, Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
P. ASTM D2824 - Aluminum -Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coatings.
Q. ASTM D3747 - Emulsified Asphalt Adhesive for Adhering Roof Insulation.
R. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement - Asbestos Free.
S. ASTM D4601 - Asphalt -Coated Glass -Fiber Base Sheet Used In Roofing.
03879803 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07550 - 1
11/03
T. ASTM D4897 - Asphalt -Coated Glass -Fiber Venting Base Sheet Used in Roofing.
U. ASTM D5147 — Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Material.
V. ASTM D6164 — Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using
Polyester Reinforcements.
W. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
X. FM — Loss Prevention Data
Y. PIMA —Technical Bulletin 100
Z. ULI - Fire Hazard Classifications.
AA. ULI - Roof Assembly Classification
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. New Roof Areas: New Roofing Over New Insulation
1. General: Two ply glass felts with integral granular surfaced SBS modified bitumen cap
sheet with insulation installed to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally
induced movement, and exposure to weather, without failure within the guaranteed time
period.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate roof penetrations, crickets, layout of seams, direction of laps, base, counter
flashing and penetration flashing details.
2. Tapered insulation manufacturer's drawings indicating piece marks, filler pieces and
slopes.
C. Product Data:
1. Provide for anchoring devices, membrane materials, base flashing materials, insulation,
membrane wall flashing and bituminous materials.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required for seaming the
membrane.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, supplementary instructions
ambient temperatures and wind velocity during application, and bitumen temperature at kettle
and at application point.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Phased construction is not acceptable.
C. Single Source
1. Provide primary products, including but not limited to, base sheet, ply sheets ,
membrane, bitumen and membrane flashings from a single manufacturer.
2. Provide secondary products as recommended by manufacturer of primary products for
use with roofing system specified.
D. Insulation k Values
1. k values indicated are based on 75 deg F (24 deg) C at 150 days.
2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with PIMA
Technical Bulletin 100 Conditioning Procedure.
03879803 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07550 - 2
11/03 0
U.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
�., A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with three years
documented experience and approved by membrane system manufacturer.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable UBC-1997 for roof assembly fire hazard requirements.
B. UL Listing: Provide built-up asphalt roofing system and component materials that have been
tested for application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(ULI) for Class A external fire exposure.
n 1. Provide roof -covering materials bearing ULI classification marking on bundle, package,
or container indicating that materials have been produced under ULI's Classification and
Follow-up Service.
C. Wind Uplift: Provide a system with wind uplift resistance complying with FM Roof Assembly
Classification, Class 1 Construction, I90 requirements in accordance with FM Construction
Bulletin 1-28. A.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.
C.
Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
D.
Stand roll materials on end.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
�l
A.
Do not apply roofing system during inclement weather nor when ambient temperature is below
40 degrees F.
B.
Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface.
C.
Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
.
weatherproofed during same day.
1.12 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
Coordinate the work with installing associated metal flashings as the work of this section
proceeds.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard ten year NDL (no dollar limit)
warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Roofing Installer's Warranty: Submit on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by
Installer, covering Work of this Section, including membrane roofing, sheet flashing, roof
insulation, fasteners, and vapor retarders, if any, for a warranty period of 2 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
03879803 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07550 - 3
11/03
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Roofing Membrane
1.
Manville Roofing Systems; Denver, CO.
2.
Firestone Building Products Co.; Carmel, IN.
3.
GAF Building Materials Corp.; Wayne, NJ.
4.
Siplast, Inc.; Irving, TX.
B. Polyisocyanurate Insulation
1.
Apache Products Co.; Dallas, TX.
2.
Atlas Roofing Corp.; Atlanta, GA.
3.
Celotex Corp.; Tampa, FL
4.
RMAX, Inc.; Dallas, TX.
5.
Johns Manville Corp.; Denver, CO.
6.
Firestone Building Products Co.; Carmel, IN.
7.
GAF Building Materials Corp.; Wayne, NJ.
C. Perlite
Insulation
1.
GAF Building Materials Corp.; Wayne, NJ.
2.
Johns Manville Corp.; Denver, CO.
3.
Celotex Corp.; Tampa, FL
D. Substitutions:
In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Modified Bitumen Base Sheet: SBS modified asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, with glass
fiber reinforced mat, dusted with fine granular surfacing and averaging or exceeding 58 lb/100
sq. ft. minimum.
B. Ply Sheet: ASTM D2178, Type IV, asphalt coated fiberglass mat.
C. Insulation
1. Type A Insulation: ASTM C1289, Polyisocyanurate rigid board, Type II, both faces
finished with asphaltic coated glass mat, constant thickness and tapered 1/4 inch per foot
with the following characteristics:
a. Board Density 2.0 lb/cu ft.
b. Board Size 48x96 inch.
C. Board Thickness Minimum 1 inch for constant thickness and tapered
insulation directly on top of metal roof deck.
d. Thermal Conductivity Conditioned k factor of 0.17 as determined by ASTM
C518.
e. Board Edges Square
2. Type B Insulation: ASTM C728, Type 2, expanded perlite mineral aggregate board with
the following characteristics:
a. Board Density 10.0 lb/cu ft. minimum
b. Board Size 48x96 inch.
C. Board Thickness Minimum 1/2 inch.
d. Thermal Conductivity k factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C177.
e. Board Edges Square
3. Tapered Insulation: Provide tapered insulation with a minimum slope of 1/4 inch per
foot with a minimum thickness of 2 inch.
03879803 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07550 - 4
11/03 0
14
f
r
D. Membrane: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) type reinforced
with non -woven polyester fabric white ceramic granule surfaced; with minimum characteristics
complying with ASTM D5147 as follows:
1. Thickness: 160 mils
2. Average Weight: 0.9 lb/sq ft
3. Sheet Width: 39.4 inches
4. Tensile Strength
a. At 0 deg. F: 125 lbs/in (MD); 87 lbs/in (CD).
5. Elongation to Break
a. At 0 deg. F: 45 percent (MD); 47 percent (CD).
6. Tear Strength: 127 lbf (MD); 101 lbf (CD).
7. Dimensional Stability: Less than 0.8 percent.
8. Low Temperature Flexibility: Less than 15 deg. F.
E. Asphalt Bitumen
F. Asphalt Bitumen
1. Slopes less than'/s inch per foot: ASTM D312, Type III.
G. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.
H. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586 Type I.
I. Insulation Adhesive: ASTM D3747, Type I.
J. Membrane Coating: Fibrated aluminum type as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
K. Flashings
1. Flexible Base Flashings: Manufacturer's standard SBS type conforming to the same
requirements as the membrane.
L. Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 07600.
M. Accessories
1. Fiber Cant: Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite, preformed to 45 degree
angle, 4 inch high (5 5/8 inch face).
2. Insulation Fasteners: Factory coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying
with corrosion resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for fastening roofing
insulation to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
3. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit
application.
4. Base Sheet Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by system
manufacturer; length required for thickness of material with metal washers.
5. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify existing substrate and deck insulation is supported and secured.
C. Verify existing substrate and deck insulation is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or
projections.
D. Verify existing substrate and deck insulation surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
E. Verify flutes of metal deck are clean and dry.
03879803 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07550 - 5
11/03
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Insulation
1. General
a.
Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through
roof.
b.
Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing.
C.
Apply no more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.
d.
Install tapered insulation in accordance with approved tapered insulation shop
drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
e.
Tape joints of Type D insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's
instructions.
f.
Minimum Total Insulation Thickness: As required to achieve a minimum
insulation R value of 20 roof slope indicated.
2. Over
Metal Decking
a.
Lay base layer of constant thickness A.
b.
Lay second layer of constant thickness A insulation with all joints staggered
minimum of 6 inches from first layer.
C.
Over base and second layer, lay top layer of Type B insulation with all joints
staggered minimum of 6 inches from layer below.
d.
In full mopping of hot bitumen, install Type (at Contractor's option with
membrane manufacturer's approval) A tapered insulation crickets.
e.
In full mopping of hot bitumen, install constant thickness top layer of either (at
Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval) Type B or Type C
insulation with all joints staggered from joints in first layer of insulation by a
minimum of 6 inches.
f.
At all cricket edges, install tapered edge strips to transition from cricket to main
roof area with no vertical dimension at the edge of the cricket exceeding 1/8 inch.
B. Base Sheet
1. Roof
Slopes Less Than 1/2 Inch
a.
In full mopping of hot bitumen, install SBS base sheet over Type B insulation.
C. Membrane Application
1. General
a.
Weather lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof.
b.
Lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof.
C.
Apply membrane smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, or tears.
d.
Ensure full bond of membrane to substrate.
e.
Extend membrane up cant strips and minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces.
f.
Mop and seal membrane around roof protrusions and penetrations.
g.
Provide waterproof cut-off to membrane at end of day's operation. Remove cut-off
before resuming roofing.
2. Roof
Slopes Less Than 1/2 Inch
a.
Over SBS base sheet, install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Membrane Flashings and Accessories
1. General
a.
Secure to substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
b.
Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating or protruding through the
membrane.
03879803
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07550 - 6
U,
11/03
141
w
i
t
s
I
2. Base Flashings
a. Apply flexible sheet base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements.
3. Membrane Parapet Flashing
a. Masonry Parapets
1) Prime masonry substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
2) Extend down front face of parapet no further than can be covered by
coping flashing.
E. Accessories
1. Install prefabricated roofing expansion joints to isolate roof into areas as indicated.
F. Surfacing
1. Apply granular surfacing, matching membrane surfacing, as recommended by
manufacturer to completely cover bitumen bleed -out at all lap joints in membrane.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Provide accurate thermometers at kettle and at luggers near point of application.
C. Correct identified defects or irregularities.
D. Require site attendance of roofing materials manufacturer's representative during installation of
work.
3.4 CLEANING
A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of
surfaces for cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces.
3.6 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS (company name)
Of (mailing
address), herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work
("work") on the following project:
1. Owner:
2. Address:
3. Building Name/Type:
4. Address:
5. Area of Work:
6. Acceptance Date:
7. Warranty Period:
8. Expiration Date:
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted, indirectly as a subcontractor, to warrant
said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated
Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be
03879803 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07550 - 7
11/03
made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and
defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the
building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. lightning;
b. hail;
C. peak gust wind speed exceeding (wind speed) mph;
d. fire;
e. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
f. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, vents, equipment supports, and
other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;
g. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and
h. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by
Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of the foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null
and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and
expense thereof has been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.
3. The Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is
not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents, resulting from
leaks or faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than
Roofing Installer, except for emergency repairs, including cutting, patching, and
maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning
of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations,
but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner
engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null
and void, unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner
in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage
or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this
Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray -cooled surface, flooded
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects
work covered by this Warranty.
6. The Owner shall notify Roofing Installer within 30 days of observed, known, or
suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for
Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or
deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work
and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources
lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall
not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract
was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of
(month) of 20 (year).
03879803 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07550 - 8
11/03
1. Authorized Signature:
1
2. Name:
3. Title:
END OF SECTION
03879803 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING 07550 - 9
11/03
SECTION 07600
SHEET METAL
aPART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Coping, flashings.
B.
Sill and lintel flashings.
C.
Thru-wall scupper and conductor head.
D.
Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks.
E.
Gutters and downspouts.
F.
Concrete splash blocks.
Q1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 04200 - Unit Masonry:
1
B.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing:
+
C.
Section 07550 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Roofing system.
D.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
E.
Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting.
F.
Section 10210 - Metal Wall Louvers: Sill flashings associated with louvers.
G.
Division 15 and 16 Sections: Roof mounted equipment and penetrating.
s
1.4 REFERENCES
[ A. AA DAF - 45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
iB. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic
Coatings on Extruded Aluminum.
C. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels.
D. AAMA 611 - Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum.
E. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated by the
' Hot -Dip Process.
u F. ATM A755/A755M - Steel Sheet, Metallic coated by the Hot -Dip Process and Prepainted by
the Coil -Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products.
G. ASTM A792 - Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot -Dip Process.
H. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
I. ASTM B 101 - Lead -Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.
J. ASTM B209/B209M - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate.
K. ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.
03879803 SHEET METAL 07600 - 1
11/03
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
L. ASTM B486 - Paste Solder.
M. ASTM B749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products.
N. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board.
O. ASTM D226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
P. ASTM D2178 - Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
Q. ASTM D4397 - Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural
Applications.
R. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free.
S. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Copper in Architecture - Handbook.
T. CDA (Copper Development Association) - Contemporary Copper, A Handbook of Sheet
Copper Fundamentals, Design, Details and Specifications.
U. FS TT-C-494 - Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant.
V. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual.
W. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual - Fifth Edition with Addendum no. 1.
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profiles, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured components metal types, finishes, and
characteristics.
D. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 inches long illustrating typical seam, material and finish.
E. Submit two samples 6x6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements.
B. Conform to SMACNA Manual for sizing components for rainfall intensity determined by a
storm occurrence of 1 in 10 years.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to 1997 UBC code for size and method of rain water discharge.
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years
documented experience.
PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section
01039.
ll
03879803 SHEET METAL 07600 - 2
11/03
L
U
L
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to
provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate with the work of Section 04200 for installing flashing.
C. Coordinate with the work of Section 06114 for installing nailers.
D. Coordinate the work with downspout discharge pipe inlet.
E. Coordinate with the work under Sections 15000 and 16000 for roof mounted equipment and
penetration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Preformed Metal and Accessories
1. Cheney Flashing Co.;
2. Keystone Flashing Co;.
3. Metal -Era Inc; Waukesha, WI.
B. Prefinished Metal
1. AEP/Span Metals Corp., Dallas, Texas
2. Alumax Corp., Mesquite, Texas
3. MBCI - Grand Prairie, Texas
4. Peterson Aluminum — Elk Grove Village,1L.
C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Pre -Finished Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209/B209M, manufacturer's standard alloy and temper
for specified finish; 0.032 inch thick; mill finish shop pre -coated with modified silicone.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers.
B. Primer: Zinc molybate type.
C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybate alkyd. Bituminous type as specified in Section 09900.
D. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900.
E. Bedding Compound: Rubber -asphalt type.
F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
G. Gutter and Downspout Anchorage Devices: SMACNA requirements of same material as gutter
and downspout.
H. Gutter Supports: Brackets.
03879803 SHEET METAL 07600 - 3
11/03
I. Downspout Supports: Brackets of same material as gutter and downspout.
J. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered.
****** OR ******
K. Paste Solder: ASTM B486; type suitable for application and material being soldered.
L. Touch-up Paint: To match factory finish.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28
days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment complying with requirements of section 03300 -
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE.
B. Downspout Boots: Cast iron match exterior.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate sheet metal items in accordance with SMACNA details indicated in paragraph
SCHEDULE at the end of this section unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
3. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, interlockable with sheet.
4. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
5. Fabricate with required connection pieces.
6. Hem exposed edges on underside 6 inch; miter and seam comers.
7. Form material with flat lock seams.
8. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal
with sealant.
9. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form
drip.
B. Fabricate all exposed sheet metal from pre -finished aluminum sheet.
C. Sealant Pans
1. ASTM A653, galvanized steel, formed with minimum 2 inch horizontal distance from
penetrating item, with 3 inch upstand, and 4 inch (100 nun) flanges.
2. Form top edge with continuous 45 degree backbend, minimum 1/4 inch long, facing
toward inside of pan.
D. Downspouts
1. Fabricate downspouts to profile matching existing.
2. Form metal and seal watertight.
3. Downspout Size: match existing.
4. Accessories: Profile to suit downspouts.
E. Coping Flashings
1. Fabricate cap flashing to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section.
2. Fabricate cap flashings with integral slope tapering 1 inch from front to back unless
otherwise required by slope of tapered insulation filler or otherwise indicated on
drawings.
3. Provide minimum 4 inch vertical leg on front side with continuous cleat.
4. Provide minimum 4 inch vertical leg on back side.
5. Fabricate inside and outside corners with continuously factory welded mechanically
seamed and sealed joints. Provide finish to match remainder of cap flashing.
I
I
I �
I
I
LIB
u
03879803 SHEET METAL 07600 - 4
11/03 U
2.6 FINISH
i A. Field painting of expose metal: As specified in section 09900 - PAINTING.
B. Prefinished Metal: Fluoropolymer coating produced with Kynar-500 resin complying with the
following:
1. Salt Spray Test
a. Withstand salt spray test for a minimum of 1000 hours in accordance with ASTM
B 117, including scribe requirement in test.
b. Receive a rating of 10, no blistering, as determined by ASTM D 714 immediately
upon removal of panel from test, and rating of 7, 1/16-inch failure at scribe, as
determined by ASTM D 1654.
2. Formability Test: No evidence of fracturing to naked eye when subjected to a 180-degree
bend over a 3/8-inch diameter mandrel in accordance with ASTM D 522.
3. 2000 Hour Accelerated Weathering Requirements
a. Test Conformance: ASTM G 23 using a Type D apparatus.
b. No cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of protective coating, or
corrosion of base metal.
C. Loss of Adhesion: Protective coating that can be readily removed from base metal
with tape in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Test Method B.
a d. Chalking: Not greater than No. 8 rating in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test
procedures.
e. Color Change: Maximum 2 NBS units in accordance with ASTM D 4214 and
ASTM D 2244 test procedures.
4 j 4. Humidity Test: No signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion when scored panel
subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000 hours.
5. Impact Resistance: Withstand direct and reverse impact in accordance with ASTM D
2794 equal to 1.5 times metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch -pounds, with no loss
of adhesion.
6. Abrasion Resistance Test: Withstand a minimum of 80 liters of sand before appearance
of base metal when subjected to falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D 968.
7. Pollution Resistance: No visual effects when immersion tested in a 10 percent
hydrochloric acid solution for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D 1308.
a 8. Color
a. To match existing.
C. Exposed Fasteners: Factory finished to match color of item being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
in place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
L
03879803 SHEET METAL 07600 - 5
11/03
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to details on drawings and details included in the SMACNA manual.
B. Fill back of cap flashing with plastic roofing cement.
C. Backbed lap joints of flashings in horizontal position.
D. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners.
E. Termination Bars
1. Install in longest practical lengths.
2. Seal top of bar to supporting construction with sealant as specified in Section 07900
- JOINT SEALERS.
F. Coping Flashing
1. Install with front edge engaged in continuous cleat.
2. Fasten back edge to parapet substrate with hex head washered fasteners.
G. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
H. Fit flashings tight in place.
I. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.
J. Seal metal joints watertight.
****** OR ******
K. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with
neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
L. Secure downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
M. Connect downspouts to downspout boots system. Seal connection watertight.
N. Set splash pans under downspouts draining from a higher to lower roof area.
O. Set concrete splash blocks under all downspouts.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01410.
B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with
specified requirements.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Metal Fabrications
ITEM SMACNA PLATE & FIGURE GAGE
1. Conductor Head 1-25 C 24
2. Scupper 1-27A 24
3. Downspouts
Downspout 1-32 B, Smooth surface 24
a. Hangers 1-35H Similar 24
4. Pipe Flashing 4-14A 24
5. Vent Pipe Flashing 4-14B 2.5# lead
03879803 SHEET METAL 07600 - 6
11/03 Id
6. Coping Flashing
a. Form 34A 24
b. Anchorage 3-7A 24
C. Joint Table 3-1, Type J2
END OF SECTION
03879803
11/03
SHEET METAL
07600 - 7
f,
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
FPART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B. Sealant and backing.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07410 - Preformed Roof Panels: Sealants used in conjunction with paneling.
B. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing - Roofing system.
C. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Sealants used in conjunction with metal fleshings.
D. Section 08110 — Steel Doors and Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with steel frames.
E. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Gaskets used in conjunction with
framing and glazing methods.
F. Section 08700 — Hardware: Sealants used in conjunction with hardware.
G. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods.
H. Section 08311 - Sliding Glass Doors: Gaskets used in conjunction with framing and glazing
methods.
I. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with sound rated
partitions.
J. Section 09300 - Tile: Sealants used in conjunction with tile.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AAMA 803.3 - Voluntary Specification for Narrow -Joint Seam Sealer.
B. AAMA 808.3 - Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound
C. ASTM C719 - Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement.
D. ASTM C792 - Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking, and Chalking of Elastomeric
Sealants.
E. ASTM C570 - Oil and Resin - Base Caulking Compound for Building Construction.
F. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.
G. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
H. ASTM C1311 - Solvent Release Sealants.
I. ASTM C1193 - Use of Joint Sealants.
J. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
K. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers
(Closed -Cell Foam).
03879803 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1
i 11/03
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
limitations and color availability.
2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions.
B. Samples
1. Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of
strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed
to view.
C. Mockup
1. Construct field sample panel illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface.
2. Locate where directed.
3. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work.
D. Certificates
1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements
and are suitable for use indicated.
2. Joint sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers, and cleaners required for
sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic
compounds.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section
with minimum ten years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five
years documented experience.
C. Conform to ASTM C1193 requirements for materials and installation.
1. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product
required.
2. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test sealant adhesion
to joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each type of elastomeric and non-elastomeric sealant joint
substrate indicated.
3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be
erected.
4. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below:
a. Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths using same materials and methods for
joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work.
Allow sealants to cure fully before testing.
b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to other followed by 2 vertical
cuts approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top
of 2-inch cuts. Place mark 1 inch from top of 2-inch piece.
11
I
I
I
0
0
ill
u
03879803 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2
11/03 U
C
I
0
C. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant just above 1-inch mark; pull firmly
down at a 90-degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant.
Pull sealant out of joint to distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for
testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum
movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds.
5. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled -out portion, failed to adhere to
joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of
product and joint substrate.
6. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing,
in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered
satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.
E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants
as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects as well as qualities of materials and execution:
1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are
indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section.
F. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot
life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements
1. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
2. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet.
3. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during
and after installation.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight
and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
03879803
11/03
JOINT SEALERS
07900 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Elastomeric Sealants
1. General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or
polysulfide polymer based elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920.
2. Types
a. S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25.
b. S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25.
C. S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25.
d. S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
B. Latex Sealants
1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex
sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on
interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage
change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or
cohesively.
2. Types
a. S-5; Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant
1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint
movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression
for a total of 10 percent.
2) Conformance: ASTM C 834
b. S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant
1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint
movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression
for a total of 50 percent.
2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per
ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920.
3) Special Properties: Fungus and mildew resistant.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
C. Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant
1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic
terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3, with capability to withstand
15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and
compression) at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for
Project without failing cohesively when tested for adhesion and cohesion per
ASTM C 719.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
D. Type S-8; Butyl Sealant
1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable,
solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of
75 percent solids and tack -free time of 24 hours or less, complying with ASTM C 1311.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
0
III
I
I
I
ire
0
0
03879803 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4
11/03 U
I
ire
L
E. Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant
1. General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic rubber
sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying with
AAMA 803.3
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section.
F. Accessories
1. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant
manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
3. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized
30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
5. Masking Tape: Non -staining, non -absorbing type as recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on
Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
E. Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/2 the joint width.
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E. Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather for
extended period of time.
F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
H. Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions.
03879803 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5
11/03
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods
and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in
which joints occur.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
C. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired areas are
indistinguishable from original work.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Joints
1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2.
2. Horizontal traffic joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2.
3. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2,
S-3 or S4.
4. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3 or S4.
5. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations:
Sealant types S-3 or S4.
6. Threshold Bedding: Sealant type: S-8.
7. Joints in Masonry Flashing: Sealant Type S-9.
8. Joints in Sheet Metal Flashing: Sealant Type S-9.
B. Interior Joints
1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, or S-2.
2. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2,
S-3, or S4.
3. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3, S-4.
4. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations:
Sealant types S-3, S-4 or S-6.
5. Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types S-3, S-4 S-5, S-6 or
S-7.
6. Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures, joints between ceramic tile and
joints between ceramic tile and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6.
7. Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and walls:
Sealant type S-7.
END OF SECTION
I
0
0
I
0
0
03879803 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 6
11/03 U
0
0
0
0
SECTION 08000
DOOR SCHEDULE
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1-General Requirements apply to work of this section
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Door Schedule
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames
B. Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors
C. Section 08220 FRP Doors and fiberglass resin transfer milded door frames.
D. Section 08700 Hardware
E. Section 09900 Painting
F. Section 09915 Color and Finish Schedule
1.4 GENERAL
A. This section covers only the doors, frames and hardware as they relate to this project.
Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other appropriate
section of the specifications or in the drawings. Refer to the drawings for locations
required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR SCHEDULE
A. The DOOR SCHEDULE lists door sizes, types, construction, frame sizes, types, detail
locations on drawings, hardware sets and other remarks.
2.2 DOORS
A. Door types, references by letter designation in the DOOR SCHEDULE, are located in the
drawing set.
2.3 REMARKS
A. Door schedule remarks.
1. Glazing
a. G2 = 1/4" Tempered Clear
03879803 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 1
11/03
2. Label (Fire Resistive Rating)
a. L1 = 20 minute
3. Miscellaneous
a. M 1 = Field verify existing wall thickness prior to submitting door frames size.
b. Door frames to be prepared for electronic hardware; coordinate with security
installer.
C. M3 = Vision light frame to have epoxy paint, reference Color Schedule.
d. M4 = Diamond mesh reinforced door.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Door Schedule
1. See Attached.
END OF SECTION
03879803 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 2
11/03
I
41
cc
aa)
Q
0
N
•2 a
E
co
a�
x
N_
a) co
E
ILL w
C
O
A
N
N
N
N
N N
N
0001
N
���J�JJJJJJJ
N
T
r
r
r
r
r
T
T
T
r
LO
Q
Q
Q
Q
Q
U
OD
mQ
cocna7a7cncncocncocna7cncncncncncnU)cncna7aocna7
r
Oc000000000000000000SLO
r
r
T
T T
T
T
T
r
T
T
r
r
r
T
T
r
r
T
r
r
oo0
T
r
LO
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
LO
Ln
LO
LO to
LO
S
w
LO
LO
LO
LO
�M�����a���MrT����AAaAAA
0000o
aaaa`�aaoaaaaooc�o
T
0000000000
T
r
T
T r
r
T
T
T
r
0
T
0
T
0
T
0
r
0
T
0
T
0
T
0
r
0
T
0
T
0
r
0
r
0
T
0
LO
a
LO
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
LOLO
W,
LO
L
�M�Rco
com0
aaaa
aoaaaaooco�aaUmaco
rrrrcor-COr�rrrrrr-001--Wj�cq�rrM�r>
towww—ww
o
W
OW
W
O
I-wwcn
w
r
w
LL
LL
LL
w
w LL
w
LL
w
w
LL
ma:
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
LL
aaCLCL
aaaLo_aawwaaan.n.aaaaa
x
2
2
x
2
2 x
x
2
x
2
x
LL
LL
x
x
2
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
LL
LL
LL LL
LL
LL
cL
LL
LL
U-
LL
LL
LL
LL
lL
LL
LL
LL
LL
F�o.�������wwn.n.a���F�aa
UU�UUUUUUUmm���UNuUI
NOLL
cn2cncncncncncnwLLLLx2xcACAcnrnmx2
a
am
am
a a
ammmcommcommcocommm
Ica
m
T
x
T
x
r
x
T
x
T
x
T T
x x
T
x
T
x
r
x
T
x
r
x
T
x
T
x
r
x
T
x
T
x
T
x
T
x
r
x
r
x
T
x
T
x
T
x
9900000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
r
r
I
r
1
r
1
r
I 1
r r.
I
r
I
r
I
r
1
0
I
0
1
0
1
r
I
r
1
r
I
r
1
r
1
r
1
r
x
I
r
x
I
r
x
1
r
x
1
r
x
x
o0ocooroc
x
x
x
x
x X
x
waococ000000000
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
000
6chchc7c'hc7Mc�MM
NMC6MMM6Ch
616166/6
•
TNc7
O
O
O
O
wwra000OOTaNchetcAcOrrnc9Or
O
O
O O
O
r
r
r
r
r
T
T
r
T
T
r
T
N
c9
ri
T
T
T
T
r
T
T
T
r r
T
T
T
T
T
T
r
T
r
T
T
T
T
r
r�
h'
0 PART1-GENERAL
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1- General Requirements apply
to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Standard non -rated and fire rated steel doors and frames.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames.
B. Section 08210 - Flush Wood Doors.
C. Section 08700 - Hardware.
D. Section 08800 - Glazing.
E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall: Prepared openings.
F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors and frames; bituminous coating of frames in
contact with cementitious materials.
G. Section 16000: Electrical connection to activate door.
1.4 REFERENCES
' A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted
Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
C. ANSI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
Doors, Frames, Frame Anchors and Hardware Reinforcings.
D. ANSI- A250.7 - Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement --Application).
E. ANSI A250.8/SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & Frames.
F. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
Steel Doors and Frames.
G. ASTM A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate,
Sheet and Strip.
H. ASTM A366 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality.
I. ASTM A568 — Carbon and High -Strength Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and Cold -Rolled, General
Requirements.
J. ASTM A569 — Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip
Commercial Quality.
K. ASTM A591 — Steel, Sheet, Electrolytic, Zinc -Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications.
f L. ASTM A620 — Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Drawing Quality, Special Killed.
i.. M. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process.
03879803 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1
11/03
0
N. ASTM A366 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality.
O. ASTM A924 — Steel Sheet, Metallic -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process.
P. SDI-112 — Zinc -Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
Q. SDI-113 — Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal Transmittance of Steel
Door and Frame Assemblies.
R. SDI-117 — Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
S. SDI-128 — Guidelines for Acoustical Performance Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
T. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
U. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
V. TAS — Texas Accessibility Standards, 1994.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements
1. Conform to requirements of 36 CFR Part 1191.
2. Conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for fire rated class indicated
3. Conform to requirements of TAS.
B. Manufacturer
1. Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Indicate each type door and frame elevation, reinforcements, hardware locations, metal
types and gauges, fire rating and finish. Use same numbering system as indicated on
drawings.
2. Indicate frame configuration, anchor spacings and anchor types.
3. Indicate door core construction and door head and door sill closure method.
4. Indicate cut outs for glazing, glazing stop and glazing frame profiles and methods of
attachment.
5. Manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions.
B. Certificates
1. Manufacturer's Certificate certifying that Products and fabrications meet or exceed
specified requirements.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Provide frames with manufacturer's standard sill spreader bar for all welded units.
B. Protect doors and frames with manufacturer's standard resilient packaging.
C. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's five year warranty.
0
a
I
I �
0
0
I
In
In
u
03879803 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2
11/03 U
r
b_1
E
U
I
U
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Interior Doors, Frames
1. Stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366 and ASTM A568.
B. Exterior Doors, Frames
1. Stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366 or A620 and ASTM A568.
C. Protective Coatings
1. Bituminous Coating: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting.
2. Primer: Manufacturer's standard oven dried, gray alkyd enamel primer, complying with
requirements of ANSI A250.10.
D. Accessories
1. Jamb Anchors
a. Masonry Construction: T =strap type, corrugated and galvanized.
b. Steel Stud Construction: Z type, same gage and material as frame.
2. Silencers: As specified in Section 08700 - Hardware.
3. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel, square profile, mitered comers; prepared for countersunk
style flat head sheet metal screws.
4. Door Glazing Frames: Rolled steel, beveled profile, mitered comers; prepared for
countersunk style thru-bolts at fire rated doors. and flat head sheet metal screws at non -
fire rated doors.
a. Acceptable Product: JAnemostat Model no. IFGS-75-SCI IFGS-MS ISL-IS®
National Guard Products Model no. IL-VGLF-MDI IL-VGLF-Nff �C,-VGLF-
W D1 IL-V GLF-OGI 1L-V GLF-SF®.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate doors and frames to sizes and profiles indicated and in conformance with,
except as otherwise s ecified, [ANSI A250.31 ANSI A250.4, ANSI A250.8, f ANSI
A250.10J ISDI-112,1ISDI-113,UandlSDI-1281 Ifor non -rated assemblies and NFPA
80 and NFPA 252 for rated assemblies.
2. Fabricate doors and frames with hardware reinforcements in accordance with Table 4 of
ANSI A250.8. Weld all hardware reinforcement plates in place.
3. Provide mortar guard boxes for frames set in masonry.
4. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit.
5. Provide face welded frames with temporary steel spreader bars.
B. Doors
1. Exterior doors: Level 2, Model 2.
2. Interior doors: Level 2, Model 2, STC 38 where scheduled.
3. Close top edge of doors with flush steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight.
4. Close bottom edge of doors with inverted steel channel closure.
5. Door Edges: Beveled.
6. Core Construction, Exterior Doors
a. Vertical steel stiffeners formed from not less than 6 inches (150 nun) gage steel,
spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) apart, and securely attached to face
sheets by spot welds, not more than 6 inches (150 mm) on center.
b. Fill spaces between stiffeners full height of door with a minimum 0.6 pound
density mineral fiber insulation.
03879803 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3
11/03
Thermal Value: Total insulation R-Value of 2.4 (RSI value of 0.7), measured in
accordance with ASTM C236.
7. Core Construction, Interior Doors
a. Vertical steel stiffeners formed from not less than 20 gage (0.9 mm) steel, spaced
not more than 6 inches (150 mm) apart, and securely attached to face sheets by
spot welds, not more than 6 inches (150 mm) on center.
*****OR*****
8. Core Construction, Fire Rated Interior Doors
a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 252.
9. Core Construction, Sound Rated Doors
a. Conform to requirements of ASTM E413 with an STC of 32.
C. Frames
1. Exterior Frames: Level 3,14 gage (1.3 mm) (1.9 mm) gage (1.9 mm) (2.7 mm).
2. Interior Frames: Level gage (1.0 mm) (1.3 mm) 2, 16 gage (1.3 mm) (1.9 mm)STC 38
where scheduled.
3. Fabricate and assemble as complete welded unit.
4. Weld Z anchors to frame.
5. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches (1219 mm with roll formed steel channels fitted
tightly into frame head, flush with top.
6. Prepare interior frame for silencers except where scheduled to receive sound seals or
weatherstripping. Provide for three single silencers on strike side of single doors and two
single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.
7. Provide minimum 14 gage steel floor angle clips welded to each jamb.
2.3 FINISH
A. Finish: As Specified in SECTION - 09900.
****** OR ******
B. Shop Finish: Thermosetting epoxy in accordance with ANSI A250.3, color as selected by
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install frames in accordance with ANSI A250.11 and manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Coordinate with masonry and gypsum wallboard wall construction for anchor placement.
3. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch (1.5mm)
where in direct contact with masonry.
4. In masonry openings, provide an adjustable T-strap anchor at each hinge location and at
same location in strike jamb.
0
I
I
u
U
03879803 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4
11/03 U
3.2
3.3
3.4
5. Door frames installed in metal stud framing shall have double 20 gauge studs on each
side of jamb.
6. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
7. Install field applied hardware in accordance with SDI-109.
8. Touch-up damaged shop finishes.
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to
corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove temporary spreader bars and welds. Grind and repair frame as required to provide a
smooth paint finish.
B. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule in Section 08000.
END OF SECTION
03879803 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5
11/03
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
F; PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non -rated and fire rated flush wood doors to receive transparent and paint finish.
B.
Cut outs for glass panels.
C.
Metal door lite surround frames.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Steel doors and frames.
Fill
B.
Section 08700 - Door Hardware.
C.
Section 08800 - Glazing.
D.
Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors.
-
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
B. ANSIWMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
C. ASTM B749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products.
D. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
E. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class.
F. NEMA - LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
G. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
H. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
I. NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association.
J. UL IOB - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
K. Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required,
special beveling, special blocking for hardware, and identify cutouts for glazing.
2. Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics;
i factory machining criteria, and factory finishing criteria,.
s
03879803 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1
11/03
C. Samples
1. Submit two samples of door construction, 24x24 inch in size cut from top corner of door.
2. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 24x24 inch in size illustrating wood
grain, stain color, and sheen.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
1. Indicate special installation instructions.
E. Manufacturer's Certificates
1. Certify that doors meet or exceed specified requirements and requirements of NWWDA
standards referenced.
2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NWWDA T.M.-6.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE D
A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1-A for Flush Wood Doors.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. (�
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS ll
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum five years documented experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252 UL 10B.
B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging.
C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves.
D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where
sunlight might bleach veneer.
E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on -site to permit
ventilation.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware
installation.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term:
1. Exterior Doors: Five (5) years.
03879803 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2
11/03
I
2. Interior Doors: Life of Installation.
B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Doors
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Algoma, WI.
2. Eggers Industries, Inc.; Two Rivers, WI.
3. VT Industries, Inc.; Holstein, IA.
4. Weyerhaeuser; Marshfield, WI.
B. Door Lite Surround Frames
1. Air Louvers, Inc.; Pico Rivera, CA.
2. Anemostat Door Products; Carson, CA.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Lumber
1. Transparent Finish: NHLA first grade, plain Red Oak kiln dried to maximum 10 percent
moisture content.
B. Cores
1. Solid Core
a. Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1, grade 1-LD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds
per cubic foot density.
b. Fire Rated
1) 20 and 30 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated
particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density.
2) 3/4 and 1 1/2 Hour Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core.
2. Hollow Core: Manufacturer's standard phenolic impregnated honeycomb corrugated
fiberboard.
C. Veneers
1. Trans arent Finish:.050 inch thick, NWWDA Premium, JAI grade Custom, A
Rade��conomy, B grad�,AshjjNatural BirchQ Select White Birch tirAcCherry!
ed Oalt [White Oaljalnul pecies wood, rotary cut plain cquarter
sliced rift cut.
2. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3, JGeneral Pu os Special Purpose JNon-Fire rated
Vdj lFire Rated Type, 10.050I 10.1251 T inch thick, finish,
� color, �� pattem 1, as selected.
D. Glazing Stops
1. Wood, of same species as door facin lWood with metal clips for rated doors➢.
2. JRolled steel JAluminum4 Ichannell sha a as detailed, lbutted 1mitere4
corners; prepared for countersink style Ittamper prooI screws; designed to conform to
UL requirements.
E. Adhesives
1. Exterior Doors: Type H - water resistant.
2. Interior Doors: Type JI - waterproof In - water resistant.
03879803 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3
11/03
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fabricate fire rated doors to meet fire ratings scheduled in accordance with ASTM E84
classifications for flame spread/smoke developed of 20/45. Attach fire rating label to
door edge.
2. Fabricate doors to thickness scheduled.
3. Veneer Match
a. Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Book Match.
b. On Pairs of Doors: Pair Match.
4. Hardware
a. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with templates furnished
by hardware supplier at locations indicated in NWWDA I.S.1.7-87 - Hardware
Locations for Wood Flush Doors.
b. Do not machine for surface hardware.
C. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware.
5. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings with
prefit clearances specified in NWWDA I.S. 1-A.
B. Flush Face Doors
1. Solid Core: Fabricate in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 1 and 1-A for 151111 ply
construction except as otherwise specified, with finish as scheduled.
2. Stiles
a. Type and Species
1) Transparent Finish: Solid wood of same species as veneer facing.
2) Opaque Finish: Solid hardwood, species of mill option.
3) Plastic Laminate Finish: Same as door facing with door edge trim applied
to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.
b. Depth
1)
2)
Mineral Core Doors: Minimum 1 3/4 inch at doors scheduled to receive
auto flush bolts
All Other Doors: In accordance with NWWDA I.S. 1-A.
3. Rails
a. Type and Species: Solid hardwood, species of mill option.
4. Bonding
a. Wood Cores: Type A - bonded.
b. Mineral Cores: Type A - bonded.
5. Blocking - Mineral
a. Provide at lock edge top of door for closer bottom of door for kick plate middle of
door and wardrobe hook.
b. Top rail: Minimum 6 inch wide
C. Bottom Rail: Minimum 10 inch wide.
2.4 FINISH
A. As specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING.
0
1 11
11
I I
I
0
U
03879803 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4
11/03 U
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or
alignment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
t : B.
Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
C.
Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door height at
bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements.
D.
Pilot drill screw and bolt holes.
E.
Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders.
i F.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08110 and
t
hardware specified in Section 08700.
G.
Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
H.
Install door louvers, plumb and level.
L
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Telegraphing: 1/10 inch measured with straight edge in any three inch span.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string,
corner to comer, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.
C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, top
to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.
D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge
to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
END OF SECTION
03879803 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 5
11/03
SECTION 08220
FRP DOORS AND FIBERGLASS RESIN TRANSFER MOLDED DOOR FRAMES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1— General Requirements apply to work of this section.
n1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) Doors.
B. Fiberglass Resin Transfer Molded Door Frames.
C. Door Hardware Schedule.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Sections Include The Following:
1. Section 09250 Gypsum Board System.
2. Section 09300 Tile.
3. Section 07900 Joint Sealers.
4. Section 09915 Color and Finish Schedule.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards
1.
ASTM D 635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time
of Burning of Self -Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position
2.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for a Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
3.
Laminate Properties
r
a. ASTM D 882 Tensile Strength
b. ASTM D 790 Flexural Strength
C. ASTM D 2583 Barcol Hardness
d. ASTM D 256 Impact Resistance
e. ASTM D 792 Density/Specific Gravity Of Laminate
f. ASTM D 1761 Mechanical Fasteners
4.
Core Properties
a. ASTM C 177 Thermal Properties
b. ASTM D 1622 Density/Specific Gravity
C. ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics
d. WDMA TM-10 and TM-5 Firestop ASTM E 152 U.L. 10(b)
B. Qualifications
1.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A company specialized in the manufacture of
fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) doors and frames as specified herein with a
minimum of years documented experience and with a record of successful in-service
performance for the applications as required for this project.
03879803
FRP DOORS AND FIBERGLASS RESIN TRANSFER 08220 - 1
11/03
MOLDED DOOR FRAMES
1.5
2. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed fiberglass door
and frame installations similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated and
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
3. Source Limitations: Obtain fiberglass reinforced plastic doors and frames through
one source fabricated from a single manufacturer.
4. Source Limitations: Hardware and accessories for all FRP doors as specified in
Section 08710 should be provided and installed by the fiberglass door and frame
manufacturer. Coordination with electrical is required for door hardware
installation.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Technical Data Including:
1. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced
2. Manufacturer shall provide certificate of compliance with current local and federal
regulations as it applies to the manufacturing process.
3. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
4. Schedule of doors and frames indicating the specific reference numbers as used on
drawings, door type, frame type, size, handing and applicable hardware.
5. Details of core and edge construction. Include factory -construction specifications.
6. Certification of manufacturer's qualifications.
B. Submittal Drawings For Approval Shall Be Submitted Prior To Manufacture And Will
Include The Following Information And Formatting.
1. Summary door schedule indicating the specific reference numbers as used on
owner's drawings, with columns noting door type, frame type, size, handing,
accessories and hardware.
2. A drawing depicting front and rear door elevations showing hardware with bill of
material for each door.
3. Drawing showing dimensional location of each hardware item and size of each door.
4. Individual part drawing and specifications for each hardware item and FRP part or
product.
5. Construction and mounting detail for each frame type.
C. Samples:
1. Provide one 21 x 18 inch completely assembled (hinged) door and frame corner
section, with faces and edges representing typical color and finish. One edge should
be exposed for view of interior door and frame composition. Sample should include
6 inch lite opening as well as standard cutouts for hinges and strike plates.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining optimum condition of
fiberglass doors and frames under anticipated traffic and use conditions.
2. Include one set of final as built drawings with the same requirements as mentioned
in Section B above.
3. Include certificate of warranty for door and frame listing specific door registration
numbers.
4. Include hardware data sheets and hardware manufacturer's warranties.
03879803 FRP DOORS AND FIBERGLASS RESIN TRANSFER 08220 - 2
11/03 MOLDED DOOR FRAMES U
1}
i
1.6
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Each door and frame should be delivered individually crated for protection from damage in
cardboard containers, clearly marked with project information, door location, specific
reference number as shown on drawings, and shipping information. Each crate should
contain all fasteners necessary for installation as well as complete installation instructions.
B. Doors should be stored in the original container out of inclement weather for protection
against the elements.
C. Handle doors pursuant to the manufacturer's recommendations as posted on outside of
crate.
WARRANTY
A. Warranty all fiberglass doors and frames for a period of 25 years against failure due to
corrosion. Additionally, warranty all fiberglass doors and frames on materials and
workmanship for a period of 10 years, including warp, separation or delamination, and
expansion of the core.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:
A. Chem -Prof Door Co., Ltd., P.O. Box 4560, Brownsville, Texas 78523 Phone: 1-800-444-
6924, Fax: 956-544-7943, Website: www.chem-pruf.com
B. Substitutions: As specified is Section 01300.
2.2 FRP DOORS
A. Doors shall be made of fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) using chemically proven resins
resistant to contaminants typically found in the environment for which these specifications
are written. Doors shall be 1 3/4 inch thick and of flush construction, having no seams or
cracks. All doors up to 410 x 8'0 shall have equal diagonal measurements with a maximum
tolerance of +/- 1/32 inch.
B. Door Plates shall be 1/8 inch thick, molded in one continuous piece, starting with a 25 mil
gelcoat of the color specified, integrally molded with at least two layers of 1.5 ounce per
square foot fiberglass mat and one layer of 16 ounce per square yard unidirectional roving.
This will yield a plate weight of 0.97 lbs per square foot at a ratio of 30/70 glass to resin.
C. Stiles and Rails shall be constructed starting from the outside toward the inside, of a 25 mil
gel coat of the color specified followed by a matrix of at least three layers of 1.5 ounce per
square foot of fiberglass mat. The stile and rail shall be molded in one continuous piece to
a U-shaped configuration and to the exact dimensions of the door. In this manner there will
be no miter joints or disparate materials used to form the once -piece stile and rail.
D. Core material shall be 2 psf expanded polyurethane foam, which completely fills all voids
between the door plates.
E. Internal Reinforcement shall be firestop of sufficient amount to adequately support
required hardware and function of same.
03879803 FRP DOORS AND FIBERGLASS RESIN TRANSFER 08220 - 3
11/03 MOLDED DOOR FRAMES
F. Finish of door and frame shall be identical in color and texture. At time of manufacture, 25
mil of resin -rich gelcoat must be integrally molded into both the door and frame.
Secondary painting to achieve color is not acceptable.
2.3 FRAMES
A. Frames shall be fiberglass and manufactured using the resin transfer method in closed rigid
molds to assure uniformity in color and size. Beginning with a minimum 25 mil gel coat
and a minimum of two layers continuous strand fiberglass mat saturated with resin, the
frame will be of one-piece construction with molded stop. All frame profiles up to 3/4" will
be solid fiberglass. All frame profiles greater than 3/4" shall have a core material of 2 psf
polyurethane foam. Metal frames or pultruded fiberglass frames will not be accepted.
B. Finish of frame shall be identical in color and texture to the door. 25 mil resin rich gel coat
will be integrally molded into the frame at time of manufacture. Secondary painting to
achieve color is not acceptable.
C. Jamb/Header connection shall be coped by CNC for tight fit.
D. Internal Reinforcement shall be continuous within the structure to allow for mounting of
specified hardware. Material shall be completely non -organic with a minimum hinge screw
holding value of 656 lbs. Frame screw holding value to accommodate screw shall be
minimum of 1,000 lbs per screw. Documented strength of frame screw holding value after
third insert must be submitted. Dissimilar materials, such as steel, will be deemed
unacceptable as reinforcement for hardware attachment.
E. Mortises for hardware shall be accurately machined by CNC to hold dimensions to +/-
0.010 inch in all three axis.
F. Hinge pockets shall be accurately machined by CNC to facilitate heavy duty hinges at all
hinge locations, using spacers when standard weight hinges are used.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. Due to the special nature of the material in this section, all related hardware as specified
must be furnished and installed by the door and frame manufacturer. Hardware schedule is
located at the end of this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION CONDITIONS
A. Verification of Conditions
1. Openings are correctly prepared to receive doors and frames.
2. Openings are correct size and depth in accordance with shop drawings or submittals.
B. Installer's Examination
1. Have the installer examine conditions under which construction activities of this
section are to be performed and submit a written report if conditions are
unacceptable.
2. Transmit two copies of the installer's report to the architect within 24 hours of
receipt.
3. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have
been corrected is prohibited.
0
[u
It
I
0
ll
03879803 FRP DOORS AND FIBERGLASS RESIN TRANSFER
11/03 MOLDED DOOR FRAMES
08220 - 4
f�
1
i 3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install door -opening assemblies in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's
- ? printed installation instructions, using installation methods and materials specified in
installation instructions.
B. Field alteration of doors or frames to accommodate field conditions is strictly prohibited.
' C. Site tolerances: Maintain plumb and level tolerance specified in manufacturer's printed
installation instructions.
D. Fire labeled doors and frames must be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and the latest revision of NFPA 80.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturers maintenance instructions to swing
open and shut without binding and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by
gravitational influence.
B. Adjust door hardware to operate correctly in accordance with hardware manufacturer's
maintenance instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces of door opening assemblies and exposed door hardware in accordance with
respective manufacturer's maintenance instructions.
3.5 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A. Protect door opening assemblies and door hardware from damage by subsequent
construction activities until final inspection.
HW -14
Opening no's: 111, 111A
Each Opening to have:
3 EA Hinges
1 EA Lever Latehsets — electronically operated in fail safe/fail server made.
1 EA Mag Lock
1 EA Perimeter gasket
1 EA Auto Door Bottom
1 EA Hinge Pin Door Stop
* All electronic hardware to be coordinated with security hardware installer.
END OF SECTION
03879803 FRP DOORS AND FIBERGLASS RESIN TRANSFER 08220 - 5
11/03 MOLDED DOOR FRAMES
SECTION 08700
HARDWARE
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Casework Hardware.
B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames
C. Section 08113 - Steel Frames
D. Section 08210 - Wood Doors
E. Section 08211 -Flush Wood Doors
F. Section 08220 — FRP Doors and Fiberglass Resin Transfer Molded Frames
G. Section 08331 - Overhead Coiling Doors: Hardware for same except cylinders
H. Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors: Hardware for same except cylinders
I. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders
J. Section 16721- Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System: Electrical connection to activate door
closers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications
1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years
experience.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. Fire Door Hardware
a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or
specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label.
b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide
type required by NFPA.
C. Provide door hardware listed by UL or Warnock Hersey or other testing
laboratory approved by code authority having jurisdiction.
d. Provide hardware tested in accordance with NFPA 252.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (NEMA LB3-1995)
- Performance Standards for High Pressure Decorative Laminate.
03879803 HARDWARE 08700 - 1
11/03
B.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
1.
ANSI A117 Building and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for
Physically Handicapped People.
2.
ANSI A156.1 Butts and Hinges.
3.
ANSI A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.
4.
ANSI A156.3 Exit Devices.
5.
ANSI A156.4 Door Controls - Closers.
6.
ANSI A156.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products.
7.
ANSI A156.6 Architectural Door Trim.
8.
ANSI A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions.
9.
ANSI A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders.
10.
ANSI A156.12 Interconnected Locks & Latches.
11.
ANSI A156.13 Mortise Locks & Latches.
12.
ANSI A156.15 Closer Holder Release Devices.
13.
ANSI A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware.
14.
ANSI A156.17 Self -Closing Hinges and Pivots.
15.
ANSI A156.18 Materials and Finishes.
16.
ANSI A156.21 Thresholds
17.
ANSI A156.23 Electromagnetic Locks
18.
ANSI A156.24 Delayed Egress Locks
C.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING & MATERIALS (ASTM)
1.
ASTM F883 Padlocks.
D.
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
1.
BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches.
2.
BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers.
3.
BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices.
E.
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
1.
36CFR Part 1191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA)
F.
DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI)
1.
DIE-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware.
2.
DM-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature.
3.
DIE-04 Recommended Locations for Builders'Hardware for Custom Steel Door and
Frames.
4.
DHI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames.
5. DHI A115 Wood Door Preparation Standards
G. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
2. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures.
3. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies.
H. STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE
1. SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application).
I. Texas Civil Statutes, Article 9102, Architectural Barriers Act, Texas Accessibility Standards
(TAS)
1. TAS 4.13.8 Door Thresholds
2. TAS 4.13.9 Door Hardware
3. TAS 4.13.10 Door Closers
J. UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC.
1. Building Materials Directory.
03879803 HARDWARE 08700 - 2
11/03 Ll
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product
Data
1.
Provide product data on specified hardware.
2.
Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions.
3.
Provide wiring diagrams, electrical characteristics, and product data on all electrically
controlled devices.
B. Hardware Schedule
1.
Include for each item: Quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail
information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and
hardware set identification using same opening numbers as indicated on the drawings;
lock trim material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding
ANSI/ BHMA standard type number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if
not covered by ANSI/ BHMA; and list of abbreviations.
2.
Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
a 3.
Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors.
4.
Include master cross-reference list indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and
associated hardware set.
a. If, for any reason, any door is moved from the set indicated in the schedule at the
end of this section, provide a master cross-reference list in numerical sequence
indicating door number, original hardware set and new hardware set for every
` f'J
opening.
C. Keying Schedule
1.
Hold a keying conference with the Owner to develop a keying schedule.
�} 2.
Develop schedule in accordance with DHI-03.
' 3.
Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project.
4.
rlr
Unless otherwise indicated or requested, provide keying as follows:
Key doors different key doors to the same room alike.
a. all and all
b. Key all exterior doors alike.
C. Master key all doors except mechanical room doors to one key.
?
d. Key mechanical room doors to existing utilities master key system.
D. Certificates of Compliance
1.
Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conforin to the NFPA,
CFR and ANSI/ BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that
proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products.
2.
Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are
indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware
(i.e. active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates.
E. Closeout Submittals
1.
Submit in accordance with Section 01700.
2.
Provide list of actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code.
3.
Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements adjustment methods and
inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
4.
Furnish spare parts data, including a complete list of parts and supplies and source of
supply, for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electromagnetic
closer holder release devices.
5.
Submit special tools required for hardware adjustment or control.
03879803
HARDWARE 08700 - 3
11/03
6. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing
routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting
guides.
7. Submit simplified "as installed" diagrams for electronic locking devices and
electromagnetic closer holder release devices.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or
container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware
schedule.
C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between
hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement
required, size of holes, and similar details.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year warranty for door closers.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Blank keys: Provide one for each lock scheduled.
B. Provide 10 extra cylinder cores for each master key group.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
0
0
0
a
A. Hinges
1. Bommer; Landrum, SC
2. Hager Hinge Co.; St. Louis, MO
3. McKinney Manufacturing Co.; Scranton, PA
4. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works; New Britain, CT
B. Lock and Latches
1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; City of Industry, CA
2. Best Lock Corporation; Indianapolis, IN
3. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT
4. PDQ Industries, Inc.; Leola, PA
5. Sargent Division, ESSEX Industries, Inc.; New Haven, CT
6. Schlage Lock Co.; San Francisco, CA
C. Push/Pulls
1. Elmes Door Hardware, Teramura International Corporation; Torrance, CA.
2. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO
3. Rockwood Manufacturing Co.; Rockwood, PA
03879803 HARDWARE 08700 - 4
11/03
I
I
4.
Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA
D.
Electromagnetic Locks
1.
Adams Rite; Pomona, CA
2.
Loknetics Security Engineering; Forestville, CT
3.
Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN
E.
Exit
Devices
1.
Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT
2.
Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC
3.
Sargent Division ESSEX Industries Inc.; New Haven, CT
4.
Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN
F.
Closers
1.
Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT
2.
LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co.; Princeton, IL
3.
Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC
G.
Overhead Holders
1.
Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN
2.
Rixson Architectural Hardware; Charlotte, NC
H.
Manual and Automatic Bolts
1.
Door Controls International (DCI); Dexter, MI
2.
Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN
3.
H.B. Ives, Harrow Co; Wallingford, CT
4.
Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA
I.
Gasketing/Threshholds
1.
Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO
2.
Pemko Manufacturing Co.; Memphis, TN
3.
Reese Enterprises, Inc.; Rosemount, MO
4.
Zero International, Inc.; Bronx, NY
J.
Protection Plates
1.
Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO
2.
Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.; Temple, TX
3.
Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA
K.
Door Stops/Bumpers
1.
Elmes Door Hardware, Teramura International Corporation; Torrance, CA.
2.
Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN
3.
Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO
4.
H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT
5.
Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA
L.
Door Silencers
1.
Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN
2.
H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT
3.
Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA
M.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. General
1. Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at
the end of this section.
03879803
11/03
HARDWARE
08700 - 5
2. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Schloge LCN Hager Pemko Triangle
Brass. Components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with
the ANSI/BHMA standards for Grade 1 products and are listed in the latest edition of
the BHMA Directories of certification.
3. Regardless of whether or not the HARDARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has
every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components
required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar
openings and the referenced codes.
B. Exit Devices and Exit Device Accessories
1. General
a. Provide dust proof floor strikes for vertical rod devices.
b. Provide manufacturer's standard filler to extend exit device beyond door lite
frames where door lites extend below exit device. Factory cut or form filler to
match profile of exit device trim.
C. Closers
1. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Size one size larger than manufacturer's
published recommendations, but not less than size 5.
2. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published
recommendations, except as specified otherwise.
3. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jam mount closers
for outswinging exterior doors.
4. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at
90-degree open position.
5. Operating Pressure: Provide closers with maximum operating pressure as follows:
a. Interior Doors: Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically
handicapped for a push-pull of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle.
b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pounds.
C. Fire Rated Doors: Set to minimum required to relatch door.
D. Protection Plates
1. Conformance: ANSI A156.6, category J100.
2. Fabrication
a. Metal Plates
1) Fabricate from 0.050 inch thick stainless steel.
2) Bevel all edges.
3) Countersink screw holes for flat head screws.
3. Size
a. Width: 2 inches less in width than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for
pairs of doors.
b. Height
1) Armor Plates: 36 inches.
2) Kick Plates: 10 inches except where bottom rail is less than 10 inches,
extend plate extend to within 1/2-inch of panel mold or glass bead.
3) Mop Plates: 4 inches.
E. Miscellaneous
1. Metal Thresholds
a. Where required, modify thresholds to receive projecting bolts of flush bolts and
exit devices.
b. Thresholds for doors accessible to handicapped: Raised thresholds, corrugated,
beveled with slopes not exceeding 1:2, and with height not exceeding 1/2-inch.
Bevel not required where height is less than 1/2-inch.
03879803 HARDWARE 08700 - 6
11/03
F.
Accessories
1.
Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging
keys, required to adjust hardware items.
G.
Fastenings
1.
Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware.
2.
Concrete or Grout Filled Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields.
3.
Hollow Masonry: Provide resin filled screen anchors equal to Hild C7 anchors.
4.
Gypsum Wallboard: Provide nylon or derlin expansion anchors equal to Hilti
"Togglers".
5.
Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
6.
Provide one-way or tamperproof screws on exterior doors equipped with half or full
surface hinges.
H.
Fire
Door Hardware
1.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
I.
Finishes
1.
Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting.
2.
Conform to ANSI A156.18 as follows:
n
a. Hinges:626
b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626
C. Door closers: BHMA 630 or BHMA 630 painted.
d. Miscellaneous hardware: Finish appearance to match door hardware.
e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: Finish appearance to match door hardware.
f. Thresholds: Finish appearance to match door hardware.
J.
Keying
1.
Provide an extension of existing keying system.
2.
Key locks in sets or subsets.
3.
Furnish locks with the manufacturer's standard construction key system.
4.
Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other
approved means.
5.
Supply keys in following quantities:
a. 2 keys for each lock
=
b. 3 master keys
C. 6 construction keys
6.
Furnish keys to Owner arranged in a container for key control system storage in sets or
subsets as scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
' A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
�J
r
03879803 HARDWARE 08700 - 7
11/03
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DI -II Recommended Locations for
Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames.
2. Install in accordance with DHI-02.
3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted.
4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with
thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts.
5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 for positioning requirements for handicapped.
B. Door -Closing Device
1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by
manufacturer.
2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from
halls and corridors.
C. Key Control Storage System
1. Install where directed by Architect.
D. Armor, Kick and Mop Plates
1. Armor Plates: Where scheduled, install on push side of single -acting doors and on both
sides of double-acting doors.
2. Kick Plates: Where scheduled, install on push side of single -acting doors and on both
sides of double-acting doors.
3. Mop Plates
a. Where scheduled, install on pull side of single -acting doors where door is
scheduled to receive armor or kick plate.
b. Where scheduled, install on pull side of single -acting doors where door not
scheduled to receive armor or kick plate.
E. Door Edgings
1. Install on stop face of butt edge of door unless otherwise scheduled.
F. Auxiliary Hardware
1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors.
2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt
G. Thresholds
1. Install in a bed of sealant with stainless steel screws and expansion shields.
2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping.
3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions.
H. Weatherseals
1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal
screws after door and frames have been finish painted.
2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position.
3. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer.
I. Gasketing
1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame.
J. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors
1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105.
03879803 HARDWARE 08700 - 8
11/03 U
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION
03879803
11/03
HARDWARE
08700 - 9
f-
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
BSL-3 LABORATORY
HW-1
Opening No's 101,119
Each opening to have:
3 ea Hager
Butts 13131279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea By others
Electronic Lever Lockset
626
1 ea LCN
Closer 4111 EDA x SMB
AL
1 ea Pemko
Auto Door Bottom 434ARL
AL
1 set Pemko
Perimeter Gasketing 285CR
AL
1 ea Ives
Hinge Pin Door Stop 70
A92-A-A
Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer
HW-2
Opening No's 102, 103, 109,
110
Each opening to have:
3 ea Hager
Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea By Others
Electronic Lever Lockset
626
1 ea LCN
Closer 4111 EDA x SMB
AL
1 set Hager
Silencers 307D
630
1 ea Ives
Hinge Pin Door Stop 70
A92-A-A
Coordinate installation of door
hardware with security lockset installer
Door hardware at openings 03, 09 and 10 to operate in fail safe/fail secure mode
HW-3
Opening No's 108
Each opening to have:
3 ea Hager
Butts 1361279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea By Others
Electronic Rim Panic Device
626
1 ea LCN
Closer 4111 EDA x SMB
AL
1 ea Pemko
Auto Door Bottom 434ARL
AL
1 set Pemko
Perimeter Gasketing 285CR
AL
1
1 ea Ives
Hinge Pin Door Stop 70
A92-A-A
Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer
Panic to alarm when operated; tie into security recording system
M
HW-4
Opening No's 117
Each opening to have:
3 ea
Hager
Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea
By Others
Electronic Rim Panic Device
626
1 ea
LCN
Closer 4111 EDA x SMB
AL
1 ea
Pemko
Auto Door Bottom 434ARL
AL
1 set
Pemko
Perimeter Gasketing 285CR
AL
1 ea
Ives
Hinge Pin Door Stop 70
A92-A-A
Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer
15 second delay on panic w/alarm when operated; tie into security recording system
No hardware on hall side of door.
HW-5
Opening No's
104, 106, 107
Each opening
to have:
3 ea
Hager
Butts 661279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea
Schlage
Lever Lockset D70RD
626
1 ea
Ives
Hinge Pin Door Stop 70
A92-A-A
1 set
Hager
Silencers 307D
630
HW-6
Opening No's
105
Each opening
to have:
3 ea
Hager
Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea
By Others
Electronic Lever Lockset
626
1 ea
LCN
Closer 4111 EDA x SMB
AL
1 ea
Pemko
Auto Door Bottom 434ARL
AL
1 set
Pemko
Perimeter Gasketing 285CR
AL
1 ea
Ives
Hinge Pin Door Stop 70
A92-A-A
Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer
HW-7
Opening No's 112,130
Each opening to have:
3 ea
Hager
Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea
By Others
Electronic Lever Lockset
626
1 set
Pemko
Perimeter Weatherstrip 303DV
1 ea
Pemko
Door Sweep/Rain Drip 3452DP
1 ea
Pemko
Threshold 176A
Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer
Opening 130 is a pair of doors;
adjust hardware accordingly
HW-8
Opening No's
113,131
Each opening to have:
3 ea
Hager
Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea
Schlage
Lever Latchset D40S
626
1 ea
Ives
Hinge Pin Door Stop 70
A92-A-A
1 set
Hager
Silencers 307D
630
HW-9
Opening No's
114
Each opening to have:
3 ea
Hager
Butts 1361279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea
By Others
Electronic Rim Panic Device
626
1 ea
LCN
Closer 4111 EDA x SMB
AL
1 set
Pemko
Perimeter Weatherstrip 303DV
1 ea
Pemko
Door Sweep/Rain Drip 3452DP
1 ea
Pemko
Threshold 176A
Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer
HW-10
Opening No's
115, 116, 123
Each opening
to have:
3 ea
Hager
Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5
626
1 ea
Schlage
Lockset D91 RD
626
1 ea
LCN
Closer 4111 EDA x SMB
AL
1 ea
Hager
Stop 236W
626
1 set
Hager
Silencers 307D
630
HW-11
Opening No's 110A, 110E
Each opening to have:
3 ea Hager Butts BB1279 4.5 x 4.5
1 ea Schlage Lockset D91 RD
1 ea Ives Hinge Pin Door Stop 70
1 set Hager Silencers 307D
HW-12
Opening No's 111, 111 A
1 ea Marble Threshold
1 ea Ives Hinge Pin Door Stop 70
All Other Hardware By Door Manufacturer
Coordinate installation of door hardware with security lockset installer
Door hardware to operate in fail safe/fail secure mode
626
626
A92-A-A
630
A92-A-A
11
P
I
P.
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass glazing for Sections referencing this Section for products and installation.
B. Glass and for hollow metal frame work.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and windows.
B. Section 08211— Flush Wood Doors.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors
by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
B. ANSI Z97.1- Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used
in Buildings.
C. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures.
D. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal, Gaskets, Setting Blocks and Spacers.
E. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
F. ASTM C 1036 - Flat Glass.
G. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
H. ASTM C 1172 - Laminated Architecture Flat Glass.
I. ASTM C1281— Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications.
J. ASTM C1311 -Solvent Release Sealants.
K. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
L. ASTM E546 - Test Method For Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
M. ASTM E576 - Test Method For Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical
Position.
N. ASTM E773 - Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
O. ASTM E774 — Classification of this Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
P. ASTM E4802 - Poly (Methyl Methacrylate) Acrylic Plastic Sheet.
Q. ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems.
R. GANA - Glazing Manual.
S. GANA - Laminated Glass Design Guide.
T. GANA - Sealant Manual.
U. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type.
03879803 GLAZING 08800 - 1
11/03
0
V. FS TT-G-410 -Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for
Channel or Stop Glazing).
W. SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association.
X. UL 752 - Bullet Resisting Equipment.
Y. UL 972 - Burglary Resistant Glazing
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier:
1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900.
2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane
to heel bead of glazing sealant.
B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of
glass as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 code to a design pressure of 20 lb/sq ft as
measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330.
C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less.
D. Completed installation of window unit shall be required to pass commissioning for a biosafety
laboratory level III for resistance to the passage of our when under negative pressure.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Glass:
a. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations,
special handling or installation requirements.
b. Polycarbonate material manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials
and methods.
C. Provide copy of manufacturer's sample warranty.
2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and
environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required.
C. Samples:
1. Submit four samples, minimum 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating glass units, coloration and
design. Mark each sample to match glazing legend.
2. Submit 3 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as scheduled.
D. Manufacturer's Certificates
1. Certify that glass meets or exceeds requirements of CPSC 16 CFR Part 1201 for
Category I materials.
2. Certify that sealed insulating glass units meet or exceed specified requirements.
3. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge sealant indicating
that glass edge sealants were tested for compatibility with other glazing materials
including sealants, glazing tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
n
a
11 �
11
I
-11
a
11,
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual and GANA 1�
Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. l
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
03879803 GLAZING 08800 - 2 11/03 U
n 1.9
I
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of
glazing compounds.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to
adjacent Work.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide Warranties in accordance with Section 01700.
B. Ten year manufacturer's warranty:
1. Include coverage for plastic film from coating failure, fading or cracking for 5 years.
2. Include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and replacement of same.
3. Include coverage for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same.
C. Five year manufacturer's warranty:
1. Insulating Glass Units: Include coverage for from seal failure, interpane dusting or
misting, and replacement of same.
2. Polycarbonate Glazing: Include coverage against yellowinglloss of light transmission,
abrasion, breakage, delamination, and replacement of same.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
U2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
L•
A. Flat Glass Materials
1.
Libbey-Owens-Ford Co.
2.
PPG Industries, Inc.
3.
Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
4.
Viracon.
B. Glazing Compounds
1.
Dow Coming Corp.
2.
GE Silicones.
3.
Norton Co.
4.
Pecora Corp.
5.
Tremco Mfg. Co.
6.
VIP Enterprises, Inc.
C. Substitutions:
Under provisions of Section 01600.
a 03879803 GLAZING 08800 - 3
11/03
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Glazing
1. G 1 - Tempered Safety Glass: 0.030 inch thick clear polyvinyl butyryl sandwiched
between two 1/8 inch thick panes of glass conforming to ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully
tempered with horizontal tempering; Condition A, uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass,
Flat; Class 1 clear; Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1.
2. G 2 - Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully tempered with horizontal
tempering; Condition A, uncoated; Type I - Transparent Glass, Flat; Class 1 clear;
Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; thickness as noted on drawings or,
at Contractor's option, provide.
B. Glazing Compounds
1. Modified Oil: FS TT-G-410; gray color.
2. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1085; Shore A hardness of 10-20 bronze color; non -skinning.
3. Silicone Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for
glazing application indicated; single component; chemical curing; capable of water
immersion without loss of properties; non -bleeding, non -staining, cured Shore A
hardness of 15 to 25.
a. Color: As selected.
b. Structural Silicone: Provide high -modulus structural silicone glazing materials
where sealant bonds glass to substrate.
C. Glazing Accessories
1. Glazing Tape: ASTM C1281, preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube
spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as
required for glazing channel; black color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to
receive glazing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,
and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
2. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
3. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
I
G
I �
L71
I
11
11
03879803 GLAZING 08800 - 4
11/03 U
4. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as
Q follows:
a. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size
and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
l i clearances and comply with system performance requirements.
1 f b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed
thickness of tape.
5. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications,
unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer.
0 6. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with
referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks
in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after work is complete.
C. Clean glass.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. After installation, mark pane with an Yby using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
0 END OF SECTION
03879803 GLAZING 08800 - 5
11/03
I
n
L
r
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
B. Drawings, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract, Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
C. Drawings, Construction Contract Clauses, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1- General
Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal furring and lathing.
B. Portland cement plaster system.
C. Aggregate surface finish.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Concrete: Wall substrate surface.
B. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Wall substrate surface.
C. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Structural metal studding and framing behind
plaster base.
D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
E. Section 08110 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames: Installation of door frames.
F. Section 08113 - Standard Steel Frames: Installation of door frames.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
B. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes and
Tubes.
C. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
D. ASTM C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime.
E. ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
F. ASTM C847 - Metal Lath.
G. ASTM C897 - Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement -Based Plasters.
H. ASTM C926 - Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster.
I. ASTM C933 - Welded Wire Lath.
J. ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases
to Steel Studs from 0.33 inches to 0.112 inches in thickness.
K. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster
Bases.
L. ASTM C1032 - Woven Wire Plaster Base.
03879803 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1
11/03
M. ASTM C1063 - Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement -Based Plaster.
N. ASTM C1085 - Butyl Rubber - Based Solvent - Release Sealants.
O. ASTM E119 - Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
P. FM - 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies.
Q. NTMA - National Tile and Marble Association.
R. PCA (Portland Cement Association) - Plaster (Stucco) Manual.
S. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fabricate vertical elements to limit finish surface to 1/360 deflection under lateral point load of
100 lbs.
B. Fabricate horizontal elements to limit finish surface to 1/360 deflection under superimposed
dead load and wind uplift loads.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data
1. Provide product data on furring, lathing components, structural characteristics, plaster
materials, characteristics and limitations of products specified.
2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Certificates
1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Samples
1. Submit one samples, 48"x 48" inch in size illustrating finish color and texture. — See
Mock-up.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lather
1. Company specializing in metal furring and lathing work with five years documented
experience.
2. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1063.
B. Plasterer
1. Company specializing in cement plaster work with five years documented experience
approved by manufacturer.
2. Apply cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926 and PCA Plaster (Stucco)
Manual.
C. Mock-up
1. Construct mockup, 4 feet long by 4 feet wide, which includes furring, lathing, plaster
finish, color, substrate, incidental flashings, sealants, and other components. Coordinate
with installation of associated work of Sections 05400, 09250.
2. Locate where directed.
3. Accepted sample shall be kept at project site until completion of all work of this section.
4. Mockup may remain as part of the Work.
n
0
I �
I
I
0
0
03879803 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2
11/03 Ll
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
�
A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F nor
more than 80 degrees F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of plaster and until
cured.
J
(-j PART 2 - PRODUCTS
U 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
a A. Bonding Agents
1. Dayton Superior, Corp; Oregon, IL.
2. Larson Products, Corp.; Jessup, Maryland.
3. Laticrete International, Inc.
1 B. Finish Stucco
1. El Rey Stucco Co., Inc.; Albuquerque, NM.
D 2. La Habra Products, Inc.; Anaheim, CA.
3. United States Gypsum; Chicago, IL.
4. Highland Stucco and Lime Products
C. Moldings
1. Delta Star (Superior Metal), Inc.; San Carlos, CA.
2. Fry Reglet Corp., Alpharetta, GA.
3. MM Systems Corp.; Tucker, GA.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Studs, and Tracks and Wall Furring: As specified in Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal
Framing and 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems.
B.
Furring Channels: ASTM C1063, hot or cold rolled steel; G-60, hot dipped galvanized coating,
3/8 inch deep x 3/4 inch high; length as required.
C.
Resilient Channels: Galvanize coated formed steel; minimum 25 gage thick; size and length as
required, hat shaped profile.
C; D.
Hangers: ASTM C 1063, Galvanized steel, of size to suit application, to rigidly support ceiling
components in place, to deflection limits as indicated.
E.
Lateral Bracing: Formed steel, rust inhibitive paint finish; minimum 16 gage thick; size and
length as required.
F.
Metal Lath: ASTM C847; Galvanized, self furring mesh of weight to suit application.
G.
Moldings
1. Material: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy, minimum .050 inch thick, AA-
M12C22A21, finish.
2. Depth: Governed by plaster thickness.
3. Lengths: Maximum possible lengths.
l
l
4. Flanges: Expanded flanges
5. Edges: Square
H.
Corner Mesh: Formed aluminum, minimum 26 gage thick; expanded flanges shaped to permit
complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide.
03879803
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3
11/03
2.3
I. Anchorage Methods: Nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit
application, galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place.
****** OR ******
J. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I Portland.
K. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.
L. Aggregate: Marble crate finish to match existing and in accordance with ASTM C897.
M. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster.
N. Bonding Agent: ASTM C631; type recommended for bonding plaster to concrete concrete
masonry surfaces.
PLASTER MIXES
A. Mix and proportion base -coat cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926, and in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
******** OR ********
B. Finish Coat: Mix and proportion finish coat cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926.
C. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
D. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
E. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and evaporation.
F. Do not retemper finish coat mixes after initial set has occurred.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces and site conditions under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify
no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface.
C. Concrete: Verify surfaces are flat, honeycomb is filled flush, and surface is ready to receive
work of this Section. Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form release agents exist on
concrete surface that are detrimental to plaster.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction.
B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Clean surfaces using acid solutions, solvents, or
detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water.
C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Apply in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install lathing and furring for Portland cement plaster work in accordance with ASTM
C1063 and the following:
11
n
I
0
I
I
111
11
I �
U
03879803 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4
11/03 U
B. Wall and Furred Space Framing
g
****** OR ******
1.
Erect wall furring by directly attaching to concrete masonry walls.
2.
Erect furring channels vertically. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at
maximum 24 inches o.c.
3.
Space furring channels maximum 16 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from
a
abutting walls.
4.
Erect resilient channels at maximum 24 inches on center. Place joints over framing
members.
a
5.
Establish control and expansion joints with specified joint device.
C. Lathing
1.
Apply one ply of underlayment over substrate; weather lap edges 4 inches minimum.
Fasten in place.
****** OR ******
2.
Apply self furring reinforcement with self furring ribs perpendicular to supports.
3.
Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between
supports.
4.
Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1-1/2 inches. Nest outside ribs of rib lath
together.
****** OR ******
5. Attach metal lath to metal framing in accordance with ASTM C1063. Space attachments
at maximum 6 inches on center.
D. Accessories
1. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, return metal lath 3 inches from
corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.
2. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.
3. Place strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.
4. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing
materials. Secure rigidly in place.
5. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in
place.
6. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place.
7. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.
E. Control and Expansion Joints
1. Locate exterior control and expansion joints as indicated.
2. Establish control and expansion joints with double casing beads butted tight. Set both
beads over 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet for air seal continuity.
3.4 PLASTERING
A. Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C926.and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply scratch coat to a nominal thickness of 5/16 inch brown coat to a nominal thickness of
5/16 inch, and a finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch over self -furring reinforcement
surfaces.
03879803 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 5
11/03
3.5
C. Moist cure scratch and brown coats. Apply brown coat immediately following initial set of
scratch coat.
D. After curing, dampen base coat prior to applying finish coat.
E. Apply finish coat and imbed exposed pebble chips to match existing finish.
F. Machine apply aggregate surfacing to full surface coverage.
G. Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours.
H. Tempering of finish -coat plaster is prohibited.
TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION
03879803 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 6
11/03
SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
nPART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
j
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
y
A.
Metal stud wall framing.
B.
Metal channel ceiling framing.
C.
Framing accessories.
D.
E.
Gypsum board.
Cementitious backer board.
F.
Taped and sanded joint treatment.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrication.
B.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of surface mounted
accessories specified in other sections.
C.
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.
D.
Section 09300 - Tile.
E.
Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish.
1.4 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI A118.9 - Cementitious Backer Units
B.
ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
C.
ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board.
D.
ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring
Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
E.
ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Board.
F.
ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
G.
ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases
to Steel Studs from 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness.
H.
ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster
Bases.
I.
ASTM C1047 - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base.
J.
ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
K.
ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
L.
ASTM E1190 - Strength of Power -Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members.
M.
FM 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies.
N.
GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
O.
GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual.
03879803
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 1
It
11/03
0
P. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory.
Q. WHI - Certification Listings.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural
members, and clearances of intended openings.
B. Partition Component Sizes and Spacings: Provide steel framing members as indicated but not
less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection
and lateral loading conditions:
1. Non -Axial Load Bearing Components
a. Maximum Deflection: IJ360 at 20 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Interior Partitions
a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center
unless otherwise indicated.
b. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 5 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Maximum Deflection: Ll120 at 7.5 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center
unless otherwise indicated.
d. Maximum Deflection: IJ120 at 10 lbf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Ceiling Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to
comply with ASTM C 754, maximum deflection of LJ240 and deadload of 5 lbf per sq.
ft. minimum, spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit following in accordance with provisions of Section 01300:
1. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with laboratory seals.
2. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape joint compounds.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
seven years documented experience.
B. Field Samples
1. On actual gypsum board assemblies, prepare field samples of at least 100 sq. ft. in
surface area for the following applications. Simulate finished lighting conditions for
review of in -place unit of Work.
a. Wall surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes.
b. Ceiling surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes.
C. Material Compatibility
1. Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board
and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board
manufacturer.
11
III
I
u
I
0-
I
11
U-
0
U-
U
03879803 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 2
11/03 U
I
r
I
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
C. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
D. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions
1. General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing
gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Room Temperatures
a. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than
40 deg F.
b. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50
deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry.
C. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources.
3. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials.
Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too
rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Studs
I.
United States Gypsum Co.
2.
Dale Industries
3.
Unitech
4.
Dietrich
5.
Alabama Metals Corp.
6.
Celotex Building Products
7.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
8.
National Gypsum Co.
9.
United States Gypsum Co.
B. Gypsum Board
1.
United States Gypsum Co.
Q
2.
Celotex Building Products
3.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
4.
National Gypsum Co.
5.
United States Gypsum Co.
I i
03879803 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 3
11/03
0
C. Accessories
1. United States Gypsum Co.
2. Celotex Building Products
3. G-P Gypsum Corp.
4. National Gypsum Co.
5. United States Gypsum Co.
D. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Framing
1. Non -axial Load Bearing Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, C
shaped sized as indicated in construction documents.
2. Interior Studs and Tracks
a. To Receive Gypsum Board: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick
(unless otherwise specified or required by partition height for loading specified),
C shape, with knurled faces. Double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs.
b. To receive Plaster: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 22 gage thick unless
otherwise indicated, C shape, with knurled faces.
3. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645.
4. Interior Channels: ASTM C645; Hot or Cold -rolled steel, ASTM A 525 G-60, hot
dipped galvanized coating.
5. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C645, manufacturer's standard
direct -hung grid suspension system composed of main beams and cross furring members
that interlock to form a modular supporting network.
B. Gypsum Board
1. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick
except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square
edges.
2. Cementitious Backing Board: High density, glass fiber reinforced, 1/2 inch (nominal)
thick.
C. Accessories
1. Sealant: Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; black
in concealed locations; color as selected from manufacturer's standard in exposed
locations. Sealant shall be rated for chemical resistance in laboratories.
2. Trim:
a. Corner Beads: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, 1-1/4 inch
wide flanges.
b. Edge Trim: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, types as
indicated.
3. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water.
4. Cementitious Backing Board Tape: Manufacturer's standard 2 inch wide, coated glass
fiber tape for joints and comers.
5. Fasteners
a. Framing to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and
size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.
b. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C), size and type
recommended by framing manufacturer.
C. Metal Framing to Metal Framing: Manufacturer's standard screw attachments and
as indicated.
n
0
I i
I I
0
I
u
03879803 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 4
11/03 0
c
I
P,
E
d. Gypsum Board to Metal Framing
1) Screws complying with ASTM C954; type as required for substrate
indicated.
2) Adhesive: ASTM C557.
6. Tie and Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, with capability to
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
p 3.2
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board
assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A. Metal Studs
I.
General
a. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
b. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center (regardless of fire rated partition
allowances for wider spacings unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Form all comers and intersections using conventional three stud framing.
3.
Interior Partition
a. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending through the ceiling
bracing and for partitions extending through the ceiling structure above.
b. Non -Fire Rated Partitions: Brace partitions, extending above ceiling only, with
runner track running diagonally from top of partition to underside of roof or floor
deck above and space alternately at 4 feet on center maximum.
4.
Door Opening Framing: Install double 20 gauge studs at door frame jambs. Install stud
tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent
studs.
5.
Blocking: Screw wood blocking to studs. Install blocking for support of finish carpentry
items, plumbing fixtures, wall cabinets, hardware,
6.
Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and
mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing.
B. Ceiling
Framing
1.
Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Coordinate location of hangers with other work.
3.
Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.
4.
Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels
or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches
past each end of openings.
5.
Laterally brace entire suspension system.
C. Gypsum Board
1.
Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's instructions.
03879803
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 5
11/03
n
2. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over
firm bearing.
3. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing.
4. Control Joints
a. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as required by ASTM
C840.
b. Install control joints centered above each jamb of all door frames. Extend control
joint from top of frame head to top of partition.
5. Place corner beads at all exposed external corners. Use longest practical length. Place
edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials at all exposed locations. Leave
a 1/4 inch space between edge trim and dissimilar material. Seal joint with sealant
specified in Section 07900.
D. Joint Treatment
1. Gypsum Board: Install joint treatment in conformance with ASTM C840 and to level as
defined by GA-214 and as scheduled at the end of this Section.
2. Cementitious Backing Board: Tape joints and corners in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from plumb and true Flatness: 1/8 inch
in 10 feet in any direction.
3.4 JOINT TREATMENT SCHEDULE
A. Level 1: All gypsum board surfaces concealed above ceilings.
B. Level 2: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile, wood paneling and
behind fixed millwork.
C. Level 3: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive spray applied texture.
D. Level 4: All gypsum board surface scheduled to receive Type II wall coverings specified in
Section 09950 -Wall Coverings.
E. Level 5: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive paint.
END OF SECTION
I
X
ill
0
� I
a -
I
u
03879803 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 6
11/03 U
SECTION 09300
TILE
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ceramic tile floor finish.
B. Mortar bed installation.
C. Ceramic tile walls and ceiling and base finish using the thinset application method.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete: Floating of floor slab for mortar bed.
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Control and expansion joint components.
C. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall: Cementitious backer unit.
D. Division 15 Section - Sanitary Drainage and Vent Systems: Floor drains.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/TCA A108.4 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Water Resistant Organic Adhesive.
B. ANSI/TCA A108.5 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex
Portland Cement Mortar.
C. ANSI/TCA 108.10 - Installation of Grout in Tilework.
D. ANSI/TCA A118.1 - Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar.
E. ANSUTCA Al 18.4 - Latex -Portland Cement Mortar.
F. ANSI/TCA A 118.6 - Ceramic Tile Grouts.
G. ANSI/TCA A136.1 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile, Type 1 and Type 2.
H. ANSV17CA A137.1 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
I. ASTM C 1027 - Standard Test Method for Determining Visible Abrasion Resistance of Glazed
Ceramic Tile.
J. TCA - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Submit shop drawings indicating tile layout, perimeter conditions, junctions with
dissimilar materials, and setting details.
2. Submit product data indicating material specifications, characteristics, and instructions
for using adhesives and grouts.
3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions.
4. Submit maintenance data including recommended cleaning and stain removal methods,
cleaning materials, and polishes and waxes.
03879803 TILE 09300 - 1
11/03
B. Samples
1. Submit color samples for selection by Owner.
C. Certificates
1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications
1. Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with
minimum 5 years experience.
2. Conform to ANSI/TCA A137.1
B. Installer Qualifications
1. Conform to TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
2. Installer: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum
5 years documented experience.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with Section 01600.
B. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, bearing brand name and identification of
manufacturer.
C. Store bagged materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from
weather.
D. Store tile in manner to prevent scratching, chipping and breaking.
E. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesives in a closed, unventilated environment.
B. Maintain 50 degrees F. during installation of mortar materials.
1.9 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide approximately 4% maintenance materials of each tile specified to the Owner at location
as directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Tile
1.
American Marrazzi, Tile, Inc.
2.
American Olean Tile Co.
3.
Crossville Ceramics
4.
Dal -Tile Corp.
5.
Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
6.
Monarch Tile, Inc.
7.
Summitville Tiles, Inc.
03879803 TILE 09300 - 2
11/03
B.
Tile Setting and Grouting Materials
1. American Olean Tile Co.
2. Custom Building Products
3. Dal -Tile Corp.
4. Laticrete International, Inc.
5. Mapei Corporation
6. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
C.
Waterproofing Membrane
L9
L9
1. Compotite Corporation
2.2 MATERIAL
A.
Tile
1. Ceramic Floor Tile
�j
a. Conformance: ANSI/TCA A137.1
�j
b. Type: Vitreous with moisture absorption of 0 to 0.5 percent
C. Size: 8 x 8 x 1/4 inch
d. Pattern: As scheduled.
e. Edge: Cushioned
f. Surface Finish: Unglazed
g. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's Group 12 3 colors.
h. Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C1028; not less than .60 wet and dry.
2. Ceramic Wall and Ceiling Tile
a. Conformance: ANSI/TCA A137.
b. Type: Non -vitreous with moisture absorption over 7.0 percent
C. Size: 6 x 6 x 1/4 inch
d. Edge: Cushioned
e. Surface Finish: Matte glazed
f. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's Group 12 3 colors.
3. Trim Shapes: Surface caps, corners and miscellaneous pieces to match adjacent tile
surface.
B.
Organic Adhesive: ANSI/TCA A136.1, Type 1; thinset bond type.
C.
Thinset Mortar: ANSI/TCA A118.4; Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water.
D.
Grout
1. Type: Pre -mixed cementitious with latex additive.
2. Colors
a. Walls and Ceilings: Manufacturer's color as selected by Architect.
E.
Mortar Bed
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 Type I.
F
2. Sand: ASTM C-144.
3. Water: Potable.
2.3 MIXES
A. Mortar Bed
1. Mix 1 part Portland Cement to 6 parts damp sand by volume.
2. Add minimum amount of water to produce workable consistency.
B. Thinset and Grout
1. Mix and proportion pre -mix bond coat and grout materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
03879803 TILE 09300 - 3
11/03
n
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that surfaces are plumb and level and have square corners with the following maximum
variation:
1. Subfloor Surfaces: 1/8 inch from true flat in 10 feet with no abrupt, irregularities greater
than 1/32 inch.
2. Vertical Surfaces:
a. Deviation from plumb: 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
b. Deviation from alignment: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing substrate:
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration.
B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
D. Apply conditioner to surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
General
1.
Install adhesive, tile, and grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.
Lay floor and wall tile in grid pattern centered in both directions in each space or on each
wall area.
3.
Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
4.
Place edge strips at exposed tile edges in floors.
5.
Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations through tile.
6.
Form corners and bases neatly.
7.
Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size.
Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.
8.
Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting
9.
Grout tile joints and damp cure for minimum of 72 hours after installation.
10.
Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and at junction of dissimilar
planes.
B.
Expansion and Control Joints
1.
Provide joints where indicated on the drawings, and if not indicated, provide in
conformance with TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
2.
Keep expansion and control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
3.
Seal joint with sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
C.
Mortar Bed
1.
Install cleavage membrane.
2.
Apply mortar bed over cleavage membrane to a thickness as indicated on the drawings.
3.
Use mortar within 2 1/2 hours of initial mixing.
4.
Do not use mortar after it has begun to set.
D.
Floor Tile
1.
Install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA Handbook number 8415.
03879803
TILE 09300 - 4
0
0
11
I
I
0
IF
u
I
u
I
11/03
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
E. Wall and ceiling Tile
1. Over cementitious backer units, install in accordance with ANSI 108.5 and TCA
Handbook number B415.
TOLERANCES
A. Install tile with the following variation from true flatness:
1. 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.
2. From edge of tile to edge of adjacent tile: 1/32 inch.
B. Install grout with the following variation from flush with tile surface:
1. Maximum 3/64 inch for 1/4 inch wide joint.
2. Maximum 1/16 inch for 3/8 inch wide joint.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound tile after setting.
B. Replace hollow sounding units.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Wash tile thoroughly to remove all residue.
B. Use of acid in cleaning solutions is prohibited.
C. Replace all broken chipped or otherwise damaged tile.
D. Remove and replace tiles that do not conform to specified tolerances.
PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for minimum of seven days after installation.
END OF SECTION
03879803 TILE 09300 - 5
11/03
SECTION 09510
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1- General Requirements apply
to Work of this Section.
1 1.2 WORK INCLUDED
r i
A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B.
Acoustical tile.
C.
D.
Non -fire rated assemblies.
Perimeter trim.
E.
Replacement of acoustical units in existing grid system.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09900 — Painting: Painting existing ceiling suspension system.
B.
Section 15325 - Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
C.
Section 15932 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system.
D.
Section 16515 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
1.4 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation
Room Method.
B.
ASTM C635 - Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings.
C.
ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in
Panels.
D.
ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E.
ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building
Partitions.
F.
ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
G.
ASTM E580 - Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in
Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.
H.
ASTM E1111 Measuring the Interzone Altenuation of Ceiling Systems.
I.
ASTM E1414 Airborne Sound Altenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling
t i
Plenum.
J.
ASTM E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products
K.
CISCA - Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice.
L.
UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Fire Resistance Directory, System Ratings.
M.
UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Building Materials Directory.
03879803
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1
11/03
0
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling
panels with five years minimum experience.
B.
Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience.
Q
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform applicable code for combustibility requirements for materials.
B.
Provide acoustical tile with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per ASTM E 84:
1. Flame Spread: Class I, 0-25.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
C.
Identify acoustical tile with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
organization.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
Q
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with other work or
ceiling finishes, interrelation of mechanical and electrical items related to system and. Indicate
method of suspension where interference exists.
C.
Product Data
1. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, accessories.
2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions.
D.
Samples
1. Submit four samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic
units.
a
2. Submit four samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross
runner, and edge trim.
E.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
U
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical units to project site in original unopened packages.
B.
Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and
surface contamination.
C.
Handle acoustic units carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percent
to, during, and after acoustic unit installation.
prior
1.10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A.
Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust
generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
This includes all owner furnished and installed items and cabling.
03879803
11/03
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2
L
T
L
B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard 30 year warranty against rust and corrosion
of the grid system and sagging, warping or shrinking of Type C panels when installed in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and using manufacturer's grid system and
ceiling panels.
B. Grid System: Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty against rust and corrosion
when installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Acoustial Panels: Provide manufacturer's standard 10 year warranty against sagging, warping
or shrinking of Type C panels when installed in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide 1 box of each type acoustical ceiling unit specified to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong World Industries; Lancaster, PA
B. Celotex Building Products; Tampa, FL
C. USG Interiors; Chicago, IL
D. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Suspension Systems
1. Grid — match existing.
a. Conformance: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, as required for ceiling tile
scheduled.
b. Type: Exposed T.
C. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel.
B. Touch-up Paint: Acoustical Unit manufacturer's standard type and color to match acoustic and
grid units.
C. Attachment Devices
1. Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung",
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Wire Hangers, Braces and Ties:
a. Zinc -Coated Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating,
soft temper.
b. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM
C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide
not less than 0.016 inch diameter wire.
03879803 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 3
11/03
D. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure
acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum
deflection of 1/360.
E. Acoustic Units
1. Conformance: ASTM E1264.
2. Type 01 Units
a.
Size: Match existing.
b.
Thickness: Match existing.
C.
Type: Match existing.
d.
Form: Match existing.
e.
Fire Hazard Classification: None
f.
Edge Detail: Square
g.
Surface Color: White
h.
Pattern: Match existing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
C. Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Extend existing acoustical ceiling installations using materials and methods as specified.
B. Clean and repair existing acoustical ceilings which remain or are to be reinstalled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Suspension System
1. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as
supplemented in this Section.
2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum.
3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete.
4. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
5. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the installation of hanger clips
during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required.
6. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
7. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the
nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
8. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units no less than 50 percent of
acoustical unit size in accordance with reflected ceiling plan.
9. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead
load to exceed deflection capability.
10. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner;
or support components independently.
I
u
U
03879803 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 4
11/03 U
11.
Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
12.
Perimeter Molding
a. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces into bed of
acoustic sealant.
b. Use longest practical lengths.
C. Miter inside corners.
s
d. Install at junctions with other interruptions.
B. Acoustic Units
1.
Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
2.
Lay units one way with pattern parallel to match existing.
n
3.
Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces.
4.
Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and
5.
Install level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
}
6.
Rabbet edges of field cut reveal edge border tile to match factory edges. Paint field cut
edges to match factory finish.
7.
Cutting Acoustic Units
a. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.
b. Cut edges to field cut units.
8.
Where bullnose concrete block corners round obstructions occur, install preformed
r...
closures to match perimeter molding.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
B. Maximum variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees
maximum.
3.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide one full cartons extra quantity of each type acoustic units specified to Owner at location
designated.
END OF SECTION
03879803 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 5
11/03
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General
Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
i
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient tile flooring.
B. Resilient base.
C. Sheet vinyl flooring.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers :
B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Wall materials to receive base.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D2047 - Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish -Coated Floor Surfaces
as Measured by the James Machine.
B. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy
Source.
D. ASTM F1066 Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.
E. ASTM F1303 Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing.
F. Rubber Manufacturers Association - Moisture Emission Test Unit
G. FS SS-T-312- Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl and Vinyl Composition.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to 1997 UBC and NFPA 101 code as indicated on drawings for fire performance
ratings as follows:
1. Flooring, critical radiant flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, per
ASTM E 648.
2. Flooring, smoke density: Maximum 450, per ASTM E662.
3. Wall base: Flame spread maximum 75, smoke developed maximum 450 per ASTM E84.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide seaming plan for sheet vinyl flooring.
03879803 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 1
11/03
n
B. Product Data
1. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available for selection by Owner.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions
1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions.
D. Samples
1. Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for initial color selection by
Owner.
E. Closeout Submittals
1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700.
2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested
methods and schedule for cleaning. j
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum seven years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with
minimum seven years documented experience.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS fl
A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a
temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions
above 55 degrees F.
B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during,
and 24 hours after installation of materials.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide one box of each color of tile, 66 sq ft of each color and type of sheet vinyl flooring and
50 lineal feet of base of each material specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Tile Flooring Types F2.
1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI.
2. Tarkett, Inc., Parsippany, NJ.
3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA.
4. Azrock Industries, Inc., San Antonio, TX.
B. Sheet Flooring �[
1. Type F1 �f
a. Vinyl Plastics, Inc.; Sheboygan, WI.
b. Tarkett, Inc.; Parsippany, NJ.
C. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Lancaster, PA.
d. Congoleum Corp.; Lawrenceville, NJ. U
03879803 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 2
11/03 U
G
r
C. Resilient Base
1. Vinyl Plastics, Inc., Sheboygan, WI.
2. Johnson Rubber Company, Middlefield, OH.
3. Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, PA.
4. Mercer Products Co., Inc., Orlando, FL.
5. R.C. Musson Rubber Co., Akron, OH.
6. Roppe Rubber Corp., Fostoria, OH.
D. Accessories: As recommended by flooring manufacturer.
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
IurVr 91411ifc?
A.
Vinyl Composition Tile ASTM F1066; 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick; design and color as
selected by Owner.
1. Conformance: ASTM F1066, Class 2.
J
2. Size: 12 x 12 x 1/8 inch thick
3. Color/Pattern: Color and pattern through total thickness. Color as
selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard color
series.
B.
Homogeneous Sheet Vinyl
1. Type F1
a. Conformance: ASTM F1303, Type H, Grade 1, Class B,
b. Thickness: Total of .080 inch.
C. Color and Pattern: Through total thickness; as selected from
manufacturer's standard.
d. Size: Width of 78 inch x length required to minimize seams.
e. Wearing surface: No -wax.
f. Integral Base: Integral with sheet flooring to a height of 6" above
finish floor
C.
Base
1. Compliance: FS SS-W-40, Type I rubber or Type 2 vinyl; Style A
2. Size: 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; colors as selected by Architect.
3. Length: Roll.
4. Accessories: Premolded end stops and external comers, of same material, size, and color
..
as base.
D.
Accessories
a-�
1. Subfloor Filler: Type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.
2. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
1111
3. Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
4. Sheet Flooring Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl
flooring for heat welding seams, in color matching field color.
5. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
-
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and are
ready to receive Work.
03879803
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 3
11/03
0
B. Verify concrete floors exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.
C. Verify that concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content as recommended by
manufacturer as follows:
1. Prior to installation of any resilient flooring, conduct quantitative moisture emissions
tests in accordance with Rubber Manufacturers Association Guidelines.
2. Maximum Allowable Moisture Content: 31bs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours.
3. Test Quantities: Minimum of 4 tests for areas up to 5,000 sq. ft. and one additional test
for each additional 5,000 sq. ft. of floor area.
4. Allow areas of floor containing more than the allowable moisture content to dry a
minimum of 48 hours before retesting.
***OR***
5. If the adhesive can be peeled easily from the floor surfaces, the floor is not sufficiently
dry.
6. Apply resilient flooring when tests show that the adhesive adheres tightly to the floor
surface,
7. If concrete floors are in contact with the ground or over unventilated crawl spaces, use
small patches of primer in lieu of adhesive to test for moisture.
D. Verify floor and lower wall surfaces are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new
adhesive and finish materials.
E. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps.
B. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler.
C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface.
D. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
E. Vacuum clean substrate.
F. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-thru" or interference with adhesion by substances
that cannot be removed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
2. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion
3. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is
dissimilar.
4. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where
indicated. Installation of flooring with stainless steel. Secure resilient strips by adhesive.
5. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to
produce tight joints.
6. Install flooring in recessed floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.
B. Sheet Flooring
1. Lay flooring with joints and seams in accordance with seaming plan. Lay out seams to
avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns carefully at seams.
2. Double cut sheet; provide heat welded seams.
e
0
11
in
11
03879803 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 4
11/03
H
r 1�
C.
I
I
r
3. Carry sheet flooring up walls in toilets, shower/ toilet and janitor's closets. Terminate
with metal edging except in shower/ toilet rooms, heat or chemically seal to adjacent
wall vinyl specified in Section 09964.
C. Tile Flooring
1. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed.
2. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile
pattern.
3. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter.
4. Install tile to match existing pattern.
D. Base
1. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between
joints.
2. Miter internal corners.
3. At external corners, use premolded units.
4. At exposed ends, use premolded units.
5. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
6. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Subfloor Flatness: Maximum 1/8 inch deviation in 10 feet.
B. Vertical Alignment (Offset from edge of tile to edge of tile): None allowed.
C. Horizontal Alignment (Offset from a straight line): Plus or minus 1/16 inch in any length.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning.
B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
C. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Section 01700 -Contract Closeout: Protecting installed construction.
B. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
03879803 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09650 - 5
11/03
F
L
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1- General Requirements apply
to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Surface finish schedule.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 05500 — Metal Fabrications: Handrail Painting.
B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Texture on gypsum wallboard surfaces.
C. Section 09800 - Special Coatings
D. Section 15391 - Marking and Identification: Color schedule for equipment and piping.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
B. ASTM D1546 - Method for Performance Tests of Clear Floor Sealers.
C. ASTM D 1730 - Practices for Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum Surfaces for Painting.
D. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
E. ASTM D2092 - Practice for Preparation of Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Surfaces for
Painting.
F. ASTM D2486 - Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Interior Latex Flat Wall Paints.
G. ASTM D3359 - Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test.
H. ASTM D3730 - Guide for Testing High -Performance Interior Architectural Wall Coatings.
I. ASTM D4138 - Test Method for Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating
Systems by Destructive Means.
J. ASTM D4262 - Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces.
K. ASTM D4263 - Test Methods for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method.
L. ASTM D4414 - Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch Gages.
M. ASTM D4540 - Guide for Testing Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints.
N. ASTM D4541 - Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion
Testers
O. Steel Structure Painting Council - Steel Structures Painting Manual
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
03879803
11/03
PAINTING
09900 - 1
0
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE n
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish
products with five years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years
documented experience. n.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to UBC Class I and NFPA 101 Class A for flame (I(
spread/smoke development rating requirements for finishes of 0-25/0-450.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Provide product data on all finishing products.
2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed application instructions.
B. Samples
1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available
for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection.
C. Certificates
{�
1. Submit paint manufacturer's certificate(s) stating the following:
a. Paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide.
b. Paints for interior use contain no insecticide.
C. Paints for interior use contain no more than 0.06 percent lead.
d. Paints proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air pollution
District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is
located.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for
U
mixing and reducing.
D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. and a maximum of 90
degrees F., in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of i
finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. l
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above p�
50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. I `
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors; l�d
50 degrees F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Synthetic Finishes: 65 degrees F. for
interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface. ( l
lJ
03879803 PAINTING 09900 - 2
11/03
P" }
U
1Pj
Ij
C
1
1.10 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner at location designated.
B. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. ICI Paint Stores, Cleveland, OH.
B. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc., San Carlos, CA.
C. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA.
D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Coatings
1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
3. Compatible with existing coatings in renovation areas.
B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality.
C. Stripping Agents: As recommended by manufacturer for finish to be removed.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule.
B. The schedule is based on the products of ICI Paint Stores and Kelly Moore Paint Co., Inc. as
follows:
NO.
PRODUCT NAME (ICI PAINT)
TYPE
1.
1000
Ultra-Basecoat Primer
Latex
2.
1030
PVA Primer/ Sealer
Latex
3.
1110
Ultra -Hide Stain Jammer
Vinyl Toluene
4.
1310
Ultra -Hide Prime-n-Finish
Alkyd
5.
1370
Spraymaster DTG
Alkyd -Flat
6.
1402
Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel
Latex - Eggshell
7.
1406
Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel
Latex -Semi Gloss
8.
1434
Ultra -Wall Enamel
Latex, Low Lustre
9.
1482
Spray Master Pro Uni-Grip WB
Latex -Eggshell
10.
1516
Ultra -Hide Wall & Trim Enamel
Alkyd, Semi -Gloss
11.
1582
Spray Master Dryfall
Alkyd -Eggshell
12.
1700
Woodpride Stain
Alkyd — Oil
13.
1802
Woodpride Interior Varnish
Waterborne -Satin
14.
1808
Woodpride - WB Interior Varnish
Waterborne Clear Gloss
15.
1916
QD Sanding Sealer
Vinyl Toluene
16.
2000
Decra-Shield exterior primer
Acrylic -Latex
17.
2406
Decra-Shield
Acrylic -Semi -Gloss
18.
2516
Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Enamel
Alkyd -Semi -Gloss
03879803
11/03
PAINTING
09900 - 3
19.
3038
Ultra -Hide Durus
Acrylic Gloss
20.
4000
Bloxfil Block Filler
Acrylic
21.
4020
Devflex DTM Primer
Acrylic
22.
4160
Devguard Tank & Structural Primer
Alkyd
23.
4206
Devflex Acrylic
Waterborne Acrylic, Semi -Gloss
24.
4308
Devguard Industrial Enamel
Alkyd -Gloss
25.
4406
Tru-Glaze-WB
Waterborne Epoxy, Semi -Gloss
26.
HF10
High Heat Coating Silicone
Flat
27.
HT-12
High Heat Silicone
Flat
NO. PRODUCT NAME (KELLY-MOORE) TYPE
1. 70 Kel-Guard
Synthetic Rubber
C. Dry mill film thickness (DMFT) indicated is minimum acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Moisture Content
1. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter.
a. Field test concrete in accordance with ASTM D4263.
b. Test moisture content of wood in accordance with ASTM D2016.
2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following
maximums:
a. Gypsum Soffits: 12 percent.
b. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Masonry, Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
d. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
e. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
f. Concrete Floors: 7 percent.
g. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: 12 percent.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Unpainted Surfaces
1. General
a. Prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended procedures
unless higher level of preparation is specified.
b. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to
preparing surfaces or finishing.
C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
d. Shellac and seal marks on wood surfaces which may bleed through surface
finishes.
03879803 PAINTING 09900 - 4
11/03 Id
v
c
11
2. Impervious Surfaces
a. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach.
b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
3. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces
a. Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials.
b. Apply latex based compatible sealer or primer.
4. Insulated Coverings
a. Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
5. Concrete Floors
a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D4258.
b. Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water.
C. Verify required acid -alkali balance is achieved in accordance with ASTM D4262.
d. Allow to dry.
6. Galvanized Surfaces
a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730.
b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.
C. Apply coat of etching primer.
7. Aluminum Surfaces
a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730.
b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent.
C. Apply coat of etching primer.
8. Unit Masonry Surfaces
a. Clean concrete in accordance with ASTM D4258.
b. Clean unit masonry in accordance with ASTM D4261.
C. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter.
d. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and
allow to dry.
e. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of
sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water.
f. Allow to dry.
9. Plaster Surfaces
a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster.
b. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
C. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.
10. Steel and Iron Surfaces
a. Concealed Locations
1) Remove all grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with
paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation.
2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts,
and nuts are similarly cleaned.
b. Exposed Locations
1) Remove all grease, dirt, mill scale, rust and weld slag in accordance with
paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation.
2) Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts,
and nuts are similarly cleaned.
11. Wood Doors
a. Seal top and bottom edges with clear or opaque primer as required for finish
scheduled.
03879803
11/03
r : t.rri.
09900 - 5
0
B. Primed and Previously Painted Surfaces
1. All Surfaces
a. Thoroughly clean of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter.
b. Remove blistering, cracking, flaking, peeling or other deteriorated coating.
C. Roughen slick/glossy surfaces.
d. Repair damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips and
spalls with suitable materials to match adjacent areas.
e. Feather edges of chipped paint and sand smooth.
f. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer.
g. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.
h. Clean surfaces with solvent.
i. Prepare non-ferrous surfaces in accordance with paint manufacturer's
recommended level of preparation.
j. Chemically Strip surfaces bare to substrate where indicated on drawings.
2. New Shop Primed Steel Surfaces
a. Where higher level of preparation is specified in this Section than in other
Sections for unpainted steel, comply with requirements of this Section and
following:
1) At Contractor's option, either shop or field prepare steel in accordance with
procedures specified in this Section.
2) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with lesser requirements
specified in other sections, it is considered a temporary protective coating
only.
(a) Remove temporary shop coatings and prepare steel in accordance
with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation for
unpainted surfaces.
3) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with paint
manufacturer's recommended level of preparation, field prepare in
accordance with paragraph "All Surfaces" above.
4) Prime coat specified under paragraph 3.9, SURFACE FINISH
SCHEDULE, can be eliminated except for bare areas requiring touch-up.
3. Existing Steel Surfaces
a. Prepare in accordance with requirements specified in this Section for Unpainted
Surfaces in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of
preparation.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from
disfiguring other surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Paint, Stain and Varnish
1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
3. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
M,
d
0
U
U
03879803 PAINTING 09900 - 6
11/03 U
G
r.
F
R
4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
7. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
8. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish
with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Section 15391 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment,
ductwork, piping, and conduit.
B. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets,
collars and supports, occurring in finished areas except mechanical and electrical rooms.
C. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted
accidentally.
D. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of
flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to
match face panels.
E. Paint exposed conduit, boxes and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas except
mechanical and electrical rooms.
F. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment
before installing equipment.
G. Color code equipment, plumbing piping, and exposed ductwork in accordance with
requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering.
H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
I. Shop Primed Equipment
1. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
2. Prepare and paint shop primed equipment as specified for base material and location.
J. Shop Painted Equipment
1. Prepare and paint shop painted equipment as specified for base material and location as
follows:
a. Interior Finished Spaces (excluding mechanical and electrical rooms): Paint
surfaces to match color of adjacent finish. This applies, but is not limited to,
mechanical diffusers and electrical panels and covers.
b. Exterior Equipment: Where noted on drawings, paint exposed mechanical and
electrical equipment color as selected by Architect.
3.6 PROTECTION OF DISSRAILAR METALS AND METALS IN MASONRY AND CONCRETE
A. Where specified in other sections, protect dissimilar metals that are in direct contact and metals
set on or filled with mortar or concrete with one coat of coal tar paint equal to Carboline
Bitumastic Super Service Black.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General
1. When requested by Architect, provide verification of coating application and durability
in accordance with specified requirements at no cost to the Owner.
03879803
11/03
PAINTING
09900 - 7
3.8
B. Steel Surfaces
1. Dry Film Thickness: Verify in accordance with SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Paint
Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
2. Adhesion: Confirm adhesion of coating system to substrate in accordance with either
ASTM D3359 (Method B) or ASTM D4541.
C. Concrete Floors
1. Verify compliance in accordance with ASTM D1546.
D. Other Surfaces
1. Film Thickness
a. Measure wet film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4414 and convert to dry
film thickness by multiplying wet film thickness by percent soilds and by percent
solvent added.
b. Measure dry film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4138.
E. Scrubbability
1. Test interior flat latex paints in accordance with ASTM D2486.
F. Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints: Test in accordance with ASTM D4540.
G. High -Performance Interior Architectural Wall Coatings: Test in accordance with ASTM
D3730.
ADJUSTING
A. Repair surfaces which have been destructively checked for dry film thickness.
B. Recoat surfaces determined not to be in conformance with dry film thicknesses specified.
C. Recoat in accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.9 CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed
metal containers and remove daily from site.
3.10 SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Surfaces
Surface
Aluminum
Ferrous Metals
* Gates,
Fencing,
Bollards,
Bumper Guards,
Railings,
Exposed Lintels,
Misc. Metal
1st Coat (DMFT)
4020 (3.0)
4160 (2.0)
2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat MMF)
2406 (2.0) 2406 (2.0)
U
4308 (2.0) 4308 (2.0)
**or** **or** 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) t
03879803 PAINTING 09900 - 8
11/03
W
* Muffler Exhausts
Temp to 1000 Deg.
HT-12 (1.0)
HT-12 (1.0)
Temp to 500 Deg.
HT-10 (1.0)
HT-10 (1.0)
* Doors, Frames
4160 (2.0)
4308 (2.0)
4308 (2.0)
and Equipment
**or**
**or**
2516 (2.0)
2516 (2.0)
* Galvanized Metals
4160 (2.0)
4308 (2.0)
4308 (2.0)
Louvers,
**or**
**or**
Ducts,
2516 (2.0)
2516 (2.0)
Downspouts,
Misc. Wood
2000 (2.1)
2406 (1.4)
2406 (1.4)
B. Interior Surfaces
Surface
1st Coat (DMFT)
2nd Coat (DMFT)
3rd Coat (DMF)
Concrete
* Concrete Walls
1030 Varies
1406(1.4)
1406(1.4)
* Concrete Floors
70(1.0)
70 (1.0)
Concrete Masonry
(CMU)
4000 Varies
1406 (1.4)
1406 (1.4)
**or**
**or**
1402 (1.4)
1402 (1.4)
**or**
**or**
1434 (1.4)
1434 (1.4)
* Plaster
1000 varies
1406 (1.4)
1406 (1.4)
**or**
**or**
1402 (1.4)
1402 (1.4)
**or**
**or**
1434 (1.4)
1434 (l.4)
Metal Decking
Galvanized
1370
1582 (2.0)
1582 (2.0)
Primed
1482 (2.0)
1482 (2.0)
**or**
**or**
1582 (2.0)
1582 (2.0)
Ferrous Metals
Bar Joists
4160 (2.0)
1482 (2.0)
1482 (2.0)
& Beams
**or**
**or**
(Exposed)
1582 (2.0)
1582 (2.0)
03879803
PAINTING
09900 - 9
11/03
Doors and Frames,
4160(2.0)
1516 (2.0)
1516 (2.0)
Railings,
**or**
**or**
Equipment
4308 (2.0)
4308 (2.0)
Galvanized Metal
* Ducts,
1370
1516(2.0)
1516(2.0)
Louvers,
**or**
**or**
**or**
Piping,
4160 (2.0)
4308 (2.0)
4308 (2.0)
Vents
Gypsum Drywall
* Surfaces to
1110 (1.1)
1110 (1.1)
receive vinyl
(if required)
wall covering.
* Room no's.
1030 (1.1)
4206 (1.5)
4206 (1.5)
Surface
1st Coat (DMFT)
2nd Coat (DMFT)
3rd Coat (DMF)
All other
1030 (1.1)
1406 (1.5)
1406 (1.5)
spaces.
**or**
**or**
1402 (1.5)
1402 (1.5)
**or**
**or**
1434 (1.5)
1434 (1.5)
* Wood Drawer
1802 (1.0)
1802 (1.0)
& Cabinet
Thin 50%
Thin 25%
Interiors
**or**
**or**
Transp. Finish.
1808 (1.0)
1808 (1.0)
* Trim, Transp.
1802 (1.0)
1802 (1.0)
Finish
Thin 50%
Thin 25%
**or**
**or**
1808 (1.0)
1808 (1.0)
* Trim, Transp.
1700 Varies
1802 (1.0)
1802 (1.0)
Finish (Stained)
Thin 50%
Thin 25%
**or**
**or**
1808 (1.0)
1808 (1.0)
* Cabinets, Ext.
1700 Varies
1802 (1.0)
1802 (1.0)
& Interiors
Thin 50%
Thin 25%
Transp. Finish
**or**
**or**
(Stained)
1808 (1.0)
1808 (1.0)
* Cabinets, Ext.
1310 (1.5)
1516 (1.4)
1516 (1.4)
& Interiors
Opaque Finish.
03879803 PAWTING 09900 - 10
11/03
Wood Doors
Transp. Finish
1802 (1.0)
1802 (1.0)
Thin 50%
Thin 50%
**or**
**or**
1808 (1.0)
1808 (1.0)
Stained &
Transp. Finish
1700 Varies
1802 (1.0)
1802 (1.0)
Thin 50%
Thin 50%
**or**
**or**
1808 (1.0)
1808 (1.0)
3.11 COLOR SELECTION SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Section 09915 — Color Schedule.
END OF SECTION
I
03879803 PAINTING 09900 - 11
r 11/03
SECTION 09915
COLOR SCHEDULE
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
n A. Color of the interior materials and products that are exposed to view in the finished
'LJI construction. The word "color" includes surface color, pattern and texture as indicated.
B. Patterns and textures required for interior finishes, including both factory applied and field
applied colors unless specified elsewhere.
i C. When color is not designated for items, propose a color for approval.
L 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
aA. General
1. Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other sections of the
specifications.
2. Specific locations where the various materials are required are shown on the drawings.
3. Items not designated for color in this section may be specified in other sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR COLOR SCHEDULE
A. Walls
1. Plaster with marblecrete finish to match existing.
2. Plaster — accent banding to match existing texture and color.
B. Trim
f 1. Bollards: Painted steel to match existing
L 2. Downspouts: Prefinish to match existing.
3. Sealants: Match existing
4. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Match existing
5. Louvers: Match Hollow metal door color.
2.2 INTERIOR COLOR SCHEDULE
All colors to be selected by Owner during submittal process. No colors will be selected until all
submittals requiring color selections have been submitted for review.
A. Floor Finishes
1. Fl — seamless sheet vinyl with integral 6" base.
03879803 COLOR SCHEDULE 09915 - 1
11/03
2.
F2 — VCT.
3.
F3 — sealed concrete.
4.
F4 — ceramic tile.
B. Base Finishes
1.
B 1 — Integral seamless sheet vinyl base 6" high.
2.
B2 - 4" rubber.
3.
B3 — ceramic tile.
C. Wall
Finishes
1.
W 1— qwb no texture epoxy paint finish.
2.
W2 — qwb, orange peel texture, latex paint finish.
3.
W3 — Ceramic tile.
4.
W4 — Block filler primer, oil based paint finish.
D. Ceiling
Finishes
1.
Cl - qwb, no texture epoxy paint finish.
2.
C2 - Suspended acoustical ceiling.
3.
C3 - Exposed structure above.
4.
C4 — Ceramic tile.
E. Miscellaneous
1.
P1— Laboratory casework.
2.
P2 — Hollow metal door frames.
3.
P3 — Wood doors.
4.
P4 — Hollow metal doors.
5.
P5 — Ships ladder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03879803 COLOR SCHEDULE 09915 - 2
11/03
� 11
I
1�
c
SECTION 09960
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. High performance coatings and special preparation of surfaces.
B. Coating system is designed and specified around Tnemec products. Substitutions in accordance
with Section 01600 are acceptable of submitted for review and found to be equal or greater in
specified performance.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09250 — Gypsum Board System.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. FS TT-C-535 - Coating, Epoxy, Two -Component, for Interior Use on Metal, Wood, Wallboard,
Painted Surfaces, Concrete and Masonry.
C. FS TT-C-542 - Coating, Polyurethane, Oil -Free, Moisture Curing.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide coating systems that meet the following minimum performance criteria, unless more
stringent criteria are specified:
1. Coats 3 and 4.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: 0/0 flame spread/smoke generated, when tested
in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. Abrasion Resistance: 28.8mg, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4060.
C. Impact Resistance: 160/80, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2794.
d. Hardness: 2H, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3363.
e. Adhesion: 967 psi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3359.
f. Lead Content: None.
g. Stain Resistance: 7 days, when tested in accordance with TTM - 59.
h. Scrubbability: Excellent.
i. Gloss and Color Retention: Excellent.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data indicating coating materials and performance ratings.
C. Submit two samples 24 x 24 inch in size illustrating colors available for selection.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
03879803 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 1
11/03
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Closeout procedures.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and cleaning requirements for coatings,
repair and patching techniques.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.8 MOCK-UP
A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Mock-up requirements.
B. Provide wall/ceiling mock-up, 8 feet long by 8 feet wide, illustrating coating, color, surface
sheen, and texture, for each specified coating.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F or above 90 degrees F.
C. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of
coating.
D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface.
E. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for bond to substrate, degradation of chemical resistance and.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Carboline Company.
B. Coronado Paints.
C. Duron Inc.
D. MAB Industrial Coatings.
E. Tnemec Co., Inc.
F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
03879803 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 2
11/03 f1
7
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Coatings - General: Provide complete four -coat systems formulated and recommended by
manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats
specified includes primer coat.
a 1. Lead content: None.
2. Chromium content, as zinc chromate or strontium chromate: None.
3. Maximum VOC content: As required by applicable regulations.
4. Colors: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Epoxy Prime Coating: Two coats minimum 6 mils total dry film thickness.
1. Prime Coat: Solid color as selected.
2. Second Coat: Solid color; color as selected.
a. Thin second coat by 20% with TNEMEC 414 thinner as required by
manufacturer.
3. Product: Series 66 Hi -build epoxyoline manufactured by TNEMEC.
C. Epoxy Coating: Two coats polyester finish.
1. Percentage of solids by volume: 60.0, minimum.
a 2. Dry film thickness, per coat: 3.0, minimum.
3. Comply with the performance requirements specified above for severe exposure.
4. First Coat: Solid color; color as selected.
a. Thin first coat up to 5% as recommended by manufacturer with TNEMEC a1-39
thinner.
5. Second Coat: Solid color; color as selected.
6. Product: Series 291 CRU manufactured by TNEMEC.
D. Primers: As recommended by coating manufacturer for specific substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
�J 3.1 EXAMINATION
C A.
B. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Coordination and project conditions.
C. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the coating
manufacturer. Obtain and follow manufacturer's instructions for examination and testing of
substrates.
D. Drywall substrate must be clean, dry and free of all contaminants.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter.
B. Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal surface
with shellac.
C. Remove finish hardware, fixture covers, and accessories and store.
D. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from overspray; mask if necessary
to provide adequate protection. Repair damage.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Apply primer to all gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces, unless specifically not required by
coating manufacturer.
03879803 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 3
11/03
B. Apply coatings to thicknesses specified.
C. Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in
color, texture, or finish. Finish edges, crevices, corners, and other changes in dimension with
full coating thickness.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final cleaning.
B. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
C. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material.
D. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously
removed.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Colors: To be selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
B. Walls and ceilings where scheduled:
1. Prime Coat: TNEMEC Series 66 Hi -build eqoxyline.
Thinning: Thin Series 66 by 20% with TNEMEC 41-4 thinner (Required) thin Series
291 up to 5% if needed with TNEMEC 41-39 thinner.
END OF SECTION
03879803 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 - 4
11/03 Id
9
SECTION 10210
METAL WALL LOUVERS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fixed louvers and frames.
B. Insect Screening
C. Blank out sheeting.
n1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Prepared exterior wall opening.
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
C. Section 09220 — Portland Cement Plaster: Prepared exterior wall opening.
D. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting.
E. Division 15 Section - Fans: Ductwork attachment to louver.
F. Section 15714 - Filters: Filter attachment to louver.
1.4 REFERENCES
I
A.
AA - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
CB.
s
Extrusions and Panels.
C.
AAMA 606.1- Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
D.
AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for
Architectural Aluminum.
E.
AAMA 608.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color
Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.
F.
AMCA 500 (Air Movement Control Association) - Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and
Shutters.
G.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed
and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips.
H.
ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
I.
ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars.
J.
ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
K.
ASTM A653/A653M - Sheet Steel, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated by the
Hot -Dip Process, Lock -Forming Quality.
L.
ASTM A740 - Hardware Cloth (Woven or Welded Galvanized Steel Wire Fabric).
M.
ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate.
N.
ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bar, Rod, Wire, Shape, and Tube.
03879803
METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 1
11103
1.5
1.6
O. FS RR-W-360A - Wire Fabric, Industrial
P. FS RR-W-365A - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening).
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Fixed Louver Section
1. Installed louver to permit passage of air velocity as specified in Division 15 and 16
without blade vibration or noise, with maximum static pressure loss of 0.10 inches.
2. Fabricate louver to permit minimum percent free area as specified in Division 15 and 16.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
11
ire
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of AMCA certified louvers with three O
years experience.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Indicate on shop drawings, layout, elevations, dimensions and tolerances; head, jamb
and sill details; blade configuration, screening; and frames.
2. Provide product data on preassembled louvers describing design characteristics,
maximum recommended air velocity, free area, materials and finishes.
3. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
4. Submit operation and maintenance data including lubrication schedules and adjustment
requirements.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with installation of unit masonry and plaster.
B. Coordinate work of this Section with mechanical ductwork and electrical services to motorized
devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Cesco Products, Minneapolis, MN.
B. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.; Cincinnati, OH.
C. Ruskin Manufacturing, Grandview, MO.
D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 6063-T5.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5.
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A527, galvanized to G90 zinc coating, factory primed for field painting.
D. Steel Shapes: ASTM A283, galvanized to G60 zinc coating.
E. Fasteners and Anchors: ASTM A307, galvanized steel type.
03879803 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 2
11/03
U
F. Accessories
1. Linkage
a. Concealed in jamb.
2. Operator
a. Control circuit: 2 wire, 120 volt, 60 hertz.
b. Return: Automatic spring powered upon power interruption.
C. Case: Die cast aluminum, NEMA Type I.
d. Operating environment: -40 to 136 degrees F.
a e. Accessories: Splined crank arm, linkage connector as required by conditions and
dustproof cover.
G. Insect Screening: 18 x 14 interwoven wire mesh of .011 inch diameter bronze wire, 0.063 inch
diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave, square design.
H. Primer: Manufacturer's standard baked on type.
I. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame.
ff J. Sealants: Type specified in Section 07900.
l'
2.3 FABRICATION
CA. Louver Size: 4 inches deep, face measurements as indicated or required to cover cavity between
wythes of walls.
CB. Louver Blade Design: 1. Fixed Louver Section
a. 081 inch thick extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5 sloped at 45 degrees; K-style;
integral waterstops on blade.
C. Louver Frame
1. General
a. Channel shaped with welded corner joints.
b. Fixed sections to mesh tightly to form rigid waterproof mullion with no exposed
fasteners.
2. Fixed Louver Section:.125 inch thick extruded aluminum, alloy 6063-T5.
D. Sill Flashings: One piece per louver; roll formed to shape indicated on drawings or if not
indicated as required in conformance with SMACNA 7-3 B.
E. Screens: Permanently install screen mesh in shaped frame with reinforced corner construction;
screw to louver frame.
F. Blank Out Sheeting: Same material as louver and frame.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Exterior Aluminum Surfaces and Exterior Surface of Blank -Out Sheeting: 1.2 mil thick
fluorocarbon coating, color as selected by Architect anodized coating complying with AA mill
finish.
B. Interior Aluminum Surfaces, Screens and Blank -Out Sheeting: 1.2 mil thick fluorocarbon
coating, color as selected by Architect anodized coating complying with AA mill finish.
u
03879803 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 3
11/03
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by the louver manufacturer.
B. Verify that proper power supply is available.
C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install louvers level and plumb.
C. Secure louvers in opening framing with exposed fasteners removable for future generator
installation.
D. Align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion of moisture to
exterior.
E. Install insect screening to interior of louver.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust operable louvers for freedom of movement with actual control; lubricate operating
joints.
B. Clean surfaces and components.
END OF SECTION
03879803 METAL WALL LOUVERS 10210 - 4
11/03
USECTION 11609
�i STERILIZING EQUIPMENT
aPART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contractor Construction, Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1—General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
u 1.2 WORK INCLUDES
[� A. Laboratory steam sterilizers.
a1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Division 15: Mechanical.
QB. Division 16: Electrical.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The sterilizer shall comply with or meet the requirements of:
1. ASME Section VIII, Division 1 Code for Pressure Vessels.
2. Uniform Plumbing Code.
3. ETL listed to UL 3101-1 by Intertek Testing Services.
4. ETL listed to IEC 6 10 10-1 and IEC 61010-2-041 by Intertek Testing Services.
5. Cycle performance validated to ANSI/AAMI ST8.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single source responsibility: Equipment and accessories shall be manufactured or
! furnished by a single manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer's qualifications: Modern plant with proper tools, dies, fixtures and skilled
workmen to produce high quality laboratory equipment, and shall meet the following
minimum requirements:
1. Ten years or more experience in manufacture of laboratory equipment of type
specified.
I 2. Ten installations of equal or larger size and requirements.
C. Installer's qualifications: Factory trained and/or certified by the manufacturer.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Plans at 1/4 IN = 1 FT-0 IN scale or larger.
2. Elevations at 1/2 IN = 1 FT-0 IN scale or larger.
3. Cross reference shop drawings to Contract Documents.
B. Product data:
1. Manufacturer technical data and specifications.
C. Project information:
1. Certification of installer qualifications.
03879803 STERILIZING EQUIPMENT 11609 - 1
11/03
D. Contract closeout information:
1. Operating and maintenance data.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Verify all dimensions at site.
B. Verify locations of all existing items and items and work furnished in other sections.
C. If necessary to vary from arrangement indicated because of structural, mechanical,
electrical or other considerations, make such variations only after approval of Architect.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Schedule delivery of equipment so that spaces are sufficiently complete that material can
be installed immediately following delivery.
B. Protect finished surfaces from soiling or damage during handling and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Base: Getinge/Castle, 1777 East Henrietta Road, Rochester, New York 14623 (585)475-
1400.
B. Optional:
1. Steris Corporation
2. Primus
2.2 EQUIPMENT LIST
A. E02 (reference sheet A-103), model 533LS gravity and vacuum steam sterilizer.
1. 21 IN. x 21 IN. x 38 IN. chamber.
2. Manual door operation.
3. Double door configuration, recessed both ends.
4. Printer at control/load end.
5. Control console on unit at control/load end.
6. Biological sealing flange at control/load end.
7. House steam.
8. Interior rack with 2 shelves.
9. Integral electric steam generator.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Chamber: 0.197 IN. duplex stainless steel, type 2205.
B. Door: 0.236 IN. duplex stainless steel, type 2205, vertical sliding type.
C. Jacket:316Ti.
D. Interior chamber shall be polished to a high luster finish.
E. Steam connection to jacket and chamber: 316L stainless steel.
F. Gaskets: 0.63 IN. one-piece silicone, replaceable without tools.
G. Insulation: 1-1/2 IN. fiberglass.
H. Paneling: 0.050 IN. 300 series #3 finish stainless steel.
03879803 STERILIZING EQUIPMENT 11609 - 2
11/03
U
it
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Chamber shall be constructed of an inner shell reinforced by a series "U" channels that
form the outer jacket of the chamber.
B. Pressure vessel construction shall meet ASME code requirements for working pressures up
to 45 psig.
C. Shelves shall be adjustable on 2-1/2 IN. centers.
D. Rack supports and shelves shall be easily removable for cleaning.
E. Unidirectional door operation: Remote/unload end door cannot be opened until a cycle is
completed once the control/load end door is opened.
F. Compressed air backup system shall maintain door gasket seal in the event of a utility loss.
G. Integral steam generator shall be designed for fully automatic operation at standard
voltages, with on -off selector switch, adjustable pressure control, adjustable high -limit
control, adjustable over -pressure cutoff, automatic fill valve, high water cutoff and ASME
UV rated 100 psi pressure relief valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which products are to be installed.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Use manufacturer's printed instructions or Drawings in all cases where items or details are
not indicated.
B. Except for final mechanical and electrical connection, installation of each item shall be
complete in every respect, including all necessary items required for proper operation and
appearance.
C. Provide all trim, fillers, closures, stands, supports, sleeves, collars, escutcheons, ferrules,
brackets, braces or other miscellaneous items required for complete installation.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Repair all damage done to premises as result of installation.
B. Remove all debris left by this installation.
C. Test and adjust all items of equipment for satisfactory operation.
END OF SECTION
03879803
11/03
STERILIZING EQUIPMENT
11609 - 3
SECTION 11610
BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS CLASS II
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELETED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1—
General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDES
A. Biological Safety Cabinets, Class H, Type B2.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Division 15.
B. Division 16.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NSF International - Standard 49 for Biohazard Cabinetry.
B. UL - Standard 3101-1.
1.5 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINET GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Biological Safety Cabinets shall function as a containment unit that will protect the
operator, product & the environment from aerosol particulate produced or generated within
the cabinet. This is to be accomplished by capture within HEPA filters that are installed in
the cabinet.
B. Cabinet shall have Momentum Air Curtain downflow velocity profile, i.e., a higher
velocity of downflow behind the viewscreen relative to downflow velocity over the work
surface.
C. High velocity return air slots shall be located at each end of the front access opening. These
slots help to prevent air from being drawn into the work area along the edges of the side
wall and from escaping the work area to the ambient environment.
D. The sliding viewscreen shall be slanted at an angle of 10° from vertical, capable of moving
to a fully closed position during shutdown periods.
E. All biologically contaminated ducts, plenums and work area side walls shall be permanent
metal construction and maintained under negative pressure or enclosed within a negative
pressure zone.
F. Cabinet shall be capable of automatically handling a 60% minimum increase in filter
loading without reducing total air delivery by more than 10%. With the use of the speed
controller, the cabinet shall be capable of handling a 180% increase in filter loading. Test
data to verify these capabilities shall be available upon request.
G. Complete unit shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory (UL) for electrical, fire and
personal safety.
H. Sliding sash high velocity air return slots shall be provided along the entire top edge of the
work area to prevent migration of contamination behind the sliding glass viewscreen.
03879803 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS CLASS 11 11610 - 1
11/03
0
I. Biological Safety Cabinets will have uniform downflow velocity as defined by the NSF 49
Standard, Section 5 — Subsection 5.9.1.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer shall provide a certified copy of the personnel, product and cross -
contamination (biological) tests, equivalent to or more demanding than as specified in NSF
International Standard #49, for each delivered unit.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate equipment locations, large scale plans, elevations, cross sections,
rough -in and anchor placement dimensions with tolerances and all required clearances.
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for each component and item of laboratory
equipment specified. Include component dimensions, configurations, construction details,
joint details, attachments, utility and service requirements with locations.
D. Instructions: Written instructions in booklet form providing additional details on safe and
proper operation and maintenance.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
0
0
0
In
I
A. Single Source Responsibility: Biological Cabinet casework and other laboratory equipment D
or accessories, shall be manufactured or furnished by a single laboratory furniture
company.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Modern plant with proper tools, dies, fixtures and skilled
labor to produce high quality laboratory casework and equipment.
C. Installer's Qualifications: Factory certified by the manufacturer.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Schedule delivery of equipment so that spaces are sufficiently complete and the equipment
can be installed immediately following delivery.
B. Protect finished surfaces from soiling or damage during handling and installation. Keep
covered with polyethylene film or other protective covering.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install equipment until the following conditions have been met:
1. Windows and doors are installed and the building is secure and weather tight.
2. Ceiling, overhead ductwork and lighting are installed.
3. All painting is completed and floor tile located below casework is installed.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warrant against defects in materials and workmanship on biological safety cabinets and
accessories; include labor and replacement parts (except HEPA filters and lamps).
B. Warranty Period: Two years from date of installation or three years from date of purchase,
whichever is sooner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Base: The Baker Company, Sanford, Maine 04073 USA, 800-992-2537.
I
I
III
0
In
I
03879803 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS CLASS II
11/03
11610 - 2
a
I
B. Optional:
1. Labconco.
2. Nuaire.
2.2 EQUIPMENT LIST
A. Equipment items E08, E09 and E15 (reference sheet A-103) shall be SterilchemGARD III
Advance model SG603TX.
2.3 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINET MATERIALS
A. Viewscreen shall be constructed of 1/4" safety plate glass, with a maximum opening of 18"
for equipment loading.
B. Cabinet exterior construction: seal panels of 16 gauge cold -rolled steel and dress panels of
18 gauge cold -rolled steel, baked enamel finish Perma White.
C. Cabinet interior (work area) construction: one-piece 16 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel,
with a smooth, 7 1/6" radius between rear and side walls, and easily cleanable, radiused
corners on the work surface tray.
D. Work area shall be provided with two GFI protected duplex outlets with drip -proof covers
and circuit breakers.
E. Cabinet shall have a unitized drain pan with 7 1/6" radius on all sides and a fully -
removable work surface and work surface supports to facilitate cleaning.
F. Stainless steel air diffuser filter protector provided in work area.
G. 27. Speed controller shall automatically compensate for line voltage changes to maintain
constant voltage to motor while allowing for manual adjustments to accommodate filter
loading.
H. A single power cord and plug shall be provided for electrical power source.
I. One petcock shall be provided on the right wall inside the cabinet. Three additional capped
penetrations shall be provided for addition of future petcocks, two on the left wall and one
on the right wall.
J. Unit shall have standard HEPA filters with an efficiency of 99.99% when filtering particles
of 0.3-micron size.
K. Unit shall have a washable, re -useable, intake prefilter.
L. Unit shall have (optional) ultraviolet light with a shutoff safety feature when the
viewscreen is raised.
M. Unit shall have electronic ballasts for UV and fluorescent lighting to provide longer life
and lower heat output.
N. Unit shall have a telescoping stand that allows the work surface height to be set at either
30" or 36".
O. Unit shall have a removable armrest across the cabinet front.
2.4 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINET CONSTRUCTION
A. Interior work area shall be 27 1/4" high.
B. Cabinet shall have UniPressureTM PreFlow System, designed to provide more uniform air
flow to the supply filter.
C. Supply and exhaust HEPA filters shall be front -loading.
D. A plenum assembly shall be provided to allow the supply filter to be directly clamped to
the plenum against a closed -cell neoprene gasket. Plenum applies force to full perimeter of
filter, rather than point force.
E. Audible and visual alarm system shall be provided to indicate low exhaust airflow, and
shall be interlocked with unit supply blower to prevent pressurization of the work zone.
03879803 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS CLASS 11 11610 - 3
11/03
0
F. Cabinet shall have a microprocessor -based membrane control panel mounted on the front
of the cabinet facing down toward the user when sitting at the unit.
G. Unit shall have an audible alarm and a flashing LED to indicate when the sliding
viewscreen is in an unsafe position. An alarm mute switch shall be provided on the front -
mounted cabinet control panel to allow the operator to mute the alarm tone for brief
adjustments. The alarm shall automatically reset after five minutes if the viewscreen
remains in an unsafe position.
H. Intake velocity through the 8" front access opening shall be minimum of 100 FPM.
I. Work area side walls and rear wall to be one-piece construction. A straight back wall shall
be provided to maximize work area and easily accommodate laboratory equipment.
J. Lower front work area airfoil shall be provided to improve access opening containment
capability.
K. Unit must be listed by NSF International, meeting Standard #49.
L. Each unit, before shipping, shall have a complete physical test to assure cabinet meets
Class II requirements. A copy of this test will be provided with the unit.
M. All external plumbing connections to the petcocks and the drain pan shall be made
standard through the bottom of the cabinet and not the sides, allowing zero clearance
between the unit and the building walls or equipment to its right and left. Factory option
for plumbing through the back or top of cabinet.
N. Six-foot unit shall exhaust no more than 1200 CFM of air with an average 105 FPM
calculated air intake through front access opening at 8" operating level.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify equipment rough -in before proceeding with work.
B. Coordinate with other trades for proper installation of plumbing and electrical services and
for rough opening dimensions required for hood installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; comply with standards required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install equipment plumb, square, and straight, without distortion; securely anchor.
C. Schedule installation to ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and
expeditious manner.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Qualified independent certifier shall certify biological safety cabinet before use,
performing tests recommended in NSF International Standard No. 49.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean equipment, casework, countertops, and other surfaces as recommended by
manufacturer, rendering work in new and unused appearance.
B. Clean adjacent construction and surfaces soiled in the course of installation of this work.
C. Touch up minor damaged surfaces caused by installation. Replace damaged components as
directed by Architect.
0
0
C'
0
0
u
u
03879803 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS CLASS II 11610 - 4
11/03
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective measures to prevent equipment and surfaces from exposure to other
construction activity.
V' END OF SECTION
F..
I
03879803 BIOLOGICAL SAFETY CABINETS CLASS 11 11610 - 5
11/03
P
0
PJ
r
P.
SECTION 12345
MODULAR STEEL CASEWORK
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1— General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDES
A.
Steel casework.
B.
Work surfaces.
C.
Sinks and outlets.
D.
Service fittings.
E.
Accessory equipment.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Division 15: Furnishing and installation of plumbing utilities and final connections.
B. Division 16: Furnishing and installation of electrical utilities and final connections.
1.4 CASEWORK DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Flush construction: Surfaces of doors, drawers and panel faces shall align with cabinet
fronts without overlap of case ends, top or bottom rails. Horizontal and vertical case shell
members (panels, top rails and bottoms) shall meet in the same plane without overlap.
B. Slimline styling: Front width of end panels 3/4" and front height of top and bottom
members V.
C. Self-supporting units: Completely welded shell assembly without applied panels at ends,
backs or bottoms, so that cases can be used interchangeably or as a single, stand-alone unit.
D. Interior of case units: Easily cleanable, flush interior. Base cabinets, 30" and wider, with
double swinging doors shall provide full access to complete interior without center vertical
Post.
E. Drawers: Sized on a modular basis for interchange to meet varying storage needs, and
designed to be easily removable in field without the use of special tools.
F. Case openings: Rabbeted -like joints all four sides of case opening for hinged doors and
two sides for sliding doors in order to provide dust resistant case.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single source responsibility: Casework, work surfaces, laboratory fume hoods, equipment
and accessories shall be manufactured or furnished by a single laboratory furniture
company.
B. Manufacturer's qualifications: Modern plant with proper tools, dies, fixtures and skilled
workmen to produce high quality laboratory casework and equipment, and shall meet the
following minimum requirements:
1. Ten years or more experience in manufacture of laboratory casework and equipment
of type specified.
03879803 MODULAR STEEL CASEWORK 12345 - 1
11/03
2. Ten installations of equal or larger size and requirements.
C. Installer's qualifications: Factory trained and/or certified by the manufacturer.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Casework:
a. Plan of casework at 1/4 IN = 1 FT-0 IN scale or larger.
b. Elevations of casework at 1/2 IN = 1 FT-0 IN scale or larger.
C. Cross reference shop drawings to Contract Documents.
B. Product data:
1. Manufacturer technical data and specifications.
C. Samples:
1. Worksurface Sample.
2. Finish Sample (3" X 5" Painted Steel, Wood and Plastic Laminate).
D. Project information:
1. Certification of installer qualifications.
E. Contract closeout information:
1. Operating and maintenance data.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Verify all dimensions at site.
B. Verify locations of all existing items and items and work furnished in other sections.
C. If necessary to vary from arrangement indicated because of structural, mechanical,
electrical or other considerations, make such variations only after approval of Architect.
D. Contractor and Owner inspect existing casework prior to removal by Contractor, upon
delivery by Contractor to new location, and after installation by Contractor to verify
physical appearance and condition of such casework.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Schedule delivery of casework and equipment so that spaces are sufficiently complete that
material can be installed immediately following delivery.
B. Protect finished surfaces from soiling or damage during handling and installation. Keep
covered with polyethylene film or other protective coating.
C. Protect all work surfaces throughout construction period with 1/4" corrugated cardboard
completely covering the top and securely taped to edges
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Base: Fisher Hamilton Scientific; Modular Metal.
2. Optional: Kewaunee Scientific.
3. Other manufacturers desiring approval comply with Document 00440.
4. Manufacturer must have minimum of 10 years experience and 5 similar installations.
I
0
0
1
I
I
H
03879803 MODULAR STEEL CASEWORK 12345 - 2
11/03
[i
�J
F
U
2.2 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Casework: All steel, modular, complete with all components indicated, and plumbing and
electrical fixtures, fittings and connections.
1. Steel finish: Allow for 2 colors (may be on each case) selected from manufacturers
full line.
B. Steel sheet: Cold rolled, mild steel, ASTM-A366/A366M, in US Standard gauges.
1. Use 20 GA for: Solid door interior panels, scribing strips, filler and security panels,
enclosures, drawer fronts and bodies, shelves, finished back panels and sloping tops.
2. Use 18 GA for: Case tops, ends, bottoms and backs; vertical posts and uprights,
glazed door members, partitions, security panels, door exterior panels, and top and
rear corner gussets.
3. Use 16 GA for: Top front and back rails, intermediate horizontal rails, table frames
and legs, and leg rails and stretchers.
4. Use 14 GA for: Drawer suspensions, door and case hinge reinforcements, and front
corner reinforcements.
5. Use 11 GA for: Table leg corner brackets and gussets for leveling screws.
6. Finish: Reagent resistant, electrostatically applied, baked enamel, satin finish, in
minimum of two of manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Epoxy resin tops: Molded; chemical and corrosion resistant, modified thermosetting epoxy
resin, uniform throughout, non -glare black color, 1-1/4 IN (31 mm) thick.
1. Flexural strength (ASTM-D790): 4000 PSI.
2. Compressive strength (ASTM-D695): 14,000 PSI.
3. Hardness, Rockwell M (ASTM-D785): 197.
4. Water absorption, by weight in 24 HR (ASTM-D2842): 0.02 percent.
D. Leveling devices: 1/2 IN (12 mm) diameter threaded leveling screw fastened to bottom of
leg or to bracket attached to cabinet.
1. Screw slotted for screw driver.
2. Capacity: 750 LB (340 Kg).
3. Bearing area: 1.22 SQ IN (750 SQ mm), minimum.
E. Pulls for drawers and hinged doors: Long, slimline type, anodized brushed aluminum, with
screws at 5 IN (125 mm) on center.
F. Hinges: Institutional, 5 knuckle, brushed chrome plated, with barrel only projecting beyond
face of cabinet.
1. Not less than 2-1/2 IN (62 mm) long.
2. Drilled for 3 screws each leaf, not welded to case or door.
3. For doors up to 36 IN (900 mm) high: 2 hinges.
4. For doors over 36 IN (900 mm) high: 3 hinges.
G. Door catches: Spring actuated, cadmium plated with nylon roller, adjustable for controlled
opening and closing action.
H. Elbow catches: Spring type, cadmium plated steel, with strike of suitable design.
I. Locks: Heavy duty cylinder type.
1. Exposed keyway nose: Satin nickel plated, stamped with identifying numbers.
2. Provide 2 stamped brass keys, 3/32 IN (2.3 mm) thick, minimum, with each keyed
lock.
3. Provide for 500 primary key changes in 5 master keyed groups.
4. Extra keys available from manufacturer or registered locksmiths only.
J. Shelf clips: Die formed steel, zinc plated, designed to engage in 2 rectangular holes on 1/2
IN (12 nun) centers in wall cases and 2 IN (50 mm) centers in base units.
2.3 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
03879803 MODULAR STEEL CASEWORK 12345 - 3
11/03
A. Plumbing fixtures and fittings: All external parts polished chrome plated.
1. Manual operation type.
2. Identify services with tamperproof color coded plastic index buttons:
19
C.
Q
Service
Color
Code
Color of
Letters
Cold Water
Dark Green
CW
White
Hot Water
Red
HW
White
Steam
Black
STM
White
Air
Orange
Air
Black
Gas
Dark Blue
Gas
White
Vacuum
Yellow
Vac
Black
Dist. Water
White
DW
Black
Oxygen
Light Green
OXY
White
Hydrogen
Pink
H
Black
Nitrogen
Grey
N
Black
All other rare gases
Light Blue
Chem Symbol
Black
3. Plumbing fittings: Body of red brass (minimum 85 percent copper), unless otherwise
indicated.
Water fittings: Gooseneck, straightway or bibb type, as indicated with replaceable cartridge
type interior working unit.
1. Cartridge: Non -corrosive, non-metallic housing, with red brass stem and Buna-N
"O" ring; ceramic discs flow control through 90 degree rotation; FDA approved
lubricant; sealed to faucet body with 2 Buna-N "O" rings and secured with cap nut.
2. Four arm type handles.
3. Spout outlets: 3/8 IN (9 mm) IPS, female threads, and either removable 3/4 IN (18
mm) hose connection with 10 serrations or removable anti -splash outlet.
4. Goosenecks: 3/8 IN (9 mm) brass pipe, 0.09 IN (2.25 mm) all thickness.
a. 7-1/2 IN (185 mm) clearance, minimum, between outlet and top, with two 90-
degree bends.
b. Union type connection to faucet.
C. Permitting field adjustment of fixed goosenecks on conversion to swinging
type by removal of washer.
5. Combination hot and cold water fittings: One piece cast body.
6. Special water fittings (distilled, deionized and demineralized): Aluminum body,
anodized inside and out, with tin plated brass stem and aluminum serrated hose
connection.
Vacuum breakers: Chrome plated brass, with specified finish.
1. Integral vacuum breakers for all domestic water fixtures.
2. Separate units, if required: Nidel.
Sinks - general:
1. Use manufacturer's standard sizes where dimensions do not vary by more than 1/2
IN (12 mm) from sizes indicated.
2. Provide strainer and tailpiece.
3. Calk joints between sinks and tops with silicone sealant.
4. Provide supports: Reagent resistant finish.
D
I
I
u
It
03879803 MODULAR STEEL CASEWORK 12345 - 4
11/03 U
PJ
E.
I
L
I
a. In cabinets: Two 1 x 2 x 1 IN, (25 x 50 x 25 nun) 11 GA steel channels
extending across width, attached to 3/8 IN (9 mm) diameter hanger rod.
E. Sinks, epoxy resin: Integrally molded from modified, thermosetting black epoxy resin,
oven cured.
1. Cove all inside corners.
2. Slope bottom to drain.
3. Recess strainer and plus assembly into bottom of sink for flush installation.
4. Provide removable overflow.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication - General:
1. Combine all products under responsibility of casework manufacturer.
2. Provide all components indicated.
3. Model numbers given are those of prime manufacturers.
4. Grind all exposed welding smooth.
5. No exposed fasteners.
6. Pulls: Attach through both panels of doors and drawer fronts.
B. Base Units and Cases:
1. Base units and 25", 31" and 37" high wall cases: End panels and back reinforced
with internal reinforcing front and rear posts.
2. 49" and 84" high cases: Formed end panels with front and rear reinforcing post
channels; back shall be formed steel panel, recessed 3/4" for mounting purposes.
3. Posts: Front post fully closed with full height reinforcing upright. Shelf adjustment
holes in front and rear posts shall be perfectly aligned for level setting, adjustable to
1/2" o.c.
4. Secure intersection of case members with spot and arc welds. Provide gusset
reinforcement at front corners.
5. Base unit backs: Provide drawer units without backs and cupboard units with
removable backs for access to services behind units.
6. Bottoms: Base units and 25", 31", 37" and 49" high wall cases shall have one piece
bottom with front edge formed into front rail, rabbeted as required for swinging
doors and drawers and flush design for sliding doors.
7. Top rail for base units: Interlock with end panels, flush with front of unit.
8. Horizontal intermediate rails: Recessed behind doors and drawer fronts.
9. Base for base units: 4" high x 3" deep with formed steel base and 11 ga. die formed
steel gussets at corners. Provide 3/8" diameter leveling screw with integral bottom
flange of minimum 0.56 sq. in. area at each corner, accessible through openings in
toe space.
10. Tops of wall cases: One piece, with front edge formed into front rail.
C. Drawers: Modular sized, removable, mountable in any location in cabinet.
1. Fronts: Interchangeable, flush mounted, 3/4 IN (18 mm) thick.
a. Formed steel, double wall construction with sound deadening.
2. Bodies: Bottom, sides, back and inner front, one piece welded assembly.
a. Top edges formed into semicircular tote grip.
b. Bottom corners coved.
3. Suspension: Provide self -centering drawers, removable without use of tools, locking
or full open position.
a. Drawer runner welded to drawer body.
b. Case runner attached with screws or into slotted rail.
C. Coved runner raceways with round nylon tired ball bearing rollers.
03879803 MODULAR STEEL CASEWORK 12345 -5
11/03
d. Rubber closing bumpers.
e. Friction centering devices not acceptable.
f. File drawers: Full extension.
D. Swinging doors: 3/4 IN (18 nun) thick, double wall telescoping box construction with
inner and outer panels welded together.
1. Over 14 IN (350 min) wide and under 36 IN (900 nun) high: Formed, embossed
stiffener.
2. 36 IN (900 min) high and over: Vertical channel stiffener.
3. Sound deadening honeycomb core laminated to interior of panels.
4. Hinge mounting brackets and hinge reinforcement.
5. Fit to case with minimum clearance.
6. Provide roller catch, pull, hinges, rubber bumper.
E. Removable shelves: Adjustable on 1/2 IN (12 nun) centers in wall cases and on 2 IN (50
min) centers in base units.
1. All sides formed down 3/4 IN (18 min); returned 5/8 IN (15 nun) at front and back.
2. 43-1/2 IN (1087 min) wide or over: Full length reinforcement.
3. Support on 4 die formed brackets, engaged in 2 rectangular holes in each comer
Post.
F. Epoxy resin tops:
1. Joints: Chemical and corrosion resistant cement.
2. Drip grooves on underside of exposed edges.
3. Backsplash: Molded 4 IN (100 nun) high; provide wherever top abuts wall.
G. Pull Direction: Horizontal at drawers, vertical on doors.
2.5 METAL FINISH
A. Metal finish:
1. Preparation: Spray clean metal with a heated cleaner/phosphate solution, pretreat
with iron phosphate spray, water rinse, and neutral final seal. Immediately dry in
heated ovens, gradually cooled, prior to application of finish.
2. Application: Electrostatically apply urethane powder coat of selected color and bake
in controlled high temperature oven to assure a smooth, hard satin finish. Surfaces
shall have a chemical resistant, high grade laboratory furniture quality finish of the
following thickness:
a. Exterior and interior exposed surfaces: 1.5 mil average and 1.2 mil min.
b. Backs of cabinets and other surfaces not exposed to view: 1.0 mil average.
2.6 EPDXY RESIN WORK SURFACES
A. Material: Chemical and abrasion resistant, durable top of one inch thick cast material of
epoxy resins and inert products, cast flat, with a uniform non -glare black matte finish.
B. Backsplash curb: Same material as top, 4" up butt jointed and cemented to top. Provide
where tops abut wall surfaces. Include end curb where top abuts end wall.
2.7 SINKS, DRAINS AND TRAPS
A. Epoxy resin sinks: Integrally molded from modified thermosetting black epoxy resin,
specially compounded and oven cured. Cove inside corners and pitch bottom to threaded
drain outlet.
1. Size: As indicated.
n_
D
11
0
I
11
I
u
03879803 MODULAR STEEL CASEWORK 12345 - 6 U
11/03
I
iI
t'
2.9
B. Sink supports:
1. Cabinet sinks: Support sinks on 11 gauge, adjustable, 1" x 2" x 1" channel with
reagent resistant finish. Provide two channels across width of cabinet, attached to
3/8" diameter threaded hanger rods.
2. Caulk joint between top and sink with non -hardening mastic.
LABORATORY FITTINGS
A. Water Service Fittings:
1. Water service faucets and valves shall have renewable unit containing all working
parts subject to wear, including replaceable stainless steel seat. Unit shall have
sensations for position locking into valve body.
2. Gooseneck vacuum breakers: Brass forgings integral with gooseneck, with
renewable seat and special design valve member for fine flow control.
3. Goosenecks shall have separate 3/8" IPS coupling securely brazed to gooseneck to
provide full thread for attachment of anti -splash outlet fittings, serrated tips and filter
pumps.
B. Distilled Water Fittings: All brass fittings tin lined for distilled water service.
1. Provide renewable tin lined unit containing all working parts subject to wear,
including replaceable stainless steel seat. Unit shall have serrations for position
locking into valve body.
C. Handles for service cocks, faucets and remote controls: Four -arm type except ground key
cocks. Provide removable screw -on type colored plastic discs with letter stamped on disc
in contrasting color as scheduled below:
Service Disc/Letter Colors Letters
Gas
Blue/White
Vacuum
Yellow/Black
Compressed Air
Orange/White
Cold Water
Green/White
Hot Water
Red/White
Steam
Black/White
Chilled Water
Brown/White
Distilled Water
White/Black
D. Fixture finish: Chrome finish developed
properly prepared brass
castings or forgings:
Gas
Vac.
C-Air
C.W.
H.W.
Stm.
CH.
D.W.
by the following sequence of platings over
Plating
Minimum Plating Thickness
Copper (Initial)
0.000050 IN.
Nickel
0.000350 IN.
Chromium (Final)
0.000015 IN.
ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
A. Pegboards:
1. Board: Stainless steel board finished on face and edges. Where exposed, finish back
with slightly different surface texture and bevel bottom edges.
2. Pegs: White polypropylene pegs in 5", 6-1/2" and 8" lengths, with glassware
protector base. Base of pegs shall be two prong style for mechanical attachment. Do
not bond pegs to board.
03879803 MODULAR STEEL CASEWORK 12345 - 7
11/03
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which products are to be installed.
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Use manufacturer's printed instructions or Drawings in all cases where items or details are
not indicated.
B. Except for final mechanical and electrical connection, installation of each item shall be
complete in every respect, including all necessary items required for proper operation and
appearance.
C. Provide all trim, fillers, closures, stands, supports, sleeves, collars, escutcheons, ferrules,
brackets, braces or other miscellaneous items required for complete installation.
D. Furnish and set in place all service and plumbing fixtures as indicated.
E. Provide new plastic laminate tops on all relocated existing casework.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Repair all damage done to premises as result of installation.
B. Remove all debris left by this installation.
C. Test and adjust all items of equipment for satisfactory operation.
END OF SECTION
03879803 MODULAR STEEL CASEWORK 12345 - 8
11/03 U
In
C
V
SECTION 15010
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL
PART GENERAL
1.1 SPECIAL NOTE
A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued
thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a
part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall
be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued
separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to
comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional
compensation due to omission of drawings.
1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. See Section 01095. Also refer to regulations and standards of:
1. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association.
2. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.
3. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
4. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
5. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
6. NFPA — National Fire Protection Association
[ : 7. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories.
1.3 CHECKING DOCUMENTS
A. The Drawings and the Specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall
check the Drawings and Specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any
discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly
provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No
discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the
Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents.
1.4 GENERAL
A. In general, the piping and ductwork to be installed by the various trades under these
Specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular
conditions at the Site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to
complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. Refer to Section 01315 for
Coordination Requirements. The following is a general outline concerning the running of
various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the Drawings or conditions at the
building necessitate deviating from these standards.
B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in
chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas
that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically
indicated or directed.
C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment
spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms
where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or
required.
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 1
11 /03
U
D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls.
They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings
shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement.
E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and
finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's
unfamiliarity with these details. Piace all inserts in masonry walls while they are under
construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general
construction to precede that general construction.
F. The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact
locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation
details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the
architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all
obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the
equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating
installation.
G. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc.
The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to
all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the
building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations (within 10 feet of locations
shown on drawings) necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect
shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner.
H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the
space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other
space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with
the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of
failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his
(the Contractor's) own expense. Note that coordination drawings are required.
I. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment.
Interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the
work proceeds. Refer to paragraph 1.06, Coordination Drawings.
J. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit
in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The
following order shall govern:
1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting
fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid
conflicts at the site.
2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers.
3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances.
4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function
would not be impaired by bends and offsets.
K. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most
appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained
therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible
to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner.
L. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's
attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any
and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular
apparatus, material, or equipment.
M. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the
accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to
accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not.
N. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these
documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not
indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient
time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to
0
fl
I
0-
I
I
[I
fl
0
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 2
11 /03
require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in
accordance with the specifications.
1.5 DIMENSIONS
A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions,
including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra
charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions
and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be
submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Produce a set of the coordination drawings showing electrical, mechanical, structural and
architectural for the Project. The purpose of these drawings is to plan the orderly installation
of the work of all trades so that the work will fit into the space allotted, and will be accessible
for maintenance and operation in the future. Care shall be taken to ensure that all suggested
clearances for maintenance and operation will be provided in the actual installation.
B. Provide the following information on, but not limited to scale drawings in plan, sections with
minimum'/i' scale or %" scale as appropriate.
- 1. Mechanical equipment type, size and location, label per plan designation.
2. Pipework, route and size, label per plan designation.
3. Ductwork, route and size.
j 4. Concrete housekeeping pads and concrete curbs for apparatus casing and AHU support.
LL1i 5. Vibration isolation type and size.
6. Diffuser, grille, register type, size, and location, and connection detail.
7. Volume, fire, smoke damper type and location.
8. Access panels.
9. Valve size and location.
10. Laboratory piping.
11. Drainage systems.
C. The coordination drawings shall become installation drawings, refer to "Installation Drawings"
below.
1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. A pre -installation conference shall be held between the City of Lubbock's Representatives,
and the Contractor and Sub -Contractors prior to commenting work. Meeting notes shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the City of Lubbock's Representative. Specifically, the location
of the roof mounted water chiller shall be discussed.
1.8 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for
communications, etc. will be done in accordance with Division 16 of these specifications. The
Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The
Contractor, in accordance with Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls,
furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. Note that some electrical
work is the responsibility of the Temperature Control contractor. Temperature control work
includes all wiring (including conduit) for controls specified in Section 15900, including power
for actuators serving valves and dampers.
B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this Project, or furnished by
the Owner and installed in this Project, shall be completely wired up in accordance with
Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires
required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the
Contractor. If conflicts occur between the Drawings and the actual requirements, actual
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 3
11/03
requirements shall govern. The Contractor is strongly encouraged to coordinate voltages of
all mechanical equipment with the electrical service provided during the submittal phase.
1.9 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of
recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the
current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the
standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers'
Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories.
B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 15 shall furnish each motor with a
starter and all controls of the types specified or required. Refer to "MOTOR STARTERS"
below.
C. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits
of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics
and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture
and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be
listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. Note
that HOA switches and pilot lights are required for all starters.
1.10 MOTORS
A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating
conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the
equipment served. Motor efficiencies shall meet minimum Texas Energy Standards for New
Buildings. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to
the following requirements:
1. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required
by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload
protection.
2. Fractional larger than 1/6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or
enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with
inherent thermal overload protection.
3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or
enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15.
4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient,
dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of
1.15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus.
1.11 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Except where starters are shown integral to motor control centers (see electrical drawings),
the Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment
for equipment specified under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the
specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater
element sizes and all other details. All starters shall be combination starter/disconnect
devices, and shall include control transformers, hand -off -auto switches, and pilot lights.
B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at
the same time.
C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted
and wired.
D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination
starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or
combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated.
0
a
P
q,
J1
0
u
0
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 4 11
[
11 /03 11
E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture
with the proper enclosures.
j�
F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required
F�
for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only
where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter
cover unless otherwise indicated.
G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified.
Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits
when the starter is disconnected.
H. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. Overloads
shall be solid state type.
I. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a
secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded.
J. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower
rated on -off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the
same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box
with a stainless steel coverplate.
K. Starters in Motor Control Centers: Refer to Electrical Drawings for starters in motor control
centers. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details with Division 16.
1.12 BELT GUARDS
A. Belt guards shall be provided for all belt driven equipment installed under this contract.
Guards shall be rigidly constructed of 18 gauge sheet metal on angle iron frame, with fronts
of expanded metal or 1/2 inch mesh hardware cloth. Guards shall be sized to permit belt
tightening to the full extent of the motor slide rails. They shall be securely installed in such
fashion as to permit ready removal for servicing of the protected drive. Guards shall have
tach holes.
r 1.13 PROGRESS OF WORK
a A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his
work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner.
1
1.14 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the
manufacturer.
1.15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials
shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and
shall bear their label.
B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the
Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding.
C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in
substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion,
the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an
evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited
to plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be
applicable to major items of equipment.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and
shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final
l acceptance of the job.
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 5
11 /03
E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all
kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract.
F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be
done according to the best practice of the trade.
1.16 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL
A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these
specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular
manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality
as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by
the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality.
B. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these
specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for
the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally
requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material.
1.17 DESIGNATIONS OF STAINLESS STEEL MATERIALS
A. Note that stainless steel materials have been generically designated in various sections of the
Contract Documents. In all cases, the material grade shall meet the following requirements
Term in Drawings, Specifications
(Undesignated) Stainless Steel
304 SS
304L SS
304 Stainless Steel
304L Stainless Steel
316 SS
316L SS
316 Stainless Steel
316 Stainless Steel
316L Stainless Steel
1.18 SHOP DRAWINGS
Required Standard
SAE/ANSI/ASTM
Unified Numbering System (UNS)
UNS S30403
SAE/ANSI/ASTM
Unified Numbering System (UNS)
UNS S31603
A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the
Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of
material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in
order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall
render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc.,
occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to
comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer
he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges
in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor.
B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design
concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract
Documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop
drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire Contract Documents. Contractor will be
held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job
site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the
satisfactory performance of his work.
C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets
therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 6
11 /03
I
11
t.�
individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with
the project.
D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all
shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been
checked by the Contractor. Contractor shall verify that electrical characteristics of every
power consuming devices is coordinated with the electrical circuits provided.
E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the
Contract Drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the
Contractor from furnishing and erecting same.
1.19 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS
A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly
protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required
temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the
cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in
the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of
the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be
sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question.
1.20 PERMITS, FEES, ETC
A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the
local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water,
gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility
companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including
charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any
inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these
specifications.
1.21 TESTING
A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as
specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities.
The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests.
1.22 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES
A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes,
ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by
the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the
work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the
accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the
matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the
work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the
Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by
the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall
obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance.
1.23 TERMINOLOGY
A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," and/or similar phrases occur, it
is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected
under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to
{ the contrary.
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 7
11 /03
B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it
shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material.
C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract.
D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs.
E. "The Project' includes all work in progress during the construction period.
F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described
singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items.
1.24 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP
A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his
work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a
whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner
that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped,
hindered or delayed at any time.
B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and
free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from
the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of
any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and
machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions
and hindrances.
1.25 COORDINATION OF TRADES
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades.
For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be
coordinated with Division 16 for:
1. Voltage
2. Phase
3. Ampacity
4. No. and size of wires
5. Wiring diagrams
6. Starter size, details and location
7. Control devices and details
B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be
coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances
for service, auxiliary devices required, etc.
C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against
manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish.
D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The
Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure
details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any
device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense.
E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and
symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades.
1.26 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. The Contractor under each respective section shall perform all structural and general
construction modifications and cut all openings through either walls, floors or ceilings required
to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that may appear up to
the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the
Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than
required or in wrong locations.
B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their
strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting.
0
I
0
D
� I
0
I
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 8
11 /03
Il
0
0
I
C. The Contractor under each respective section shall be responsible for the patching of all
openings cut to install the work covered by the Contract and to repair the damage resulting
from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder.
D. All patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade and shall comply with the
applicable sections of these specifications. Coordinate all cutting and patching requirements
with all trades before bidding.
1.27 PAINTING
A. Painting shall be in accordance with the general construction specifications. Painting for
Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows:
1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and
then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a
color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces.
2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and
miscellaneous metal.
3. Paint all exposed sheet metal.
4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces
until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained.
B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation
surface is visible.
1.28 SEALING
A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes
and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and
fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes,
conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. All penetrations in BSL-3 areas shall be
thoroughly sealed to an airtight condition.
1.29 LARGE APPARATUS
A. Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is
I too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job
by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is
completed. Install large HVAC equipment through the louver opening.
1.30 ACCESS PANELS
A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is
required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable
ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide access doors, at least 12 inches
by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire
dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc.
1.31 USE OF SYSTEMS
A. It is considered that it will be necessary to operate the mechanical systems to provide heating
and ventilation in portions of the building that are enclosed. As systems or portions of
systems become operable, they shall be operated as required to maintain habitable
conditions in enclosed portions of the building that are still under construction and portions
that are fully complete as may be required to properly protect installed piping, equipment and
finishes.
B. In order to provide protection to ducts, plenums, etc. install temporary filters over or in return
air openings until all finished painting is completed. Protect supply outlets, coils, etc. as
necessary in each case.
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 9
11 /03
C. Except for operation of cooling equipment to prove its performance and to adjust and balance
the systems, that equipment will not be operated for comfort of construction workers.
D. During warm weather the Contractor shall arrange for the operation of systems to supply 100
percent outside air. The systems controls shall be reset to their normal cycle of operation in
each case during the times that heating is required and when the cooling equipment is
operated.
E. Immediately prior to the time that the systems are to be accepted by the Owner, each system
shall be carefully examined and if ductwork is dirty, it shall be carefully cleaned by men skilled
in that type of work. All filters shall be put in first class condition by replacement of filters
and/or other procedures as directed.
F. The use of the equipment for maintaining environmental and/or protective temperature
conditions shall in no way constitute acceptance of that equipment and the connected piping,
ducts, insulation, finishes, etc. by the Owner. Furthermore, it shall in no way shorten the
guarantee period hereinafter specified. The Contractor shall either secure extended
warranties from the vendors of equipment or shall purchase insurance to provide proper
coverage on the equipment through the guarantee period and shall file with the Architect
substantiating affidavits from equipment manufacturers or a copy of the insurance policy
covering the equipment through the guarantee period. The personal underwriting of the
Contractor for equipment manufacturers' warranties is not acceptable, but his personal
underwriting of piping, ductwork, insulation and associated materials is acceptable subject to
the provisions of the contract.
G. The Contractor shall provide such labor as may be required in the operation of the systems
and shall pay all costs.
1.32 SCHEDULE OF WORK
A. Under no condition shall any work be done in the present building that would interfere with its
natural use during its normal hours of occupancy, unless special permission is granted by the
Owner. This is particularly applicable where new connections are to be made to present lines
or items of equipment in that building or where present equipment items in that building are to
be relocated or modified in any way. The Contractor shall include this scheduling
requirement in his proposal as no additional compensation for overtime work will be granted.
1.33 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS
A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for herein
and as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate
changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to
illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use.
B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. They shall be
submitted for approval and five copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information.
C. Specifically, for the work of Division 15, the Contractor shall prepare 1/4"=V-0" scale
drawings of all areas, showing ductwork (supply, return, exhaust), piping, lab gas, waste,
vent, water and all other plumbing. The drawings shall allow space for the installation
electrical conduits and lighting fixtures. Contractor shall determine the space required for
electrical through direct discussion with Division 16 and fire protection subcontractor and shall
include provisions for the required space in his installation drawings. The drawings shall
show elevations tagged on the drawings, and shall show finished ceiling heights and
structural steel elevations. Provide section views as required. Coordinate with Architect's
reflected ceiling plan and shop drawings for Laboratory Fume Hood and Biological Safety
Cabinet Equipment, carefully laying out these systems and clearance required. The
mechanical and electrical drawings are schematic in nature and do not show all offsets
required to install the systems. The purpose of these drawings is to coordinate the work to be
installed for the proper fitting of the systems into the space to ensure that water drainage, and
sewer piping is not installed in inappropriate places (such as over electrical rooms), and to
ensure adequate access by the Owner for service and maintenance of systems. It is the
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 - 10
11 /03
I
I
obligation of the Contractor under the contract to fit his work above the ceilings, and these
drawings are a vehicle to accomplish this requirement. Drawings shall be prepared for all
areas shown on the Drawings.
1.34 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the
representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the
Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each
system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be
made familiar with all procedures.
1.35 OPERATING MANUALS
A. Prepare and submit copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks
prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional
material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the
Contractor.
B. Manuals shall contain the following data:
1. Catalogue data of all equipment.
2. Shop drawings of all equipment.
3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size)
4. Start-up instructions for major equipment.
5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment.
6. Wiring diagrams.
7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment.
8. Parts list for all items.
9. Name and address of each vendor.
1.36 GUARANTEE
A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship
and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance.
1.37 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS
A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications
shall furnish:
1. Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that
purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work.
Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed.
2. All manufacturers' guarantees.
3. All operating manuals.
4. Guarantees.
5. Test and Balance Report.
1.38 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION
A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully
inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications.
END OF SECTION
02092 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 15010 -11
11 /03
1S
SECTION 15042
t COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
(NOT IN CONTRACT — INFORMATION ONLY)
1 IMPORTANT NOTE: The Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for the project will be performed by the
Commissioning Agent, who is an independent contractor with the City of Lubbock for this project. The
Commissioning Agent will provide the services of a qualified Test Engineer. The General Contractor
(GC), and his subcontractors shall cooperate with the Commissioning Agent (CA) by operating the
systems required for testing, providing any additional dampers or test ports, and correcting any
deficiencies uncovered during the Commissioning Process. The specification below is presented as a
guideline for the activities of the TAB contractor under the CA for the purpose of informing the GC and his
subcontractors of the types of activities required for proper support of the Commissioning Process. Note
that in the following reference specification, the term "CA" refers to the Commissioning Agent or his
subcontractors, including the TAB Contractor. The term "GC" refers to the General Contractor or his
3 subcontractors.
PART 1 GENERAL
HERE&IITSIO11
A. Section Includes: The purpose of this section is two fold: first to describe the requirements
of the GC to provide all necessary support services to the CA, who will perform testing,
adjusting and balancing (TAB); and secondly to describe the commissioning process
specific to testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) systems and equipment. Systems
include, but are not limited to, heating, ventilating, and air conditioning, supply air and
exhaust air systems, hot water heating, water chiller system with piping, special piping, high
purity piping, etc.
1.2 CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. All work shall conform to the following codes, regulations, and standards of latest issue:
1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC), "National Standards for Field Management
and Instrumentation Total system Balance," Volume One, No. 81266.
2. ASHRAE Handbook, 1987 HVAC Systems and Applications, Chapter 57.
3. AMCA Publication 203 Fan Application Manual, Part 3, Field Performance
Measurement.
4. National Institute of Health (NIH).
5. Industrial Ventilation Guide, American Conference of Governmental Industrial
Hygienist.
6. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), "Procedural Standards for Testing,
Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems".
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Reference Commissioning Agent's Plan (to be provided at a later date) for primary
commissioning requirements and responsibilities. Note that commissioning of temperature
controls and lab airflow controls is the responsibility of the GC. Reference 15920.
B. Reference Section 15995 for GC requirements in support of the commissioning process.
Refer to Division 15 specifications and plans and GC shop drawings for system
configuration and details of required construction.
C. During the balancing work, list all items which are installed incorrectly or have been
i installed in accordance with the contract drawings and/or specifications. This shall include
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 -1
11 /03
all air distribution, piping, pumping, heating and cooling systems. Deliver deficiency list to
GC for correction.
D. During the balancing work, advise the GC of any deficiencies in the construction or systems
such as lack of balancing valves, dampers, etc., that adversely impact the "balance -ability"
of systems.
E. During the balancing work, report all deficiencies in controls, air valve leakage, damper
leakage, mixing box leakage, thermostat malfunction, excessive noise in the HVAC system,
etc., that adversely impacts the quality of the HVAC systems to the GC for correction.
F. Obtain from the GC an unmarked copy of the plans and specifications to be used during
the system balance. These drawings are to be maintained on the job site with notes and
red -lines indicating as -built conditions discovered in the course of the TAB work.
G. Records and test data shall be kept throughout the course of the project that pertain not
only to test results, but observations relative to quality of construction, completeness of
components and systems, and overall integrity of the HVAC systems.
1.4 SYSTEM CHANGES
A. General: Changes or additions of sheaves, belts, blade pitch, volume dampers, and
access to system components shall be provided by the GC, as required by the testing and
balancing agency, at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.5 TESTING AND BALANCING AGENCY
A. Agency Qualifications: The CA, as part of this contract, shall obtain the services of a
qualified agency to perform the testing and balancing work as herein specified. The CA
shall submit the name of the proposed agency to the Owner's Representative for review
within 60 days after the contract award. The criteria for determining qualifications shall be
membership in the AABC, or certification by the NEBB, and the agency shall have not less
than 5 years experience on projects of similar scope and complexity. The agency shall be
independent of the GC or equipment suppliers for this project. Submit a current list of
projects for which the balancing contractor provided services, including references and
phone numbers, and name of principal technician.
B. Qualified Agencies: The CA, as part of this contract, shall obtain the services of one of the
agencies listed below to perform the testing and balancing work as herein specified. The
agency shall be independent of the GC or equipment suppliers for this project.
1. ND White Engineering
2. Engineered Test and Balance
3. or Owner approved equal
1.6 JOB COORDINATION
A. General: Within 60 days of the start of construction, review the plans, specifications and
installation of all the affected systems. Submit a written report to the Owner's
Representative indicating any recognized deficiencies in the systems that would preclude
the proper adjusting, balancing, and testing of the systems.
1.7 AGENDA
A. General: Submit two copies of an agenda for review by the Engineer at least 30 days prior
to the start of testing and balancing. The agenda shall include the following:
1. An outline of tasks to be performed at the job site (in the sequence they are to be
performed).
2. An explanation of the equipment to be used for each type of field measurement.
Indicate the correction factors to be used for area, velocity, CFM, density, GPM, etc.
3. Indicate equations to be used for data which is to be calculated.
4. Indicate the location of each pitot tube traverse to be performed.
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 2
11 /03
5. An organized compilation of all of the forms that will be used to record data at the job
site. Each form shall be filled in with installation and design data as specified and shall
include blank spaces for the recorded test data. Indicate all data specified to be
3 recorded. The forms shall be organized in a manner which is satisfactory to the
Owner's Representative. The final organizational format for the submitted forms shall
be used for the finished testing and balancing report.
1.8 PROCEDURES, GENERAL
A. Requirements: Adjust systems and components thereof to perform as required by the
UU drawings and specifications.
B. Initial Testing: Prior to actual start of testing and balancing verify that the systems and
equipment are ready for balancing and submit a letter to the Owner's Representative so
stating and also describing any deficiencies found. Correct air and water system
performance deficiencies disclosed by initial testing prior to balancing the systems.
n C. Test Duration: Operating tests of heating and cooling coils, fans and other equipment shall
1C JI be of not less than 4 hours duration, after stabilized operating conditions have been
established. Capacities shall be based on temperatures and air and water quantities
measured during such tests.
D. Off-season Testing: In consideration that testing and balancing may be scheduled in the
season other than that for which the equipment applies, the agency shall provide load to
test the equipment. The heating system shall be tested under whatever sustained load can
be provided by combination of ambient and cooling apparatus. If the cooling system is
tested in the winter, the heating system shall be used to generate whatever sustained load
can be provided. Full operational tests shall be performed during the next available heating
and/or cooling season as may be requested by the Owner's Representative and scheduled
with the Owner. Utility expenses for these tests will be provided by the Owner.
E. Instrumentation: Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with the
approved agenda. Furnish all personnel, instruments, and equipment for tests specified
herein.
1. Accuracy of Instruments: Instruments used for measurements shall be accurate to
within the requirements of NEBB. Provide calibration histories for each instrument for
examination. Calibrate each test instrument by an approved laboratory or by the
manufacturer. The Engineer has the right to request instrument re -calibration, or the
use of other instruments and test methodology, where accuracy of readings is
questionable.
2. Application of Instruments: Comply with manufacturer's certified instructions.
I F. Filters: Verify that new air filters have been installed after the test run and before the start
of testing and balancing.
G. Air Vents: Blow off all manual air vents before the start of testing and balancing.
H. Air Pattern Controllers: Adjust air pattern controllers, grille and register blades for the air
diffusion patterns indicated prior to testing and balancing.
I. Wiring and Controls: All wiring and controls shall be completed and tested before the start
of testing and balancing. Installation shall be completed and approved by the Owner's
Representative before the start of balancing.
1.9 BALANCING REPORTS
+ A. Report Submittals:
1. First Submittal: Two (2) copies of the rough draft report for review by the Test Engineer
and Commissioning Agent, to include:
a. A list of items which will prevent the balancer from providing a full and complete
balance.
b. Narratives that describe all problem areas that may require major construction or
design changes.
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 3
11 /03
c. Narratives that describe the building systems and control systems to demonstrate
comprehension of systems operation, including system diversity.
d. The balancing agenda which reiterates the scope of the balancing work and the
intended order of activity.
2. Pre -Final Submittal: Three (3) copies of the complete report; for approval by the Test
Engineer and Commissioning Agent; and information for the A/E.
3. Final Submittal: Four (4) copies of the approved report; in binders per requirements
indicated in Division 1, General Requirements; except imprint bound edges of volumes
with the name of the building and the words "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Report".
Imprint front of the volume with the name of the building, project name, project number,
Owner, GC, Mechanical Subcontractor Architect, Mechanical Engineer, and the TAB
firm; three (3) copies for the Owner and one (1) copy for the A/E.
B. The pre -final and final reports shall include a narrative and the data necessary to describe
the system(s), operating equipment, and how they function. Identify equipment using the
construction drawing identifiers. Provide ventilation and heating hot water piping riser
diagrams if either one is not already a part of the construction drawings. Include data
required by: "3.5 Air System Data" and "3.6 Water System Data".
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Instrumentation shall be provided as necessary and appropriate to perform the work. The
type and number of instruments utilized shall be determined by the type of systems
involved and the number of personnel required to complete the work by the time stipulated.
The instruments shall be recently factory calibrated and shall be used with the factory -
determined application factors. This instrumentation shall include, as appropriate, but not
be limited to, the following, or approved equal.
1. Airflow/Pressure:
a. Capture box
b. Inclined manometer
c. Anemometer; 4 inch Biram type
d. Anemotherm; Anemostat Model 60
e. Velometer; Alnor Type 3002
f. Dwyer "Magnehelic", 0 to 4 inch wg; 0 to 10 inch wg
g. Pitot tubes; static and velocity; Dwyer Model 400
2. Water Flow/Pressure:
a. Barco meter and calibration charts
b. Pressure gauges
c. P&T insert probes
3. Temperature:
a. P&T insert probes
b. Duct probes
c. Surface temperature pyrometer; Alnor Type 4200
d. Electronic readout devices
e. Recorders
4. Humidity:
a. Sling psychrometer
b. Electronic humidity sensor
5. Electrical:
a. Amprobe
b. Voltmeter
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 4 C
11 /03 �l�r{
III
C
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The CA shall provide all necessary test equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION
A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required
systems and configuration.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required
construction details, and their support and further define the systems features.
C. Make periodic inspections of the HVAC systems components, ductwork, and piping
systems as constructed; reviewing the following for configuration, quality of construction,
adherence to design requirements, and conformance with shop drawings and submittal
information.
3.2 GENERAL TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Records shall be maintained at all times which shall readily indicate all steps, adjustments,
and intermediate and final readings. The records shall indicate on each trial whether a
damper or balancing device was cut or opened. The records shall be maintained on
reproducible type forms which shall include measurement locations, design capacities,
appropriate manufacturer's performance factors, and dates and names of personnel
involved; and shall be included in the report.
B. Final settings shall be clearly marked on each balancing valve, quadrant, etc.
C. Occasionally work may have to be performed in areas that are partially or fully occupied by
the Owner, which may require the work to be accomplished during other than normal
working hours. Such occupancy shall not be considered justification for any deviation for
the requirements outlined herein or any extra payments. Where overtime work is required
for expeditious completion of the balancing work, payment of premium rates for such work
shall not be allowed without specific written approval by the Owner's Representative in
advance.
D. System operation will be by the GC to suit the requirements of the balancing work. System
filters shall be new at start of testing, adjustment, and balancing work.
E. Demonstrate agreement of recorded and measured data. Upon completion of final balance
settings, notify the Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent. Repeat flow readings at five
percent of the outlets as directed by the Commissioning Agent or Owner's Representative.
If repeat readings differ by more than five percent from the final values recorded on the
balance report forms, balancer shall make corrections to the system balance and this
procedure shall then be repeated.
F. Resourcefulness is frequently required in order to properly balance some of the more
complex and intricate systems. This may dictate the use of methods and techniques not
herein before stated. Where "standard" balancing procedures cannot, due to physical
conditions or other circumstances be employed, alternate methods shall be determined and
approved by the Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent.
3.3 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. General: Prior to air system balancing, verify the following:
1. Systems shall be running in control and modulating with reasonable flows and
pressure.
2. Clean air filters.
3. All fire, smoke and isolation dampers open.
4. All ducts intact/no leakage.
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 5
11 /03
�J
5. Test and adjust blower rpm to design g requirements.
6. Test and record motor actual and full load amps.
7. Test and record system preliminary static pressure profiles across all fan system
components at intermediate points in branch ducts, and at end of runs.
B. Adjustments: Adjust all air handling systems to provide the required design air quantity to,
or through, each component as indicated.
C. Balance: Use flow adjusting (volume control) devices to balance air quantities only; i.e.
proportion flow between various terminals comprising system, and only to the extent that
their adjustments do not create objectionable air motion to sound. Make final
measurements of air quantity, after the air terminal has been adjusted to provide the
optimum air patterns of diffusion.
D. Fan Adjustment: Total air system quantities shall be varied by adjustment of fan speeds
utilizing the VFD's and in some cases by sheave sets. Terminal control boxes, manual
volume dampers, etc. shall not be used for fan adjustment. Fans, air handling equipment,
or other equipment with vibration levels considered by the balancer to be excessive shall
be brought to the attention of the GC for correction.
E. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) or (VSD)/Filter Pressure Drop Simulation Test: The
VFD's shall be positioned when the filter bank(s) are at their maximum allowable pressure
drop. Simulate filter loading by gradually covering the face of the filters and observing the
VFD modulation as the filter pressure drop increases. IF the VFD is at its maximum
operating condition and with the maximum dirty filter condition and the static pressure
setting is sufficient to supply design volumes to all the terminals and the inlet static
pressure to VAV boxes is at least .75", then the fan speed shall be decreased. Adjust the
static pressure sensor setting to the lowest level that will still obtain the required terminal air
volumes and VAV box inlet pressure. After consultation with the GC and the Owner's
Representative, the static pressure sensor shall be moved to a location deemed
appropriate by the testing and balancing agency if it is reading incorrectly (due to poor
positioning or air turbulence occurring from a known or unknown cause).
F. Air Measurement:
1. General: Total system air quantities shall be determined by summing the air quantities
at the terminals served. Total system air quantities shall also be determined by pitot
tube traverse and by fan performance data.
2. Pitot Tube Traverse: Perform pitot-tube traverses at each fan, and (in addition), if the
fan serves more than one floor, perform traverses on each branch fed to each floor.
Pitot tube traverses may be omitted at branch feeds to each floor if all the branch feeds
are individually less than 2,000 CFM.
3. Test Holes: Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible from elbows,
bends, takeoffs, and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow
measurements. Plug holes after testing and patch insulation where required. Indicate
test hole location with marker.
4. Air Terminal Balancing: Preliminary measurement of flow rates by means of velocity
meters applied to individual terminals, with or without cones or other adapters, may be
used for balancing. Final measurement of air quantities at each type of air terminal
(inlet and outlet) shall be determined only by the method approved in the balancing
agenda. When complete, at least one air path from each air outlet or inlet shall have all
j1
volume dampers wide open. This is to ensure minimum static pressure build-up in the
system as a result of balancing. Balance air terminals to within plus or minus 5% of the
volume flow rate values listed on the drawings. In all rooms or areas where the supply
and exhaust (or return) volume flow rates indicated on the drawings differ for the
purposes of pressurizing a room or area, the 5% degree of accuracy in balancing the
air terminals shall not change the difference between the supply and exhaust (or return)
volume flow rates.
r `
G. Lab Airflow Control System: Assist the lab airflow control system manufacturer in complete
LJ
point-to-point commissioning of the lab airflow control systems, including:
1. Perform testing of all face velocity of all fume hoods using ANSI certified equipment.
f ,
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 6
11 /03
I
2. Test all face velocity alarms, purge override switches unoccupied/sash up alarms, and
all other hardware components.
3. Verify proper pressure relationships in all lab spaces. Assist the lab airflow controls
manufacturer during set-up and start-up of the LACS. Provide full documentation of all
testing.
4. Test all fume hoods or biological safety cabinets as described below.
H. VAV Box Adjustment: VAV terminal control units shall be adjusted for the air quantities
indicated. Adjust thermostats which control VAV boxes and record maximum and minimum
CFMs. The velocity pressure off of the box flow -sensing probe shall be recorded at both
the maximum and minimum CFMs.
I. Other Systems: Provide complete balancing of the following systems:
1. Biological safety cabinets
2. Canopy hoods over autoclave
3.4 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES
A. Adjustment: Adjust heating, cooling, condensing water, special piping, high purity piping
systems to provide required quantity to, or through, each component.
B. Metering: Measure water quantities with pitot-type meters (Anubar), venturi meters, or
circuit setters. Measure temperatures and pressures from the thermometers, pressure
gauges or Pet's plugs. Adjust systems to provide the design pressure drops through the
heat transfer equipment (coils, converters, etc., except room units) prior to the capacity
testing. Where flow metering fittings are not installed, determine flow balance by
measuring temperature differential across the heat transfer equipment. Perform
measurement of temperature differential with the air system, adjusted as described herein,
in operation.
C. Automatic Controls: Position automatic control valves for full flow through the heat transfer
equipment during tests.
D. Pump Differential Pressure Bypass Valves: Verify operation is as specified and indicated.
If valve is working improperly, coordinate with the temperature controls installer and adjust
for proper operation.
E. Three -Way Valves: Pressure drop through bypass circuits at the three-way valves shall be
adjusted to balance that through the coil circuit.
F. Built-up Coil Banks: Adjust flow through coils for equal flows.
G. Makeup PRVs: Check and adjust makeup water pressure reducing valves as necessary to
obtain indicated static pressures.
H. Distribution: Adjust distribution by means of balancing devices (cocks, valves, and fittings)
and automatic flow control valves. Do not use service valves for adjustment. Where
automatic flow control valves are utilized in lieu of venturi tubes, record pressure drop and
flow through the valves.
I. Capacities: Adjusted capacities shall be within a tolerance of plus or minus 5% from the
design ratings shown on the contract drawings or, when leaving water temperatures are
used to indicate a balanced condition, within a tolerance of plus or minus 1°F. When
complete, at least one path from the pump discharge to the pump intake (except for the
balancing valve used to set the pump operating head) shall have balancing valves wide
open. This is to ensure minimum friction drop in the system as a result of balancing.
J. Special Procedures: When the pump capacity (as designed) is less than total flow
requirements of individual heat transfer units of system served, full flow may be simulated
by the temporary restriction of flow to portions of the system. In such a case, delineate
specific procedures in the agenda.
3.5 CERTIFIED REPORTS
A. Submittal: Submit three copies of the reports described herein, covering system
performance and air motion (FPM), to the Engineer prior to final tests and inspection.
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 7
11 /03
B. Instrument Records: Include types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all
instruments.
C. Reports: Reports shall identify conspicuously items not conforming to contract
requirements.
D. Recorded Values: All quantities recorded in report shall be measured unless report notes it
as a calculated value. Calculate values only where measuring is not possible.
E. Air Terminal Numbering Sketch: In lieu of an agency air terminal numbering sketch, obtain
three sets of half-size prints for inclusion into the certified report. The agency shall color
code the different duct systems, number the air terminals (in red) to correspond to the
numbers in the report, and indicate test holes and miscellaneous measurement locations.
3.6 AIR SYSTEM DATA
A. Report: The certified report shall include for each air handling system the data listed below.
B. Equipment (fan or factory fabricated air handling unit):
1. Installation Data:
a. Equipment schedule identification
b. Manufacturer and model number
c. All nameplate data
d. Type/size
e. Arrangement, discharge, and class
f. Motor HP, voltage, phase, cycles, and full load amps
g. Location in the building
h. Motor and fan sheave size, manufacturer and model number
i. Number of belts, belt size, manufacturer and model number
2. Design Data: Data listed in schedules on drawings and in the specifications.
3. Fan Recorded (Test) Data:
a. Date and time of readings and name of technician
b. CFM, measured by traverse at or near the fan
c. Static pressure readings across each component in the fan casing or plenum (each
coil, filter bank, control damper, louver, etc.)
d. Total pressure readings, where appropriate
e. RPM
f. Motor operating amps and volts (for each leg)
g. Motor operating BHP
h. Fan curve with operating point
i. Fuse and starter heater sizes
j. Damper positions (outside air, return air, etc.)
k. Signify that sheave alignment and belt tension have been checked and adjusted
I. VFD operation test observations and static pressure sensor set point
m. Economizer damper minimum position test observations and data
4. Pitot Tube Traverse:
a. Duct size(s)
b. Number, location and cross-section sketch of each pitot-tube (pressure)
measurement. Perform pitot tube traverses for all air handling systems whose
supply air, exhaust air, return air, or outside air ductwork (risers and take -offs) have
a cross sectional area of 400 square inches or larger.
c. Sum of velocity measurement, excluding pressure measurements
d. Average velocity
e. Recorded (test) CFM
f. Design CFM
5. Individual Air Terminals:
a. Terminal identification (supply or exhaust air valves, location and number
designation)
b. Type, size, manufacturer and catalog identification
c. Design and recorded quantities - CFM at minimum and maximum settings
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 8
11 /03
0
Is
r
[A
d. Design and measured air flow of primary and recirculated air
e. Deflector vane or diffusion cone settings
f. Applicable factor for application, velocity, area, etc.
g. Design and recorded velocities - FPM (state "core," "inlet," etc., as applicable)
6. Biological Safety Cabinets:
a. Installation Data:
(1) Identification (room or suite numbers, name, location, number designation,
exhaust fan)
(2) Manufacturer's name, model or size, and type (i.e. fume, perchloric, walk-in
canopy, bio-safety)
(3) Inlet fact area of hood with sash at maximum height (with sash stop released),
unless otherwise indicated.
(4) Design is inlet flow at 100 fpm through open inlet face area
(5) Final setting shall conform with certifying agency measurements using NIH
standards
b. Design Data:
(1) Maximum sash height
(2) Opening with
(3) Opening area
(4) Face velocity
(5) total CFM
c. Test Data:
(1) Maximum sash height
(2) Opening width
(3) Opening area
(4) Face velocity
(5) Total CFM
(6) Special air valve static pressure setting
3.7 WATER SYSTEM DATA
A. Report:
The certified report shall include for each water conveying system the data listed
below.
1. Pumps:
a.
Installation Data:
(1)
Equipment schedule identification
(2)
Manufacturer and model
(3)
All nameplate data
(4)
Size
(5)
Type drive
(6)
Motor HP, voltage, phase, and full load amps
(7)
Location in the building
b.
Design
Data:
(1)
Static pressure (at no -flow) at the makeup water connection
(2)
GPM
(3)
Head
(4)
RPM
(5)
BHP and amps
c.
Recorded Data:
(1)
Date and time of reading
(2)
Static pressure (at no -flow) at the makeup water connection
(3)
Discharge pressures (full -flow and no -flow)
(4)
Suction pressures (full -flow and no -flow)
(5)
Operating head (full -flow and no -flow)
(6)
Operation GPM (from pump curves if metering is not provided)
(7)
Pump curve with operating point(s)
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 9
11 /03
(8) Operating amps and volts (for each leg)
(9) Full -flow amps
(10) No -flow amps
(11) Calculated BHP
(12) Indicate pump differential pressure bypass valve test results
(13) Pressure at highest point in system
2. Converters and Heat Exchangers:
a. Installation and Design Data:
(1) Equipment schedule identification
(2) Manufacturer, model, type, and size
(3) GPM
(4) Inlet (entering) and outlet (leaving) temperatures
(5) Steam inlet pressure
(6) Water pressure drop
(7) Location in building
b. Recorded Data:
(1) Date and time of readings
(2) GPM
(3) System side entering and leaving water temperature
(4) Water pressure drop
(5) Heating (or cooling) media - steam pressure and temperature and condensate
temperature, or entering and leaving water temperature
(6) Heating (or cooling) media - flow (GPM or lbs. per hour)
(7) Heating (or cooling) capacity
3. Air Heating and Cooling Coils:
a. Installation and Design Data (Each Coil)
(1) Load in BTU per hour
(2) GPM
(3) Entering and leaving water temperature
(4) Entering and leaving air conditions (D.B. and W.B.)
(5) CFM
(6) Water pressure drop
(7) Air Pressure drop
(8) Number of coils
(9) Finned length
(10) Finned height
(11) Face area
(12) Face velocity
(13) Number of rows
(14) Fins per inch
(15) Manufacturer and model
b. Recorded Data:
(1) Date and time of readings
(2) Type of equipment and identification (location or number designation)
(3) Verify construction is per design data
(4) Entering and leaving air conditioning (D.B. and W.B.)
(5) Entering and leaving water temperature
(6) GPM
(7) CFM
(8) Water temperature rise or drop
(9) Air temperature rise or drop
(10) Water pressure drop
(11) Air pressure crop
(12) Capacity in BTU per hour
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 10
11 /03
I
f
I
1 I
. L
L
I
L
4. Domestic Water System:
a. Balancing and Recorded Data:
(1) Adjust balance valves on re -circulation lines to obtain equal temperature (plus
or minus 2°F) in each leg of system.
(2) Record temperature of each leg of re -circulation system and temperature at
the re -circulation pump.
(3) Record leaving water temperature of hot water heater(s).
3.8 SPECIAL SYSTEMS DATA
A. Report: The certified report shall include the data listed below.
B. Smoke Tests: After air and water balancing is completed, smoke tests shall be performed
across all doors as directed by the Test Engineer. Adjust (and record) air quantities as
necessary to obtain code required pressure relationships as directed by the Engineer.
Provide smoke gun and smoke.
3.9 FINAL TESTS, INSPECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Capacity and Performance Tests: Make tests to demonstrate that capacities and general
performance of systems comply with contract requirements.
B. Retests: The testing agency shall recheck random selections of up to 10% of the data
recorded in the balancing report in the presence of the Engineer. The balancing report will
be automatically rejected if more than 20% of the rechecked readings deviate more than
10% of the recorded reading in the balancing report.
C. Marking of Settings: Following final acceptance of the balancing report, the settings of all
valves, splitters, dampers, and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked by
the balancing agency, so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time.
3.10 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. See criteria stated under Air Systems and Water Systems
3.11 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in this Section. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
conditions. List the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices and
acceptable results for each condition tested. Provide a unique alpha -numeric identification
for each FPT procedure.
B. Submit for approval test procedure check -off sheets. Number each test procedure check-
off item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
Sign -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Commissioning Agent or other
Owner -designated witness.
END OF SECTION
02092 COMMISSIONING, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15042 - 11
11 /03
I
I i
SECTION 15047
MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section applies to piping systems used to transport gases, liquids or semi -liquids. The
term "piping systems", includes pipes, fittings, valves and pipe coverings located either
inside or outside the buildings. This identification scheme does not apply to piping systems
buried in the ground.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Part 1910.144.
B. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems - ANSI A 13.1
C. Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards - ANSI 253.1
1.4 METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION
A. The primary identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the
material content of the system by wrap -around pipe markers, giving the name of the
content in full or abbreviated form. These markers shall be conspicuously placed at
frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where
pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of
flow.
B. This identifying marker shall be supplemented by the use of a color code which will indicate
the nature of the material carried in the system. Piping systems shall be placed, by the
nature of their contents, in one of the basic groups listed below. Each group is assigned a
predominant color range as noted.
C. The entire exposed length of the piping system shall be painted by its proper color code to
identify the system. Markers shall be Seton Setmark or equal. Specialties shall be painted
as specified for piping. "Exposed" refers to all piping in the equipment room. Piping above
the ceiling deck will be considered "concealed".
D. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each
pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at
intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 15 feet when installed above
the ceiling deck, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified
therein. Markers on lines above ceiling deck shall be applied on the topside of the lines
and ducts and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow
indicators adjacent to identification markers similarly color coded and sized.
E. Size of Identification:
Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering
Letters (" Height)
3/4 to 1-1/4 1 /2
1-1/2 to 2 3/4
2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4
8 to 10 2-1/2
Over 10 3-1/2
02092
11 /03
MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION
15047 - 1
F. Colors: Exact colors shall conform to Owners Piping Identification Code. All numbers
are PITTSBURGH:
Piping Color
Ducts - Supply and Exhaust Safety Orange - 6-259
Chilled Water Supply & Return Spanish Blue - 1-346
Hot Water Supply & Return Spanish Blue —1-346
Waste and Vent Flat Black - 54-198
Domestic Cold Water Vista Green - 6-256
Domestic Hot Water Rose Coral - 15P-27
Air Lines Autumn Brown - 54-126
Equipment
Pumps H & CH Water Seal Brown - 1-344
A.H. Unit, Generator Touch up as required
Controls Equipment Polish and lacquer
Copper Pipe Polish and lacquer
Electrical Materials Grey
Lab Compressed Air Lines Reef Brown - 95-6 (Color Guild)
Gas (Natural) Safety Red - 6-261
1.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton
P-250 tag with depressed, black filled numbers and letters identifying the service by letters
and the number of the valve. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using
meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire.
B. Furnish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of
every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize the
valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall be neatly
typed and mounted under a glass pane in a suitable frame. These charts shall, in addition,
list the various colors identifying the piping. Mount the charts on the wall of the mechanical
equipment room.
1.6 IDENTIFICATION OF UNDERGROUND LINES
A. All lines installed underground shall have a 6" wide 0.004" thick color coded, permanent
plastic tape buried above the pipe, approximately 12" below grade. The tape shall identify
the pipe thus protected. In addition, provide tracer wire for all buried services.
02092 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15047 - 2
11 /03
r
L
I
I
E
1.7 MARKING ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A. Lay -in Ceiling Panels: Use color coded thumb tacks neatly aligned in one corner of the
panel to identify valves, fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc. The color code shall conform
to the piping identification color code for valve access. The color shall be red for fire and
smoke dampers. Generally, equipment shall be accessible from above the ceiling deck,
and not from above the lay -in ceilings.
B. Stencil 1/2" high letters on concealed access doors to identify fire and smoke dampers.
1.8 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the
equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment,
valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc.,
shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of
equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example,
pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-1, EF-2, etc.; Air
Units will be AHU-1, AHU-2, etc.
B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of
engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick,
3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least
1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the
item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information.
Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Boilers
2. Water Chillers
3. Pumps
4. Air Handling Units
5. Humidifiers
6. Filter Banks
7. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches
8. Exhaust and Return Air Fans
9. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items
10. Plumbing equipment
END OF SECTION
02092
11 /03
MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION
15047 - 3
�i
1
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
r
1i
SECTION 15060
PIPING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service
necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or
specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3 INSPECTION
A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during
the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during
hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the
Contractor.
1.4 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE
A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign
matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will
protect them from damage by freezing.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
I 02092
11 /03
A. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be
used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the
applicable standard.
PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR=35
PVC Soil Fittings — Elastomeric ASTM D3212
Copper Tubing
Wrought Copper Solder Fittings
Cast Bronze Solder Fittings
Steel Pipe
Butt Weld Fittings
Socket Weld Fittings
Steel Flanges
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
ASTM B88
ANSI BI6.22
ANSI B16.18
ASTM A120, A53, A106
ANSI B16.9
ANSI B16.11
ANSI B16.5
ANSI B16.3
PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1584 Type 1120
Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1585, AWWA C900
Flange Bolt, Sets ANSI/ASME B31.1
PIPING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
15060 - 1
B. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass
to iron seat; Crane or equal.
C. Insulating Fittings: Maloney or equal.
D. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal
to Chase, Crane or Mueller.
E. Victaulic nor other mechanical couplings are not permitted.
F. Gaskets in Water Lines: Equal to Flexitalic Wire Insertion Red rubber sheet packing; 1/16"
thick. Use full face gaskets with cast iron flanges.
G. Gaskets in Steam and Condensate Return Lines: Flexitalic or equal. Use full face gaskets
with cast iron flanges.
2.2 VALVES
A. General Service Valves: 2" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 2-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron
body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos:
Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure
Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG
Gate 3" and smaller 428 424
Gate 3-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 7-1/2 E
Globe 3" and smaller 1 14-1/2 P
Globe 3-1/2" and larger 351 21E
Angle 3" and smaller 2 16-1/2 P
Angle 3-1/2" and larger 353 23E
B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as
recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated
line, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket.
C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth,
Hammond.
D. Check Valves: Use "Silent' check valves at the discharge of circulating water pumps. Unless
specifically noted to the contrary, use horizontal swing check valves in all other locations.
E. Silent Check Valves 1-1/2" and Smaller: Bronze body; bronze trim; stainless steel spring;
Combination Pump Valve Company No. 36 or equal.
F. Silent Check Valves 2" and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, equal to
Combination Pump Valve Company No. 10B or 20B up to 125 psi 11 B, or 21 B up to 250 psig.
G. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to Crane No. 37 for
pressures to 125 psi or No. 36 for pressures to 200 psi SWP or 400 PSI WOG.
H. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Iron body, flanged, bronze trimmed; equal to Crane
No. 373 for pressures to 125 psi or No. 39E for pressures from 125 psi to 250 psi.
I. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, SS Grade CF8M
discs, stainless steel shafts with 316SS bushings, resilient EPDM seats and O-rings, 'Bubble
Tight' shut-off at 250 psi pressure. On valves 4" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position
with memory stops. On valves 8" and larger, provide geared operators. Valves shall be
equal to Demco NE-C-5122031. The following valves will be acceptable: Centerline Series
LT, Crane 42-SSZ, Demco, Grinnell WD-8271, Keystone 122, Norris R-3011.
J. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and
O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three
piece break away for in -line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are
acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. Where valves are installed
in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket.
0
I I
11
11
I
U
u
0
02092 PIPING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES 15060 - 2
11 /03
K. Valves in Plastic Lines: Cabot Chemtrol CPVC ball valves. Refer to Section 15080 for Pure
Water System components.
L. Pipe Flexible Connections: Flexible connections shall be molded expansion joints as
manufactured by Proco Series 240, or equal. Construction shall include neoprene cover and
tube elastomer, retaining flanges and control rod plate.
2.3 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES
A. Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380
T-handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the
pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so
that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be
Q screwed into and out of the cock.
B. Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as
possible. Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by
the manufacturer, use these tappings.
C. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze
bushed rotary movement and link; 4 1/2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum
case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range
a suitable for the duty.
D. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-1 with cast aluminum case; Weksler,
Weiss, and Trerice acceptable.
E. Steam Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-1 with cast aluminum case, mounted
on coiled pipe (pigtail) siphons; Weksler, Weiss, Trerice acceptable.
2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all
thermometer and controller bulbs which are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever
a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature
indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely surrounded by
flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic
only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating
instruments, for easy readability.
B. Test Wells: Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass,
with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled
with oil to facilitate temperature measurements.
2.5 MERCURIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Industrial type with Cycolac plastic cases, glass fronts, 9" scale, adjustable straight or angle
pattern as required for ready readability. Furnish thermometers with 2-1/2" stem extensions
where they are installed in insulated lines. Select scale ranges for maximum readability at
the design temperature of the medium being measured. Thermometer equal to Weksler No.
AA5H9.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Weiss, Moeller.
2.6 COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT
A. Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1/4" MPT fitting to receive either a
temperature or pressure probe 1/8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of
neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend
through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines.
02092 PIPING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES 15060 - 3
11 /03
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The
location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings.
B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained
materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the
building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified
grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building.
C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings.
D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible
connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping
due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to
minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure.
E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of
connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper
connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide
unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided.
Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material.
F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same
material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except
that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains
may be made with Bonney Weldolets, Thredolets or equal. Mitering of pipe to form elbows,
notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted.
G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of
assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with
the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are
not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of
fabricating it before ordering materials.
3.2 FLASHING
A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per
square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the
waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity.
Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square.
3.3 MASTIC PANS
A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru mastic pans. Pans shall be 18 gage
galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, and filled with mastic.
3.4 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on
grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit
readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines,
the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter
of the insulation.
B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through black steel or galvanized
pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they
shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and
sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire
resistive material. Refer to General Contractor Specifications for Firestopping Methods and
Materials.
u
I
I
fJ
02092 PIPING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES 15060 - 4 (-�
11/03 0
if
11
C. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through
floors shall be provided with black steel or galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at
least four No. 4 rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect.
After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and
floors on grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve
with mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link manufactured by Link Seal or equal.
Contractor shall coordinate sleeve size to ensure a watertight joint.
3.5 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES
A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons
or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or
ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly
against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are
insulated.
B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls.
3.6 INTERIOR TRENCHING
A. Trenches for underfloor lines inside the building shall be properly excavated, following in
general the procedures set out for exterior lines. Where floors are to be poured over these
lines, they shall be backfilled, tamped, and settled with water.
B. Where necessary to cut floors for installation of underfloor lines, the floor shall be saw cut and
patched back to a flush and level condition.
C. All surplus materials removed in these trenching operations shall be disposed of as directed
by the Architect.
3.7 PROTECTION OF UNDERGROUND PIPING
A. Underground steel piping shall be cleaned and primed with Humble "Rust -Ban" and wrapped
with a double thickness of 3M Scotch "51" vinyl tape over pipe and fittings.
3.8 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS
A. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing
with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard
drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of
the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder
(95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver
composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content
be permitted on the jobsite.
B. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material
conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material
conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the
material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and
a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit
the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of
welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or
blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before
depositing the next successive bead of welding.
C. Mechanical Couplings: Mechanical couplings and fittings are not permitted.
D. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made using bolts and gaskets as specified. Faces of
the flanges shall be cleaned of all dirt, rust or other foreign matter. The pipe, valve, or fitting
shall be properly aligned and free to move while bolting, and the bolts shall be gradually
tightened at a uniform rate around the entire flange. No strain shall be put on the flanges in
making up the joint.
02092 PIPING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES 15060 - 5
11 /03
0
E. Solvent Weld Plastic Joints: Solvent welded according to manufacturers instructions.
F. Special Joints: Special joints made with clamps, compression couplings, etc. shall be as
required to connect tubing to piping systems, tubing to items of equipment and other such
connections. Use tools as required by the materials and conditions.
3.9 REPAIR OF LEAKS
A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows:
1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing
joints will be permitted.
2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening
fails to stop the leak.
3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails,
remake the joint.
4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base
metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal.
The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length.
B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system.
3.10 HANDLING OF MATERIAL
A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the
site by the Contractor.
B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded
by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances
shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled
against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place
where it is to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive,
building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian
traffic.
C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall
not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be
made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor
shall replace the damaged pipe.
3.11 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES
A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings,
valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All
pipe shall be installed straight and true to line.
B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans
are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so
to not interfere with existing obstructions.
END OF SECTION
0
u�
I
I
nu
I
U
02092 PIPING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES 15060 - 6
11/03
r
L
SECTION 15070
PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment,
labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in
connection with the installation of the plumbing systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to 15060 -PIPING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES section.
A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Schedule 80, PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and
Schedule 40 DWV fittings conforming to ASTM D-2665, assembled with solvent cement
conforming to ASTM D-2564.
B. Sanitary Fixture Waste Arms: Fixtures served by sanitary soil waste and drain lines shall be
connected using cast iron pipe and fittings, red brass pipe, Type L hard copper tubing with
cast brass drainage fittings or lead. Use brass soldering nipples or ferrules as required.
C. Sanitary Vent Lines: Schedule 80, PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and Schedule 40 DWV fittings
conforming to ASTM D-2665, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564.
D. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under
slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be
Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and
cast iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder joint fittings. No
lead solder will be permitted.
E. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings.
F. Downspouts and Interior Storm Drain Lines: PVC-DWV Plastic pipe and fittings conforming to
ASTM D-2665, assembled with solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564.
G. Specialty Gases:
1. Supplied from local cylinders located in labs.
2. Piping bracketed on walls - Swagelock fitting system.
3. Piping shall be 1/4" type 316 stainless steel tubing joined by "Swagelok" system.
H. Miscellaneous Lines: Such as pilot lines, bleed lines, control and sampling lines, equalizer
lines, drains from air vents and relief vents, etc. shall be fabricated of the materials used in
the systems to which they are connected.
I. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change
in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil,
waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they shall be
concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W 8480-R or provided with
other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts
in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule
with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in
finished tile floors shall be Wade W-6000-TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade
W-6000-72 with carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to
4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines.
02092 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 15070 - 1
11 /03
2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Refer to Section 15450.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ISOLATING VALVES
A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving
the riser. These isolation valves shall be installed at an accessible location. Where these
valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the
ceiling or chase.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the
following specifications shall apply.
1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a
uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to
serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never
be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second.
2. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof.
3. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely
drain the system.
4. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush
valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins.
3.3 TESTING
A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise
covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as
required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing.
B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks
whatsoever.
C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with
water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting
system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the
pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with
water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the
highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be
filled with water and tested with at least a 10-foot head of water. The water shall be kept in
the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts.
The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours.
D. Downspouts and Storm Drains: Test with water under a head of at least 10 ft. System shall
be tight at all joints with no leaks whatsoever.
E. Other Tests: Perform all tests required to demonstrate that each system is operating
properly.
3.4 DISINFECTING
A. After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and
materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by
the application of a chlorinating agent. The chlorinating agent may be a liquid chlorine, liquid
chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines
through a suitable solution feed device.
m
11,
0
I �
11
If
I
I
U_
02092 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 15070 - 2
11 /03 -0
B. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being filled
and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of
the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the
section to be disinfected very slowly.
C. The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per
"! million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipelines for a period of not less than 24
hours. At the end of the 24-hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20
ppm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water
in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million.
�a
11
END OF SECTION
02092 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS 15070 - 3
11 /03
I
I
SECTION 15080
PURE WATER PIPING SYSTEM
PART GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish a complete high purity PVDF piping system to include pipe, fittings, anchors,
specialty fittings, and valves. At the Contractor's option, socket fusion or butt fusion joining
methods may be used. At the Contractor's option, unpigmented PVDF or unpigmented
polypropylene (NPP) may be used.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The following standards apply to products used within this section.
1. (PVDF): ASTM D-3222, ASTM D-2467, ASTM D-2464, ASTM D-1785, ASTM D-2657
2. Natural Polypropylene: ASTM D-4101/PP0210-B45145, ASTM D-2467, ASTM D-2464,
ASTM D-2657, ASTM D-1785, FDA-21 CFR 177.1520(C)(1.1), USP-CLASS VI.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PVDF- Natural (unpigmented) Polyvinylidene Fluoride
B. NPP — Natural (Unpigmented) Polypropylene
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Install piping, fittings and valves constructed of PVDF or NPP.
1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. System performance requirements system shall handle the following:
1. Operating Pressure: 50 psi
2. Operating Temperature: 73 deg. F.
3. Test Pressure: 100 psi
4. Media: RO Water, 1 Megohm-cm quality
1.6 SUBMITTALS: Submit the following:
A. Product data for the system specified; relative to materials, dimensions of individual
components, profiles and finishes.
B. Product certificates signed by manufacturer of piping product stating compliance to stated
requirements.
C. Welder certificates, certifying that welders comply with the installation procedures as outlined
by ASTM D-2657. All training should be scheduled and completed prior to job start-up.
D. Qualification of Firms Supplying High Purity Water Piping: Firms must have a minimum of
five years experience in HP design, installation and operation of a thermoplastic high -purity
piping systems.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain components from a single source having responsibility and accountability to answer
and resolve problems regarding proper installation, compatibility, performance and
acceptance.
02092 PURE WATER PIPING SYSTEM
11 /03
15080 - 1
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all pipe to arrive on -site protected inside manufacturers standard shipping tubes.
B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location with protection from the environment.
C. Lift, support and transport piping per manufacturer's recommendations.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warranty period shall one year after date of substantial completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work
include: Natural Kynar (NPVDF) as manufactured by Chemtrol, a division of Nibco.
2.2 MATERIAL
A. Pipe:
1. Rigid PVDF used in the manufacture of Schedule 80 piping components shall conform to
requirements in ASTM D-3222 for Type I homopolymers. Pipe and fitting components
shall be manufactured from PVDF compound which shall be natural (unpigmented) 700
series Kynar of the highest purity and maximum transparency to UV radiation.
2. Rigid NPP used in the manufacture of Schedule 80 piping shall be Chem -Pure Natural
PP pipe, constructed of Cell Class PP0110-A2-1510 as per ASTM D4101. Fitting
material shall be Cell Class PP0210-B45145 as per ASTM D4101. These materials shall
be unpigmented, of the highest purity, meeting the standards referenced above.
B. Fittings:
1. Fitting components shall utilize socket type heat fusion welded connections and shall
have socket lengths and wall thicknesses conforming to ASTM D-2467 and socket
diameters shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations to
provide an interference fit with the pipe. Butt -fusion joining will be acceptable.
2. Pipe shall be manufactured to the same tolerances for outside diameter wall thicknesses
as outlined in ASTM D-1785 for Schedule 80 pipe.
3. Fittings shall be industrial, heavy duty, hub style.
4. Unions shall be the 0-ring seal type having interchangeable components with true union
valves for maximum system versatility.
C. Pressure Ratings: Socket fittings and pipe for PVDF shall be pressure rated for 470 psi (3/4"
pipe size) at 73 deg. F. water service. For NPP, socket fittings and pipe shall be pressure
rated for 470 psi (3/4" pipe size) at 73 deg. F. water service.
D. Valves:
1. All valves shall be supplied by the supplier of the pipe and fittings.
2. Isolation Valves: For PVDF option, True -Bloc True Union Ball Valves, full port, rated for
150 psi non -shock at 73 deg. F. Constructed of all Natural PVDF, with Glass Bead Filled
Polypropylene handle. Chemtrol Model S66TB-V, thermal socket weld ends. For NPP
option, True Union Ball Valves, full port, rated for 150 psi non -shock at 73 deg. F.
Constructed of all NPP, with Glass Bead Filled Polypropylene ball and PVC handle lever,
Viton 0-rings, seats and seals. Chemtrol Model S62TU-V, thermal socket weld ends.
3. Check Valves: For PVDF option, True Union Ball Check, rated for 150 psi non -shock at
73 deg. F. Constructed of all Natural PVDF with Viton Elastomeric Trim. Chemtrol Model
S66BC-V, thermal socket weld ends. For NPP option, True Union Ball Check, rated for
150 psi non -shock at 73 deg. F. Constructed of all Natural Polypropylene with Viton
Elastomeric Trim. Chemtrol Model S62BC-V, thermal socket weld ends
0
I
I
02092 PURE WATER PIPING SYSTEM 15080 - 2
11 /03
u
[A'
F
�i
E
P
V
E. Sink Fittings: Gooseneck spouts with integral supply fitting is specified to be provided as a
part of the laboratory casework. Make final connection to all sink fittings.
2.3 SPECIALTY FITTINGS
A. Specialty fittings include restraint fittings, instrumentation fittings, instrumentation donuts, etc.
Specialty fittings shall be machined of the same PVDF resin as the fittings. All fittings shall be
machined and then cleaned.
2.4 JOINING EQUIPMENT
A. Socket Fusion: Proper equipment selection shall be based on pipe size and site conditions.
Socket fusion tools shall be available in two styles; one portable style capable of welding 1/2"-
2", and a bench style capable of welding 3/4"-4". Heating elements shall be electronically
controlled for accurate welding temperatures. Tools shall incorporate male and female heater
insert with teflon coating. Pipe shall be cut using plastic pipe cutting wheels in tubing cutter.
Saw cut method or ratchet cut method are prohibited. Butt -fusion joining shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Facilities: Subassembly and fabrication work should be conducted to a separate, temporary
clean room located within the building. Room for sub -assembly should be filtered to
ASHRAE 90% level.
B. Tools:
1. All fusion tools utilized and necessary miscellaneous tools shall be dedicated for clean
build only, and should be kept separate from other tools. Special attention should be
given to the fusion tools to prevent the possibility of contaminating a weld. The contractor
shall lease or purchase all necessary welding equipment from the manufacturer. At the
end of the installation, information pertaining to the lease or purchase of any necessary
equipment for additional pipe joining and repair shall be provided to the Owner.
Contractor is responsible for proper maintenance and care of the fusion tools during
construction.
2. Installers shall be pre -qualified through training on welding technique according to ASTM
D-2657.
3. Manufacturer shall provide on -site training in the assembly and installation of the piping
system.
3.2 TESTING
A. Prior to pressure testing, the system shall be examined for the following items:
1. Pipe shall be completed per drawing layout with all pipe and valves supports in place.
2. Pipe, valves and equipment shall be supported as specified, without any concentrated
loads on the system.
3. Pipe shall be in good condition, void of any cracks, gouges or deformation.
a. Pipe flanges shall be properly aligned. All flange bolts should be checked for correct
torque.
b. All joints should be reviewed for appropriate welding technique.
(1) Socket - to have two beads on the end of the fitting and on the outside of the
pipe in contact.
B. If any deficiencies appear, the joint shall be remade.
02092 PURE WATER PIPING SYSTEM 15080 - 3
11 /03
C. Pressure Test:
1. Test fluids shall be deionized water, with quality level set by Owner's representative. In
all cases test must be done hydrostatically. Air is not acceptable for the final hydrostatic
test..
2. Prior to filling the system, test with 10 psi nitrogen to find obvious leaks.
3. Filling the system - Open all valves and vents to purge the system of air. Slowly inject the
water into the system, making sure that air does not become trapped in the system.
4. Begin pressurizing the system in increments of 10 psi. Bring the system up to 100 psi
and hold. Allow system to hold pressure for a minimum of two hours and up to a
recommended 12 hours. Check pressure gauge after one hour. Due to natural creep
effects on plastic piping, the pressure will have decreased. If drop is less than 10% pump
the pressure back up. At this time the system may be fully pressurized to desire test
pressure.
5. If after one hour the pressure has decreased more than 10%, consider the test a failure.
Note the 10% value may need to be greater for larger systems, or systems experiencing
significant thermal changes.
6. Test is to be witnessed by Owner's representative, and certified by the Contractor.
7. In obvious leaks can be found by employing the system and placing a 10 psi charge of
clean, dry nitrogen on the system. Each joint should then be individually checked using a
soapy water solution or an Ultrasonic, leak detection gun. Leak detection guns shall be
available from the pipe manufacturer.
3.3 CLEANSING OF HP PIPING SYSTEM
A. Upon completion of the testing the lines shall be drained and refilled with 10% hydrogen
peroxide solution, and circulated through the system for 6 hours. Flush out system two times
with RO water and make the system ready for operation.
END OF SECTION
0
11
I
III
I �
I
ii
III]
a
9�
0
02092 PURE WATER PIPING SYSTEM 15080 - 4
11/03
SECTION 15085
PURE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide water treatment equipment as specified, scheduled and indicated.
B. Provide "turn -key" design, installation, supervisor, and startup for the system. It will be
acceptable for the system to be installed by Division 15 subcontractor, if the installation
work is supervised and checked by the pure water system equipment supplier.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: The Equipment supplied must be equal or superior in every way, from the
standpoint of quality of components, functions, capacities, flow rates, controls, data
readout, alarms, and etc. The proof that equipment other than that specified is equal or
superior in every way to that specified is the responsibility of the contractor offering the non
specified brand.
Products complying with these specifications are supplied by Bob J. Johnson & Associates,
Inc. (806) 745-7933 or (214) 631-4316
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawing submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Cut sheets on all equipment showing features, characteristics, and capacities.
2. Water analysis results.
3. Floor plan layout showing equipment layout in floor space which is available.
4. Manufacturers recommended installation instructions for system.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver water softeners and accessories in factory -fabricated water-resistant wrapping.
B. Handle water softeners and accessories carefully to avoid damage to material component,
enclosure and finish.
C. Store water softeners and accessories in a clean, dry space and protect from the weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER SOFTENER AND PRETREATMENT
A. General: Furnish, install and place into operation an automatic twin water softener
consisting of two (2) 9" diameter X 48" high filter tanks with 1 cubic foot each of cation
exchange resin. System shall be rated for a maximum service flow of 10 gpm at a pressure
loss of not more than 15psi.
B. Equipment: The equipment shall be a Unity Equipment Systems model U30FO75T or
approved equal.
L 1. Softener Tank(s):
a. Tanks shall be of fiberglass reinforced plastic rated for 100 psig working pressure
and hydrostatically tested at 50% in excess of the working pressure. Tanks shall be
NSF approved.
02092 PURE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 15085 - 1
11 /03
b. Tanks shall have threaded NPT connections, pressure gauges, and sampling
cocks on the service inlet and outlet.
c. Tanks shall have 50% or more freeboard.
2. Internal Distribution:
a. Upper distribution system shall be of the baffle type to evenly distribute the water
over the entire tank area.
b. Lower distribution system shall be of a proven design slotted PVC nipple. The
distribution system shall be embedded in a single layer subfill of washed 1/8" x
1/16" gravel to support the resin bed.
3. Main Operating Valve:
a. The sequence control valve shall operate on commands from the valve controller.
A hydraulically balanced piston shall glide effortlessly along non -corrosive spacers
and seals to a precise position. This precision motor -driven valve shall perform in
the toughest applications and shall be made of high quality brass for a long and
reliable life. A single valve shall regenerate and control flow through resin tank.
b. Valve shall have a treated water sampling cock.
4. Water Meter: A water meter shall be provided on the common outlet of the water
softener. Regeneration shall initiate when a preset volume of water is used. Once the
meter gallon setting zeros out, the system shall automatically switch tanks and the
exhausted tank shall go immediately into regeneration. Once regeneration is
completed, the tank shall go into the standby mode.
5. Flow Control: An automatic flow controller shall be provided to maintain proper
backwash and flush rates over wide variations in operating pressures and require no
field adjustment.
6. Controls: A reliable Fleck or equal electro-mechanical controller shall control softener.
The fully adjustable 5-cycle, single controller shall operate all steps and regeneration
cycles for both vessels, including up -flow backwash, down -flow brining and slow rinse,
rapid rinse, brine refill and down -flow service. Valve monitor flow control devices shall
automatically control backwash and brine rinse rate.
7. Brine System: The softening system shall include an 18" diameter X 40" high
poiyethyiene combination salt storage and brine making tank with a salt fill capacity of
400 lbs. Brine refill shall be automatically controlled by the timer/controller to provide
the correct amount of brine for each regeneration. A float and safety valve shut-off shall
back-up the refill system to minimize the chance of overflow.
8. Softener Resin: The sulfonated polystyrene cation exchange resin shall have a
minimum exchange capacity of 30,000 grains per cubic foot when regenerated with 15-
Ibs. salt.
9. Guarantees:
a. All mechanical equipment shall be guaranteed for one (1) year against any defects
in workmanship or materials. Any part proving defective will be replaced or repaired
within this period.
b. The manufacturer guarantees that under actual operating conditions, the mineral
shall not be washed out of the system during the service run or backwashing
period; that the turbidity and color of the affluent, by reason of passing through the
filter system, shall not be less than the incoming water; and that the underdrain
system, gravel, and mineral shall not become fouled, either with turbidity or by dirt,
while operating as noted on manufacturer's instructions.
2.2 ACTIVATED CARBON FILTER
A. General: Furnish, install and place into operation an automatic activated carbon filter
consisting of one (1) 9" diameter x 48" high filter tank with 1 cubic feet of granular activated
carbon. System shall be rated for 3.7 gpm at a pressure loss of not more than 5 psi.
B. Equipment: The equipment shall be a Unity Equipment Systems model AC9F075 or
approved equal.
0
0
11
0
I
I
0-
11
02092 PURE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 15085 - 2
11 /03
C
h,
2.3 REVERSE OSMOSIS SYSTEM
A. General: Furnish, install and place into operation a fully automatic reverse osmosis system
capable of providing .48 gpm (700 gpd) of water with Total Dissolved Solids in the
permeate less than 22 ppm based on feedwater with TDS of 1100 ppm and temperature of
770 F. The system will have a recovery rate of 50%.
B. Equipment: The equipment shall be Water Equipment Technologies (W.E.T.) Model GRO
700 or approved equal.
02092
11 /03
PURE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
15085 - 3
0
1. Membranes: RO membranes shall be Film Tec, spiral wound, thin film composite type.
Membranes will be housed in PVC pressure vessels. Each vessel shall be rated for
250-psig working pressure and will be equipped with a product sample valve.
2. Pump: The RO pump(s) shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. Pump shall be
positive displacement rotary vane type with non -overloading 1/3 HP ODP motor.
Voltage shall be 115V 60HZ.
3. Pre -filter Cartridges: Provide adequately sized filter housing with easy access for
cartridge replacement. Pressure drop shall not exceed 5 PSI at maximum flow of RO
system. Cartridges shall be 5-micron nominal rated, pleated type, sized for 0.5 gpm per
square foot of filter surface area.
4. Piping & Valves: The high pressure plumbing of the RO unit shall be 316 stainless steel
or specially qualified thermoplastic high pressure tubing. All welded pipe shall be
passivated. All low-pressure valves are PVC ball, ball check, or butterfly valves. High-
pressure valves are to be 316 stainless steel ball, butterfly, globe or needle valves. The
system shall have an electrically actuated inlet shut off valve for system isolation during
shutdown. Glycerin filled pressure gauges shall be provided to measure filter pressure
drops and membrane feed.
5. Instrumentation: System shall be controlled with a central control panel(s) which shall
control the operation. System shall include, as a minimum the following features:
a. Low feed water shutdown.
b. Conductivity monitor.
c. Pretreatment lockout.
6. Structural Fabrication: RO skid shall be constructed from Stainless Steel.
7. Guarantees: All mechanical equipment shall be guaranteed for one (1) year against
any defects in workmanship or materials. Any part proving defective will be replaced or
repaired within this period without charge to the owner or contractor.
2.4 BLADDER STORAGE TANK
A. General: Provide One (1) Steel Pressurized Storage Tank, 24" diameter X 68" height, 119
max. gallon capacity with approx. 35 gallon drawdown capacity at 30-50 psi. with 1-1/4"
NPT connections.
1. Shell: Heavy gauge steel
2. Base: High -impact composite; ABS
3. Finish: Electro statically applied, baked on polyester paint.
4. Water Cell: One piece seamless PVC, made from FDA listed material.
a. Controlled 2 dimensional cell expansion.
b. Water never touches the steel tank material.
5. Flange: Reinforced polypropylene.
6. Service Connection: Reinforced polypropylene integral to flange.
7. Air valve: Rubber stem/ brass body Schrader valve assembly.
8. UV Valve cover: High density polyethylene.
B. The Reverse Osmosis unit shall be fastened to a mounting bracket that is be secured to the
top of the storage tank to conserve space in mechanical room.
C. Equipment: Shall be a Pro -Source PS320-TR50 or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SANITIZATION
A. Water treatment vendor shall be responsible for sanitizing the distribution system with 35%
semi -conductor grade hydrogen peroxide, diluted to 5% concentration, left overnight and
drained completely the next day. Entire system shall be rinsed until there is no disinfectant
residual detected. System will then be placed into service by a qualified service technician
with a minimum 5 years experience with RO water systems.
0
�i
0
IF
0
0
I
[l
0
H_
02092 PURE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 15085 - 4
11 /03
r
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WATER TREATING SYSTEM
A. General: Covered under this section of the specifications is the actual delivery of water
treating equipment, installation materials and related supplies, unpacking of equipment,
I installing equipment, commissioning the system, instructing owner personnel as relates to
r operation and maintenance of the system.
B. Equipment Delivery: All equipment materials and supplies are to be new and where
practical delivered to the job site in the manufacturers/suppliers shipping containers, with all
items subject to inspection and acceptance by the General Contractor and Owners
representatives.
C. Equipment Placement: The equipment shall be placed and designated by the drawings
and specifications or as directed by or accepted by the General Contractor.
D. Piping/Plumbing of Equipment: The interconnecting piping and distribution piping of the
system shall be the responsibility of the project contractor. Piping and valves from the outlet
r of the RO system shall be high quality PVC schedule 80 ball valves, pipe and fittings, all of
1Lz USA manufacture.
E. Electrical Wring and Controls: Except for supply of the proper electrical to the water
treating control panel by the project electrician, the water treating equipment supplier shall
be responsible for all interconnecting electrical and control wiring. Electrical and control
u wiring shall conform to the electrical specifications for the project.
3.3 COMMISSIONING
A. The supplier of the water treating system shall be fully responsible for final checkout of the
installed system, shall start the system into operation, and verify performance. All pieces of
equipment shall be fully filled or loaded with consumables (salt, filter cartridges, batteries,
bulbs, fuses, etc.).
3.4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION AND ASSURANCE
A. The supplier of the water treating system shall verify the testing and monitoring that the
system is reliably producing water at the outlet of the R.O. system with a resistivity of at
least 20,000 ohms/CM @ 770F based on influent Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) of 1100
ppm. The equipment supplier shall be responsible for follow-up responsibility of correcting
any failure of the system caused by inferior equipment or workmanship for a period of one
full year from successful start-up of the system when operated in accordance with
instructions provided by the equipment supplier.
3.5 OPERATOR TRAINING
A. The supplier of the water treating system shall provide for owners/ operators a quantity of
four (4) Instruction Manuals covering all major components of the system, with a parts
breakdown of each, along with a priced list of recommended spare parts and consumables.
The owner/operator personnel shall be provided with a 4-hour session of training as soon
as can be mutually arranged after equipment commissioning and a follow-up 4-hour
training session within the next 90 days.
END OF SECTION
02092 PURE WATER SYSTEM EQUIPMENT 15085 - 5
11 /03
SECTION 15090
CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service
necessary for and incidental to the chilled and heating water systems as shown on the
drawings and/or specified herein.
B. Install chilled and heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and
other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to Section 15060.
B. Chilled and Heating Water Lines: Type L copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint
fittings. Provide Victaulic Dielectric Waterway or equal where steel and copper are joined.
C. Drain Lines: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe assembled with 150 pound malleable iron,
banded pattern, screwed fittings or, at the Contractor's option may be type L hard copper
assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. Do not mix the two materials.
D. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; Crane No. 976, or equal. Pipe the discharge of the air
vents to the nearest floor drain or open site drain.
E. Relief Valves: ASME labeled; equal to Bell and Gossett No. 250 having a relief setting of 125
pounds. Bell and Gossett, Taco or Thrush acceptable. Provide a relief valve in every closed
water circulating system.
F. Suction Diffuser: Gustin-Bacon Series 410 with 150 lb. flange pump connection and drain
plug.
2.2 EXPANSION TANK— HEATING WATER SYSTEM AND CHILLED WATER SYSTEM
A. Welded steel shell fabricated to ASME BPVC Section Vill Div. 1. Bladder shall be heavy-duty
butyl, removable for inspection. Bladder tank shall be equal in all respects to Taco CBX-30.
Tank shall be provided with valved gage glass, tappings and Bell and Gossett Airtrol tank
fitting, and shall have mounting saddles. It shall be supported from the structure in the
equipment room on adjustable hanger rods. It shall be factory coated for corrosion
resistance.
B. Provide and install in the water supply line to each expansion tank a gate valve, a Bell and
Gossett No. D-250 combination anti -syphon pressure reducing valve and relief valve, and a
check valve.
C. Shot Feeder: Provide and install a two gallon shot feeder across the supply and return mains
of the closed water circulating system. The feeder shall be installed with ball valves on either
side of the feeder. Provide an air cock, funnel, fill valve and drain valve.
02092 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15090 - 1
11 /03
2.3 CONNECTIONS TO SMALL COILS
A. Connections to water coils having 3/4" connections and smaller may be served using type "L"
soft copper tubing. Use only 95-5 or other high melting solder for these runouts.
2.4 BLADDER TYPE EXPANSION TANK
A. Unit shall be bladder type, floor mounted for permanent separation of air and water. Shell
shall be fabricated and designed to ASME BPVC Section VIII Div. 1. Bladder shall be heavy
duty butyl, removable for inspection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS
A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks
and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain
connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable,
provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system.
B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change
size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on
the same level.
C. Install drains from each pump base and from each air unit pan to the nearest floor drain in
each case. Provide any other drain lines indicated on the Drawings or required.
D. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections
of circulating systems or where indicated on the Drawings or required.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Chilled Water System: Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic
soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and
circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water.
Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water.
B. Heating Water System: Same as chilled water system, except heat the solution.
3.3 TESTING
A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system
working pressure or 100 psig whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks.
3.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A. Chemical treatment for the campus' chilled water system is accomplished at CHACP #1
(Central Plant). Additional treatment in the building is not permitted. For the heating water
system, provide initial fill of system and makeup from the chilled water system. Coordinate
with chemist at CHACP #1 (806) 742-3328 for treatment chemicals to be used in the heating
water system.
END OF SECTION
02092 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15090 - 2
11 /03
i
SECTION 15180
INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials,
transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the
installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described
herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All
surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically
excepted.
f 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be
described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also
where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other
data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those
provided by equipment manufacturers.
B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to
this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein.
C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure
NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as
adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings.
r 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS
A. Factoryapplied vapor barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper
and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the
paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive.
B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed
Manville "Zeston" covers with taped seams.
2.3 METAL JACKETS
A. Where metal jackets are specified, they shall be 0.016" thick No. 5005 tempered aluminum
secured with machine drawn 0.020" stainless steel bands.
1'
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly
engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation
02092 INSULATION 15180 - 1
11 /03
0
materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special
materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards.
B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All
coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and
tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems
unacceptable.
3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION
A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and
accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered.
B. Apply rigid insulation board on flat sheet metal surfaces with Benjamin Foster No. 81-12
adhesive and additionally secure with Graham pins or adhesive clips on 12" centers. No
penetration of the metal will be permitted. Fill all joints with seam filler and strip with an open
woven glass fabric tape. Trowel Benjamin Foster No. 8142W vapor seal adhesive over all
joints and clips to a 1/8 inch thickness and wipe to eliminate pinholes.
C. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the
longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster 82-07
or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4" wide band of
vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive.
D. Where glass cloth is specified on sheet metal ducts, it may be field applied with two coats of
vapor barrier mastic or may be factory applied on rigid insulation with field applied cloth on
seams and joints. Use painted finish speed nuts to secure insulation with factory applied
cloth to the duct.
E. Provide a separate, additional, field applied glass cloth cover on all portions of any insulated
piping system exposed in any space, including to main mechanical equipment rooms and all
piping on the mechanical deck. Exercise care to locate seams in the cloth in an
inconspicuous place and apply all cloth neatly, including that on valves and fittings. Adhere
the cloth in all cases with adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster No. 30-36. Jackets shall be
applied wrinkle free and smooth. Note that exposed chilled water piping, exposed heating
water piping, and all domestic water piping located in the main mechanical equipment room
shall be covered with aluminum jackets.
F. Exclusions: No insulation shall be applied to:
1. Expansion tanks.
2. Exposed chrome plated lines.
3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS
A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In
the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in
any room, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms and in the
maintenance space above the laboratory ceiling deck; the word "concealed" shall apply to
any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings
and chases-
1 . Chilled Water Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory
applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro-Lok APT 850". Insulation
shall be 2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC
covers or equal.
2. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines and Return Lines: Insulate with molded
sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket
equal to Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick for lines 2-1/2" and
larger. For smaller lines, use 1" thick insulation. Insulate valves and fittings with
fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers.
3. Domestic Hot Water Lines: Insulate with Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650" molded sectional
glass fiber pipe covering with all purpose jacket. Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate
0
I
HI
[i
0
[I
11
02092 INSULATION 15180 - 2
11 /03 0
G
I
C
valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass
insulation.
4. Domestic Cold Water Lines and Coil Condensate Drain Lines: All cold water lines
throughout with those exceptions noted hereinbefore, shall be insulated with 1/2" thick
Manville "Micro-lok APT 650" molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied vapor
barrier jacket. Insulate valves and fittings with Manville preformed "Zeston" PVC covers
over fiberglass insulation.
5. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Armaflex. Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during
fabrication.
6. Horizontal Storm Drains and Downspouts: Insulate entirely as specified for domestic cold
water lines.
7. Roof Drains: Insulate bodies of roof drain with one coat insulating cement to thickness of
adjacent covering and cover with vapor barrier jacket of kraft paper and aluminum foil
with glass fiber reinforcing fabric. Hubs shall be covered by building up layers of
insulation until they are covered. The insulation shall overlap the adjacent insulation by a
minimum of 2", bevel the ends and seal with glass fiber reinforced vapor barrier asphaltic
adhesive.
8. Boiler Breeching and Flues: Two inch thick, Manville "Thermo-12" molded pipe covering
or blocks, wired in place. Fill all cracks and voids with insulating cement. Finish with
aluminum jackets.
9. Chilled Water Storage Tank: Two inch thick, Manville pipe and tank insulation. Finish
with metal jacket at the contractor's option, the tank may be factory -insulated.
10. Boiler: Factory Insulated.
11. Water Heaters: Factory Insulated.
12. Generator Exhaust Piping: Insulate the generator exhaust piping from the exhaust
manifold to the muffler and from the muffler to the outlet cap. Insulate the mufflers.
Exhaust piping and mufflers shall be insulated with 3" thickness of Johns Manville Super
Caltem 1700 block insulation. The insulation shall contain xonotilite chrystal structure for
strength and low hydration. Product shall meet ASTM C 533, Type II, and shall be rated
for 1700 deg. F. Apply the insulation to the pipe and mufflers, wired in place. Fill voids
with high temperature insulating cement. The entire length of pipe and mufflers shall be
metal jacketed.
3.4 DUCT INSULATION: Refer to 15848 — DUCT AND PLENUM LINING section for plenum
insulation.
A. High Pressure Ducts:
1. Insulate the round cold high pressure ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville
"Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor
barrier jacket.
2. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal
runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Seal all
joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 85-20
adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats.
Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. Install with not
more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Note that double wall duct need not be insulated.
B. Concealed Ducts:
1. Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville
"Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor
barrier jacket. Note that exhaust ductwork need not be insulated.
2. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal
runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on
ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two
coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in
02092 INSULATION 15180 - 3
11 /03
adhesive between coats. Install with not more than 25% compression in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip.
4. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed.
C. Exposed Ducts in Mechanical Equipment Room: Insulate ducts exposed in equipment room
with 1" thick, Manville "Spinglas No.814", 3 lb. density fiberglass, with FSK jacket applied with
100% adhesive coverage and graham pins 12" OCEW. Glasfab and mastic seal all joints
and pin holes. Cover with glass cloth.
D. Duct Liner: Refer to Section 15848, DUCT AND PLENUM LINING.
END OF SECTION
02092 INSULATION 15180 - 4
11 /03
SECTION 15220
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
`} Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3 SCOPE
A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and
install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this
work.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall
be provided for the support of all piping
and equipment. The following
tabulation lists
materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and
Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered.
MATERIAL
SERVICE
FEE AND MASON CAT.
Hanger
Copper Tubing 4" and Larger
364 copper plated
Hanger
Copper Tubing 3" and smaller
361 copper plated
Hanger
Steel Lines 3" and smaller
215 or 199
Hanger
Steel lines 4" and larger
239
Hanger
Outside Insulation -all lines
239
Hanger
Cast Iron Lines
239
Hanger
Plastic Pipe
108 + 109
Hanger
Refrigerant Pipe
102
Hanger
Glass Pipe
375
Wall Bracket
All
150, 151, or 155
Saddles
Steel Lines On Rollers
71, 1710, 1712, 172,173
Conc. Inserts
New Construction
185
Rollers
Steel Piping
161,272
Pipe Clamps
2" and Smaller
304
Pipe Clamps
3" and Larger
241
Pipe Rest
All
295 or 291
Exp Shield
Concrete
374
Beam Clamps
r}
All
249, 254, 255, 282, 280
i Adjuster
All
2381
02092 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15220 - 1
0 11/03
a
2.2 HANGER RODS
A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows:
Rod Diameter
3/8"
1/2"
5/8"
3/4"
2.3 HANGER SPACING
Size of Steel Pipe or
Copper Tube Supported
2-1/2" and smaller
3" and 4"
5" through 8"
10" and larger
Size of Cast Iron
Pipe Supported
3" and smaller
4" through 6"
8" through 10"
12" and larger
A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable
sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel
lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type
of pipe involved or required by code.
Size of Line
3/4" and smaller
1" through 1-1/2"
2" and larger
All cast iron lines
PART 3 EXECUTION
Hanger Spacing in Feet
5
7
10
5 (Minimum two per joint)
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS
A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to
expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports,
etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise
shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to
minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required.
B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line
shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional
provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be
aligned.
C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately
support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and
install anchor base fittings or other approved supports.
D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may
be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and
terminating in a capped end resting on the floor.
E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be
supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to
the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially
manufactured items are not available in the proper size.
F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists,
piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts.
On piping larger than 4", verify the joist strength before installation.
G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be
supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended
on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized
'71
0
I
I
02092 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15220 - 2
11 /03
u
G
U
L
L
for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings
shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from
the trapezes.
H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger
material.
I. Hangers supporting insulated lines which are specified to be finished with a vapor seal shall
be fitted outside the insulation. The insulation or horizontal lines shall be protected by low
compression insulation shields. On all pipes the shields shall be Fee and Mason Fig. 81 or
rolled 14 gauge galvanized. The shields on horizontal lines shall be positioned so that they
encompass the bottom of the pipe and are centered on the hanger or support. On vertical
lines there shall be two shields of the same type full encompassing the pipe at each clamp.
Shields shall be secured with a 3/4" wide lacquered steel band at each end.
J. Horizontal piping subject to expansion due to temperature above 180 degrees F shall be
supported on roller hangers. Where the line is supported from overhead, hangers shall be
Fee and Mason Fig. 272 with two locknuts on the hanger rod to allow for proper leveling of
the line. Lines supported from elbow shall be supported using Fee and Mason Fig. 161
adjustable pipe roll stands set on and attached to support framing members. Roller
hangers shall be sized to allow for increased sizes due to pipe covering.
K. On all insulated lines four inches and larger and where roller supports are used on piping
systems, install pipe covering protective saddles so that the load of the pipe line will be
transmitted directly to the rollers without damage to the insulation.
3.2 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES
A. Where pipes specified under different sections may possibly be racked on the same
supporting structure, each trade shall cooperate with the others involved to properly locate
the supporting members and shall furnish a proportionate share of the labor and materials
involved in the installation.
B. Any other special hangers and supports shall be provided and installed as indicated on the
drawings, specified elsewhere herein or required by conditions at the site.
A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc.
3.4 PRE -FABRICATED EQUIPMENT MOUNTING SUPPORTS
A. Provide ThyCurb equipment mounting supports, or approved equal of 18 ga. galvanized
construction with continuously welded corner seams and a 3" cant, supports to be internally
reinforced with a factory installed wood nailer and 18 ga. counterflashing. Supports to be a
minimum of 8" above the finished roof and of the style and design to mate the roof deck.
B. Supports shall be level at the top, with pitch built into supports where roof slopes 3/8 of an
inch per foot or more, and supports must have certified load bearing data. Supports must
span a minimum of 2 joists and more if equipment length requires it. Supports to be used
for all roof mounted equipment, HVAC units, condensing units and roof mounted piping.
3.5 PREFABRICATED ROOF MOUNTED PIPING SUPPORTS
` A. Provide rigid polycarbonate resin pipe supports with rigid Teflon roller equal to Miro Pillow
block pipe stands. Use Model 02 for pipes less than 2", Model 24-R for pipes 2" to 4" and
Model 48-R for 5" and above. Mop pipe stands to roof on built-up roofs, set in plastic
cement for other types of roof.
02092 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15220 - 3
11 /03
3.6 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. All structural steel shall conform to ASTM A-36. All steel shall be new, clean and straight.
B. All holes shall be drilled or punched for the proper size. Burning of holes with a torch is not
permitted.
C. Clean all surfaces of steel of mill scale, rust and other foreign matter and prime with at least
one shop coat of red lead or zinc chromate.
END OF SECTION
02092 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15220 - 4
11 /03
iy
E
C
r
SECTION 15240
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3 SCOPE
A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and
install all vibration isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ISOLATION
A. Mechanical equipment and associated piping and ductwork shall be mounted on vibration
isolators as specified and required to minimize transmission of vibrations and structure borne
noise to building structure or spaces.
B. All rotating equipment shall be balanced both statically and dynamically. The equipment
supporting structure shall not have any natural frequencies within plus or minus 30% of the
operating speeds. The equipment when mounted and placed in operation shall not exceed a
self excited vibration velocity of 0.10" per second when measured with a vibration meter on
the bearing caps of the machine in the vertical, horizontal and axial directions or measured at
the equipment mounting feet if the bearings are concealed.
C. Isolation shall be stable during starting and stopping of equipment without any traverse and
eccentric movement of equipment that would damage or adversely affect the equipment or
attachments.
D. Isolation shall be selected for the lowest operating speed of equipment.
E. Isolation shall be selected and located to produce uniform loading and deflection even if
equipment weight is not evenly distributed.
2.2 FIBERGLASS ISOLATORS
A. Fiberglass isolators shall consist of a high density matrix of precompressed molded glass
fibers enclosed in a resilient neoprene jacket. Fiberglass isolators shall be equal to
Consolidated Kinetics Corporation isolators. Isolators shall be selected for the actual loads of
equipment served and generally shall be 90% efficient or better.
2.3 NEOPRENE PADS
A. Neoprene pads shall be of cross ribbed or waffle design and a minimum of 5/16" thick.
Where concentrated load bearing is encountered, steel bearing plates shall be bonded to
neoprene pads to spread the load. The neoprene pads shall be sized for a load of 50 pounds
per square inch.
02092
11 /03
VIBRATION ISOLATION
15240 - 1
0
2.4 SPRING ISOLATORS
A. Spring isolators shall be free standing, laterally stable without any housing, and complete with
neoprene acoustical friction pads, a minimum of 1/4" thick between the base plate and the
support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment
or base. Coil outside diameters shall not be less than 0.8 of the operating height of the spring.
Spring shall have an additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the operating deflection. The
horizontal stiffness of spring isolators shall be not less than 0.8 of the vertical axial stiffness.
All spring isolators shall be selected for 1" initial deflection or more. Isolators for air units shall
be selected for 2" deflection. Isolators shall be galvanized where installed outside.
2.5 SUSPENSION TYPE ISOLATION
A. Suspension type spring isolation for piping system or equipment hangers shall be a
combination of spring and neoprene in series. The spring and elastomer combination shall be
encased in a structurally stable steel bracket. Spring diameters shall be large enough to
permit a 15 degree angular misalignment of the rod connecting the hanger to the equipment
or pipe without rubbing on the hanger box.
B. Duct isolation hangers shall consist of spring and neoprene grommet or mount encased in a
steel bracket with suitable means for connecting to ducts and building structure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PIPES AND DUCTS
A. Furnish vibration isolation in accordance with the following:
1. Each pipe connected to equipment mounted on vibration isolators shall have a
minimum of 3 spring hangers.
2. Hanger vibration isolators shall be selected for not less than the deflection provided for
the equipment to which the piping is connected. The vibration isolator units selected
shall accommodate the thermal movement of the piping systems.
3.2 SCHEDULE OF VIBRATION ISOLATION
EQUIPMENT PRIMARY ISOLATION
PRV Type Fans Neoprene Pads
Utility Vent Fans Spring Isolators - 1"
Air Units Internally Isolated by Mfr.
Chiller Neoprene Pads
Air Compressors Neoprene Isolator
Unit Heaters Neoprene Grommets
END OF SECTION
0
M
L
U
02092 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15240 - 2
11 /03
SECTION 15402
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment,
labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in
connection with the installation of the plumbing systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR CHAMBERS
A. Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe,
shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of
equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where
required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in
accordance with PDI recommendations.
2.2 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device
which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded or tubing
spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be
designed to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in
chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match.
2.3 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
A. This Contractor shall furnish and install Crane No. 976 or 977 air vent valves at all high points
for the hot water system, as shown and/or as required. Run a 3/4 inch type L hard copper
drain line from the discharge of each air vent valve to a floor drain or as directed.
2.4 TEPID WATER MIXING VALVE FOR EMERGENCY SHOWER SERVICE
A. Mixing valves shall be Leonard mixing valves as shown on the drawings. Each shall have a
chrome body, stops, inlet check valves, strainers, outlet valve, thermometer and adjusting
device to set the discharge temperature. Anchor the valve to the wall in an accessible
location in the mechanical chase as shown on the drawings.
B. Units shall be equal to Leonard TM-850 for 20 gpm service.
2.5 WATER HEATER — GAS -FIRED
A. Provide the water heater shown and scheduled on the drawings. It shall be a glass lined,
jacketed, insulated package water heater.
B. The gas fired unit shall be complete with draft diverter, adjustable thermostatic control, gas
pressure regulator and all standard accessories including a thermomagnetic safety pilot
02092 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 15402 - 1
11 /03
0
designed to shut off gas flow completely to both main burner and pilot burner, if pilot flame
is extinguished.
C. Provide in the outlet of each heater a Watts temperature and pressure relief valve, with a
drain line therefrom full size to the floor drain. Size valve according to the applicable
codes.
D. Gas fired water heaters shall bear the ASME Stamp and shall be installed in accordance
with the Boiler Code if the capacity is 120 gallons or more, or the input is 200,000 BTUH or
more. Specifically, 2' of clearance is required on all sides, and 4' of clearance is required
above the heater.
E. Refer to drawings for capacities.
2.6 WATER HEATER - ELECTRIC
A. Electric water heater shall be a packaged electric water heater with welded steel, glass
lined tank, factory insulated and jacketed. Provide with a drain.
B. Heating elements shall be direct immersion elements, Incaloy sheathed.
C. Control shall be automatic. Thermostat shall be immersion type. Thermostat shall operate
the magnetic contactors.
D. Master Control Panel: Prewired and factory installed to contain the contactors, wiring and
terminals.
E. Provide with magnesium anode.
F. Provide a Watts T & P relief valve piped full size to floor drain.
G. Unit shall be UL listed.
H. Capacity shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
2.7 PLUMBING ISOLATION VALVES
A. Plumbing isolation valves for domestic hot, cold, and recirculating service shall be quarter -
turn ball valves meeting the specification below.
B. Ball Valves, 2" and Smaller: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon
seats and O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Memory
stops may be deleted for domestic water service. Valve shall be three piece break away for
in -line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two
piece ball valves are not acceptable, except for drain line service. Where valves are
installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket.
C. Ball Valves, 2-1/2 and Larger: Bronze body, conventional port, flanged ends, ball valves for
domestic water service or cast iron body, flanged ends, full port, double epoxy coated, FDA
approved, suitable for potable water and food contact. Watts number G-4000-FDA or equal.
END OF SECTION
D
I
I
L
C
0
I
11
u
02092 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 15402 - 2
11/03
.;
fps
SECTION 15414
DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment,
labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in
connection with the installation of the plumbing systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DRAINS
A. Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable. Provide a clamping
device for the floor membrane, where applicable.
B. All floor drains, floor sinks and trench drains shall have cast iron bodies, auxiliary drainage
rim, adjustable strainer and deep seal p-trap.
Floor Drain "FD"
Fixture Wade No. W-1103-G or equal with 6"x6" NB top, cast iron
body.
Floor Sink "FS"
Fixture Wade No W-9110-8X8X6 or equal, C.I. square floor sink,
A.R.E. interior, aluminum dome strainer, with NB grate.
Provide % grate for all receptor locations, full grate for traffic
areas. Provide trap primer.
END OF SECTION
02092
11 /03
DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
15414 - 1
SECTION 15450
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment,
labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in
connection with the installation of the plumbing systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
aA. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART PRODUCTS
F2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE
A. Refer to drawings for Plumbing Fixture Schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. All fixtures shall be installed by the Contractor in accordance with manufacturer's
i instructions. Coordinate rough -in utilities as required.
END OF SECTION
I
I 02092 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 - 1
11 /03
1".
G
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
0
c
f.
L
SECTION 15490
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment,
labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in
connection with the installation of the plumbing systems..
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS LINES
A. Schedule 40 black steel with 150 lbs. banded malleable iron fittings.
2.2 GAS VALVES
A. Iron body, lubricated plug valves equal to Nordstrom Fig. 143 or equal in sizes 2-1/2" and
larger. Valves 2" and smaller equal to Crane No. 270 or Lee 10685 iron body flat -head
threaded gas stop.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Section 15060 requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following
specifications shall apply.
1. Gas Lines:
a. All gas piping shall run exposed unless specifically detailed otherwise on the
drawings, with special venting provisions. (PVC sleeve around all gas piping
installed in concealed spaces. Vent the sleeve to an area below the ceiling with
escutcheon.)
b. A drip pocket shall be installed at connection to an item of equipment and at each
low point of the gas distribution system. Grade all lines to drip pockets. Drip
pockets shall consist of a nipple and cap screwed to the bottom of the drop.
c. Provide a gas cock, union and gas pressure regulator at each connection to a gas
consuming appliance.
2. Identification: For other than black steel pipe, exposed gas piping shall be identified by
a yellow label marked "Gas" in black letters. The marking shall be spaced at intervals
not exceeding 5 feet (1524 mm). The marking shall not be required on pipe located in
the same room as the appliances served. All tubing carrying medium -pressure gas
shall be marked with a label at the beginning and end of each tubing section.
02092 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS - INTERIOR 15490 - 1
11 /03
3.2 TESTING
A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or
otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or
systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment
before testing.
B. Gas Lines: Test with 50 psig air pressure for 24 hours with no pressure drop (except for
temperature correction). If any drop occurs, soap test all joints, correct leaks and retest.
END OF SECTION
02092 NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS - INTERIOR 15490 - 2
11 /03
c
n
L
h
L10
L
SECTION 15650
AIR-COOLED LIQUID CHILLER
PART GENERAL
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Microprocessor controlled, air-cooled liquid chiller utilizing scroll compressors, and low
sound fans. Chiller shall be equal to Carrier model 30RA035.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 550/590, latest revision (U.S.A.).
B. Unit construction shall comply with ASHRAE 15 Safety Code, NEC, and ASME applicable
codes (U.S.A. codes).
C. Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9002/BS5750, Part 2
Manufacturing Quality Standard.
D. Unit shall be full load run tested at the factory.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Unit controls shall be capable of withstanding 150OF (66°C) storage temperatures in the
control compartment.
B. Unit shall be stored and handled per unit manufacturer's recommendations.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Factory -assembled, single -piece chassis, air-cooled liquid chiller. Contained with
the unit cabinet shall be all factory wiring, piping, controls, refrigerant charge (R-22), and
special features required prior to field start-up.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. Frame shall be of heavy -gage galvanized steel.
2. Cabinet shall be galvanized steel casing with a backed enamel powder or pre -painted
finish.
3. Cabinet shall be capable of withstanding 500-hour salt spray test in accordance with
the ASTM (U.S.A.) B-117 standard.
C. Fans:
1. Condenser fans shall be direct -driven, 11-blade airfoil cross-section, reinforced polymer
construction, shrouded -axial type, and shall be statically and dynamically balanced with
inherent corrosion resistance.
2. Two -speed or single fan operation shall allow reduced sound levels during scheduled
unoccupied operating periods. Manufacturers without unoccupied reduced sound
capability shall submit 1/3 octave band data and sound power data as measured by
ARI 370 as confirmation of unit sound characteristics.
3. Air shall be discharged vertically upward.
4. Fans shall be protected by coated steel wire safety guards.
D. Compressors:
1. Fully hermetic scroll type compressors.
2. Direct drive, 3500 rpm (60 Hz) 2900 rpm (50 Hz), protected by either line break device
or discharge gas thermostat, depending on motor, suction gas cooled motor.
3. External vibration isolation — rubber in shear.
02092
11 /03
AIR-COOLED LIQUID CHILLER 15650 - 1
E. Cooler:
1. Cooler shall be rated for a refrigerant working -side pressure of 450 psig (3103 kPA)
and shall be tested for a maximum fluid -side pressure of 150 psig (1034 kPA) (in
Canada, 250 psig [1724 kPA] per Canadian National Registry requirements).
2. Shall be single -pass, ANSI type 316 stainless steel, brazed plate construction.
3. Shell shall be insulated with %-inch (19 mm) closed -cell, polyvinyl -chloride foam with a
maximum K factor of 0.28.
4. Shall incorporate 2 independent refrigerant circuits on sizes 032 to 055; sizes 010 to
030 shall have one independent refrigerant circuit.
5. Cooler shall have an optional factory -installed heater, to protect cooler from ambient
temperature freeze down to 20OF (290C).
F. Condenser:
1. Coil shall be air-cooled with integral subcooler, and shall be constructed of aluminum
fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes.
2. Tubes shall be cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed.
3. Assembled condenser coils shall be leak tested and pressure tested at 450 psig (3103
kPa).
G. Refrigeration Components: Refrigerant circuit components shall include filter drier,
moisture indicating sight glass, thermal expansion device, and complete operating charge
of both refrigerant R-22 and compressor oil.
H. Controls, Safeties, and Diagnostics:
1. Controls:
a. Unit controls shall include the following minimum components:
(11)Microprocessor with non-volatile memory. Battery backup system shall not be
accepted.
(2) Single terminal block for power and controls.
(3) Control transformer to serve all controllers, relays, and control components.
(4) ON/OFF control switch.
(5) Replaceable solid-state relay panels and controllers.
(6) Pressure sensors installed to measure cooler entering and leaving saturated
temperatures and outside air temperature. Thermistors installed to measure
cooler entering and leaving fluid temperatures. Provision for field installation of
accessory sensor to measure compressor return gas temperature.
2. Unit controls shall include the following functions.
a. Automatic circuit lead/lag for dual circuit chillers.
b. Capacity control based on leaving chilled fluid temperature and compensated by
rate of change of return -fluid temperature with temperature set point accuracy to
0.1°F (0.06°C).
c. Limiting the chilled fluid temperature pull -down rate at start-up to an adjustable
range of 0.2°F to 20F (0.11 °C to 1.1 °C) per minute to prevent excessive demand
spikes at start-up.
d. Seven-day time schedule.
e. Leaving chilled fluid temperature reset from return fluid.
f. Chilled water pump start/stop control and primary/standby sequencing to ensure
equal pump run time.
g. Dual chiller control for parallel chiller applications without addition of hardware
modules, control panels, thermometer wells.
h. Unoccupied low sound operation to limit condenser fan sound during scheduled
periods.
i. Timed maintenance scheduling to signal maintenance activities for pumps,
condenser coil cleaning, strainer maintenance and user -defined maintenance
activities.
j. Boiler enable signal to initiate system heating mode.
k. Low ambient protection to energize cooler and hydronic system heaters.
02092 AIR-COOLED LIQUID CHILLER 15650 - 2
11 /03
I
FJ
0
H
I
0
I
3. Diagnostics:
a. The control panel shall include, as standard, a Scrolling Marquee display capable
of indicating the safety lockout condition by displaying a code or which an
explanation may be scrolled at the display.
b. Information included for display shall be:
(1) Compressor lockout.
(2) Loss of charge.
(3) Low fluid flow.
(4) Cooler freeze protection.
(5) Thermistor malfunction.
(6) Entering and leaving -fluid temperature.
(7) Evaporator and condenser pressure.
(8) Time of day:
(a) Display module, in conjunction with the microprocessor, must also be
capable of displaying the output (results) of a service test. Service test
shall verify operation of every switch, thermistor, fan, and compressor
before chiller is started.
(b) Diagnostics shall include the ability to review a list of the 20 most recent
alarms with clear language descriptions of the alarm event. Display of
alarm codes without the ability for clear language descriptions shall be
prohibited.
(c) An alarm history buffer shall allow the use to store no less than 20 alarm
events with clear language descriptions, time and date stamp event entry.
(d) The chiller controller shall include multiple connection ports for
communicating with the local equipment network, Johnson Metasys and
the ability to access all chiller control functions from any point on the chiller.
(e) The control system shall allow software upgrade without the need for new
hardware modules.
4. Safeties: Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and all necessary components in
conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the following protections:
a. Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and all necessary components in
conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the following
protections:
(1) Loss of refrigerant change.
(2) Reverse rotation.
(3) Low chilled fluid temperature.
(4) Thermal overload.
(5) High pressure.
(6) Electrical overload.
(7) Loss of phase.
b. Condenser fan and factory pump motors shall have external overcurrent protection.
I. Operating Characteristics:
1. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at outdoor ambient temperatures from
45°F (7°C) to 120°F (50°C) for sizes 010-018 or 320F to 120OF (00 to 52°C) for sizes
022-055.
2. Unit shall be capable of starting up with 950F (35°C) entering fluid temperature to the
cooler.
J. Motors: Condenser fan motors shall be totally enclosed single speed, 3-phase type with
permanently lubricated bearings and Class F insulation (except Motormaster® V control
motors which shall be open type and shall have Class B insulation).
K. Electrical Requirements:
1. Unit primary electrical power supply shall enter the unit at a single location (some units
multiple poles).
2. Primary electrical power supply shall be rated to withstand 120OF (50°C) operating
ambient.
3. Unit shall operate on 3-phase power at the voltage shown in the equipment schedule.
02092 AIR-COOLED LIQUID CHILLER 15650 - 3
11 /03
4. Control points shall be accessed through terminal block.
5. Unit shall be shipped with factory control and power wiring installed.
L. Hydronic System:
1. Field pipe connections shall be copper NPT and shall be extended to the outside of the
unit chassis.
2. Refer to Section 15090 for piping.
3. Water pressure gages (2) shall be factory installed across the cooler and rated for 150
psig.
4. Proof -of -flow switch shall be factory installed and rated for 150 psig.
5. Hydronic assembly shall have factory supplied electric freeze protection to 20OF (290C).
6. Piping shall be type L seamless copper tubing.
7. Copper body strainer with 20-mesh screen and ball type blow down.
M. Special Features: Provide the following optional accessories:
1. Low Ambient Operation: Unit shall be capable of down to 20OF (29°C) with the addition
of the field- or factory -installed solid-state Motormaster®V control with condenser coil
temperature sensor. In addition, adequate field -supplied antifreeze with suitable
corrosion inhibitor protection shall be field -installed in the evaporator circuit, field -
fabricated and installed wind baffles shall be required.
2. Non -Fused Disconnect: Unit shall be supplied with factory -installed, non -fused
electrical disconnect for main power supply.
3. Remote Enhanced Display: Unit shall be supplied with indoor -mounted, remote, 40-
character per line, 16-line display panel for field installation. Mount in the equipment
room.
4. Minimum Load Control: Unit shall be equipped with factory (or field) installed,
microprocessor -controlled, minimum -load control that shall permit unit operation down
to a minimum of 15% capacity.
5. Energy Management Control Module: A factory or field -installed module shall provide
the following energy management capabilities: 4 to 20 mA signals for leaving fluid
temperature reset, cooling set point reset or demand limit control; 2-point demand limit
control (from 15% to 100%) activated by remote contact closure.
6. Hail Guards/Security Grille: Field -installed accessory kit shall include set of metal grilles
for the protection of the condensing coils, coils from damage including hail.
7. Vibration Isolation: Vibration isolation pads shall be supplied for field installation at unit
mounting points. Pad shall help to reduce vibration transmission into the occupied
space.
8. Control Display Access Door: Unit shall be provided with a transparent control box door
that allows see -through viewing of control display without opening the control box.
9. DataPortTm Control: Unit shall be supplied with field -installed interface device that
allows a non -Carrier controller to read values in system elements connected to the
CCN Communication Bus using plain English ASCII over its RS-232 connection for
connection to the Johnson Metasys System.
10. Leaving chilled fluid temperature reset from return fluid, outdoor air temperature, space
temperature or 4 to 20 mA input. Connect to Johnson Metasys System.
END OF SECTION
0
I
in
U
02092 AIR-COOLED LIQUID CHILLER 15650 - 4
11 /03
I
L
SECTION 15744
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service
necessary for and incidental to the variable frequency fan and pump control system as
shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. Carefully review the air handling unit
schedule, fan schedule, and pump schedule for required drives.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. Submit harmonic calculations for all drives.
1.3 GUARANTEE
A. The drive manufacturer shall guarantee in writing a 24 hour response time to arrive at the
jobsite to repair the drive maximum guaranteed down time shall be 72 hours, regardless of
type of failure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROL -SINE WEIGHTED PWM TYPE
A. The control shall be constructed of new materials only. The control shall produce a 3
phase output capable of providing efficient operation of standard NEMA or IEC design AC
induction motors. The control shall consist of a power section made up of a fixed AC to DC
converter, a fused filter, storage network, and an inverter using either bipolar transistors or
IGBTs in the power switching section. A logic control section which is microprocessor
based using a 16-bit processor and LSI for minimum part count and maximum reliability.
The power section shall be isolated from the control section between the driver output of
the control printed circuit card and the power switching devices.
B. The variable frequency controller shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Input power 3 phase 60 Hz, either 208, 230, or 460 VAC
a. Nominal input voltage +/-10%
b. +/-5% input frequency stability
2. Comply to IEEE 519-1981 without external modification on a power system with at least
2% source impedance or less and a capacity of at least 1.04 times the control full load
input current.
3. Comply to FCC subpart J of part 15 for class A computing device from 7MHZ to 30MHZ
for conduction limit without external modification.
4. Output Power: 3 phase, 1.5 to 60 HZ with variable voltage to give proper and efficient
operation of variable torque load.
5. Overload capacity of 125% for 1 minute.
C. Furnish the following basic functions:
1. Fused input door interlocked disconnect.
2. Isolated 115VAC control transformer.
3. Provide digital annunciated fault and limit functions for:
a. Thermal overload relay trip
b. Microprocessor self -check function
c. Output overcurrent trip
02092 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15744 - 1
11 /03
d. DC bus overvoltage trip
e. Inverse time overload trip
f. Heatsink overtemperature trip
g. DC bus fuse open
h. DC bus overvoltage (regen. limit)
i. Output ground fault
D. Provide lamp annunciated fault functions for:
1. Inverter ready light
2. Inverter run light
3. Bypass run light
4. Bypass safety lockout light (red)
5. Inverter safety lockout light (red)
6. Power line on light
7. Control voltage enabled light
E. Standard Features shall include:
1. Door mounted components.
a. Inverter run indication
b. Bypass run indication
c. Remote safety indication
d. Digital speed (frequency or percent speed) and motor ammeter
e. Manual speed potentiometer
f. Inverter / off / bypass switch
g. Reset push-button for fault and enable
h. Manual / auto reference selector switch
i. Annunciation as in section 4.4
2. DC bus charged indicator.
3. Current limit circuit active to prevent nuisance tripping during accel or run conditions.
4. Regeneration limit circuit active to prevent nuisance OV tripping during deceleration.
5. Minimum and maximum speed set, separate and non -interactive.
6. Power loss restart selectable for Auto Restart in auto mode only.
a. Automatic restart from undervoltage, power failure, or control fault, or both.
7. Critical frequency lockout for up to 3 points, available from 10 to 100% speed with at
least a 6 HZ bandwidth.
8. Only non -filament type indicating lights may be used.
9. Control shall survive without component failure, and annunciate, output phase to phase
and phase to ground faults.
10. Integral 2 contactor type bypass circuit with all branch circuit protection supplied
internal to enclosure.
11. Control shall have the following isolated instrument signal follower:
4 to 20 madc
0 to 10 vdc
12. Loss of reference protection, where the control constantly monitors the input analog
speed signals for abnormal changes, i.e. where the analog reference signal changes by
more than 90% in 500 msec or less. The control shall than maintain its speed at 80%
of the last speed commanded. Until such time as the control is commanded to stop or
the analog reference returns to normal.
13. Volts per hertz ratio shall be automatic, tracking motor load requirements to achieve
most efficient operation within the parameters set, potentiometer adjustments not
allowed.
14. Control shall have available 15 selectable volts per hertz patterns.
15. Control must be capable of starting into a spinning motor and switching from inverter to
bypass back to inverter without delay and without tripping off line of the inverter, also
must be capable of stopping a motor rotating in the reverse direction and than
accelerating that motor in the proper direction.
0
I]
I
I
I
I
I
I
IJ
02092 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15744 - 2
11 /03
1
f
F
I
11
16. To reduce possible acoustical noise ad electrical interference the control must have an
automatically variable carrier frequency from 380 to 2500 hertz. There shall be no
sudden frequency shifts which cause acoustical noise increases during shifts in the
motor.
17. Control shall have a fused door interlocked disconnect with fuses rated for proper
branch circuit protection.
18. Isolation transformers or line reactors are not allowed.
19. Control must comply to IEEE 519-1981 General Systems, Special Applications.
20. Control must comply to FCC subpart J of part 15 for class A computing devices,
conduction limit between 7 mhz to 30 mhz.
21. All components must be supplied in an integral enclosure, separate enclosures are not
allowed.
22. All controls under 150 horsepower will require ETL or equal Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory approval.
23. Coordinate the control signal type with the Temperature Control Subcontractor.
F. THE VARIABLE SPEED CONTROL SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY IDM
CONTROLS OR APPROVED EQUAL BY ABB.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Install VFD in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.2 The drive manufacturer shall submit costs for extended warranties.
END OF SECTION
02092 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15744 - 3
11 /03
I
r
I
SECTION 15750
HOT WATER BOILER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment,
labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in
connection with the installation of the plumbing systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUE VENTS
A. Provide and install flue vents on all gas burning devices including water heaters, unit heaters
and furnaces.
B. All such flue vents shall be constructed of Metalbestos double wall metal conduit and shall be
of the sizes recommended by the manufacturers of the devices vented. They shall be
complete with all couplings and other required fittings and shall terminate 24" above the roof
in a ventilator type weatherproof rainhead similar and equal to a Breidert Air-X-Hauster.
Where any vent passes through combustible construction it shall be provided with a
separation in accordance with the standards of the NFPA. All vents shall be flashed and
counterflashed into the roofing construction to the satisfaction of the Architect and shall be
watertight.
2.2 BOILER -SPACE HEATING MODULAR/ATMOSPHERIC DRAFT
A. Furnish and install, where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and in
compliance with all rules and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction:
1. For Space Heating Only: Gas -fired cast iron modular hot water boilers, with vent
dampers, complete with one or more batteries of boiler modules and accessories.
B. Heating plant shall be A.G.A. (C.G.A. for Canada) design certified for an input of 900 MBH
and a heating capacity of 720 MBH and an I=B=R net output rating of 626 MBH for automatic
operation with natural gas. Heating plant shall be HYDROTHERM MULTI -TEMP MODEL
MR-900PV or a series of three model MR-300.
C. Each module shall be ASME coded for 100 psi working pressure Section IV and completely
factory -assembled to include automatic combination gas valve with intermittent pilot,
transformer, atmospheric -type lanced aluminized -steel burners, base, absorption unit, and hi -
limit aquastat. For vent damper models, modules shall be pre -wired with plug-in type
connections for vent dampers. Manufacturer shall provide an ASME pressure relief valve
with a capacity to the module's gross output, a temperature/pressure indicator, a drain valve,
a vent damper, as applicable, and a draft hood for each module.
D. Each battery of modules shall be equipped with a manual reset hi -limit and a low water cut-
off. Manufacturer shall provide insulated factory -finished steel jackets for assembly into one
complete extended jacket for each battery of modules. Optional headers, as supplied by the
manufacturer, shall be included for each battery of modules with self -aligning couplings, pipe
nipples and unions for connection to modules.
02092 HOT WATER BOILER 15750 - 1
11 /03
0
E. Each module's cast iron absorption unit construction shall be of horizontal section design to
provide zig-zag water flow through base, intermediate and top sections, with maximum heat
transfer from deep -ribbed iron surfaces, assembled with cast iron push nipples. Cope seal
shall be employed between sections to provide permanent gas -tight seal between sections.
Sections shall be held together with draw rods. Flue collector shall be of same quality cast
iron as absorption unit. Absorption unit shall be held to cast iron side plates and lined with
high -temperature, mineral -fibre insulating panels by mounting clips and bands. Base
assembly shall be fire -tested and dielectric tested.
F. Each module's gas controls shall be factory -wired and tested, and suitable for individual step
firing without reducing module's thermal efficiency. Heating plant control system may be
provided by the manufacturer with factory -supplied wiring diagram. The heating plant shall
be controlled by Hydrotherm Level II control system with outdoor reset control. The system
shall be enabled by the Johnson Metasys system.
G. Manufacturer shall provide an approved engineering drawing of the modular heating plant
installation including piping, wiring and controls. After completion of installation, the heating
plant shall be started and operationally tested in the presence of a representative of the
heating plant manufacturer.
H. The manufacturer shall warrantee the quality of workmanship and materials of any part of the
boilers and equipment supplied for a period of 12 months after date of installation and
start-up and provide a 20 year guarantee against thermal shock for up to 140 degrees F.
water temperature differentials between main and boiler water temperature.
I. Each module is to be supplied with:
1. vent damper and intermittent electronic ignition
2. low water cutoff
3. 2nd high limit with manual reset
4. mounted relief valve
5. main manifold with valved piping
J. Boiler equipment, associated manifolding, and control panels shall be manufactured by
Hydrotherm or approved equal.
K. Connect the boiler control circuit power to the Emergency Electrical System.
END OF SECTION
0
III
I
LIB
02092 HOT WATER BOILER 15750 - 2
11 /03
U
SECTION 15760
U GTS® GAS -FIRED EVAPORATIVE STEAM HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM
aPART GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
aA. Section includes DRI-STEEM Humidifier Company, GTS model, gas -fired steam humidifier
or approved equal.
B. Related items: Electrical Service and Connections: Division 16
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Certifications:
1. AGA/CGA/CSA
2. CE
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with Section 01330 (Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples).
B. Submit product data (manufacturer's specifications, and technical data including
performance, construction and fabrication) for each manufactured component.
C. Comply with Section 01700 (Contract Closeout).
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Product shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials and fabrication for a period
of two years after installation or 27 months from ship date
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GAS -FIRED EVAPORATIVE STEAM HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM
A. Fabrication requirements:
1. Tank and cover: 14-gauge 304-stainless steel with Heli-arc welded seams
2. Quick removable cover with threaded knobs and gasketed flanges
3. Easily -accessible cleanout plate
l 4. Steam outlet on top of tank configured to connect to flange
5. Stainless steel round flue outlet to vent products of combustion. Humidifier shall be
certified to use Class B flue materials
6. Four steel support legs to provide 12" (305 mm) between underside of humidifier and
floor
7. Stainless steel heat exchanger with welded joints
8. Factory Insulation: Humidifier shall be covered with %-thick (19 mm), rigid, foil -faced
fiberglass insulation. Insulation shall be covered with reinforced aluminum foil. All
surfaces except front face panel shall be covered.
9. Size: Unit with capacities of 300 Ibs/hr (136 kg/hr) or less shall be capable of fitting
through a 36" door.
B. Water requirements: The humidifier shall be capable of generating steam from tap,
softened or DI/RO water.
C. Drain: An electric drain valve shall be mounted on humidifier assembly to allow tank to
drain automatically at the end of a humidification season.
02092 GTS® GAS -FIRED EVAPORATIVE STEAM HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM 15760 - 1
11 /03
D. Burner Assembly:
1. Humidifier and burner assembly shall be AGA/CGA/CSA certified and tested to support
natural or LP gas.
2. Gas train assembly shall be complete with burner/mixing tube assembly, igniter, sight
glass, flame rod electrode, gas manifold, integral gas valve and venturi.
3. Each burner shall freely modulate or time proportion with a gas input turndown ratio of
up to 4:0.
2.2 HUMIDIFIER OPTIONS: The following option shall be provided.
A. Fabrication of tank, cover and heat exchanger option: 316-stainless steel with Heli-arc
welded seams.
B. Mounting Options: Indoor Enclosure: Textured aluminum with removal doors:
1. Indoor enclosure adjustable floor stand option: Painted steel frame with four adjustable
supports to provide adjustment from 15" to 24" (381 mm to 610 mm)
C. Options for use with DI/RO Water: Humidifier shall have a stainless steel electric -operated
drain valve and a stainless steel float -operated fill valve with an electric solenoid to prevent
tank from filling when the tank drains automatically at the end of a humidification season.
2.3 HUMIDIFIER CONTROLS
A. Control Cabinet: Factory -attached to the side of humidifier with all wiring between cabinet
and humidifier completed at factory. Control cabinet shall be a UUCSA listed NEMA-12
enclosure. Control devices shall be mounted on a subpanel within the cabinet. A wiring
diagram shall be included in the control cabinet.
B. VAPOR-LOGIC38 microprocessor controller with the following features or functions:
1. Makeup water switch control and low water safety shutdown.
2. Fully modulating (0% to 100%) control of humidifier outputs.
3. PID control capability
4. Self -diagnostic test at start-up
5. Integral fault relay for remote signaling of alarms — connect to Johnson Metasys
system.
6. A keypad, capable of either unit or remote mounting with a 5' (1.5 mm) cable, and able
to operate within a temperature range of 320F to 1220F (0°C to 500C).
7. A keypad that provides text backlighting and allows personal password codes.
8. A keypad, capable of monitoring and/or controlling the following parameters:
a. Relative humidity (RH) set point and actual conditions in the space (from humidistat
or humidity transmitter)
b. Relative humidity (RH) set point and actual conditions in the duct for variable air
volume applications.
c. Relative humidity (RH) high limit set point and actual conditions.
d. Total system demand in % of humidifier capacity.
e. Total system output in Ibs/hour (kg/hr).
f. Drain/flush frequency interval and duration.
g. End -of -season drain status (on standard water systems and if ordered as a DI
water option)
h. Window glass surface temperature (in % RH offset application and if ordered as an
option)
i. System alarms
j. Previous fault messages
k. Up to 20 humidifier functions, depending on programming
I. Operating temperature
0
U
11
I I
I
I
111
02092 GTS® GAS -FIRED EVAPORATIVE STEAM HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM 15760 - 2
11 /03
F
�J
El
F
U
E
9. Water level control for softened or hard water:
a. System shall provide for automatic refill, low water cutoff, field -adjustable skimmer
bleedoff functions and automatic drain -down of humidifier. System shall consist of:
(1) A water level sensing unit comprised of three metallic probes screwed into a
threaded probe head. Probe head shall incorporate probe isolation chamber
to eliminate short-circuiting between probes caused by mineral coating of
probe head. Probe head shall be mounted on the humidifier assembly.
(2) A solenoid operated fill valve factory mounted on the humidifier assembly.
(3) End -of -season drain.
C. Multifunction Temperature Sensor: A factory mounted sensor, with a range 40OF to 180OF
(4.4°C to 82°C) shall be mounted on the humidifier to perform the following functions:
1. Maintain the evaporating chamber water temperature above freezing.
2. Maintain a user -defined preset evaporating chamber water temperature.
3. Allow rapid warm-up of evaporating chamber water after a call for humidity, providing
100% operation until steam production occurs.
2.4 HUMIDIFIER CONTROL OPTIONS: The following options shall be provided.
A. Water level control for DI/RO:
1. System shall provide for continuous control of water level and will accommodate the
use of deionized or reverse osmosis water with resistance up to 18 M-ohm/cm.
2. System shall consist of:
a. A water level sensing unit comprised of a float operated stainless steel valve for
water makeup.
b. Shall operate within inlet water supply pressure range of 25 psi to 80 psi (172 kPA
to 552 kPa)
3. DI/RO water supply shall contain <3 ppm chlorides.
B. Electric interlock door control switch with manual override: Mounted and wired in control
cabinet to remove control voltage when door is opened.
C. Keypad shall be available with the following cable lengths: 10'
D. Control Input Accessory Options:
1. Humidity transmitter, Room: Humidity transmitter shall be a room -mounted device that
measures from 0% of RH range and provides a linear output from 4 mA to 20 mA.
Accuracy +2% RH. Supply voltage 21 VDC. This device will be furnished by Johnson
Controls and will provide 4-20 ma signal to the humidifier control.
2. Airflow Proving Switch, Pressure Type: Airflow proving switch shall be diaphragm -
operated with pitot tube for field installation. Switch shall have an adjustable control
point range of 0.05" to 12" we (12.5 Pa to 2988 Pa).
E. DRANE-KOOLER: A thermostatically controlled water valve shall meter an amount of cold
water into a stainless steel mixing chamber to temper 212OF (100°C) water with a 6 gpm
(0.38 I/s) in -flow rate to a 140OF (60 °C) discharge temperature to sanitary system.
2.5 HUMIDIFIER DISPERSION OPTIONS
A. ULTRA -SORB® Steam Dispersion Panel:
1. The factory -assembled steam dispersion panel shall include the following components:
a. Steam supply header/separator
b. Condensate collection header
c. Closely -spaced steam dispersion tubes spanning the distance between the two
headers
02092 GTS® GAS -FIRED EVAPORATIVE STEAM HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM 15760 - 3
11 /03
2. Each dispersion tube shall be fitted with two rows of steam discharge tubelets inserted
into the tube wall, centered on the diametric line, and spaced 1-1/2" (38 mm) apart.
Each tubelet shall be made of a thermal -resin material designed for high steam
temperatures. The two rows of tubelets in each dispersion tube shall discharge steam
in diametrically opposite directions, perpendicular to airflow.
3. Each tubelet shall extend through the wall of and into the center of the dispersion tube
and contain a steam orifice sized for its required steam capacity.
4. The humidifier shall provide absorption characteristics that preclude water
accumulation on any in -duct surface within 18" of the humidifier tube panel while
maintaining conditions of 80% maximum relative humidity at a minimum of 50OF in the
duct airstream.
5. Air pressure loss across the humidifier panel shall not exceed 0.1" water column at a
duct air velocity of 500 fpm.
6. Each packaged humidifier panel assembly of tubes and headers shall be contained
within a galvanized metal casing to allow convenient duct mounting, or to facilitate the
stacking of and/or the end -to -end mounting of multiple humidifier panels in ducts or air
handler casings. When so designated, the humidifier panel shall be shipped
unassembled.
7. All tubes and headers shall be 304 stainless steel and joints shall be Heli-arc welded.
8. Tubes shall be joined to headers with slip -fit couplings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated on drawings.
B. Coordinate electrical connections with work of Division 16.
END OF SECTION
0
I
I
it
I
I
I
I �
I
02092 GTS® GAS -FIRED EVAPORATIVE STEAM HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM 15760 - 4 U
11/03
SECTION 15800
AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service
necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or
as specified herein.
B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings.
Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown
or specified shall be furnished.
C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of
equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or
not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work
necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided.
D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally
connected, tested and placed in service.
E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and
the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have
been met, including:
1. Space requirements
2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size)
3. Capacities
4. Clearance for maintenance
5. Quality
6. Quantity
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FANS
A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on
the drawings.
B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan
performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting
shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is
for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified
and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the
contract.
C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet
horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be
selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the
specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit
shall be flexible.
D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of
noise and vibration.
E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled.
02092 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 1
11 /03
0
F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect.
G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
H. Fans shall have factory applied finish.
I. Fan motors 1/8 HP and larger shall be permanent capacitor start type.
2.2 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS
A. All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted
horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be
equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted.
B. Unless scheduled otherwise, all exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal
wheels.
C. All fans shall have backdraft dampers and bird screens. All fans shall have pre -wired
disconnect switches mounted on the fans.
D. Refer to the drawings for special requirements.
E. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit.
F. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Jenn Aire Products Co.
or Greenheck.
2.3 WALL PROPELLER FAN
A. Model: XLW
B. Description: Fan shall be a wall mounted, belt driven steel propeller exhaust fan.
C. Certifications: Fan shall be manufactured at an ISO 9001 certified facility. Fan shall be
listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705) and UL listed for Canada (cUL 705). Fan
shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance.
D. Construction: The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion
resistant fasteners. The motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a 14-gauge steel
power assembly. The power assembly shall be bolted to a minimum 14-gauge wall panel
with continuously welded corners and an integral venturi. Unit shall bear an engraved
aluminum nameplate and shall be shipped in ISTA certified transit tested packaging.
E. Coating: All steel fan components shall be LorenizedTM with an electrostatically applied,
baked polyester powder coating. Each component shall be subject to a five stage
environmentally friendly wash system, followed by a minimum 2 mil thick baked powder
finish. Paint must exceed 1,000-hour salt spray under ASTM 13117 test method.
F. Propeller: Propeller shall be a high -efficiency fabricated steel design with blades securely
fastened to a minimum 7-gauge hub. The hub shall be keyed and locked to the fan shaft
utilizing two setscrews. Propeller shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA Standard
204-96, Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.
G. Motor: Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings and
furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure.
H. Bearings: Bearings shall be designed and tested specifically for use in air handling
applications. Construction shall be heavy-duty regreasable ball type in a cast iron pillow
block housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum
cataloged operating speed.
I. Belts and Drives: Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non -static type. Drives shall be
precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor
shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150% of the installed motor horsepower. The variable
pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan RPM.
J. Product: Fan shall be the XLW as manufactured by Loren Cook Company of Springfield,
Missouri.
2.4 UTILITY VENT SET
A. Description: Fan shall be a single width, single inlet, airfoil steel wheel, belt driven
centrifugal vent set.
0
I
I
it
I
02092 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 2
11/03
H
E
L
I
111
B. Certifications: Fan shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories (UL 705) and UL listed for
Canada (cUL 705). Fan shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for air performance.
Arrangement and rotation shall be determined by the Division 15 contractor, in accordance
with the drawings.
C. Construction: The fan shall be of bolted and welded construction utilizing corrosion
resistant fasteners. The scroll wrapper shall be a minimum 14 gauge steel and the scroll
side panels shall be a minimum 12 gauge steel. The entire fan housing shall have
continuously welded seams for leakproof operation. A performance cut-off shall be
furnished to prevent the recirculation of air in the fan housing. The fan housing shall be
field rotatable to any one of eight discharge positions and shall have a minimum 1-1/2 inch
outlet discharge flange. Bearing support shall be minimum 10 gauge welded steel. Side
access inspection ports shall be provided with quick release latches for access to the motor
compartment without removing the weather cover. Lifting lugs shall be provided for ease of
installation. Unit shall bear an engraved aluminum nameplate and shall be shipped in ISTA
certified transit tested packaging. Provide with heavy duty discharge backdraft damper
rated for greater than 3000 fpm outlet velocity, and 4" static pressure. Provide with all-
weather steel cover and belt guard. Provide with scroll drain for upblast fans. Provide inlet
and outlet duct flex connectors, where duct connects to fans. Provide 2" deflection housed
isolators (six required) with neoprene feet. Mount the fans on Thycurb rails.
D. Coating: All fan components exposed to the airstream shall be factory coated with an
electrostatically applied, baked epoxy powder coating. (Cook Epoxy Powder or equal)
Each component shall be subject to a five stage environmentally friendly wash system,
followed by a minimum 2 mil thick baked powder finish. Paint must exceed 1,000 hour salt
spray under ASTM B117 test method.
E. Wheel: Wheel shall be steel centrifugal airfoil, non -overloading. Blades shall be
continuously welded to the backplate and deep spun inlet shroud. Wheel hub shall be
keyed and securely attached to the fan shaft. Wheel inlet shall overlap a one piece
aerodynamic aluminum inlet cone to provide maximum performance and efficiency. Wheel
shall be balanced in accordance with AMCA standard 204-96, balance quality and vibration
levels for fans.
F. Motor: Motor shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearings
and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Provide unit mounted pre -
wired disconnect with flexible conduit. Provide with high efficiency TEFC motor.
G. Bearings: Bearings shall be designed and tested specifically for use in air handling
applications. Construction shall be heavy duty regreasable ball or roller type in a cast iron
pillow block housing selected for a minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours at
maximum cataloged operating speed.
H. Blower Shaft: Blower shaft shall be AISI C-1045 hot rolled and accurately turned, ground
and polished. Shafting shall be sized for a critical speed of at least 125% of maximum
RPM.
I. Belts and Drives: Belts shall be oil and heat resistant, non -static type. Drives shall be
precision machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor
shafts. Drives shall be sized for 150% of the installed motor horsepower. The variable
pitch motor drive must be factory set to the specified fan RPM.
J. Product: Fan shall be equal in all respects to model CA as manufactured by Loren Cook
Company of Springfield, Missouri.
2.5 SINGLE -ZONE AIR UNITS
A. General:
1. Furnish and install York AirPak or equal by Carrier or Trane, double wall air handler. All
internal components specified in the air handling unit schedule shall be factory furnished
and installed. Unit shall be completely factory assembled. The units cooling, heating,
ventilating capacity and performance shall meet or exceed that shown on the schedule.
02092 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 3
11 /03
0
2. All necessary tags and decals to aid in the service or indicate caution areas shall be
provided. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panel access door.
Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit.
3. Units shall ship in one (1) piece where possible. Shipping splits can be provided as
required for installation. Lifting lugs shall be supplied on each side of the split to facilitate
rigging and joining of segments.
B. Base and Frame- The entire unit shall be provided with a full-length, continuous, base rail
channel. Base rail shall be formed of a minimum of 12 gage galvanized steel. The base
rail shall have a minimum height of 5 inches. All major components shall be supported
from the base. Integral lifting lugs shall be provided. All units shall be externally isolated
with 2" housed spring isolators, sized for the operating weight of the air unit. This
requirement is in addition to that for internal isolation of the fan/motor assembly.
C. Unit Casing:
1. The unit shall have a frame construction consisting of cast corner pieces and galvanized
steel vertical and horizontal structural members. The frame shall be constructed to
permit complete removal of the wall and roof panels without affecting the structural
integrity of the unit.
2. All segments shall be double wall and shall be constructed of G90 mill galvanized sheet
steel, formed and reinforced to provide a rigid assembly. The exterior casing shall be
constructed of a minimum 18 gage galvanized steel. The interior lining shall be a solid
lining of a minimum of 20 gage. Perforated lining of a minimum of 18 gage galvanized
steel shall be used in segments as specified.
3. A full 2" of NON -COMPRESSED insulation shall be provided throughout the entire unit
(walls, floor, roof and drain pan). 2"-3# fiberglass Insulation shall be provided and meet
the flame and smoke generation requirements of NFPA-90A.
D. Removable Panels:
1. All wall and roof panels shall be completely removable for unit access and removal of
components. All access panels must be removable without affecting the structural
integrity of the unit.
2. All panels shall be completely gasketed with a minimum of 1/4" thick and 3/4" wide
closed cell neoprene.
E. Access Doors:
1. Double wall access doors shall be provided in the fan and filter section on the drive side
of the unit. Additional access doors included on segments as shown on the plans.
2. Doors shall be of similar thickness and construction as the wall panels. A 3/8" bulb -type
gasket shall be provided around the entire door perimeter. Industrial style hinges shall
permit a complete 180-degree door swing.
F. Perforated Lining: The interior of specified segments shall have perforated lining of a
minimum of 18 gage galvanized steel. The lining shall be backed by a fire rated sheet
material preventing the erosion of insulation through the perforations, meeting UL181.
G. Fan Segments (FS):
1. The supply air fan segment shall be equipped with double width double inlet centrifugal
type wheels. All fans shall be airfoil (AF) as required for stable operation. Submit fan
curves for all units for approval. Note that partial width fans may be required for stable
operation.
2. Fan and unit performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with ARI Standard
430.
3. All airfoil fans shall bear the AMCA Seal. Airfoil fan performance shall be based on tests
made in accordance with AMCA standards 210 and comply with the requirements of the
AMCA certified ratings program for air and sound. In addition, all airfoil wheels shall
comply with AMCA standard 99-2408-69 and 99-2401-82. All fans shall be Class II
minimum.
4. After the pre -balanced fan is installed in the air handler, the entire fan section shall be
run -balanced at the specified speed to insure smooth and trouble -free operation. The run
balance shall include filter in horizontal and vertical planes and filter out balancing in all
three (3) planes, on both sides of the fan assembly at the bearings.
a
I
I
I
I
In
I
11
02092 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 4
11 /03
0
n
G
E
E.
5. Fan bearings shall be self -aligning; pillow block or flanged type regreaseable ball
bearings and shall be designed for an average life (L50) of at least 200,000 hours.
H. Fan Drives: Fan drives shall be selected for a 1.5 service factor and minimum of two
anti -static belts shall be furnished. A removable safety screen shall be provided in the
opening of each access door of the fan segment. Furnish fan curves for review and
approval.
I. Fan and Fan Motor Isolation: Fan and fan motor shall be internally mounted and isolated
on a full width isolator support channel using 2" deflection springs. The fan discharge shall
be connected to the fan cabinet using a flexible connection to insure vibration -free
operation.
J. Coil Segment (MC): The cooling coil segment (MC) shall have a full width multi -sloped IAQ
approved drain pan extended downstream of the coil to provide sufficient amount of space
to contain moisture carryover. Drain pan shall be of double wall construction with 304
stainless steel liner and a minimum of 2" of UNCOMPRESSED insulation. The pan shall
have a minimum depth (freeboard) of 4". Where heat recovery coils are shown, they shall
be 316 ss tubes, fins, headers, casing, and drain pan (100% stainless steel).
K. Coil Removal: All unit coils shall be installed on tracks for easy removal from the unit by
the removal of a single (1) wall panel without disturbing roof or adjoining panels of the unit.
Units that require disassembly of the unit for coil removal are not acceptable.
L. Coils:
1. Cooling and/or heating coils shall be furnished to meet the performance requirements set
forth in the schedule. All coils shall have performance certified in accordance with ARI
Standard 410.
2. Coil casing to be constructed of 16-gauge stainless steel with aluminum die -formed
corrugated fins. The primary surface shall be 5/8" OD copper tubes, staggered in
direction of airflow. Tubes shall be mandrel expanded to form fin bond and provide
burnished, work -hardened interior surface. Tubes shall have a minimum tube wall
thickness of 0.020". The aluminum fins shall have fully drawn collars to accurately space
fins and to form a protective sheath for the primary surface. The fin thickness shall be
0.006". Headers shall be of heavy seamless copper tubing, silver -brazed to tubes.
Connections shall be of red brass, with male pipe threads, silver -brazed to the headers.
A Y4" FPT plugged, vent or drain tap shall be provided on each connection, accessible
without penetrating the unit casing. All coils shall have a minimum of eight rows, and
shall have a maximum fin spacing of not greater than eight fins per inch.
3. Coils with finned heights greater than 48" shall have an intermediate drain pan extending
the entire finned length of the coil.
4. Water coils shall be designed to operate at 250-psig design working pressure and up to
300F and shall be tested with 325-psig compressed air under water. Circuiting shall
provide free and complete draining and venting when installed in the unit. All vent and
drain connections shall be extended to the outside of the unit casing.
5. Coils shall be circuited for counter flow of air and water. Water velocities shall not to
exceed 7 feet per second and/or exceed the water pressure drops scheduled. All coils
must have same end connections regardless of the number of rows deep.
M. Auxiliary Drain Pans: Segments of the unit as specified shall be provided with auxiliary
drain pans. The pan shall be of double wall construction with a stainless steel liner and
drain connections on both sides of the unit.
N. Ultra -Low Leak Dampers: Dampers shall be of ultra -low leak design having airfoil blades
constructed of 14 gage, double skin, galvanized steel. The damper blades shall be
provided with extruded vinyl edge seals and flexible metal compressible jamb seals.
Leakage shall not exceed 3.70 CFM/square foot at 1" w.g. and 8.0 CFM/square foot at 4"
w.g. The blades shall be parallel [opposed] acting.
O. Filter Segments: The filter segments shall be constructed of galvanized steel and be built
as an integral part of the unit. Segments shall be side or upstream access and be provided
with service access doors. High efficiency segments shall be furnished with galvanized
steel frames with neoprene gasketing on the leaving side of the filter and a pressure
sealing mechanism to prevent air bypass.
02092 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 5
11 /03
P. Filter Media: The filter media type shall be furnished for each segment as specified on the
plans. Furnish 3 sets of media of each type total.
Q. Filter Gage: A magnahelic, differential pressure gage shall be factory installed and flush
mounted on drive side to measure the pressure drop across every filter bank.
R. Access Segment (SA): Access Segment shall be provided in the unit to gain access to a
particular area. The access segment shall have a depth of 12".
S. Access Segment (MA): Access Segment shall be provided in the unit to gain access to a
particular area. The access segment shall have a depth of 18".
T. Access Segment (LA): Access Segment shall be provided in the unit to gain access to a
particular area. The access segment shall have a depth of 24" to accommodate the field
furnished and installed humidifier system. A double wall drain pan with 304 stainless steel
liner shall be furnished in this segment. Provide access doors with view panel and lights for
this section.
U. Integral Face and Bypass Coil Segment (IC):
1. Integral Face and Bypass coils shall be factory supplied and installed. Coils shall be as
manufactured by the L.J. Wing Company. Each heating coil shall consist of built-in series
of vertical piped heating elements and bypasses with interlocking dampers. Dampers
shall be arranged so as to completely enclose and isolate the heating coil passes when
no temperature rise is required. Each coil shall be capable of maintaining a constant
discharge air temperature regardless of variations in entering air temperature with full
heating water flow.
2. Proportioning of the air shall be such that the temperature at any point in a plane parallel
to the face of the coil three feet downstream from the leaving side shall not vary more
than 5 degrees F from the average discharge air temperature.
3. Coil shall be ARI Certified for capacity in compliance with ARI Standard 410.
4. Finned heating elements shall be fabricated of seamless straight, copper tubes with
rectangular aluminum fins spaced not closer than 11 fins per inch. Each tube shall be
individually secured to the supply and return headers by a brazed joint. Supply and
return headers shall be copper or rectangular steel tubing.
5. Dampers shall be 16 gauge, roll -formed steel with air-dried enamel finish. The coil
casing shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel with rigid framework, completely painted. Coils
shall be factory tested at 200 psig steam and 500 hydrostatic pressure.
V. Service Lights: Marine -type, vapor proof service lights shall be provided in all sections that
have access doors for personnel entry. Each light shall be 115/1/60 volts, 100-watt service
and all lights shall be wired to a single switch. Lights and conduit shall be factory furnished
and mounted in the factory for single point connection by the Contractor under Division 16.
2.6 FILTERS
A. Provide all filters specified herein and/or scheduled or shown on the drawings. All filters
shall be erected in holding frames, tight fitting, with no bypass path.
B. All filters of every type shall be UL listed Class I or II.
C. Every air handling device which supplies air to any space shall have a filter bank. No.,
size, and type of filters, shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
D. All frames shall be fitted with new media at final acceptance. In addition provide 100%
spare filters.
2.7 SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSINGS
A. Side access filter housings shall be factory fabricated by the filter manufacturer.
Dimensions and capacities shall be as scheduled.
B. Housings shall be fabricated from 16 gauge galvanized steel. Housings shall have
gasketed access doors on both sides with hinges and sealed with snap acting latches.
Gaskets shall be continuous, airtight and replaceable. Filter rails shall receive the filters
scheduled with no bypass. Rails shall be convertible to cartridge or bag type filters. Filters
a -
I
I �
I �
I
III
0
I i
I �
02092 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 6
11 /03
shall be retained by adjustable spring tension mechanisms with positive air seal around the
frame.
C. Side access filters shall have duct flanges on entering and leaving air sides.
D. Support the housings on structural steel frames or on concrete pads as required.
E. Test with soapsuds after erection to insure airtight construction.
F. Manometers: Provide and install a magnahelic gauge and tubing across every filter bank.
Attach the gauge to the filter housing or adjacent duct.
2.8 HEPA FILTERS
A. Filters shall be Cambridge Model 1-F Series ABSOLUTE as manufactured by Cambridge
Filter Corporation, Syracuse, New York, and must comply with NFPA 586.
B. The filters shall be individually tested and certified to have an efficiency of not less than
99.9% when tested with 0.3 micron dioctylphthalate smoke. The clean filter static pressure
drop shall be no greater than 1" w.g. when operating at rated capacity.
C. Filter medium shall be CM-115EWP glass -reinforced paper. It shall have a minimum tensile
strength of 3.0 lb. per inch of width and shall retain 50% of its tensile strength when folded
flat upon itself. Its elongation before rupture shall be a minimum of 1.0% of the media shall
be waterproofed and shall retain 50% of its tensile strength after being immersed in water.
D. Filters shall be constructed of pleated media with tapered aluminum inserts, glass mat
sealer, and cadmium plated steel frames. Dimensions shall be correct within 1/16" and
squareness within 1/8".
E. All high efficiency filter banks shall have renewable media prefilters in holding frames.
2.9 DISPOSABLE MEDIUM EFFICIENCY FILTERS
A. Filters shall be medium efficiency (30-35% based on ASHRAE 52-68) at a velocity of 500
FPM. Media shall be pleated, non woven reinforced cotton fabric supported by a welded
wire grid with 95% open area. Frame shall be heavy duty waterproof chipboard. Filter
shall have not less than 4.5 square feet of media per foot of face area. Filters shall be equal
to Farr 30/30 series.
2.10 GAS TO STEAM HUMIDIFIER
A. Refer to Section 15760, GAS -TO -STEAM EVAPORATIVE HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEM.
Mount the distribution panel in the air handling unit.
2.11 HEATING COILS, WATER
A. Heating coils shall be furnished and installed complete with such supporting structures as
are required. The capacity of each coil assembly shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
They shall have physical and performance characteristics as indicated and shall be erected
and connected in the arrangements shown.
B. These coils shall be of the staggered type. Coils shall have vent and drain connections and
shall be provided with duct connectors. They shall be constructed with seamless copper
1 tubes and aluminum fins with the fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. They shall be
suitable for use with steam as the heating medium. Coils shall be sized as shown on the
plans. Coils shall be removable without disturbing ducts.
END OF SECTION
02092 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800 - 7
11 /03
QPART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
n
r
L
U
SECTION 15840
DUCTWORK
A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials,
transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the
installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices,
dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as
described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied
therefrom.
B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other
materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various
items of equipment and materials.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK
A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted
on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in
accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges
of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest
edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK.
B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 1st
Edition, (1985) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures.
Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. Galvanized ducts shall be
two-sided galvanized steel (G90) of Lock Forming Quality per ASTM A653/A653M for
galvanized steel sheeting products.
C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make
all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2
times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend.
D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make
increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 7" on any
side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1"
in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate.
E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so
as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable,
provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct
surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a
size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same
duct area.
02092
11 /03
DUCTWORK 15840 - 1
0
2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION TEST
A. A trial leak test, as specified herein, shall be made after installation of the first section of
each type of ductwork to demonstrate adequacy of the construction details. All testing shall
be done in the presence of the Owner and Commissioning Agent.
B. Each test section shall incorporate at least five transverse joints and all typical fittings.
C. Drawings showing all construction details of test sections, test procedures and
instrumentation, and test results shall be submitted for record purposes. No additional
ductwork shall be installed until the trial test installation described above has been
approved.
D. Low pressure duct shall be tested at 3 "w.c. Construction of low pressure systems shall be
inherently airtight and leakage shall be of a sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in
quiet ambient and not detectable by sense of feel.
2.3 DUCT SEALER
A. All supply air ductwork and exhaust air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight
construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease.
Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint,
then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior
metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air
pressure sealant.
B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system.
2.4 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTS
A. This ductwork shall be defined as that between the discharge of the supply AHU fan and
pressure reducing terminal boxes, and from the fume hoods and air valves to the exhaust
fans on the roof. This work shall be provided and installed as shown and as specified
hereinafter.
B. This ductwork shall be round in cross-section, flat oval or rectangular as shown on the
drawings. It shall be constructed according to the latest edition of the ASHRAE
HANDBOOK. Duct construction details shall be in accordance with the "High Pressure
Duct Standard, 3rd Edition", published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association Inc. except as may be abridged herein.
C. All job -constructed ducts shall be made with longitudinal joints butted and welded. Round
ducts 48" in diameter and smaller and all flat oval ducts shall be factory fabricated spirally
wound conduit made from zinc coated steel strips. All such ducts shall be delivered in
standard lengths and shall be cut to proper length at the site by power saw to insure proper
fit and square alignment.
D. Fittings used on round or flat oval ducts shall be shop fabricated by welding. Changes in
direction shall be made with mitered fittings of at least 3 sections; 90 degree elbows shall
contain not less than five sections. Branch takeoffs shall be at 45 degree, except where
indicated on the drawings they may be 90 degree conical taps. The run of a conical
take -off shall be not less than the diameter of the branch which it serves. This contractor
shall furnish for review drawings of fittings which he proposes to use and shall not proceed
with fabrication until review by the Architect.
E. A high degree of dimensional accuracy is required in both conduit and fittings in order that
the installation may be strong, rigid, and within allowable limits of air leakage. Inside
diameter of conduits when checked with ring gages shall show a variation from nominal
diameter of not more than 0.030". Fittings shall be provided with male connections and,
when checked with ring gages, shall show a variation from nominal outside diameter of not
more than 0.015 inch.
F. Transitions shall be all welded construction. In any required rectangular ells, provide
Airsan "Acoustiturn" double thick acoustical turning vanes.
I
I
02092 DUCTWORK 15840 - 2
11 /03
1]
G. All high pressure ducts having a dimension of 36" or greater shall be assembled using
gasketed companion flanges.
H. All other joints between conduits and between conduits and fittings shall be made with
"Hardcast" cement reinforced with self -tapping drill screws. Conduits shall be joined with
couplings. Adjoining surfaces of fitting or coupling and conduit at each joint shall be
thoroughly cleaned, and after receiving a uniform coat of cement shall be pressed together.
Joints so formed shall be further strengthened by the use of hex head No. 7x12 self -tapping
drill screws installed with a screw gun. Screws shall be equally spaced around the
circumference and centered longitudinally on the joint. Use three screws per joint on
conduit with diameters of 3" through 8" and space screws approximately 6" apart on
conduit with diameters of 9" and over. Then seal the joint with "Hardcast" assembled using
manufacturer's instructions.
I. It is essential that all high velocity ductwork be practically air tight. After erection in place,
and before being insulated or connected to the air distribution units, each high velocity duct
system shall be tested for leaks. For the test, each system shall be capped at all openings.
Pressure test according to the SMACNA procedure, admitting air thru a precision orifice
and using pressure taps and a manometer. Under this test there shall be no whistling leaks
and the pressure drop across the orifice shall not exceed the pressure drop corresponding
to 1 % air loss according to SMACNA Tables of the design air quantity in that branch.
2.5 AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in
t the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed
l at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed
where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. Note that every tap of a main
' duct shall be provided with a balancing damper, in addition to dampers shown on the air
distribution schedule.
B. Splitter dampers and volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20
gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have
bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter
damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct, but shall be not
less than 12". Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where
neither dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct
system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and
bearings as required to resist corrosion.
C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers
shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single
point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked
enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings.
Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for
automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued
and riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron
frames strongly braced to insure rigidity.
D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted
with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered
inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not
easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young
Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible
ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened
to the ducts.
E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off
brackets.
02092 DUCTWORK 15840 - 3
11 /03
2.6 PLENUMS
A. Refer to 15848, DUCT AND PLENUM LINING.
2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT — Flexduct shall not be used to connect grilles.
A. Note that penetration through ceiling deck shall be by rigid ductwork to achieve air -tight
seal.
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide sound isolating flexible connections between connecting ducts and the inlet and
outlet of each fan. These connections shall in each case be long enough to permit a
minimum separation of 3" between the duct and the fan or unit housing with at least 1"
slack in the flexible material itself. Refer to 15240 for additional requirements.
B. The material shall be of a vinyl coated woven nylon/polyester blend base fabric, 22 oz. per
square yard, meeting NFPA 90A and B for flame spread and smoke developed. It shall be
fire resistant, waterproof and mildew -resistant. The material shall be equal to Excelon
Fabric as manufactured by Duro-Dyne and shall be vermin -proof.
2.9 ROUND DUCT TAPS
A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass
ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive
locking nut and air scoop.
2.10 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES
A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the
tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories.
B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in off-white.
C. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to
the duct with a minimum of four screws.
D. Where perforated supply grilles are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable
curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable.
E. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Titus, Price, Metal -Aire or Krueger will be
acceptable.
2.11 LOUVERS — FIXED
A. Refer to Architectural specifications.
2.12 AIR DISTRIBUTION SCHEDULE
A. Refer to drawings.
END OF SECTION
02092 DUCTWORK 15840 - 4
11 /03 il..'i
U.,
SECTION 15848
APPARATUS CASING, DUCT AND PLENUM LINING
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Duct lining for acoustical treatment, and plenums in Mechanical Room.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT LINER
A. Duct liner shall not be used.
2.2 APPARATUS CASING
A. Furnish and install pre-engineered panel casings as shown on the plans. Panels shall
possess all specified acoustical, thermal and structural characteristics without exception,
and shall be BEH Sound Plenum II panels manufactured by Keene Corporation Sound
Control Division or approved equal by Rink.
B. Construction: Panels shall be 4" nominal thickness and shall be fabricated with an 18
gauge galvanized steel outer sheet and a 22 gauge galvanized perforated inner sheet.
Panels shall be fully framed and stiffened with 18 gauge galvanized steel channels spot
welded or riveted to the inner and outer sheets. Panels shall be packed with high -density
acoustical thermal insulating material such that the total panel weight be not less than 5-1/2
pounds per square foot. Insulation shall be enclosed in sealed polyethylene bags. Panels
shall be perforated. Panels shall be solid where coated with exhaust ductwork coating (in
all exhaust air plenums).
C. Panels shall be of the interlocking tongue and groove design. Trim angles and channels
shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel and furnished in standard lengths. Floor
channels shall be pre -punched for bolting to the curb or floor. Panels shall be pre -punched
on the vertical groove side for ease of field assembly.
D. Access doors shall be of the dimension indicated on the plans. Access doors shall each be
generally constructed the same as panels except shall have solid sheets on both sides.
Doors shall have three hinges and two latches, single air seals, and shall seal with the air
pressure where possible.
E. Performance: Acoustical perforated panels shall have the following transmission loss
characteristics:
CPS 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
DB 11 14 19 24 28 29
F. Thermal: Entire panel casing shall have a "U" factor of .14. Individual panels have a "U"
factor of .07. Submit design data to verify compliance with the specifications.
G. Structural: Entire panel casing shall be self-supporting and shall withstand a pressure
differential to 10" H2O. Where required, additional structural support shall be provided by
the panel manufacturer. At this pressure differential, the casing shall be airtight and shall
not deflect more than 1/200 of span.
02092 APPARATUS CASING, DUCT AND PLENUM LINING 15848 - 1
11 /03
H. Installation: Panel manufacturer to furnish complete, coordinated erection drawings and
installation instructions. Drawings to include a bill of materials. Each panel to be piece
marked to match the drawings and bill of material. Panel manufacturer to furnish sufficient
sealant and fasteners for a complete installation.
I. All openings on panel penetrations greater than 6" (diameter or length and width) will be cut
and framed at the factory. Openings or penetrations less than 6", such as pipe and conduit
holes, etc., may be located and cut on the job. All filler sheets and safing between the
equipment and casing shall be provided by the Contractor.
J. Apparatus casing shall be mounted on 6" high concrete curbs. Provide special closure
plates where casing abuts walls. These plates shall be cut around obstruction as required,
insulated and sealed.
END OF SECTION
02092 APPARATUS CASING, DUCT AND PLENUM LINING 15848 - 2 11 /03 U
SECTION 15900
TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
i A. Refer to Section 15905, FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM for the FMS.
B. These Contract Documents are based on providing and installing new Johnson Metasys
Controls, controllers, and software as described in these specifications for the City of
Lubbock Health Department BSL-3 Lab. Other manufacturers will be considered. The
finished project shall result in monitoring and control capability in the Municipal Building,
and through any computer connected to the internet.
C. Note that the specifications herein describe specifically the methods and materials
employed by the Johnson Metasys control system. The intent of the specification is to allow
a equivalent equipment, methods and systems as provided by other manufacturers, as long
as the sequences of controls and other technical provisions are met.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
r2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, of regular
manufacture for this application. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly
tested and proven in actual use. Exceptions to the specification will qualify bid as
unacceptable.
B. Control Valves: Control valves shall be globe type constructed for tight shutoff and shall
operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Provide two way or three
way pattern as shown on the plans. Valves with size up to and including 2-1/2" shall be
"screwed".
C. Valve Actuators: Pneumatic valve actuators shall be suitable for direct -coupled mounting to
the valve bonnet. Valve actuators shall be properly sized to provide sufficient torque to
position the valve throughout its operating range. All valve actuators shall be spring return.
Where butterfly valves are specified, double acting non -spring return actuators may be
used. Unless otherwise stated, provide normally open valves for heating water applications
and normally closed valves for chilled water applications. Terminal unit reheat valve
actuators shall be suitable for direct -coupled mounting to the valve bonnet. Valve actuators
shall be properly sized to provide sufficient torque to position the valve throughout its
operating range. Non -spring return tri-state floating valve actuators may be used on
terminal units where the valve is less than 1 inch.
D. Control Air Dampers: Control Air dampers shall be parallel blade for two -position control
and opposed blade for modulating control applications. Dampers shall be galvanized with
nylon bearings. Blade edge and tip seals shall be included for all dampers. Leakage
through the damper shall not exceed 20CFM per square foot at 4"w.c. (based on a 48" x
48" test sample). Blades shall be 16-gauge minimum and 10" wide maximum and frame
shall be of welded channel iron. Dampers over 48" wide shall be equipped with a jackshaft
to provide sufficient force throughout the intended operating range.
E. Damper Actuators: Pneumatic damper actuators shall be linkage coupled piston type,
suitable for mounting to the damper end shaft. Pneumatic damper actuators shall be
properly sized to provide sufficient torque to position the damper throughout its operating
range. Damper actuators used on outside air dampers shall be spring return. Reheat coil
damper actuators shall be pneumatic.
02092 TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 15900 - 1
11 /03
F. Control Panels: All direct digital controllers located indoors shall be installed in NEMA 1
enclosures. All direct digital controllers located outdoors shall be installed in NEMA 3R
enclosures. Enclosures shall be of suitable size to accommodate all power supplies, relays
and accessories required for the application. Each enclosure shall include a perforated sub
panel for direct mounting of the enclosed devices. Include matched key locks for all
enclosures provided.
G. Differential Pressure Switches (Air): Provide differential pressure switches across fans and
Q
filters for status indication. Differential pressure switches shall have an adjustable setpoint
from 0.05"w.c. to 2"w.c. with a switch differential that progressively increases from
0.02"w.c. at minimum to 0.8"w.c. At maximum. Switch shall be SPDT rated for 15A (non-
Q
inductive) at 277VAC.
H. Differential Pressure Switches (Liquid): Provide differential pressure switches across
pumps to prove flow. Differential pressure switches shall have a 0-150 psig working
differential pressure and have an adjustable setpoint from 4"w.c. to 43.5"w.c. on a fall and
5.5"w.c. to 45"w.c. on a rise. Liquid differential pressure switch enclosure shall carry a
NEMA 4 rating. Switch shall be SPDT rated for 5A (inductive) at 125VAC.
r,
I. Mixed Air Low Limit Controllers: Mixed air low limit controllers shall be manual reset,
adjustable setpoint with 20-foot element serpentine across the entering air face of center
cooling coil. Control shall be responsive only to the lowest temperature along the element.
J. Firestats: Where duct smoke detectors are not provided, provide manual reset type
n
firestats. Firestats shall be UL approved, and set at 1250F in air handling unit return air or
U
50OF above maximum operating temperature in other areas. Provided firestats in intake
ductwork of all exhaust fans rated at 600 CFM or over, as required by local codes.
K. Smoke Detectors: Smoke Detectors (duct and area type) shall be provided, installed, and
wired into the Fire Alarm system by the Division-16 Electrical Contractor. The temperature
control contractor shall be responsible for interlock wiring between duct smoke detectors
and starter safety circuits.
L. Static High Limit Controllers: Discharge static high limit controllers shall be provided on all
AHU systems and variable speed exhaust systems. When discharge static pressure
exceeds setpoint, the supply fan shall be de -energized. Manual reset shall be required.
M. Pressure Transducers:
1. Static Pressure Transducers (Air): Provide static pressure transducers for monitoring
supply duct static pressure. Static pressure transducers shall be 100% solid state and
shall include glass on silicon, ultra stable capacitance sensors. Each static pressure
transducer shall incorporate short circuit and reverse polarity protection. Transmitter
output shall be either 0-10Vdc or 4-20mA. Static pressure transducers are to be
provided in an enclosure that is suitable for duct mounting. The desired setpoint is to
be in the top 50% of the transmitter's operating range.
2. Differential Pressure Transducers (Air): Provide differential pressure transducers for
monitoring air system and airflow measuring station differential pressures. Differential
pressure transducers shall be 100% solid state and shall include glass on silicon, ultra
stable capacitance sensors. Each differential pressure transducer shall incorporate
short circuit and reverse polarity protection. Transducer output shall be either 0-10Vdc
or4-20mA. Differential pressure transducers are to be provided in an enclosure that is
suitable for duct mounting. The desired setpoint is to be in the top 50% of the
(�
transducer's operating range.
�J
3. Line Pressure Transducers (Liquid): Provide line pressure transducers for monitoring
hydronic system line pressures. Pressure transducers shall be 100% solid state and
shall include diffused piezoresistive silicon wafer type sensors. Transducer output shall
be either 0-10Vdc or 4-20mA. Pressure transducers shall not require additional nulling
valves. Pressure transducers are to be provided in a field mounted enclosure and all
wetted parts shall be constructed from materials that are suitable for operation in the
1 r
measured medium. The desired setpoint is to be in the top 50% of the transducer's
l�J
operating range.
4. Differential Pressure Transducers (Liquid): Provide differential pressure transducers for
monitoring hydronic system differential pressure. Differential pressure transducers shall
02092 TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 15900 - 2 11/03 U
V
M
be 100% solid state and shall include dual diffused piezoresistive silicon wafer type
sensors. Transducer output shall be either 0-10Vdc or 4-20mA. Differential pressure
transducers shall not require additional nulling valves. Differential pressure
transducers are to be provided in a field mounted enclosure and all wetted parts shall
be constructed from materials that are suitable for operation in the measured medium.
The desired setpoint is to be in the top 50% of the transducer's operating range.
N. Current Sensing Relays: Provide current switches for indication of equipment status.
Amperage ratings shall be adjustable with the desired setpoint to be in the top 50% of the
current relays operating range. Current sensing relays shall incorporate trip indication
LED's and shall be sized for proper operation with the equipment served.
O. Relative Humidity Sensors: Relative humidity sensors shall have an accuracy of +/- 5%
from 5 to 95% RH. Output signal shall be either be 0-10Vdc or 4-20mA. Humidity
transmitters shall be factory calibrated and require no field setting.
P. Temperature Sensors:
1. Duct/Well Sensors: Sensors for duct and water temperature sensing shall incorporate
either RTD or Thermistor sensing devices. Sensing element accuracy shall be 0.1 %
over the sensor span or better. Where the element is being used for sensing mixed air
or coil discharge temperatures and/or the duct cross sectional area is in excess of 14
square feet, the element shall be of the averaging type. Averaging duct sensors shall
utilize a 6, 12 or 24 foot sensing element. Immersion sensors shall use matched 316
stainless steel bulb wells. All duct and immersion sensors shall be provided with
conduit connection housings. Sensors shall be provided with adequate standoffs for
insulation installation.
2. Space Sensors:
a. For thermostat/sensors serving all areas, these devices shall be electronic
"intelligent' thermostats, low profile type with plastic cases. The devices shall
provide feedback to the building automation system of setpoint and space
temperature. The devices shall be equipped with a three -digit alphanumeric
display to display the room temperature. The units shall be equipped with up/down
arrows for adjustment of room temperature setpoint by the User. During setpoint
adjustment, the display shall show the setpoint as it changes. The system software
shall have the capability to provide limits on setpoint adjustment within a range
defined in the building automation system software.
Q. Electronic to Pneumatic Transducers: As required by the sequence of operations, provide
electronic to pneumatic transducers. Transducers shall be used for the conversion of a
pulse or a 4-20mA DDC analog output signal to a 3 to 18 psi pneumatic signal.
Transducers shall be equipped with a 0-30 psi pressure gauge and have an analog
feedback feature.
R. Provide and install two-inch dial pressure gauges at each pneumatic valve and damper
operator to indicate its performance. All such gauges shall be identified by a permanent
tag or label indicating the plan mark for the operator for which they apply.
PART 3 ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE
3.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 15905, FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND SUPERVISION
A. Factory -trained personnel who are employed by the temperature control system contractor
and licensed for this type of work shall carry out the installation and supervision of this
project.
02092 TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 15900 - 3
11 /03
3.3 WIRING
A. The temperature controls contractor shall be responsible for all electrical installation
required for a fully functional facility management system. Perform all wiring in accordance
with all local and national electrical codes. Install all wiring, in accordance with Division 16
requirements.
3.4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Point Verification: To verify end -to -end operation of the system, the Contractor shall provide
a hard copy of an All Points Summary Listing to the Owner of each part or system to be
placed in warranty by the Owner. For all systems, the Contractor shall additionally provide
a print screen of the process display showing real time dynamic point information for all
points on the subsystem(s) to be accepted. Refer to Section 15920, COMMISSIONING
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS for commissioning requirements under the
contract.
B. Sequence Verification: The Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative that systems
perform all specified sequences. The control manufacturer's application engineer shall
verify all sequences of operation and place the system into warranty acceptance test. Refer
to Section 15920, COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS for
commissioning requirements under the contract.
3.5 FINAL TEST AND ADJUSTMENT
A. Refer to Section 01700 — Execution Requirements: Closeout Procedures.
B. Upon completion of the installation, the temperature control contractor shall make all final
adjustments to the system as may be required by actual operating conditions. All PI control
loop adjustments shall be set to prevent "hunting". Setpoints and setup amounts shall be
such as to provide satisfactory operation under all load conditions. The operating
personnel shall be instructed in the preventive maintenance procedures and in the
operating of the control system. The temperature control contractor shall submit a letter
stating that the FMCS has been installed under supervision of the temperature control
contractor and that the system has been properly adjusted, tested and is fully operational in
accordance with the desired sequence of operation.
C. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives under
the direct employment of the temperature control contractor shall provide eight (8) hours of
instruction to three (3) of the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the
mechanical system.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control system components,
including thermostats, controllers, and sensors.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide three (3) sets of complete Operating and
Maintenance Manuals with as -built drawings, operating instructions, sequence of operation,
and descriptive product operating and maintenance sheets. Assemble each set in a hard
cover binder with "Temperature Control O & M Manual" title place on front cover and
binding.
3.6 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS
A. All electrical interlocks shall be provided as specified. All electrical interlocks shall be made
by means of motor starters or shall be accomplished by separate relays. No motor power
lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit.
B. The sequences below define HVAC system operation. Refer to the project Input/Output
Su, ,imary at the end of this Section for required EMCS hardware points.
I
0
I
ii
I
a-
C
U
02092 TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 15900 - 4
11 /03 0
4i
vi
U
I
M
L
I
3.7 CONTROL SEQUENCES
A. Modes of Operation: The HVAC system will operate in either the occupied or unoccupied
modes. The time schedule shall reside in each unit's respective controller. Optimum
startistop energy management functions shall be provided. The EMCS' time schedule shall
determine the proper mode of operation.
B. Constant Volume Air Handling Unit — 100% outside air, hydronic F&B preheat, steam to
steam humidifier, CHW cooling (AHU-1)
3. Each air -handling unit shall utilize a stand-alone DDC controller dedicated only for
control of its respective unit. Each DDC controller shall be located in a NEMA 1
enclosure at the unit it serves.
4. The air handling unit shall be started and stopped by an optimum start/stop schedule
located in the unit controller. Generally, these units shall run 24 hours per day, 7 days
per week. When the unit is running, the DDC system shall enable the heating water
and chilled water systems to operate.
5. Whenever outside air temperature is below 50 deg. F (adj.) and the unit is in the
occupied mode of operation, the DDC system shall open the two position preheat coil
steam valve for full flow through the preheat coil and modulate the face and bypass
pneumatic damper actuators to maintain a preheat temperature of 50 deg. F (adj.)
6. The DDC system shall provide a 4-20 mA signal to the factory -furnished control system
serving the gas -fired steam to steam humidifier. A wall -mounted humidistat located in
General Lab 103 shall provide input to the DDC system. Setpoint of humidity shall be
35% RH, adjustable from the OWS (operation work station).
7. When the unit is off, an outside air damper located in the inlet of the unit shall be
closed, the humidifier steam valve shall be closed, and the CHW valve shall be closed
to the cooling coil. When the unit is started, the outside air damper shall open to its full
open condition. The outside air damper shall fail open on a loss of power.
8. The DDC system shall control the cooling valve to maintain a discharge air temperature
of 52 deg. F (adj.) as measured by an averaging type duct temperature sensor.
9. The DDC system shall modulate the gas -powered steam -to -steam humidifier to
maintain a space relative humidity of 30% RH (adj.). A sail switch installed in the
AHU's discharge air duct shall be interlocked with the humidifier to prevent humidifier
operation on a loss of airflow. The DDC system shall monitor a supply air relative
humidity sensor. If the supply air relative humidity rises above 90% RH (adj.), the DDC
system shall disable the humidifier.
10. The DDC system shall modulate the speed of the supply fan VFD based on a signal
from the discharge air static pressure sensor located in the supply air ductwork. The
discharge air static pressure sensor location shall be shown on the submittal drawings
and shall be approved by the Engineer. The setpoint of the control shall be 2.5"NC.
(adjustable).
11. The DDC system shall monitor a pressure differential switch installed across each filter
bank. When the switch indicates that the filter bank is dirty, the system shall notify
maintenance personnel that service/inspection is required.
12. A manual reset supply air low limit controller shall de -energize the AHU fan if the air
temperature downstream of the preheat coil falls below 35 deg. F. (adj). When the
mixed air low limit de -energizes the unit, a freeze protection shutdown alarm shall be
displayed at the OWS (operation work station). The chilled water pump shall continue
to operate, and the valve shall be open to produce maximum flow at the chilled water
coil. The outside air damper shall close completely.
13. A manual reset exhaust air high limit controller shall de -energize the AHU if the exhaust
air temperature rises above 125 deg. F. (adj.). When the return air high limit de -
energizes the unit, a high limit alarm shall be displayed at the OWS.
14. The supply air and/or exhaust air smoke detectors (provided by Div. 16) shall de -
energize the AHU if products of combustion are detected. When the supply air or
return air smoke detectors de -energize the unit, a smoke detector shut -down alarm
shall be displayed at the OWS.
02092 TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 15900 - 5
11 /03
0
15. A manual -reset static pressure high limit controller in the AHU discharge air ductwork
shall de -energize the supply fan upon sensing a discharge duct static pressure above
6" WC (adj.). When the static pressure high limit controller shuts down the unit, a high
static shutdown alarm shall be displayed at the OWS. If the supply air fan fails to start
during operation, the AHU will be de -energized. When the AHU is de -energized for fan
failure, a fan failure alarm shall be displayed at the OWS.
16. Interlock the chilled water circulating pump with the AHU start circuit. Provide positive
run status via for each pump. Provide positive run status of fan via D.P., differential
pressure.
17. Each separately temperature controlled space shall be served by a constant volume air
valve, associated hydronic reheat coil, and temperature sensor/thermostat. (Metastat)
The Metastat shall send setpoint and space temperature to the DDC system. Band on
limits imposed on the setpoint adjust (programmable in the DDC system). The DDC
system shall modulate the 3-way heating water valve open to the coil to satisfy the
setpoint. In addition, each Metastat temperature sensor located in each space shall be
capable of being trended and alarmed at the OWS.
C. Heating Water System - Packaged gas -fired modular boiler, constant volume HW pumps.
1. The heating water system shall utilize stand-alone DDC controllers dedicated only for
control of its respective heating water system. Each boiler shall be furnished with a
factory controls package. The EMCS DDC controllers shall be located in a NEMA 1
hinged door enclosure near the hot water heating equipment.
2. On a signal from the DDC system, the DDC system shall start the HW pump, should
the lead pump fail to start on command from the DDC system (as sensed by the DP
switch across the pump), the backup pump shall start and an alarm condition shall
exist.
The boiler shall be enabled to provide heating water: temperature based on a reset
schedule.
3. The HWS temperature set point shall be reset inversely, based on the following reset
schedule:
HWS Temperature Setpoint OA Temperature
130OF (adj.) 60OF
180OF (adj.) 350F
4. After heating water flow has been established, the DDC system shall sequence the
boilers as required to maintain heating water supply temperature setpoint.
5. Differential pressure switches shall be installed across each HW pump's suction and
discharge piping for monitoring pump operation. In the event that the primary heating
water pump fails to start after 5 minutes, the DDC system shall disable the primary
pump and start the standby pump. When the primary pump fails, a pump failure alarm
shall be displayed at the OWS. Interlock the boiler control circuit such that heating
water flow must be proven through the boiler before the boiler will fire.
6. The DDC system shall monitor boiler runtime through a status contact located in the
factory boiler control panel. When the boiler has operated for an owner defined time
period, the DDC system shall notify maintenance personnel that service/inspection is
required.
7. The DDC system shall monitor each pump's runtime. When a pump has operated for
an owner defined time period, the OWS shall notify maintenance personnel that
service/inspection is required.
8. In addition to the above, the EMCS shall also monitor the following points: HWS &
HWR temperature, boiler alarm, boiler status, and building HW flow.
01
u
I �
7
02092 TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 15900 - 6
11 /03
1i
V
D. Chilled Water System — Constant Volume Primary CHW pump(s):
1. The chilled water system shall utilize the DDC controller dedicated for the control of the
chilled water system. Anytime the DDC system enables an air -handling unit, the
variable volume chilled water pumps shall be started.
2. In the event that the lead CHW pumps fail to start after 5 minutes, the DDC system
shall disable the lead pump and start the standby pump. When a pump fails, a pump
failure alarm shall be displayed at the OWS.
3. Liquid differential pressure sensor(s) shall be located across each chilled water pump
to verify flow.
4. The DDC system shall monitor the secondary CHW pump(s) runtime through status
contacts located in the factory chiller control panels. Pump lead/lag shall be selectable
from the OWS operator workstation. To equalize pump runtimes, the DDC system
shall automatically swap the lead and lag CHW pumps after the selected lead pump
has operated for an owner -defined period of time. Additionally, when a pump has
operated for an owner defined time period, the DDC system shall notify maintenance
personnel that service/inspection is required.
E. Lab Exhaust Fan Control (EF-1 and EF-2):
1. For each of two exhaust fans, provide the following control functions.
2. Each lab exhaust fan is scheduled to be equipped with a VFD. These VFD's are for
monitoring and balancing, and to initiate backup fan operation in the event of fan
failure. Provide follower input to the VFD's for indication of actual speed at each
exhaust fan. Provide a common alarm from each VFD to indicate any fault at the VFD.
3. Provide start/stop and run status from current transformers at each exhaust fan.
4. Provide a static pressure signal at a point shown on the drawings. Provide negative
static pressure at this location. Control the VFD for both units to maintain a negative
static pressure average in the duct of 3" WC (adj.). If the speed of the exhaust fans is
commended above 75% (adjustable), an alarm condition shall exist. If an exhaust fan is
not generating adequate static pressure, stop the fan and cause air alarm condition to
exist. The remaining fan VFD will ramp up to satisfy the setpoint. Note that the exhaust
fans are specified to be equipped with automatic discharge dampers. Note that these
dampers shall by HEAVY DUTY construction, rated for high pressure and low leakage.
5. Provide positive run status via differential pressure switch.
F. Mechanical Room Ventilation (EF-3,4,5)
1. Each equipment room is equipped with an exhaust fan, single -speed with automatic
shutters.
2. Provide a temperature sensor in each equipment room. On a rise in mechanical room
temperature above setpoint, start the exhaust fans to ventilate the equipment room.
Note that air intakes with filters are provided for makeup of this exhaust air. Provide
mechanical room temperature input to the DDC.
G. Plumbing Control Points: Refer to the point chart for points in the plumbing system to be
annunciated to the DDC system, RO pump start/stop with positive feedback, RO system
PH level, and RO system conductivity.
H. Generator Annunciator Points: Provide two binary input points from the Emergency
Generator control panel. The Generator manufacturer will provide form C contacts for
indicating run status of the generator, and a second contact for common trouble alarm.
Integrate these point into the BAS.
3.8 FINAL TEST AND ADJUSTMENT
A. Upon completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall make all final
adjustments to the system as may be required by actual operating conditions. All throttling
range adjustments shall be set as narrow as possible without causing hunting. Setpoints
and setup amounts shall be such as to provide satisfactory operation under all load
conditions. The operating personnel shall be instructed in the preventive maintenance
procedures and in the operating of the control system. The control manufacturer shall
submit a letter stating that the control system has been installed under the control
02092 TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 15900 - 7
11 /03
manufacturer's supervision and has been adjusted, tested under operating conditions and
is operating satisfactorily in accordance with the desired sequence.
B. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives under
direct employ of the Temperature Control Manufacturer shall provide two six -hour periods
of instruction to the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the
mechanical system. An additional six -hour instruction period shall be given at the
beginning of the next heating or cooling season.
C. Provide three sets of complete operating and maintenance instructions with drawings,
typewritten instructions and operating sequences, and descriptive data sheets. Assemble
each set in a hard cover binder with "Temperature Control" title placed on front cover and
binding.
3.9 GUARANTEE
A. All devices shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree F. System shall be
guaranteed for one year after final acceptance.
3.10 POINT CHARTS
A. Provide all control points shown on the attached charts.
END OF SECTION
02092 TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM 15900 - 8
11 /03
DDC POINT CHART
AHU-1
DOINT DESCRIPTION
tart -Stop
;un Status — Fan DP
re -Filter DP
lepa Filter DP
filet Air Damper
=6 Coil DAT
=B Coil Dampers
=B Coil 3-Way Valve
lumidifier Output
lumidistat Input
humidifier Trouble
ligh Humidity — Duct
,HW Coil D.A.T.
,HW 3-Way Valve
ow Limit Freezestat
..POINT
FUNCTION
POINT APPLICATION-.
..
Lubbock Health
Department Building
BSL-3— Laboratory
1
Fanning, Fanning M
& Associates, Inc.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS c _
2555 — 74th Street Lubbock, TX 79423 • 8061745-2533
Fax 8061745-3596 - Web site fanningfanning com
AHU-1
(cont'd)
POINT DESCRIPTION
li-Limit Temp.
,HU-1 Duct Static
,HU-1 VFD Signal
DDC POINT CHART
POINT FUNCTION
POINT APPLICATION
Lubbock Health Fanning, Fanning -M
& Associates, Inc. -_
Department Building CONSULTING ENGINEERS _
BSL-3— Laborato 2 2555-74tbstred LubbocKTX 79423 • 806/745-2533
Fax: 806/745-3596 Web site. fanningfanning.com y
DDC POINT CHART
Chilled Water
System
'OINT DESCRIPTION
utside Air Temp
hiller Enable
-.HW Temp S.P.
-1 Common Alarm
upply Temp
etum Temp
HWP S/S
HWP Run Status
POINT FUNCTION
POINT APPLICATION
Lubbock Health
Department Building
BSL-3— Laboratory
3
Fanning, Fanning �,M
& Associates, Inc.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS
2555 — 74th Street Lubbock, TX 79423 - $06f745-2533
Fax 9061745-3596 Web site fanningfanning com
Heating Water
System
'DINT DESCRIPTION
oiler Start/Stop
W Pumps S/S
oiler Trouble
oiler Setpoint HWS
WS Temp
WR Temp
IW Pump DP
DDC POINT CHART
..
POINT FUNCTIONPOINT
APPLICATION..
.
..
Lubbock Health
Department Building
BSL-3— Laboratory
Fanning, Fanning
& Associates, Inc.
CONSULTING ENGINEERS e
4 2555 - 74th Street Lubbock, TX 79423 • 8061745-2533
Fax-. 8O6l745-3596 Web site: fanningfanning,com
DDC POINT CHART
General
Points
JOINT DESCRIPTION
letastat Temp
letastat Temp. S. P.
HC 3-Way Valve
F-El D/P
B-1
B-2
B-3
F-1 S/S
:F-2 S/S
F-1 DP
F-2 DP
luct Static — Exhaust
FD Output
POINT TYPE
POINT FUNCTION
POINT APPLICATION
'POINT COS ALARM
Lubbock Health
Department Building
BSL-3— Laboratory
5
Fanning, Fanning �m
& Associates, Inc. -_
CONSULTING ENGINEERS e
2555 — 74th Street Lubbock, TX 79423 - 8061745-2533
Fax 806/745-3596 - Web site fanningfanning.com
General
Points
(cont'd)
POINT DESCRIPTION
:F-3 S/S
.1stat — EF-3
:F-4 S/S
.1stat — EF-4
:F-5 S/S
"stat EF-5
M System S/S
M Tank — Conductivity
t0 — PH
3enerator Trouble
3enerator Status
=ire Alarm System
Loom Pressure Alarms
DDC POINT CHART
POINT FUNCTION
POINT APPLICATION
Lubbock Health
Department Building
B S L-(33--7Laboratory
Fanning, Fanning �M
& Associates, Inc. m =_
CONSULTING ENGINEERS e _
6 2555 —74th Street Lubbock, TX 79423 - 806/745.2533
Fax 8061745-3596 - Web site: fanningfanning.com {---;
r
U
G
i
SECTION 15905
FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
PART GENERAL
It is the intent of the Engineer to request proposals from Open Protocol Energy
Management Manufacturers for the work described below. Proprietary systems of any
nature will not be considered.
It is the intent of these specifications to describe modifications to the FMS architecture to
allow the BSL-3 facility in the Health Department to be monitored and controlled through
the internet.
This specification is based upon performance criteria established by the Metasys
Extended Architecture System by Johnson Controls Inc.
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Facilities
Management System (FMS) Contractor.
B. The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the
associated work of other trades. Reference the Division 15 Sections for details.
C. Technical Proposal:
1. It is the intent of this specification to describe the performance requirements of the
FMS. Three business days prior to bid, the FMS Contractor shall have submitted a
complete Technical Proposal to the Engineer. FMS Contractors not supplying this
Technical Proposal in compliance with these specifications cannot bid this work.
2. This Technical Proposal shall be to the recorded written satisfaction of the Engineer.
At minimum this submittal shall contain the following documentation which shall
become part of the Contract.
a. Statement of Compliance. The Statement of Compliance shall address the
Specification, paragraph by paragraph. Identify on a paragraph by paragraph basis,
compliance or deviation. For each deviation, detail the means to achieve the intent.
For each paragraph, supply and reference factory product documentation to
substantiate. The Statement of Compliance shall form part of the FMS Contract.
b. FMS network architecture diagram.
c. Product information sheets for each model of FMS product, including software, and
feature identified on the FMS network architecture diagram.
d. Specific printed product information detailing the operator workstation hardware
and operator interface software.
e. Project team organization including resumes of key project team members.
f. Project scheduling including anticipated manpower requirements to meet the
Project schedule.
g. Location of the FMS Contractor's branch office that would perform warranty work,
routine maintenance and 24/7/365 emergency repair services. Provide the phone
number that could be used by the Owner for emergency service.
h. Prior project list of five Facility Management Systems of similar size, scope and
complexity, which have been completed and accepted. Include; Project Name,
Project Owner, Project Address, Contact Name, Contact Phone Number and a
brief description of the FMS.
i. Details of the Contractor's Safety Manual and designated Safety Supervisor.
j. Details of the Contractor's policies for the handling and management of materials,
including hazardous materials.
tj
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 1
11 /03
0
3. The Technical Proposal shall be reviewed with and accepted by the Engineer prior to
contract execution.
D. The work of this Division shall be coordinated with Section 15900, Point Schedules and
Drawings.
E. If the FMS Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project
documents, the Contractor shall promptly request clarification and instruction from the
design team.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically
exists within a defined range of limiting values.
B. Binary: A two -state system where an "ON" condition is represented by one discrete signal
level and an "OFF" condition is represented by a second discrete signal level each
separated by a defined deadband. Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs are examples.
C. Facility Management System (FMS): The total integrated system of fully operational and
functional elements, including equipment, software, programming, and associated
materials, to be provided by this Division FMS Contractor and to be interfaced to the
associated work of other related trades.
D. FMS Contractor: The single Contractor to provide the work of this Division. This
Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer, installer, commissioner and ongoing service
provider for the FMS work.
E. Control Sequence- An FMS pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical
computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control
objectives.
F. Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre -defined arrangements included in the
FMS software to provide direct closed -loop control for the designated equipment and
controlled variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms
together with target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values,
timing considerations and the like.
G. FMS Network: The total digital on-line real-time interconnected configuration of FMS digital
processing units, workstations, panels, sub -panels, controllers, devices and associated
elements individually known as network nodes. May exist as one or more fully interfaced
and integrated sub -networks, LAN, WAN or the like.
H. Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the FMS network.
I. FMS Integration: The complete functional and operational interconnection and interfacing
of all FMS work elements and nodes in compliance with all applicable codes, standards
and ordinances so as to provide a single coherent FMS as required by this Division.
J. Provide: The term "Provide" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean to
furnish, install in place, connect, calibrate, test, verify, warrant, document and supply the
associated required services ready for operation.
K. A Dell Personal Computer shall be provided. Alternate pricing for HP/Compaq computers
will be considered. PC "clones" assembled by a third -party subcontractor are not
acceptable.
L. Furnish: The term "Furnish" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean
supply at the FMS Contractor's cost to the designated third party trade contractor for
installation. FMS Contractor shall connect furnished items to the FMS, calibrate, test, verify,
warrant and document.
M. Wiring: The term "Wiring" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide
the FMS wiring and terminations.
N. Install: The term "Install" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean receive
at the jobsite and mount.
O. Protocol: The term "protocol" and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean a
defined set of rules and standards governing the on-line exchange of data between FMS
network nodes.
49
J1
I
0
1�
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 2
11 /03
"software"
P.
Software: The term and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all
of programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific
!�
digital process programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood
�j
in the FMS industry for real-time, on-line, integrated FMS configurations.
Q.
The use of words in the singular in these Division documents shall not be considered as
limiting when other indications in these documents denote that more than one such item is
being referenced.
R.
Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and other
symbolic interpretation aids included in the Division documents are for general information
only and are to assist in the reading and interpretation of these Documents. They do not
form a formal part of the Documents and may not be consistent or complete in their use
throughout the Documents.
S.
The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this
Division:
ADC - Analog to Digital Converter
Al Analog Input
_
AN Application Node
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
AO - Analog Output
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
AWG American Wire Gauge
CFM - Cubic Feet Per Minute
CPU Central Processing Unit
_
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
DAC - Digital to Analog Converter
DDC - Direct Digital Control
DI (Binary) Digital Input
_
DO (Binary) Digital Output
EEPROM - Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EMI - Electromagnetic Interference
FAS - Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System
GUI - Graphical User Interface
HOA - Hand -Off -Auto
ID Identification
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
1/0 - Input/Output
LAN - Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED - Light Emitting Diode
MCC - Motor Control Center
NC - Normally Closed
NIC Not In Contract
NO - Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation
_
OAH Outdoor Air Humidity
OAT - Outdoor Air Temperature
PC - Personal Computer
RAM Random Access Memory
_
RF Radio Frequency
RFI - Radio Frequency Interference
RH Relative Humidity
_
ROM Read Only Memory
RTD - Resistance Temperature Detector
SPDT - Single Pole Double Throw
SPST - Single Pole Single Throw
02092
11 /03
FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 3
XVGA -
Extended Video Graphics Adapter
TBA -
To Be Advised
TCP/IP -
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TTD -
Thermistor Temperature Detector
UPS -
Uninterruptible Power Supply
VAC -
Volts, Alternating Current
VAV -
Variable Air Volume
VDC -
Volts, Direct Current
WAN -
Wide Area Network
1.3 FMS DESCRIPTION
A. The FMS shall be a complete system designed for use on Intranets and the Internet. This
functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Primary nodes located in equipment
rooms and similar shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly
on the IT infrastructure existing in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for
coordination with the owner's IT staff to ensure that the FMS will perform in the owner's
environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN.
B. All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that do not require the purchase of any
special or proprietary 3rd party software from the FMS manufacturer for use as a building
operations terminal. All software shall be supported by the FMS manufacturer and
documentation shall be provided by the FMS manufacturer verifying the FMS manufacturer
as the original provider of all software used on this project. The primary point of interface
on these PCs will be a standard Web Browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape.
C. Where necessary and as dictated elsewhere in these Specifications, Servers shall be used
for the purpose of providing a location for archiving system configuration data, and
historical data such as trend data and operator transactions. All data stored will be through
the use of a standard data base platform: Microsoft Data Engine (MSDE) or Microsoft SQL
Server as dictated elsewhere in this specification.
D. The work of the single FMS Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all
Sections of this Division specifications together with the associated Point Sheets and
Drawings and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents as
are listed in Part 1 of this Section.
E. The FMS work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces,
wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples,
submittals, testing, verification, training services, permits and licenses, transportation,
shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary
protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties, services, and items as Specified in
these Division documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and
commissioned FMS.
F. Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only manufacturer employees
who are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the specific equipment, software
and configurations to be provided for this Project.
G. Manage and coordinate the FMS work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project
schedules. Coordinate cooperatively with the associated work of other trades so as to
assist the progress and not impede or delay the work of associated trades.
H. The FMS as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features,
functions and services:
1. Operator information, alarm management and control functions at any Operator's
console without the need to purchase special software from the FMS manufacturer for
those consoles.
2. Enterprise -level information and control functions.
3. Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval, and
reporting functions.
4. Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of FMS functions.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 4
11 /03 0
�1
5. Offsite monitoring and management
6. Energy management
7. Remote dial -up paging for emergency maintenance response
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
j A. General:
1.
The Facility Management System Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer -owned
branch office that is regularly engaged in the engineering, programming, installation
l
and service of total integrated Facility Management Systems of similar size, scope and
complexity to the FMS specified in this Contract.
2.
The FMS Contractor shall be a recognized national manufacturer, installer and service
provider of FMS. Distributors, manufacturer's representatives, wholesalers, or any
contractor below the primary manufacturing level will not be acceptable.
3.
The FMS Contractor shall have a branch facility within a 50-mile radius of the job site
supplying complete maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, 7-day-a-week
basis. This branch facility shall provide the work for this project. This support facility
shall have a spare parts and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment required to
install, commission and service the specified FMS.
4.
As evidence and assurance of the contractor's ability to support the Owner's system
with service and parts, the contractor must have been in the FMS business for at least
the last ten (10) years and have successfully completed total projects of at least 10
times the value of this contract in each of the preceding five years.
5.
The FMS contractor shall demonstrate his financial ability to complete the project by
including in the technical proposal, a letter from their surety company, attached with a
power of attorney, stating that it will execute a performance bond and a labor and
material bond in the penal sum of 100% of the bid amount upon an award of a contract
to the bidder. The surety company must be licensed to do business in the state of the
project and have a minimal AM Best rating of A minus. The bond shall be executed
and delivered to the Owner within 10 days of Contract award.
4 6.
The Facility Management System architecture shall consist of the products of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of Facility Management Systems,
and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard of design at the time of bid.
7.
The FMS software residing in Nodes and servers shall be updated to the latest
4
currently available revision at the start of Warranty.
B. Workplace Safety And Hazardous Materials:
1.
Provide a safety program in compliance with the Contract Documents.
2.
The FMS Contractor shall have a corporately certified comprehensive Safety
Certification Manual and a designated Safety Supervisor for the Project.
3.
The Contractor and its employees and subtrades comply with federal, state and local
safety regulations.
i 4.
The Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors and employees have written safety
programs in place that covers their scope of work, and that their employees receive the
training required by the OSHA have jurisdiction for at least each topic listed in the
Safety Certification Manual.
5.
Hazards created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall be eliminated before any
further work proceeds.
6.
Hazards observed but not created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall be
reported to either the General Contractor or the Owner within the same day. The
Contractor shall be required to avoid the hazard area until the hazard has been
7.
eliminated.
The Contractor shall sign and date a safety certification form prior to any work being
performed, stating that the Contractors' company is in full compliance with the Project
safety requirements.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 5
11 /03
ilk
8. The Contractor's safety program shall include written policy and arrangements for the
handling, storage and management of all hazardous materials to be used in the work in
compliance with the requirements of the AHJ at the Project site.
9. The Contractor's employees and subcontractor's staff shall have received training as
applicable in the use of hazardous materials and shall govern their actions accordingly.
C. Quality Management Program:
1. Provide a competent and experienced FMS Project Manager employed by the FMS
Contractor. The Project Manager shall be supported as necessary by other FMS
Contractor employees in order to provide professional management service for the
work. The Project Manger shall attend scheduled Project Meetings as required and
shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of
the FMS Contractor. At minimum, the Project Manager shall:
a. Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials, labor and
other resources are available as needed.
b. Maintain the scheduling of the work and report monthly in writing to the Engineer
on progress.
c. Manage the financial aspects of the FMS Contract.
d. Coordinate with the FMS Site Supervisor and with the Engineer and other trades
as necessary to maintain progress of the Contract.
2. Provide a competent and experienced FMS Site Supervisor who shall be a full time Site
Supervisor, employed by the FMS Contractor. The Site Supervisor shall be supported
as necessary by other specialist staff so as to ensure the continuity and progress of the
work site as required by the Contract. The FMS Site Supervisor shall attend site trade
coordination meetings and selected Project Meetings and shall normally be based on
site full-time during the active FMS installation and commissioning period. The FMS
Site Supervisor shall be equipped with an enabled pager or cellular phone to allow for
quick contact and shall, at minimum, undertake duties as follows:
a. Report to the FMS Project Manager.
b. Schedule the development of on -site manpower and materials.
c. Coordinate as necessary with other trades.
d. Maintain on -site records available for viewing by the Owner and the Engineer.
e. Manage the arrangements for storage of materials, tools and other relevant FMS
Contractor assets on site.
f. Be responsible for the work and actions of the FMS workforce on site.
3. Maintain a legible copy on -site, accessible to the owner upon request of, at minimum,
the following documentation:
a. The FMS Contract Documents including all approved Change Orders.
b. All FMS related written Requests For Information and responses.
c. All approved Shop Drawings and other submittals.
d. A copy of the FMS Project Schedule.
e. Primary FMS related correspondence and minutes
f. A record of daily on -site manpower deployment
g. Other records as pertinent and required by the Contract Documents.
nil
I1"
►l
I
11"
1.5 REFERENCES U
A. All work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, as applicable: U
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards. Fp
2. National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code.
3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels.
4. UL 864 UUKL Smoke Control
5. UL 268 Smoke Detectors.
6. UL 916 Energy Management
7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
8. NFPA 90A - Standard For The Installation Of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems.
9. NFPA 92A and 92B Smoke Purge/Control Equipment.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 6 U
11/03
V
1
i
a
I
10. Factory Mutual (FM).
11. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
12. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
13. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
14. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
15. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).
16. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
17. American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII).
18. Electronics Industries Association (EIA).
19. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
20. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
21. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio Frequency
Devices.
22. Americans Disability Act (ADA)
B. In the case of conflicts or discrepancies, the more stringent regulation shall apply.
C. All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the project site.
1.6 WORK BY OTHERS
A. The demarcation of work and responsibilities between the FMS Contractor and other
related trades shall be as outlined in the FMS RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX herein. "15"
refers to the Division 15 Contractor. "16" refers to the Division 16 Contractor.
CORE FMS INTER —TRADE RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX
WORK
PROVIDE
FURNISH
INSTALL
LV
LINE
WIRE
POWER
& PIPE
& PIPE
1.
FMS Nodes, equipment, housings,
FMS
FMS
FMS
enclosures and panels and power from Div.
16 panels.
2.
FMS software, firmware and project specific
FMS
software configurations and database
entries.
3.
FMS low voltage and communication wiring
FMS
FMS
4.
FMS conduits and raceway
FMS
FMS
5.
Control Relays
FMS
FMS
6.
Concrete and/or inertia equipment pads and
15
seismic bracing
7.
FMS network routers, bridges, hubs and
FMS
FMS
associated cabling.
BUILDING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS
INTER -TRADE
RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX
WORK
PROVIDE
FURNISH
INSTALL
LV
LINE
WIRE
POWER
&
& PIPE
PIPE
1.
Automatic dampers
FMS
15
FMS
FMS
2.
Manual valves
15
3.
Automatic valves
FMS
15
FMS
FMS
4.
Pipe insertion devices and taps including
FMS
15
FMS
FMS
thermowells, flow and pressure stations,
etc.
5.
Current Switches.
FMS
FMS
6.
Power Distribution System monitoring
FMS
16
FMS
16
interfaces
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 7
11 /03
7.
Control air compressors
FMS
16
8.
FMS interface with Chiller control package
FMS
FMS
FMS
9.
Chiller controls interface to FMS
15
15
16
10.
Chiller and BoilerFlow Switches
15
FMS
11.
Boiler control package
15
FMS
16
12.
Water treatment system
15
15
16
13.
Variable Frequency Drives
FMS
16
FMS
16
14.
Room pressure monitors
FMS
FMS
FMS
15.
Laboratory Air Valves
15
15
16.
Unit Heater controls
FMS
FMS
16
17.
Starters, HOA switches
15
FMS
16
18.
Control damper actuators
FMS
FMS
FMS
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples:
1. The FMS Contractor shall submit a list of all shop drawings with submittal dates within
30 days of contract award.
2. Submittals shall be in defined packages. Each package shall be complete and shall
only reference itself and previously submitted packages. The packages shall be as
approved by the Engineer for Contract compliance.
3. Allow 15 working days for the review of each package by the Engineer in the
scheduling of the total FMS work.
4. Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such
regulations and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the FMS Contractor
where filing is necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to
the Owner.
5. Prepare an index of all submittals and shop drawings for the installation. Index shall
include a shop drawing identification number, Contract Documents reference and item
description. Submit this index prior to the submittal of any shop drawings and within 4
weeks after Contract award.
6. The FMS Contractor shall correct any errors or omissions individually noted in the first
review. The FMS Contractor shall revise the submittal and resubmit for review. Any
required third or subsequent review of the same submittal shall be at the cost of the
FMS Contractor. The Owner's reasonable costs for any third or subsequent additional
reviews, including the Consultants fees and direct expenses, may be deducted by the
Owner directly from the monies due to the FMS Contractor under this Contract by way
of a contract change.
7. At a minimum, submit the following:
a. FMS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections.
b. Schematics, sequences and flow diagrams.
c. Points schedule for each real point in the FMS, including: Tag, Point Type, System
Name and Display Units. Node Type, Address, Cable Destination, Module Type,
Terminal ID, Panel, Slot Number, Reference Drawing, and Cable Number.
d. Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menu penetrations to
show hierarchy and functional interrelationships.
e. Detailed Bill of Material list for each Node, identifying quantity, part number,
description, and optional features.
f. Control Damper Schedule including a separate line for each damper and a column
for each of the damper attributes, including: Code Number, Fail Position, Damper
Type, Damper Operator, Blade Type, Bearing Type, Seals, Duct Size, Damper
Size, Mounting, and Actuator Type.
g. Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve and a column for
each of the valve attributes: Code Number, Configuration, Fail Position, Pipe Size,
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 8 i
11 /03 +I
L
Valve Size, Body Configuration, Close off Pressure, Capacity, Valve CV,
Calculated CV, Design Pressure, Actual Pressure, and Actuator Type.
h. Details of all FMS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades.
i. Product data sheets for all products including software.
j. Training provided, including outlines for each session.
. 1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
t 1. Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the
[ Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and
Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on Compact Disc media, and include the
following for the FMS provided:
a. Table of contents.
b. As -built system record drawings. Computer Aided Drawings (CAD) record
drawings shall represent the as -built condition of the system and incorporate all
information supplied with the approved submittal.
c. Manufacturers product data sheets for all products including software.
d. System Operator's manuals.
e. Archive copy of all site -specific databases and sequences.
f. FMS network diagrams.
g. Wiring termination schedules.
h. Interfaces to all third -party products and work by other trades.
2. The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD shall be self-contained, and include all
necessary software required to access the project record drawings and data sheets. A
logically organized table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all
project record drawings and product data sheets. Viewer software shall provide the
ability to display, zoom, and search all documents. The CD-ROM(s) shall contain
adequate space for future system updates.
B. On-line Documentation: After completion of all the tests and adjustments listed above, the
contractor shall install the following information on the FMS:
i t 1. "AS -BUILT" drawing files
2. Detailed catalog data on all installed system components with address and phone
number of factory repair service.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Standard Material and Labor Warranty:
1. Provide a one-year labor and material warranty (includes all parts and Labor) on the
FMS.
2. If within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of product, upon written notice
from the owner, it is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it
shall be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the FMS Contractor at the cost
of the FMS Contractor.
3. Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 50 miles of the Project site such that
replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming. Warranty work
shall be done during FMS Contractor's normal business hours.
4. Maintain an on -site record of all work done, all items removed from site, all items
returned to site, all new replacement items installed and all remedial programming and
database entry work undertaken including software revisions installed. Maintain a
record of all re -calibrations required as a result of Warranty service.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 9
11 /03
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FMS ARCHITECTURE
A. Overall Conceptual Description:
1. The FMS shall be designed entirely for use on intranets and internets. All networking
technology used at the Tier 1 level shall be off the shelf, industry standard technology
fully compatible with other owner provided networks in the facility.
2. All aspects of the user interface, whether to servers or to Tier 1 solid state devices,
shall be via browsers. Any PCs used as operator interface points shall not require the
purchase of any special software from the manufacturer in order to provide the
complete user interface as described herein.
3. The user interface will be complete as described herein, providing complete tool sets,
operational features, multi- panel displays, and other display features. Systems which
merely provide HTML based web pages as the operator interface will not be
acceptable.
4. The primary components of the system will be the Primary Application Nodes and
Servers located at the highest level of the network architecture. Both will use the same
user interface and provide the same level of accessibility via the network. The only
distinction between the user interface used on servers as compared to Primary
Application Nodes will be select menu items used for accessing long term storage
features on the servers or on their respective archive devices (CD/RW, etc.)
B. General:
1. The FMS shall consist of a number of Nodes and associated equipment connected by
industry standard network practices. All communication between Nodes shall be by
digital means only.
2. The FMS network shall at minimum comprise of the following:
a. Operator PCs — fixed or portable.
b. Network processing, data storage and communication equipment including file
servers.
c. Routers, bridges, switches, hubs, modems and like communications equipment.
d. Active processing Nodes including field panels.
e. Intelligent and addressable elements and end devices.
f. Third -party equipment interfaces.
g. Other components required for a complete and working FMS.
3. All FMS features shall be accessible via Enterprise Intranet and Internet browser with
equivalent FMS access control for user access.
4. The FMS shall support auto-dial/auto-answer communications to allow FMS Nodes to
communicate with other remote FMS Nodes via standard telephone lines. Refer to
drawings for type of line to be used, DSL or voice grade. Where no preference is
indicated, DSL is the preferred grade. Extend a telephone line into the equipment room
for this purpose.
5. The PC Workstations, File servers and principal network equipment shall be Dell
computer products with alternate pricing for HP/Compaq computer products. "Clones"
are not acceptable.
6. Provide licenses for all software residing in the FMS system and transfer these licenses
to the Owner prior to completion. Registered copies of the most current software
available shall be furnished at the end of the contract.
C. Network:
1. The FMS shall incorporate a primary Tier 1 network. At the Contractor's option, the
FMS may also incorporate integrated secondary Tier 2 and tertiary Tier 3 networks.
2. The FMS Network shall utilize an open architecture capable of all of the following:
a. Utilizing standard Ethernet communications and operate at a minimum speed of
10/100 Mb/sec
b. Connecting via BACnet at the Tier 1 level in accordance with as per
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 -10
11 /03
L,
I
i.7
V
I
0
I
f
C
c. Connecting via the N2 Protocol at the Tier 2 level.
d. Connecting via LonMark as per ANSI/EIA 709 (LonWorks) to LonMark FTT-10
transceivers at the Tier 2 level.
3. The FMS network shall support both copper and optical fiber communication media.
D. Third -Party Interfaces:
1. FMS Contractor shall integrate real-time data from systems supplied by other trades as
required in Part 3.
2. The FMS system shall include necessary FMS hardware equipment and software to
allow data communications between the FMS system and systems supplied by other
trades.
3. The trade contractor supplying other systems will provide their necessary hardware and
software and will cooperate fully with the FMS contractor in a timely manner at their
cost to ensure complete data integration.
4. Interfaces by other software entities offered by an FMS manufacturer through a
licensing agreement with the software entity are not acceptable.
E. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS):
1. Where indicated for supporting operator PCs, servers, and other equipment as
indicated, provide a UPS.
2. UPS shall be sized for 50% spare capacity. The UPS shall be complete with batteries,
external bypass and line conditioning.
3. All FMS control components shall be connected to emergency circuits. Coordinate with
Division 16.
F. Power Fail / Auto Restart:
1. Provide for the automatic orderly and predefined shutdown of parts or all of the FMS
following total loss of power to parts or all of the FMS.
2. Provide for the automatic orderly and predefined startup of parts or all of the FMS
following total loss of power to those parts or all of the FMS. Archive and annunciate
time and details of restoration.
3. Provide for the orderly and predefined scheduling of controlled return to normal,
automatically time scheduled, operation of controlled equipment as a result of the auto
restart processes.
4. Maintain the FMS real-time clock operation during periods of power outage for a
minimum of 72 hours.
G. Downloading And Uploading:
1. Provide the capability to generate FMS software -based sequences, database items
and associated operational definition information and user -required revisions to same
at any Operator PC, and the means to download same to the associated Application
Node.
2. Application software tool used for the generation of custom logic sequences shall be
resident in both the application node and the server(s) where indicated on the
drawings.
3. Provide the capability to upload FMS operating software information, database items,
sequences and alarms to the designated server.
4. The functions of this Part shall be governed by the codes, approvals and regulations
applying to each individual FMS application.
2.2 OPERATOR PCs
Locate in the Engineering workroom of the Municipal Building (City Hall). Coordinate with the
City of Lubbock Building Maintenance Dept. for exact location. Provide one permanent, fixed
PC under this contract.
A. The Operator PCs (PCs) shall provide the primary means of communication with the FMS
and shall be used for operations, engineering, management, audit, reporting and other
related functions.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 -11
11 /03
B. The PCs shall consist of fixed and portable units as scheduled in Part 3 of this
Specification. The fixed units shall consist of installed PC -based configurations. The
portable units shall consist of PC Laptop or similar designed unit, complete with keyboard
or similar entry/selection device and complete with display and communication
arrangements with ANs.
C. Each fixed PC shall, at minimum, consist of:
1. PC processor with minimum 64-bit word structure.
2. Hard drive or equal high-speed data storage.
3. Removable high-speed data storage and export device(s) such as Read/Write CD
ROM or equal.
4. Full ASCII keyboard and digital Mouse or equal pointing device.
5. Full color, flat screen VDU display unit, minimum 17 inches diagonal screen, minimum
1280 x 1024 resolution, 0.26 or better dot pitch and minimum 72 Hz refresh rate.
6. Printers as scheduled in Part 3 of this Specification. Printers shall be monochromatic
or full color as scheduled and designed for the functional requirements and duty of the
application.
D. All fixed PCs shall operate independently and concurrently without interference and under
individual user password protection.
E. PCs functionality shall be individually definable by software means such that PC may be
designated for specific limited users and may also be readily re -designated to provide OWS
back-up to other OWSs in the FMS.
F. Portable PC shall operate identically to the fixed PC.
G. Fixed or portable operator PCs shall not require any special software to be purchased from
the FMS manufacturer. All actions required for the complete operator interface as
described herein shall be accomplished through a common browser.
2.3 SERVERS
Existing computers owned by the City of Lubbock will be utilized as data storage sites.
A. Existing servers will provide archive locations for all historical data such as trends, alarm
and event histories, and transaction logs.
B. Equip servers with the same tool set that is located in the primary application nodes for the
system configuration and custom logic definition. Verify the storage PC location with the
City of Lubbock.
C. Equip servers with the same tool set that is located in the primary application nodes for
graphic configuration.
D. Access to all information on the server will be through the same user interface used to
access individual nodes. When logged onto a server the operator will be able to also
interact with any of the primary nodes in the facility.
E. The hardware platform for servers will, at minimum, consist of:
1. PC processor with minimum 64-bit word structure.
2. Minimum 2 GHz processor speed.
3. Minimum 1 gigabyte on board ram
4. Hard drive or equal high-speed data storage, minimum 50 gigabytes.
5. OS shall be Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional
6. Removable high-speed data storage and export device(s) such as Read/Write CD
ROM or approved equal.
7. Full ASCII keyboard and digital Mouse or equal pointing device.
8. Full color, flat screen VDU display unit, minimum 17 inches diagonal screen, minimum
1280 x 1024 resolution, 0.26 or better dot pitch and minimum 72 Hz refresh rate.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 -12
11 /03
2.4 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. General:
1.
The FMS Operator Interface shall be user friendly, readily understood and shall make
maximum use of colors, graphics, icons, embedded images, animation, text based
information and data visualization techniques to enhance and simplify the use and
understanding of the FMS by authorized users at the OWS.
2.
It shall be possible to designate any PC on the Tier 1 network as an Operator Interface
point. No special software will need to be purchased from the FMS manufacturer for
any such PC.
J
3.
User access to the FMS shall be protected by a flexible and Owner redefinable
software -based password access protection. Password protection shall be multi -level
and partitionable to accommodate the varied access requirements of the different user
groups. Provide the means to define unique access privileges for each individual
authorized user. Also provide the means to establish general password groups to
which an individual will then be assigned. Once assigned to the group each individual
will assume all the capabilities and restrictions of that group. Provide the means to on-
line manage password access control under the control of a Master Password.
4.
The user interface shall be able to combine data from any and all of the system
components in a single browser window. This shall include historical data stored on a
server.
5.
The Operator Interface shall incorporate comprehensive support for functions including,
l
but not necessarily limited to, the following:
C
a. User access for selective information retrieval and control command execution
b. Monitoring and reporting
c. Alarm, non -normal, and return to normal condition annunciation
d. Selective operator override and other control actions
e. Information archiving, manipulation, formatting, display and reporting
f. FMS internal performance supervision and diagnostics
g. On-line access to user HELP menus
h. On-line access to current FMS as -built records and documentation
i. Means for the controlled re -programming, re -configuration of FMS operation and
for the manipulation of FMS database information in compliance with the prevailing
codes, approvals and regulations for individual FMS applications.
6.
Provide FMS reports and displays making maximized use of simple English language
descriptions and readily understood acronyms, abbreviations and the like to assist user
understanding and interpretation. All text naming conventions shall be consistent in
their use and application throughout the FMS.
7.
All PC -based configurations shall operate on Microsofte Windows 2000 or Windows
XP.
r 8.
Each fixed and portable PC shall be on-line configurable for specific applications,
i
functions and groups of FMS points.
B. Navigation Trees:
1.
The system will have the capability to display multiple navigation trees that will aid the
operator in navigating throughout all systems and points connected. At minimum
provide a tree that identifies all systems on the networks.
2.
Provide the ability for the operator add custom trees. The operator will be able to
define any logical grouping of systems or points and arrange them on the tree in any
order. It shall be possible to nest groups within other groups. Provide at minimum 5
levels of nesting.
3.
The navigation trees shall be "dockable" to other displays in the user interface such as
graphics. This means that the trees will appear as part of the display, but can be
detached and then minimized to the Windows task bar or closed altogether. A simple
keystroke will reattach the navigation to the primary display of the user interface.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 13
11 /03
C. Dividable display panels:
1. It shall be possible for the operator to divide the display area within a single browser
window into multiple display panels. The content of each display panel can be any of
the standard summaries and graphics provided by the system.
2. Provide each display panel with minimize, maximize, and close icons.
D. Alarms:
1. Alarms shall be routed directly from primary application nodes to PCs and servers. It
shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific PCs
and servers. The alarm management portion of the OWS software shall, at the
minimum, provide the following functions
a. Log date and time of alarm occurrence.
b. Generate a "Pop -Up" window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an alarm
has been received.
c. Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge, temporarily
silence, or discard an alarm.
d. Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user acknowledgment,
deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall include the name of the user,
the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a time/date stamp.
e. Provide the ability to direct alarms to an e-mail address or alpha -numeric pager.
This must be provided in addition to the pop up window described above. Systems
which use e-mail and pagers as the exclusive means of annunciating alarms are
not acceptable.
f. Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an alarm.
2. The FMS shall annunciate diagnostic alarms indicating system failures and non -normal
operating conditions
3. The FMS shall annunciate application alarms at minimum, as required by Part 3.
E. Reports:
1. Reports shall be generated and directed to one or more of the following: User interface
displays, printers, or archive at the user's option. As a minimum , the system shall
provide the following reports:
a. All points in the FMS.
b. All points in each FMS application.
c. All points in a specific AN.
d. All points in a user -defined group of points.
e. All points currently in alarm in an FMS application.
f. All points locked out in an FMS application.
g. All FMS schedules.
h. All user defined and adjustable variables, schedules, interlocks and the like.
i. FMS diagnostic and system status reports.
2. Provide all applicable standard reports of the FMS manufacturer.
3. Provide for the generation by the user of custom reports as specified in Part 3.
F. Dynamic Color Graphics:
1. An unlimited number of graphic displays shall be able to be generated and executed.
2. Graphics shall be based on Scalar Vector Graphic (SVG) technology.
3. Values of real time attributes displayed on the graphics shall be dynamic and updated
on the displays.
4. The graphic displays shall be able to display and provide animation based on real-time
FMS data that is acquired, derived, or entered.
5. The user shall be able to change values (setpoints) and states in system controlled
equipment directly from the graphic display.
6. Provide a graphic editing tool that allows for the creation and editing of graphic files. It
shall be possible to edit the graphics directly while they are on line, or at an off line
location for later downloading to the AN.
7. FMS system shall be provided with a complete user expandable symbol library
containing all of the basic symbols used to represent components of a typical FMS
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 14
11 /03
LJ
system. Implementing these symbols in a graphic shall involve dragging and dropping
them from the library to the graphic.
G. Schedules:
1. The system shall provide multiple schedule input forms for automatic FMS time -of -day
scheduling and override scheduling of FMS operations. At a minimum, the following
spreadsheet types shall be accommodated:
a. Weekly schedules.
b. Temporary override schedules.
c. Special "Only Active If Today Is A Holiday" schedules.
a
d. Monthly schedules.
2. Schedules shall be provided for each system or sub -system in the FMS. Each schedule
shall include all commandable points residing within the system. Each point may have
a unique schedule of operation relative to the system use schedule, allowing for
sequential starting and control of equipment within the system. Scheduling and
rescheduling of points shall be accomplished easily via the system schedule
spreadsheets.
3. Monthly calendars for a 12-month period shall be provided that allow for simplified
scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and special days shall be
user -selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall automatically reschedule
equipment operation as previously defined on the weekly schedules.
H. Historical Trending and Data Collection:
1. Trend and store point history data for all FMS points and values as selected by the
user.
2. The trend data shall be stored in a manner that allows custom queries and reports
using industry -standard software tools.
3. At a minimum, provide the capability to perform statistical functions on the historical
f
database:
a. Average.
b. Arithmetic mean.
c. Maximum/minimum values.
d. Range — difference between minimum and maximum values.
e. Standard deviation.
f. Sum of all values.
g. Variance.
Paging:
1. Provide the means of automatic alphanumeric paging of personnel for user -defined
FMS events.
a. System shall support both numeric and alpha -numeric pagers, using Alphanumeric,
PET, or IXO Protocol at the owner's option.
b. Users shall have the ability to modify the phone number or message to be
displayed on the pager through the system software.
c. System shall utilize pager schedules to send pages to the personnel that are "on -
call".
d. Contractor shall be responsible for providing a modem for connection to the paging
service.
2.5 APPLICATION NODES
A. Primary Application Nodes:
1. The primary application node shall perform the function of monitoring all system
variables, both from real hardware points, software variables, and controller parameters
such as setpoints.
2. Application nodes shall be entirely solid state devices. No rigid disk drives will be
permitted in the equipment rooms.
9 3. The primary application nodes shall manage and direct all information traffic on the Tier
1 network, between the Tier 1 and Tier2 networks, and to servers.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 -15
11 /03
4. Any node on the Tier 1 network shall be equipped with all software necessary to drive
the complete user interface including graphics on a browser connected to the node via
the network or directly via a local port on the node.
5. The operating system of the application node shall support multi-user access. At
minimum four users shall be able to access the same application node simultaneously.
6. Communication between nodes shall be per -to -peer via 10/100 Ethernet using the
BACnet protocol.
7. The AN shall be capable of direct connection to multiple field busses using different
protocols simultaneously as indicated below. Should the controller not support multiple
field busses, install two primary nodes side by side.
a. An RS-485 serial field bus such as MSTP or the manufacturer's proprietary field
bus.
b. a LON field bus for supervision and control of LON based controllers that conform
to the Lon Talk standard.
8. The primary nodes will integrate data from both field busses into a common object
structure. Data from both field busses will appear in common displays throughout the
user interface in exactly the same format. It shall not be possible to determine which
field buss the data originated on without reviewing the system configuration data.
9. AN shall be programmable and governed by the requirements of their applicable codes,
approvals and regulations.
10. The AN shall be designed, packaged, installed, programmed and commissioned in
consideration of their specific service and prevailing operating conditions. They shall
be proven standard product of their original manufacturer and not a custom product for
this Project.
11. A failure at an AN shall not cause failures or non -normal operation at any other system
AN other than the possible loss of active real-time information from the failed AN.
12. Ancillary AN equipment, including interfaces and power supplies, shall not be operated
at more than 80% of their rated service capacity.
13. AN shall comply with FCC Part 15 subpart J class A emission requirements.
14. Each primary node shall be equipped with the necessary un-interruptible power such
that it will not cease operation during minor power outages, including those that occur
upon transfer to emergency generator or other local power source not provided by the
utility.
B. HVAC Node:
1. HVAC Node shall provide both standalone and networked direct digital control of HVAC
systems.
2. A dedicated HVAC Node shall be configured and provided for each primary HVAC
system (air handler, chiller, boiler) and each terminal HVAC system (VAV Box, Unit
Heater, Fan Coil Unit, Cabinet Heater, Heat Pump, Fan Powered Box, CV Box)
3. Each HVAC Node shall retain program, control algorithms, and setpoint information in
non-volatile memory in the event of a power failure, and shall return to normal
operation upon restoration of power.
4. Each HVAC Node shall report its communication status to the FMS. The FMS shall
provide a system advisory upon communication failure and restoration.
5. For each primary HVAC system, provide means of indication of system performance
and setpoints at, or adjacent to the HVAC Node.
6. For each primary HVAC system, provide a means to adjust setpoints and start/stop
equipment at, or adjacent to the HVAC Node.
7. Provide a means to prevent unauthorized personnel form accessing setpoint
adjustments and equipment control functions.
8. The HVAC Node shall provide the ability to download and upload configuration data,
both locally at the Node and via the FMS communications network.
9. The HVAC Node shall be provided with a permanently -mounted local graphic terminal
where required in the sequences of this specification. The local graphic terminal shall
provide dynamic graphical representation of the associated system status, with the
ability for the operator to enter commands with proper password protection.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 16
11 /03
0
I
L
I
2.6 APPLICATION SOFTWARE
A. HVAC Application Software:
1. Event Messaging: Provide for the automatic execution of user -defined messages on
the occurrence of each predefined FMS real-time event including equipment/point
status change, approaching limit or alarm, time of day and the like. Direct messages to
any number of operator PCs, e-mail destinations, and pagers.
2. Indoor Air Quality: Provide monitoring of outside air, return air and supply air CO2
concentration, calculate and maintain fresh air requirements. Adjust outdoor air intake
to ensure return air CO2 high level limit is not exceeded.
3. Optimum Start/Stop: Provide software to start equipment on a sliding schedule based
upon indoor and outdoor conditions, to determine the minimum time of HVAC system
operation needed to satisfy the space environmental requirements. The program shall
also determine the earliest possible time to stop the mechanical systems. The optimum
start/stop program shall operate in conjunction with, and be coordinated with, the
scheduled start/stop and night setback programs.
4. Auto Alarm Lockout: Provide for scheduled and automatic lockout of alarm
annunciation from equipment during non -normal operating conditions including
shutdown, emergency power operation, fire alarm and the like.
5. Energy monitoring: Provide software to monitor and totalize consumption as measured
by pulse meters.
6. Event Initiated Programs and custom logic: Provide software to define custom logic
sequences that will reside in the nodes. The definition software will also reside in the
node and be accessible via the standard user interface via a browser.
7. System Restart: Upon restoration of the AC power to an HVAC Node, automatically
restart all equipment and restore all loads to the state as required by the FMS. Provide
appropriate time delays to prevent demand surges or overload trips.
8. Heavy Equipment Delays: The system shall provide protection against excessive
demand situations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays
between successive start commands to heavy electrical loads.
9. Runtime Totalization: Automatically sample, calculate and store runtime hours for
binary input and output points as listed in the point schedule of this specification.
10. Analog/Pulse Totalization: Sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily,
weekly, or monthly basis for user -selected analog and binary pulse input -type points.
2.7 FIELD DEVICES
A. Input Devices:
1. Additional devices:
a. Materials: (e.g. Stainless Steel, Waterproof, etc.)
b. Rating: (e.g. Compliance Standard, Enclosure Rating, etc.)
c. Mounting: (e.g. Pipe Insertion, Wall, Flush, etc.)
d. Range: (e.g. Working Range)
e. Accuracy: (e.g. t percent full scale)
f. Protection: (e.g. Overpressure, short circuit, etc.)
g. Output: (If applicable, e.g. 4-20mA, etc.)
h. Special: (Special characteristics e.g. fail open, approved mfr., etc.)
2. Air Low Differential Pressure Switch:
a. Rating: NEMA 1
b. Mounting: Duct Insertion
c. Range: 0.05" to 5.0" WC, complete with field adjustable setpoint.
d. Protection: Overpressure to 1 PSIG
e. Output: Form C Contact, minimum 50VA
f. Special: Automatic reset, provide complete installation kit including static pressure
tips, tubing, fittings, and air filters.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 17
11 /03
3.
Air Low Differential Pressure Sensor:
a.
Rating: NEMA 1
b.
Mounting: Duct Insertion
c.
Range: 0.05" to 5.0" WC,
d.
Protection: Overpressure to 1 PSIG
e.
Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA
f.
Special: Provide complete installation kit including static pressure tips, tubing,
fittings, and air filters.
4.
Air
High Differential Pressure Switch:
a.
Rating: NEMA 1
b.
Mounting: Duct Insertion
c.
Range: 1" to 10" WC, complete with field adjustable setpoint.
d.
Protection: Overpressure to 1 PSIG
e.
Output: 2 Form C Contacts, minimum 360VA
f.
Special: Manual reset, provide complete installation kit including static pressure
tips, tubing, fittings, and air filters.
5.
Water Differential Pressure Switch:
a.
Materials: Brass bellows
b.
Mounting: Pipe mounted
c.
Range: 2 — 26 PSI, 1.2 PSI fixed differential
d.
Protection: 120 PSI Differential overpressure, 180 PSI static pressure.
e.
Output: Form C contacts, 50 VA
f.
Special: Pipe taps and shut off valves provided by Div. 15.
6.
Temperature Sensors:
a.
Materials: Nickel element in a copper tube.
b.
Mounting: Duct/Pipe, Room
c.
Range: -50°F to 250°F, 55°F to 85°F
d.
Accuracy: 0.1 %
e.
Output: Resistive 1000ohms @ 70OF
f.
Special: Duct Element Holder, Brass Well Assembly, Room Mounting Bracket and
Cover
7.
Humidity
Sensors:
a.
Materials: Polymer
b.
Rating: class 2
c.
Mounting: Duct or Wall
d.
Range: 20% to 80%
e.
Accuracy: +/-3%
f.
Protection: 0-100% non -condensing
g.
Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA
h.
Special: Duct or Wall Mounting Kit
8.
Air
Flow Switch
9.
Water Flow Switch
10.
Current
Switch:
a.
Materials: Encased copper
b.
Rating:600vAC
c.
Mounting: Split Core
d.
Range: 1.5amps to 50 amps
e.
Action: Trip point adjustment
f.
Output: SPST, N.O.
g.
Special: Status LED
11.
Current
Transducer:
a.
Mounting: Field Mounted
b.
Range: 60 Hz nominal
c.
Accuracy: +/- 2% full scale
d.
Protection: 250 A max current
e.
Output: 4-20mA
I
I
11
H
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 18
11 /03
U
u
I
I
u
I
I
12. Static Pressure Transducer:
a. Rating: NEMA 1
b. Mounting: Duct Insertion, Pipe Insertion
c. Range: 0-25 in. water column unidirectional, 0- +/- 5 in. water column bi-directional.
d. Accuracy: +/-1% full scale
e. Protection: 10 PSIG
f. Output: 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
13. Differential Pressure Transducer:
a. Rating: NEMA 1
b. Mounting: Duct Insertion, Pipe Insertion
c. Range: 0-25 in. water column unidirectional, 0- +/- 5 in. water column bi-directional
d. Accuracy: +/-1 % full scale
e. Protection: 10 PSIG
f. Output: 4-20 mA, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC
14. Water Flow Monitoring (GPM), Commercial Grade:
a. Materials: Electrolyses Nickel Plated Brass
b. Rating: 2.5gpm to 60,900gpm
c. Mounting: 2.5" minimum pipe diameter to 36"
d. Range:50:1
e. Accuracy: +/-2% @ .4 t0 20fUsec
f. Protection: 400psi@ 180OF
g. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA
h. Special: Hot Tap Assembly
15. Water Flow Monitoring (GPM), Vortex Shedding:
a. Materials:
b. Rating:
c. Mounting:
d. Range:50:1
e. Accuracy:
f. Protection:
g. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA
h. Special: Hot Tap Assembly
16. Air Flow Monitoring:
a. Materials: PVC/ABS
b. Rating: 350FPM to 9,000FPM
c. Mounting: Duct
d. Range:
e. Accuracy: +/- 5%
f. Protection:
g. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA
h. Special:
17. Gas Flow Monitoring:
a. Materials:
b. Rating:
c. Mounting: Pipe
d. Range:50:1
e. Accuracy: +/-1 %
f. Protection: 175psi, -40OF to 140OF
g. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA, N2
h. Special:
18 Steam Flow Monitoring:
a. Rating: NEMA 4X
b. Mounting: Pipe Insertion
c. Range: 3-80 in. water column
d. Accuracy: +/-1.5% full scale
e. Protection: 2000 PSI, 500 degrees F
02092
11 /03
FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 19
0
f. Output: 4-20 mA
19. Power Meter:
a. Rating: ANSI C12.1 metering standards
b. Mounting: Split Core
c. Accuracy: +/-1 % from 5 % to 100 % of the rated at 0-60 Deg C.
d. Protection: internally isolated to 2000 VAC, case isolation 600 VAC
e. Special: Store KWH in non-volatile memory
20. KW Transducer:
a. Materials: Encased copper
b. Rating:600vAC
c. Mounting: Split Core
d. Range: Up to 2400amps
e. Accuracy: +/- 1 %
f. Output: 4-20mA
21. Override Request Switch:
a. Materials: Bakelite
b. Rating: 10 amps @ 120vAC
c. Mounting: Wall
d. Output: SPDT Momentary Contact
e. Special: Provide with cover plate
22. Occupancy Lighting Switch:
a. Materials: Passive infrared
b. Rating: 120 VAC, 60 Hz; 25 to 800 watts incandescent; 40 to 800 watts
fluorescent, 277 VAC, 60 Hz; 40 to 1200 watts fluorescent 347 VAC, 60 Hz; 40 to
1500 watts fluorescent
c. Mounting: Wall
d. Range: 1800 Field of View
e. Accuracy: Adjustable from 20 to 100% of maximum sensitivity.
f. Output: SPST
g. Special: 30 seconds to 30 minutes time delay
23. End Switches
24. Low Temperature Switches
25. High Temperature Switches
26. Thermostats
27. Carbon Monoxide Sensors:
a. Materials: Metal Oxide Semiconductor
b. Rating: 5000 sq feet
c. Mounting: Duct and wall mount
d. Range: 0 to 200ppm
e. Accuracy:
f. Protection:
g. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA
h. Special:
28. Carbon Dioxide Sensors:
a. Materials: Molded plastic enclosure
b. Rating: 0 to 5000ppm
c. Mounting: Duct or Wall
d. Range: 0 to 2000ppm / 0-5000 User selectable
e. Accuracy: +/- 50ppm
f. Output: 0-10vDC, 4-20mA
g. Special:
29. Hydrogen Detection
30. Methane Detection
B. Output Devices:
1. Electric / Pneumatic Transducers
2. Control Relays:
f'
I
I
I
11,
I
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 20
11 /03
I
I'
I
t.
k
k
L
U
H
L'
a.
Materials: Gold Flash
b.
Rating: 10 amps @ 120-277vAC
c.
Mounting: Standard Electrical Box
d.
Protection: NEMA 1 Housing
e.
Output: SPDT, DPDT
f.
Special: Provide LED for position indication. Provide with HOA switch, except when
used in Smoke Control applications.
C. Controlled
Devices:
1.
Electric Damper Actuators:
a.
Rating: NEMA 2 Enclosure
b.
Mounting: Direct mount
c.
Stroke: 90 seconds end to end full stroke, 15 seconds return to normal for spring
return
d.
Protection: Electronic stall protection
e.
Control Input: 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mADC
f.
Power: Nominal 24 VAC
g.
Torque: Size for minimum 150% of required duty
h.
Duty cycle: rated for 65,000 cycles
i.
Special: Output position feedback, manual override, field selectable rotational /
spring return direction, field adjustable zero and span.
2.
Electric Valve Actuators:
a.
Rating: NEMA 1 Enclosure
b.
Mounting: Direct mount
c.
Control Input: Continuous 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mADC
d.
Power: Nominal 24 VAC
e.
Protection: Stall protection
f.
Torque: Size for minimum 150% of required duty
g.
Special: Output position feedback, manual override, field selectable direction, field
adjustable zero and span. For spring return provide field selectable spring return
direction.
3.
Pneumatic Valve Actuators
4.
Pneumatic Damper Actuators
5.
Variable
Frequency Drives
6.
Other Devices:
a.
Humidistats
b.
Materials:
c.
Rating:
d.
Mounting: wall
e.
Range: 0-100% RH
f.
Accuracy: +/- 2% RH
g.
Protection:
h.
Output:
i.
Special:
2.8 SPECIALTY ITEMS
A. HVAC Pneumatic Air Supply:
1. General: Assembly shall be a duplex type complete with ASME tank, automatic tank
drain trap, belt guards, gauges, low resistance intake air filter and silencer, safety
valve, and all necessary accessories, including automatic start -stop pressure switch.
Furnish necessary reducing valves to reduce pressure to that required for automatic
control purposes with integral relief valve. Mount compressor on a single air storage
tank or base mounted compressors with a separate tank as shown or as required.
2. Sizing: Compressor shall provide sufficient supply air to the entire control system while
operating no more than 1/3 of the time with a maximum of six starts per hour.
02092
11 /03
FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 21
3. Electrical: Motor shall be SC volt, 3 phase, or 120 volt, single phase provided with
magnetic starter, fusible disconnect and proper overload protection. Provide an
automatic alternator which shall switch the lead compressor after each running cycle. It
shall be capable of bringing on both compressors if one cannot handle the load, and
either shall continue to function on failure of the other.
4. Drier: Refrigerated air drier assembly shall be complete with pressure regulator (single
or dual), filter station, 3 way bypass valve, automatic drain, power -on status light, high
temperature alarm light, and safety pressure relief. Air capacity shall match the total
system requirements. Drier shall have a hot gas bypass control to maintain continuous
operation and constant dew -point control. Outlet dew -point shall be +13 degrees F at
18 PSI main pressure. Filter assembly shall be housed in clear plastic and be of the
replaceable element type. Filter rating shall remove 99 percent of total oil present, 100
percent of solid particle .6 micron or large, 98 percent of solid particles .4 micron or
larger.
PART 3 PERFORMANCE / EXECUTION
3.1 FMS SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
C.
10
FMS Reports: Define custom reports required for this project here. Examples: tenant
billing, chiller efficiency reports, alarm reports, run time summaries.
Graphic Displays:
1. Provide a color graphic system flow diagram display for each system with all points as
indicated on the point list. Provide Historical Data Viewer functionality.
2. Provide a color graphic display for each floor in the facility. Indicate each HVAC zone,
color coded to indicate zone values and status. Provide Historical Data Viewer
functionality.
3. User shall access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical
penetration scheme and/or menu selection.
a. User shall penetrate from floor plan to associated HVAC system graphic.
Data Visualization Displays:
1. Display Requirements:
a. Binary Bar Chart: Provide a single binary bar chart that includes all points as
indicated on the point list.
b. Analog Bar Chart: Provide an individual analog bar chart for each system including
all points as indicated on the point list. Provide Historical Data Viewer functionality.
c. Color Gradient Chart: Provide an individual color gradient chart for each system
indicated on the point list, including all points associated with that system as shown
on the point list.
d. Pattern Display: Provide a set of pattern displays. Each pattern display shall
contain multiple systems and include all points as indicated on the point list.
Provide Historical Data Viewer functionality.
e. Psychometric Chart: Provide a set of psychometric charts, each to contain the
points indicated on the point list. Provide Historical Data Viewer functionality.
f. System Chart: Provide an individual system chart for each system indicated on the
point list, including all points associated with that system as shown on the point list.
Provide Historical Data Viewer functionality.
2. Provide two backup copies of the Data Visualization programming in Microsoft Excel or
approved equal on CD-R.
Operator PC Schedule:
ID
TYPE
LOCATION
FUNCTION
NOTES
PC1
Desktop PC
Engineering Office
In Municipal Building
HVAC
Coordinate
Location
ill
11-1
11
I
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 22
11 /03
r
I
1j,
E. Actuation / Control Type:
1. Primary Equipment:
a. Controls shall be provided by equipment manufacturer as specified herein.
b. All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.
2. Air Handling Equipment:
a. All air handers shall be controlled with DDC controllers
b. All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.
3. Terminal Equipment: Hydronic reheat coils shall have pneumatic actuated valves with
metastat thermostat control.
3.2 INSTALLATION PRACTICES
A. FMS Wiring:
1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of
the Facility Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the FMS
Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 16
Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of
Division 16 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this
section.
2. All FMS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with FMS manufacturer
recommendations.
3. The sizing type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the
design responsibility of the FMS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the
incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the FMS
Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the
selected components.
4. Class 2 Wiring:
a. All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise
specified.
b. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Class
2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5' from the building
structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring shall be
installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in
accordance with local code requirements.
5. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring
120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.
6. Perform circuit tests using qualified personnel only. Provide necessary instruments
and equipment to demonstrate that:
a. All circuits are continuous and free from short circuits and grounds.
b. All circuits are free from unspecified grounds; that resistance to ground of all
circuits is no less than 50 megaohms.
c. All circuits are free from induced voltages.
7. Provide complete testing for all cables used under this Contract. Provide all
equipment, tools, and personnel as necessary to conduct these tests.
8. Provide for complete grounding of all signal and communications cables, panels and
equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit
at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.
B. FMS Line Voltage Power Source:
1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Facility Management System shall be taken from
panelboards and circuit breakers provided by Division 16.
2. Circuits used for the FMS shall be dedicated to the FMS and shall not be used for any
other purposes.
3. DDC terminal unit controllers may use 120-volt AC power from motor power circuits.
C. FMS Raceway:
1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this
specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2".
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 23
11 /03
2. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway
(Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Engineer.
3. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building
lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.
4. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet
in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used
within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.
D. Penetrations:
1. Provide airtight firestopping for all penetrations used by dedicated FMS conduits and
raceways. All other project firestopping to be by other trade.
2. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using
approved fire resistive sealant. This requirement includes penetrations in the ceilings of
lab areas.
3. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls, shall be in conduit or enclosed
raceway.
4. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb,
true, and square.
5. No penetrations in structural elements shall be made before receipt of written approval
from the Engineer.
E. FMS Identification Standards:
1. Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the
outside of the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.
2. Cable shall be labeled at a minimum of every 18" with the FMS System manufacturer's
name and the type of signal carried within the cable, i.e. Analog Input, Analog Output,
Binary Input, Binary Output, 24 VAC.
3. Each of the cable types specified in Item A shall be of a different color coding for easy
identification and troubleshooting. Recommended color coding:
a. Analog Input Cable Yellow
b. Analog Output Cable Tan
c. Binary Input Cable Orange
d. Binary Output Cable Violet
e. 24 VAC Cable Gray
f. General Purpose Cable Natural
g. Tier 1 Comm Cable Purple
h. Other Tier Comm Cable Blue
4. Raceway Identification. All the covers to junction and pull boxes of the FMS raceways
shall be painted with the appropriate color.
5. Wire Identification. All low and line voltage FMS wiring shall be identified by a number,
as referenced to the associated shop drawing and as -built drawing, at each end of the
conductor or cable. Identification number shall be permanently secured to the
conductor or cable and shall be typed.
F. FMS Node Installation:
1. The FMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less
than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall
be anchored per the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. The FMS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other
trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.
G. Input Devices:
1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation
2. Locate components of the FMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.
H. HVAC Input Devices — General:
1, All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation
2. Locate components of the FMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.
3. The mechanical contractor shall install all in -line devices such as temperature wells,
pressure taps, airflow stations, etc.
I
I
, I
i
7
0
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 24
11 /03
4.
Input Flow Measuring Devices shall be installed in strict compliance with ASME
P 9
guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions.
5.
Outside Air Sensors:
a. Sensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact
or located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions
accurately.
a
b. Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover.
6.
Water Differential Pressure Sensors:
a. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the
flow -sensing device.
b. Differential pressure transmitters shall be supplied with tee fittings and shut-off
valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines.
c. The transmitters shall be installed in an accessible location wherever possible.
7.
Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21" w.c.):
a. Air bleed units, bypass valves and compression fittings shall be provided.
8.
Duct Temperature Sensors:
a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct and
be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.
b. The sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly
including lock nut and mounting plate.
c. For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches or where air temperature
stratification exists such as a mixed air plenum, utilize an averaging sensor.
d. The sensor shall be mounted to suitable supports using factory approved element
holders.
9.
Space Sensors:
a. Shall be mounted per ADA requirements.
b. Shall be Johnson Metastat or approved equal.
[ 10.
Low Temperature Limit Switches:
a. Install on the discharge side of the first water PHC coil in the air stream.
b. Mount element horizontally across duct in a serpentine pattern insuring each
square foot of coil is protected by 1 foot of sensor.
c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of
the air stream, provide additional switches as required to provide full protection of
the air stream.
11.
Air Differential Pressure Status Switches: Install with static pressure tips, tubing,
fittings, and air filter.
12.
Water Differential Pressure Status Switches: Install with shut off valves for isolation.
I. HVAC Output Devices:
1.
All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendation. The
mechanical contractor shall install all in -line devices such as control valves, dampers,
etc.
2.
Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum
system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the
entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced with another device, pilot
positioners shall be installed to allow for proper sequencing.
3.
Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow. Parallel
blade dampers shall be installed for two position applications.
Control Valves: Shall be sized for proper flow control with equal percentage valve
L4.
plugs. The maximum pressure drop for water applications shall be 5 PSI. The
maximum pressure drop for steam applications shall be 7 PSI.
5.
Electronic Signal Isolation Transducers: Whenever an analog output signal from the
Facility Management System is to be connected to an external control system as an
input (such as a chiller control panel), or is to receive as an input a signal from a
remote system, provide a signal isolation transducer. Signal isolation transducer shall
provide ground plane isolation between systems. Signals shall provide optical isolation
L
between systems
Q 02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 25
11 /03
J. Air Piping Installation:
1. General Installation Practices:
a. Number -coded tubing shall be used throughout with coding readily identifiable at
points of control and equipment, coding of each line to a controller or equipment
shall be different.
b. Tubing shall be installed so that it can be removed without damage or alterations to
the building structure.
c. Connections to instruments shall be made so that disconnect and removal of each
individual instrument can be made without distortion of tubing.
d. Instrument piping and tubing shall be installed so that there is sufficient space
around the equipment for servicing and adjustment.
e. Branch pneumatic lines from high-pressure air headers shall be valved at the point
of connection to the air header.
f. Air piping shall be installed parallel and perpendicular to building lines.
g. Ensure that no dirt or foreign matter is present in the system.
h. No pneumatic lines shall be concealed under or within duct insulation or acoustic
lining. The use of wire or tape to support air piping will not be permitted.
i. Air tubing in finished areas shall be run concealed.
j. Test metallic air piping at 150 psig air pressure, and nonmetallic air tubing at 40-
psig air pressure, sustained for 4 hours.
2. Plastic Tubing Installation Practices:
a. Concealed, accessible locations. Polyethylene tubing shall be supported on
galvanized steel hangers not more than 4 feet on center. At each support point at
a hanger or trapeze, the tube bundle shall be protected by a 180 degree by 8-inch
long galvanized steel shield.
b. Exposed locations. Polyethylene tubing shall be installed in covered raceways.
c. Conduit or raceway shall not exceed 50 percent fill.
d. Raceway shall be terminated not more than 12 inches from terminal devices and
this last section may be made with nonmetallic tubing run exposed.
e. Nonmetallic tubing, except terminal ends, shall be installed with a minimum
clearance of one foot to any surface, which may exceed 120 Deg. F.
3. Copper Tubing Installation Practices:
a. Copper tubing shall be fastened and rigidly supported at regular intervals to
prevent sagging, using straps, trapezes and pipe hangers as approved.
b. Only tool -made bends in copper tubing will be acceptable.
c. Install valved drip pocket at low points of mains and risers.
3.3 TRAINING
A. The FMS contractor shall provide the following training services:
1. One day of on -site orientation by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of the
specific installation details of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist
of a review of the project as -built drawings, the FMS software layout and naming
conventions, and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations.
2. Factory training for two owner representatives in a factory training lab. This training
shall be performed by a factory -certified professional trainer and, at a minimum, shall
consist of:
a. Two days training covering basic system operation.
b. One day training covering system reporting and alarm management.
c. One day training of scheduling and point trending
3. The owner representatives shall be issued Continuing Education Credits (C.E.U.$) for
the factory training.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
A. Fully commission all aspects of the Facility Management System work.
u
I
I
I
0
I �
11
0
I
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 26
11 /03 0
n_
I
F
I.
F
B. Acceptance Check Sheet:
1. Prepare a check sheet that includes all points for all functions of the FMS
2. Submit the check sheet to the Engineer for approval one month prior to testing.
3. Complete the check sheet for all items and functions of the FMS and initial each entry
with time/date as record of having fully calibrated and tested the FMS. Submit to
Engineer.
4. The Engineer will use the check sheet as the basis for acceptance testing with the FMS
Contractor.
C. All points shall be verified through a point to point commissioning procedure.
D. Provide all necessary specialist labor, materials and tools to demonstrate to the Engineer
that the FMS has been commissioned and is operating in compliance with the contract.
Prepare a list of noted deficiencies signed by both the Engineer and the FMS Contractor.
E. Promptly rectify all listed deficiencies and submit to the Engineer that this has been done.
3.5 SYSTEM TYPES
A. Agency Approvals:
1. FCC Part 15
2. UL 916 Energy Management Equipment
3. CUL 24KM Open Energy Management Equipment
B. Echelon LonWorks Designed Systems: It is the intent of this specification to provide a fully
functional process control system based upon the Echelon open system model for
interoperability. This will ensure the owner maximum utilization. All controllers designed
around Echelon's LonWorks control networking technology shall be LonMark approved
products and shall be so certified by the manufacturer at the time of bid. The purpose of
such certified compliance is to maximize multi -vendor integration. As such, non certified
products will not be accepted.
C. Communication Bus: Each controller shall communicate with the local operating network
utilizing free -topology transceivers over a twisted pair cable. The network may be
configured as a bus, star, or loop arrangement, but cable lengths in excess of 8,850 feet
will not be allowed. Communication cable shall be an unshielded twisted pair — Belden
85102 or equivalent.
D. Controllers: Note that all types may not be required for this project.
1. Flexible System Controller — A stand-alone LonWorks based controller shall be
provided or each built up Air Handling Unit (AHU) and each primary chilled water
system. For the purpose of these specifications, a chilled water system shall consist of
a chiller, air cooled condensor / cooling tower arrangement, and the associated pumps
associated with this system.
Each controller shall be provided complete with all necessary programming and
installed Inputs and Outputs (1/0) to meet the specified sequences of operation, but in
no case shall a controller be provided with less than 10% spare 1/0 capacity. All
physical 1/0 connections shall be made on removable screw down connectors for quick
disconnect and the serviceability of the controller. Controllers shall be provided as self
sufficient units to maximize reliability and shall include an internal hard clock, operating
systems, communication timing and interrupt controls, and shall be suitable for the
specified applications. Network and controller -to -controller communications must
conform to standard LonTalk protocol. No exceptions will be allowed. In addition to
non-physical or internal 1/0 such as runtime or average values, the controller shall
support connected, distributed, or bound 1/0. Where distributed 1/0 is used, the
distributed 1/0 must be under local microprocessor control in order to manage network
communications across the local operating network.
Each controller shall have the minimum capacity to accept at least 60 hard wired 1/0
points. The controller shall be provided with Central Processing Unit (CPU), 110
volt/24 volt AC power supply, Analog Output (AO) / Digital Output (DO) board,
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 27
11 /03
Universal Inputs, Automatic restart procedure on power loss/restoration, an RS-232
communications port to allow connection to any industry standard laptop PC. Program
access via this communication port allows direct field modification of the controller 1/0
in addition to overall control from the central workstation.
This controller shall be provided in a steel enclosure with a mounting backplate, keyed
lock for security, 1" and'/." knockouts shall be provided on all 4 perimeter surfaces for
easy connection of conduit systems, and painted for an acceptable appearance. Each
enclosure shall be labeled to function, system type, and equipment served.
2. Flexible Lighting Controller - Each controller shall be provided complete with all
necessary programming and installed Inputs and Outputs (1/0) to meet the specified
sequences of operation, but in no case shall a controller be provided with less than
10% spare 1/0 capacity. All physical 1/0 connections shall be made on removable
screw down connectors for quick disconnect and the serviceability of the controller.
Controllers shall be provided as self sufficient units to maximize reliability and shall
include an internal hard clock, operating systems, communication timing and interrupt
controls, and shall be suitable for the specified applications. Network and controller -to -
controller communications must conform to standard LonTalk protocol. No exceptions
will be allowed. In addition to non-physical or internal 1/0 such as runtime or average
values, the controller shall support connected, distributed, or bound 1/0. Where
distributed 1/0 is used, the distributed 1/0 must be under local microprocessor control in
order to manage network communications across the local operating network.
Each controller shall have the ability to accept at least 32 momentary lighting
contactors each with hardwired digital input feedback status, 64 maintained light
contactors, 64 analog inputs, or 64 digital inputs. The controller shall be provided with
2 RS-232 communication ports to allow connection of any industry standard laptop PC.
Program access via this communications port allows direct field modification of the
controller 1/0 in addition to overall control from the central workstation.
On board memory shall consist of 4 MB of RAM and 1 MB Flash memory with 10 year
retention between program downloads. Power loss clock retention shall be 3+ years.
All firmware must be downloadable to allow for future enhancements without changing
electronic chips. The processor shall be at least a 32 bit Intel i386EX operating at
25MHz.
The local input and output points shall be populated by a variety of 1/0 cards. This type
of modular architecture shall be supplied to allow the FLC to be expanded via the use
of multiple combinations of 1/0 card types. Systems that use expansion slots that are
dedicated to a specific 1/0 type shall not be acceptable.
1/0 cards shall be available with true universal inputs, digital inputs, maintained and
momentary digital outputs, and true analog outputs.
The FLC shall have a Control Programming Language (CPL) that will allow users
through a workstation to graphically program by way of pull down menus as well as
drag and drop functions. Direct digtial control and lighting control functions shall be
available to each FLC.
3. Package Equipment Controller - Each controller shall be provided complete with all
necessary programming and installed Inputs and Outputs (1/0) to meet the specified
sequences of operation, but in no case shall a controller be provided with less than
10% spare 1/0 capacity. All physical 1/0 connections shall be made on removable
screw down connectors for quick disconnect and the serviceability of the controller.
Controllers shall be provided as self sufficient units to maximize reliability and shall
I
I
I
I
0
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 28
11 /03
include an internal soft clock, operating systems, communication timing and interrupt
controls, and shall be suitable for the specified applications. Network and controller -to -
controller communications must conform to standard LonTalk protocol. No exceptions
will be allowed. In addition to non-physical or internal 1/0 such as runtime or average
values, the controller shall support connected, distributed, or bound 1/0.
Each Controller shall have the minimum capacity of accept at least 12 hard -wired 1/0
points (6-universal inputs, 5 digital outputs, 1-analog output). The controller shall be
provided with a communications port to allow connection of any industry standard
laptop PC. Program access via this communication port will allow direct field
modification of the controller settings in addition to overall control from the central
workstation. This controller is capable of stand-alone and network applications,
automatic restart procedure on power loss/restoration.
E. Dedicated Controllers: Note that all types specified may not be required.
1. Roof Top Unit Controller - Each controller shall be provided complete with all
necessary programming and installed Inputs and Outputs (1/0) to meet the specified
sequences of operation, but in no case shall a controller be provided with less than
10% spare 1/0 capacity. All physical 1/0 connections shall be made on removable
screw down connectors for quick disconnect and the serviceability of the controller.
Fi
Controllers shall be provided as self sufficient units to maximize reliability and shall
include an internal soft clock, operating systems, communication timing and interrupt
controls, and shall be suitable for the specified applications. Network and controller -to -
controller communications must conform to standard LonTalk protocol. No exceptions
will be allowed. In addition to non-physical or internal 1/0 such as runtime or average
values, the controller shall support connected, distributed, or bound 1/0.
Each Controller shall have the minimum capacity of accept at least 12 hard -wired 1/0
points (6-universal inputs, 5 digital outputs, 1-analog output). The controller shall be
provided with a communications port to allow connection of any industry standard
laptop PC. Program access via this communication port will allow direct field
modification of the controller settings in addition to overall control from the central
workstation. This controller is capable of stand-alone and network applications,
f automatic restart procedure on power loss/restoration
2. Heat Pump Controller - Each controller shall be provided complete with all necessary
programming and installed Inputs and Outputs (1/0) to meet the specified sequences of
operation, but in no case shall a controller be provided with less than 10% spare 1/0
capacity. All physical 1/0 connections shall be made on removable screw down
connectors for quick disconnect and the serviceability of the controller. Controllers
shall be provided as self sufficient units to maximize reliability and shall include an
internal soft clock, operating systems, communication timing and interrupt controls, and
shall be suitable for the specified applications. Network and controller -to -controller
communications must conform to standard LonTalk protocol. No exceptions will be
allowed. In addition to non-physical or internal 1/0 such as runtime or average values,
= the controller shall support connected, distributed, or bound 1/0.
Each Controller shall have the minimum capacity of accept at least 12 hard -wired 1/0
points (4-thermistor, 2 dry contact inputs, 5 digital outputs, 1-analog output). The
controller shall be provided with a communications port to allow connection of any
industry standard laptop PC. Program access via this communication port will allow
direct field modification of the controller settings in addition to overall control from the
central workstation. This controller is capable of stand-alone and network applications.
3. Fan Coil Unit Controller - Each controller shall be provided complete with all
I , necessary programming and installed Inputs and Outputs (1/0) to meet the specified
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 29
11 /03
sequences of operation, but in no case shall a controller be provided with less than
10% spare 1/0 capacity. All physical 1/0 connections shall be made on removable
screw down connectors for quick disconnect and the serviceability of the controller.
Controllers shall be provided as self sufficient units to maximize reliability and shall
include an internal soft clock, operating systems, communication timing and interrupt
controls, and shall be suitable for the specified applications. Network and controller -to -
controller communications must conform to standard LonTalk protocol. No exceptions
will be allowed. In addition to non-physical or internal 1/0 such as runtime or average
values, the controller shall support connected, distributed, or bound 1/0.
Each Controller shall have the minimum capacity of accept at least 12 hard -wired 1/0
points (6-universal inputs, 5 digital outputs, 1-analog output). The controller shall be
provided with a communications port to allow connection of any industry standard
laptop PC. Program access via this communication port will allow direct field
modification of the controller settings in addition to overall control from the central
workstation. This controller is capable of stand-alone and network applications,
automatic restart procedure on power loss/restoration.
3.6 HVAC DIGITAL CONTROLLERS
A. Expanded Digital Controller (DX-9100):
1. Each DX-9100 shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its
specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each
DX-9100 shall be a microprocessor -based, multi -tasking, real-time digital control
processor.
2. DX-9100 controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of
systems to address current requirements described in the "Execution" portion of this
Specification, and to address future expansion.
a. Single boiler or chiller plants with pump logic.
b. Cooling towers.
c. Zone pressurization of labs.
d. Generic system interlocking through hardware.
3. Point types — Each DX-9100 shall support the following types of point inputs and
outputs:
a. Analog inputs shall monitor the following analog signals:
(1) 4-20 mA Sensors
(2) 0-10 VDC Sensors
(3) 1000ohm RTDs
b. Binary inputs shall monitor dry contact closures. Input shall provide filtering to
eliminate false signals resulting from input "bouncing."
c. Counter inputs shall monitor dry contact pulses with an input resolution of one HZ
minimum.
d. Analog outputs shall provide the following control outputs:
(1) 4.20 mA — Sink or Source
(2) 0-10 VDC
e. Binary outputs shall provide SPDT output contacts rated for 2 amps at 24 VAC.
Surge and noise suppression shall be provided on all pilot relays. Inductive loads
(i.e. solenoids) shall be controlled by pilot relays.
f. TriState outputs shall be paired binary outputs for use as Power Close/Power Open
control output contacts rated for 2 amps at 24 VAC. Surge and noise suppression
shall be provided on all pilot relays.
g. Pneumatic outputs shall provide a 3-15 PSI pneumatic output. Gradual override
capability and output pressure gauge shall be provided.
4. Manual Overrides:
a. Manual override switches shall be provided for all binary outputs that do not have a
MCC Hand/Off/Auto switch.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
In
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 30
11 /03
U
b. Switches shall be mounted within the system controller key -accessed enclosure, or
the adjacent local control panel
c. Switches for analog outputs shall be rotary gradual position, providing the full
analog signal range of the associated analog output, and shall be operable whether
the panel processor is operational or not.
5.
DX-9100 controllers shall have a built-in status, and adjust panel interface to allow for
the local adjustment of all setpoints, temporary override of any input or output points,
and status of any points in alarm.
6.
Powerfail Protection — All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and
j
any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any
U
duration does not necessitate reprogramming the DX-9100.
7.
The capability to extend the input and output capacity of the DX-9100 via Point
Expansion Modules shall be provided.
a. The Point Expansion Modules shall communicate to the DX-9100 controller over a
local RS-485 expansion bus.
b. The Point Expansion Modules shall have available a range of configurations of 4,
8, 12, or 16 data points:
(1) Analog Inputs — 0-10V, 4-20mA, 1000 ohm RTD
(2) Analog Outputs — 0-10V, 4-20mA
(3) Digital Inputs w/ digital counter
a
(4) Digital Outputs — triacs or relay contacts
c. Expansion module data points shall be available for inclusion in all DX-9100 control
strategies.
B. Unitary
C
Controllers (UNT):
1.
Each Unitary Controller shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing
its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network.
Each Unitary Controller shall be a microprocessor -based, multi -tasking, real-time digital
control processor.
2.
Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following types of systems to
address specific applications described in the "Execution" portion of this Specification,
and to address future expansion:
a. Unit Vents (ASHRAE Cycle, I, ll, III, or W).
b. Heat Pumps (Air -to -Air, Water -to -Air).
c. Packaged Rooftops.
d. Fan Coils (Two -Pipe, Four -Pipe).
3.
Point types — Each Unitary Controller shall support the following types of point inputs
and outputs:
a. Analog inputs shall monitor the following analog signals:
(1) 0-10 VDC Sensors
(2) 1000 ohm RTDs
b. Binary inputs shall monitor dry contact closures. Input shall provide filtering to
eliminate false signals resulting from input "bouncing."
c. Counter inputs shall monitor dry contact pulses with an input resolution of one HZ
minimum.
d. Analog outputs shall provide the following control outputs:
(1) 0-10 VDC
e. Binary outputs shall provide SPDT output contacts rated for 2 amps at 24 VAC.
Surge and noise suppression shall be provided on all pilot relays. Inductive loads
(i.e. solenoids) shall be controlled by pilot relays.
f. TriState outputs shall be paired binary outputs for use as Power Close/Power Open
control output contacts rated for 2 amps at 24 VAC. Surge and noise suppression
shall be provided on all pilot relays.
g. Pneumatic outputs shall provide a 3-15 PSI pneumatic output. Gradual override
capability and output pressure gauge shall be provided.
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 31
11 /03
I
4. Manual Overrides:
a. Manual override switches shall be provided for all binary outputs that do not have a
MCC Hand/Off/Auto switch.
b. Switches shall be mounted within the system controller key -accessed enclosure, or
the adjacent local control panel
c. Switches for analog outputs shall be rotary gradual position, providing the full
analog signal range of the associated analog output, and shall be operable whether
the panel processor is operational or not.
5. Unitary Controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform
the sequence of operations specified in the "Execution" portion of this Specification.
6. Unitary Controllers shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service
terminal that can be connected to the UNT via zone temperature or directly at the
controller.
7. Powerfail Protection — All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and
any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any
duration does not necessitate reprogramming the LINT.
C. VAV Terminal Unit Controller (VMA):
1. The VMA shall provide both standalone and networked direct digital control of
pressure -independent, variable air volume terminal units.
2. The VMA shall be a configurable digital controller with integral differential pressure
transducer and damper actuator. All components shall be connected and mounted as a
single assembly that can be removed as one piece.
3. The integral damper actuator shall be a fast response stepper motor capable of
stroking 90 degrees in 30 seconds for quick damper positioning to speed
commissioning and troubleshooting tasks.
4. The VMA shall determine airflow by dynamic pressure measurement using an integral
dead -ended differential pressure transducer. The transducer shall be maintenance -free
and shall not require air filters.
5. Each VMA shall have the ability to automatically calibrate the flow sensor to eliminate
pressure transducer offset error due to ambient temperature / humidity effects.
6. The VMA shall utilize a proportional plus integration (PI) algorithm for the space
temperature control loops.
7. Each VMA shall continuously, adaptively tune the control algorithms to improve control
and controller reliability through reduced actuator duty cycle. In addition, this tuning
reduces commissioning costs, and eliminates the maintenance costs of manually re-
tuning loops to compensate for seasonal or other load changes.
8. The VMA shall provide the ability to download and upload VMA configuration files, both
locally and via the communications network. Controllers shall be able to be loaded
individually or as a group using a zone schedule generated spreadsheet of controller
parameters.
9. VMA control setpoint changes initiated over the network shall be written to VMA non-
volatile memory to prevent loss of setpoint changes and to provide consistent operation
in the event of communication failure.
10. The VMA firmware shall be flash-upgradeable remotely via the communications bus to
minimize costs of feature enhancements.
11. The VMA shall provide fail -soft operation if the airflow signal becomes unreliable, by
automatically reverting to a pressure -dependent control mode.
12. The VMA shall interface with balancer tools that allow automatic recalculation of box
flow pickup gain ("W factor), and the ability to directly command the airflow control loop
to the box minimum and maximum airflow setpoints.
13. The VMA shall be capable of direct electronic connection to the Alnor DB150
Balometer balancing hood. Connection shall be through a port located on the room
sensor, or directly at the controller. As an alternative, software balancing tools shall be
provided that will run in a hand-held Palm Pilot type PC (such as the 3COM Palm Pilot
or IBM Workpad). The balancing tools shall allow adjustment of airflow setpoints and
I
I
I
I
I
q
I �
I
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 32
11 /03
11
parameters, and provide permanent upload of the values entered to the VMA. The
}
Palm Pilot shall connect to the terminal unit through the room sensor port.
i
14. The VMA performance shall be self -documenting via on -board diagnostics. These
L�
diagnostics shall consist of control loop performance measurements executing at each
control loop's sample interval, which may be used to continuously monitor and
document system performance. The VMA shall calculate exponentially weighted
moving averages (EWMA) for each of the following. These metrics shall be available to
the end user for efficient management of the VAV terminals.
a. Absolute temperature loop error.
b. Signed temperature loop error.
c. Absolute airflow loop error.
d. Signed airflow loop error.
e. Average damper actuator duty cycle.
15. The VMA shall detect system error conditions to assist in managing the VAV zones.
The error conditions shall consist of.
a. Unreliable space temperature sensor.
b. Unreliable differential pressure sensor.
c. Starved box.
d. Insufficient cooling.
e. Insufficient heating.
8
16. The VMA shall provide a compliant interface for ASHRAE Standard 62-1989 (indoor air
quality), and shall be capable of resetting the box minimum airflow based on the
percent of outdoor air in the primary air stream.
17. The VMA shall comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (energy efficiency) by preventing
simultaneous heating and cooling, and where the control strategy requires reset of
airflow while in reheat, by modulating the box reheat device fully open prior to
increasing the airflow in the heating sequence.
18. The VMA shall be compatible with the U.S. EPA Energy Star Buildings
recommendations for fan energy reduction via demand -based static pressure reset
down to 2/3 of duct static pressure set point, "VSD 2/3 Reset."
19. Inputs:
a. Analog inputs shall monitor the following analog signals, without the addition of
equipment outside the terminal controller cabinet:
(1) 0-10 VDC Sensors
(2) 1000ohm RTDs
(3) NTC Thermistors
b. Binary inputs shall monitor dry contact closures. Input shall provide filtering to
eliminate false signals resulting from input "bouncing."
c. For noise immunity, the inputs shall be internally isolated from power,
communications, and output circuits.
20. Outputs:
a. Analog outputs shall provide the following control outputs:
(1) 0-10 VDC
b. Binary outputs shall provide a SPST Triac output rated for 500mA at 24 VAC.
c. For noise immunity, the outputs shall be internally isolated from power,
communications, and other output circuits.
D. AHU Controllers:
1. AHU Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the following configurations of
systems to address current requirements as described in the point charts of this
specification, and for future expansion:
a. - Large Air Handling Units
b. - Mixed Air -Single Path
c. - Mixed Air -Dual Path
d. -100% Single Path
e. -100% Dual Path
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 33
11 /03
2. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the
specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion.
3. AHU controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the
sequence of operation as required.
4. Occupancy -Based Standby/Comfort Mode Control: Each AHU Controller shall have a
provision for occupancy sensing overrides. Based upon the contact status of either a
manual wall switch or an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall
automatically select either Standby or Comfort mode to minimize the heating and
cooling requirements while satisfying comfort conditions.
5. Alarm Management: Each AHU Controller shall perform its own limit and status
monitoring and analysis to maximize network performance by reducing unnecessary
communications.
E. HVAC Application Specific Controller Configuration: The Application Specific Controllers
shall be configured using an intuitive, easy -to -use configuration tool. Standard, pre -tested,
HVAC applications will be "built-in" the tool. It is the intent that a non -programmer, fluent
with HVAC systems, and not necessarily with computer programming, be capable of using
the configuration tool with minimal training. The tool will utilize a question and answer
format to aid the user in configuration. The tool will automatically query the user for
desired operational characteristics, along with desired fail-safe and fault condition
configurations, in order to assure proper HVAC system operation and protection
3.7 VAV CONTROLLERS
A. VAV Controller shall be a configurable digital controller with the pressure sensor and
actuator as a modular unit. The actuator shall utilize stepper motor technology for rapid
response and shall have a maximum end to end travel time of 30 seconds.
B. The controller shall utilize an automated commissioning algorithm. The controller shall
automatically set damper end stops and all tuning parameters without operator intervention.
Once operating, the controller shall provide continuous loop tuning. Controllers that require
operator initiated tuning cycles are not acceptable.
C. The controller shall provide alarms to the operator workstation based on a stalled damper
motor, starved box (box is unable to provide sufficient cooling to space even though it is
fully open), actuator runtime and a VAV flow test.
D. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories: The VMA Controllers shall have the capability to
automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associated zone temperature to
allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipment performance for the past 24
hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall be stored.
E. To assist in balancing the system the controls contractor shall furnish one Alnor DB-150
Electronic Balometer. The unit shall allow the balancing contractor to change damper
setpoints to verify room air flow, cycle box fans, and adjust box maximum and minum air
flows. All adjustments shall be uploaded to the operator workstation for a permanent
record.
3.8 LIGHTING CONTROLLERS - GENERAL
A. Each Standalone DDC Controller shall be able to extend its performance and capacity
through the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) dedicated to controlling
lighting. Lighting Control ASCs shall provide standalone remote control of building lighting
circuits, including weekly and holiday time programming, local overrides, and local status
indication.
3.9 FUNCTIONS
A. Each Lighting Control ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing
its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each
il�
11
ill
Ili
I
LIB
III
I
I
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 34
11 /03
Lighting Control ASC shall be a microprocessor -based, multi -tasking, real-time digital
control processor.
B. Each Lighting Control ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating
system and databases, including:
1. -Weekly Scheduling
2. - Energy Management Applications
3. - Local Overrides
3.10 DEVICES
A. Occupancy -Based Lighting Control: Each lighting circuit shall have an associated binary
override input for monitoring motion detectors, wall switches, photocells, or similar devices.
Based upon the contact status of an occupancy sensing device, the AHU Controller shall
automatically override normal scheduled control to reduce electricity consumption, while
satisfying occupant lighting requirements.
B. The operator interface to any Lighting Control ASC point data or programs shall be through
any network resident PC workstation, or any PC or portable operator's terminal connected
any DDC panel in the network.
3.11 SEQUENCES
A. All sequences will be monitored and/or controlled from the Facility Management System
workstation. It is the intent that all temperatures, pressures, statuses, and alarm conditions
connect to the Facility Management System. Refer to Section 15900, TEMPERATURE
REGULATION/BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM for sequence of control.
EMD OF SECTION
02092 FACILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 15905 - 35
11 /03
� � � t� 0 ,� ® � � � � d � 0 � C] � C� �
SECTION 15907
LAB AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. A laboratory airflow control system shall be furnished and installed to control the airflow into
and out of laboratory rooms. The exhaust flow rate of a laboratory fume hoods shall be
precisely controlled to maintain a constant average face velocity into the fume hood at a
standard/in-use level. The laboratory control system shall control constant the amount of
make-up/supply air into the room to achieve minimum ventilation rates, and maintain
laboratory pressurization in relation to adjacent spaces (negative).
a1.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Two lab airflow control systems are acceptable: Phoenix Controls and Tek-Air Systems,
i Inc. This section describes the Phoenix System. Contact for Phoenix in Lubbock is Roger
I Thornley, Tech Sales, (806) 785-2231.
1.3 WARRANTY PERIOD
A. Warranty shall commence upon the date of shipment and extend for a period of thirty-six
months whereupon any defects in materials or laboratory airflow control system
performance shall be repaired by the supplier at no cost to the owner.
PART 2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1 AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Manual Valves: No actuation.
B. Constant Volume Hoods
C. Constant Volume Exhaust
D. Constant Supply with Reheat
2.2 AIRFLOW CONTROL SOUND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Unless otherwise specified the airflow control device shall not exceed the sound power
levels in Table 1, Table 2 and Table 3.
B. If the airflow control device cannot meet the sound power level specification, a properly
sized silencer or sound attenuator must be used. All silencers must be of a packless design
(constructed of at least 18 gauge 316L stainless steel when used with fume hood exhaust)
with a maximum pressure drop at the device's maximum rated flow rate not to exceed 0.20
inches of water.
C. All proposed airflow control devices shall include discharge, exhaust and radiated sound
LS power level performance.
02092 LAB AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM 15907 - 1
11 /03
Table 1. Exhaust Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level
Exhaust Sound Power Level in dB (re: 10- watts)
Octave Band Number
2
3
4
5
6
7
Center Frequency in Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz
1000-50 cfm Device
800 cfm @ 0.6" we
63
55
52
54
50
49
200 cfm @ 0.6" we
46
42
38
37
32
25
800 cfm @ 3.0" we
73
70
64
66
65
60
200 cfm @ 3.0" we
51
52
51
50
52
51
1500-100 cfm Device
1200 cfm @ 0.6" we
65
58
53
56
52
52
400 cfm @ 0.6" we
50
45
38
39
37
31
1200 cfm @ 3.0" we
72
70
62
65
64
60
400 cfm @ 3.0" we
55
57
55
53
56
55
3000-200 cfm Device
2400 cfm @ 0.6" we
63
56
55
58
54
55
800 cfm @ 0.6" we
51
45
41
42
39
34
2400 cfm @ 3.0" we
75
71
65
68
67
63
800 cfm @ 3.0" we
1 58
58
56
56
59
58
Table 2. Supply Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level (Discharge)
Discharge Sound Power Level in dB (re: 10 watts)
Octave Band Number
2
3
4
5
6
7
Center Frequency in Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz
1000-50 cfm Device
800 cfm @ 0.6" we
62
57
54
58
54
51
200 cfm @ 0.6" we
45
46
42
44
40
34
800 cfm @ 3.W we
72
71
67
75
72
68
200 cfm @ 3.0" we
53
56
54
58
56
54
1500-100 cfm Device
1200 cfm @ 0.6" we
63
59
55
60
54
53
400 cfm @ 0.6" we
53
49
44
49
45
39
1200 cfm @ 3.0" we
72
73
69
77
72
68
400 cfm @ 3.0" we
58
63
61
63
60
57
3000-200 cfm Device
2400 cfm @ 0.6" we
64
60
58
63
56
56
800 cfm @ 0.6" we
52
48
47
52
46
41
2400 cfm @ 3.0" we
75
75
72
78
73
70
800 cfm @ 3.0" we
59
62
62
66
62
60
02092 LAB AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM 15907 - 2 11/03 U
Table 3. Supply Airflow Control Device Sound Power Level (Radiated)
Radiated Sound Power Level in dB (re: 10" watts)
Octave Band Number
2
3
4
5
6
7
Center Frequency in Hz
125 Hz
250 Hz
500 Hz
1000 Hz
2000 Hz
4000 Hz
1000-50 cfm Device
800 cfm @ 0.6" we
44
41
45
41
36
34
200 cfm @ 0.6" we
33
28
31
29
26
20
800 cfm @ 3.0" we
53
53
56
57
55
53
200 cfm @ 3.0" we
41
38
41
39
39
37
1500-100 cfm Device
1200 cfm @ 0.6" we
47
53
40
42
38
36
400 cfm @ 0.6" we
35
39
31
34
33
26
1200 cfm @ 3.0" we
52
60
54
60
59
53
400 cfm @ 3.0" we
42
44
43
46
46
42
3000-200 cfm Device
2400 cfm @ 0.6" we
58
56
45
47
43
42
800 cfm @ 0.6" we
45
43
36
39
37
29
2400 cfm @ 3.0" we
69
68
60
65
63
57
800 cfm @ 3.0" we
54
53
48
51
50
48
PART 3 MATERIALS
3.1 AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICE - GENERAL
A. The airflow control device shall be a venturi valve. Refer to the drawings for air valve
schedule.
B. The airflow control device shall be pressure independent over its specified differential static
pressure operating range. An integral pressure independent assembly shall respond and
maintain specific airflow within one second of a change in duct static pressure irrespective
of the magnitude of pressure and/or flow change or quantity of airflow controllers on a
manifolded system.
C. The airflow control device shall maintain accuracy within t 5% of signal over an airflow
turndown range of no less than 16 to 1. No minimum entrance or exit duct diameters shall
( be required to ensure accuracy and/or pressure independence.
D. The airflow control device shall be constructed of one of the following three types:
1. Class A - The airflow control device for non -corrosive airstreams such as supply (SV)
and general exhaust (EV) shall be constructed of 16 gauge aluminum. The device's
shaft and shaft support brackets shall be made of 316 stainless steel. The pivot arm
and internal mounting link shall be made of aluminum. The pressure independent
springs shall be a spring grade stainless steel. All shaft -bearing surfaces shall be made
of a Teflon or Celenex composite.
Sound attenuating devices used in conjunction with general exhaust or supply airflow
control devices shall be constructed using 24 gauge galvanized steel or other suitable
material used in standard duct construction. No sound absorptive materials of any kind
shall be used.
2. Class B - The airflow control device for corrosive airstreams such as fume hoods and
biosafety cabinets (HV) shall have a baked on corrosion resistant phenolic coating. The
device's shaft shall be made of 316 stainless steel with a baked -on corrosion resistant
02092 LAB AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM 15907 - 3
11 /03
phenolic coating. The shaft support brackets shall be made of 316 stainless steel. The
pivot arm and internal mounting link shall be made of 316 or 303 stainless steel. The
pressure independent springs shall be a spring grade stainless steel. The internal nuts,
bolts and rivets shall be stainless steel. All shaft -bearing surfaces shall be made of a
Teflon or Celenex composite.
3. Class C - The airflow control device for highly corrosive airstreams shall be constructed
as defined in paragraph D.2 and in addition, shall have no exposed aluminum or
stainless steel components. Shaft support brackets, pivot arm, internal mounting link,
and pressure independent springs shall have a baked -on corrosion resistant phenolic
coating in addition to the materials defined in paragraph D.2. The internal nuts, bolts,
and rivets shall be titanium or phenolic coated stainless steel. Only devices clearly
defined as "High Corrosion Resistant' on project drawings will require this construction.
E. Certification:
1. Each airflow control device shall be factory calibrated to the job specific airflows as
detailed on the plans and specifications using NIST traceable air stations and
instrumentation having a combined accuracy of at least t 1% of signal over the entire
range of measurement. Electronic airflow control devices shall be further calibrated and
their accuracy verified to t 5% of signal at a minimum of eight different airflows across
the full operating range of the device.
2. All airflow control devices shall be individually marked with device specific, factory
calibration data. As a minimum, it should include: tag number, serial number, model
number, eight -point characterization information (for electronic devices), and quality
control inspection numbers. All information shall be stored by the manufacturer for use
with as -built documentation. Bar coding of all devices shall be utilized.
3.2 CONSTANT VOLUME AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICE
A. The airflow control device shall maintain a constant airflow setpoint. It shall be factory
calibrated and set for the desired airflow. It shall also be capable of field adjustment for
future changes in desired airflow.
3.3 CLOSED LOOP VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
A. Refer to Section 15744, VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES.
PART 4 EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
A. The mechanical contractor shall install all airflow control devices in the ductwork.
B. The mechanical contractor shall provide and install all reheat coils and transitions.
C. The mechanical contractor shall provide and install insulation as required.
4.2 SYSTEM START-UP AND TRAINING
A. System startup shall be provided by a factory -authorized representative of the laboratory
airflow control system manufacturer.
B. The TAB contractor under the commissioning agent shall be responsible for final
verification and reporting of all airflows. The LACS supplier shall assist on -site during the
final verification phase.
C. The laboratory airflow control system supplier shall furnish a minimum of eight hours of
owner training, by factory trained and certified personnel. Note that all training shall be
videotaped in VHS format. In addition, all training videos showing system features available
from the LACS shall be furnished to the Owner. The training will provide an overview of the
11
0
�i
I
I
0
in
02092 LAB AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM 15907 - 4
11 /03
U
job specific airflow control components, general procedures for verifying airflows of air
valves, and general troubleshooting procedures.
D. Operation and Maintenance manuals, including as -built wiring diagrams and component
lists shall be provided for each training attendee.
4.3 APPLICATION SEQUENCES
A. Application Sequences for Phoenix controls are included on the following pages.
.1
APPLICATION: CONSTANT VOLUME LABORATORIES
Introduction
l
Phoenix Controls venturi air valves shall be used to maintain a net negative or
positive pressure relationship between critical use rooms and an adjacent corridor
r, or room.
`-' In this application, a constant volume valve (CW) with actuator is used to maintain
a constant supply volume into the zone as the static pressure in the supply duct
system fluctuates. The zone's thermal load is assumed to be low enough that the
{ supply air volume, having been sized to satisfy the ventilation rate (calculated from
air changes per hour), also maintains space temperature. The constant volume
airflow is shown on the drawings.
The general exhaust volume leaving the zone is also controlled with a constant
volume valve with actuator. This valve maintains a constant exhaust volume out of
the zone as the static pressure in the exhaust duct system fluctuates. The general
exhaust (Gex) volume is sized so that, in conjunction with the zone's supply air
volume, the desired net negative or positive room offset volume is provided. By
having a pressure independent valve on both the supply, general exhaust sources,
Land lab hoods, zone pressurization control is maintained.
Independently, the zone thermostat controls the reheat coil to provide zone
j temperature control.
Seauence of Operation
As the supply system static pressure fluctuates, the constant volume supply valve's
pressure independent cone/spring assembly shall modulate to maintain a fixed
volume of supply into the zone within one second. As the exhaust system static
pressure fluctuates, the constant volume general exhaust valve's pressure
independent cone/spring assembly shall also modulate to maintain a fixed exhaust
volume out of the zone within one second.
Negative room offset volume is desired. The CW supply valve shall be factory
pre-set to a volume less than that of the CW general exhaust valve, also factory
pre-set. The offset CFM quantities are shown on the drawings. This shall result in a
room -offset volume that enters the zone from the corridor or adjacent spaces,
thereby providing pressurization control of the zone.
Independently, the zone thermostat shall control the reheat coil.
1,
r.
02092 LAB AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM 15907 - 5
11 /03
n
Fail-safe Condition
The exhaust valves shall fail open. The supply valves shall fail closed.
APPLICATION: PRODUCT INTEGRATION — NONE REQUIRED
END OF SECTION
a
11
a
A
A
Mil
11
I
a
j
02092 LAB AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM 15907 - 6 11/03 U
F
L
SECTION 15910
ROOM PRESSURE CONTROL MONITOR
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. A room pressure control system shall be furnished and installed to monitor and alarm the
measured room pressure. Control of the room pressure is specified in Sections 15907 -
LAB AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEM.
B. The system shall include a room pressure controller, a pressure sensor, a low voltage
control transformer, and low voltage control wiring. The entire system, including the
monitor, and all wiring, shall be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor.
C. All components of the room pressure controller shall be part of a completely designed,
tested, cataloged, and factory coordinated package by a single manufacturer, for single
point responsibility. Specifications and drawings are based on TSI Incorporated Model
8630-SC PRESSURA room Pressure Sensor. Field designed systems are not acceptable.
D. The system shall continuously measure, display, and alarm the room pressure to meet the
requirements of Section 15900 - TEMPERATURE REGULATION/BUILDING
AUTOMATION SYSTEM. Room pressure systems that infer room pressure through CFM
offset measurement are not acceptable. Note that this device is for pressure alarming, and
NOT for control.
E. The system shall continuously measure, and display the room pressure to comply with the
requirement set forth in NFPA 45, Section 6-4.2.
F. Manufacturer shall have successful customer installations of laboratory pressure
measurement systems in operation for more than three years.
G. The room pressure control system shall have a two-year limited warranty for all parts. The
warranty shall commence on the date of shipment from the manufacturer.
H. Provide systems as detailed below, with 4-20mA outputs for each system.
I. Provide room pressure sensors in each wet lab as shown on the drawings. Install the
pressure sensors on the corridor wall, measuring the pressure difference between the
referenced space and the adjacent corridor. There are a total of 24 sensors required under
base bid, and four under Alternate No. 5.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials as required by SUBMITTALS section.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE SENSOR
A. The pressure sensor shall consist of two velocity sensing elements mounted in -line with
each other and a temperature compensating element as described in U.S. Patent
#4,787,251. The velocity sensing elements shall be ceramic coated platinum RTD for
corrosion resistance and easy cleaning. Constant temperature thermal anemometry shall
be used to make the air velocity measurement. Pressure transducers are not acceptable.
B. The pressure sensor shall be temperature compensated over a range of 55 deg. F to 95
deg. F.
C. The pressure sensor assembly shall consist of a molded plastic sensor, PVC tubing, an
intumescent ring, and a matching sensor housing. The pressure sensor is mounted on one
side of the wall, the matching sensor housing on the other side of the wall, with the PVC
tubing penetrating the wall.
02092 ROOM PRESSURE CONTROL MONITOR 15910 - 1
11 /03
D. The pressure sensor assembly shall be ANSI / UL 1479 listed for "Fire Tests of Through -
Penetration Firestops". The unit shall have a two-hour fire rating.
E. The pressure sensor shall accurately measure room pressure from-0.20000 to +0.20000
inches H2O. The sensor shall be capable of measuring and displaying pressure down to
0.00015 inches H2O. The sensor shall be bi-directional to determine the proper direction of
pressure. Uni-directional sensors are not acceptable.
F. The pressure sensor shall be capable of being mounted on either side of the wall (i.e. in the
controlled space or in the reference space). A dip switch shall be provided to select which
side of the wall the pressure sensor is mounted.
G. A 25-foot, 6-conductor, 22 AWG cable shall be provided for the wiring connection between
the sensor and the pressure monitor.
2.2 ROOM PRESSURE ALARM
A. The room pressure controller shall measure, and alarm room pressure. It shall provide
access to menu driven programming options via a keypad. The keypad shall be a smooth
spill -proof membrane switch.
B. The case should be an aesthetically pleasing molded case manufactured with industrial
grade plastic. Case should mount to a double gang electrical box (4" wide x 4" tall x 2.5"
deep). The room pressure controller shall be capable of being mounted where convenient
for the user (within 250 feet of pressure sensor).
C. The controller must have a sliding outer cover that gives an aesthetic appearance while
protecting the display and membrane switch. The cover provides the capability of
concealing the display while still having the safe (green light) an alarm (red light) visible.
D. There shall be a two-line alphanumeric digital display indicating the measured room
pressure in inches of H2O. The display shall have a range of-0.20000 to +0.20000 with a
resolution of 5% of reading and shall be updated every one half second.
E. An analog pressure output that via a keypad allows the user to select either a 0-10 VDC or
4-20 mA linear analog output. In addition the output pressure range shall be selectable,
either -0.1 to +0.1 inches H2O or -0.01 to +0.01 inches H2O.
F. Monitor wiring shall be to a terminal strip, which plugs into the back of the monitor.
2.3 TRANSFORMER
A. The transformer shall have a primary -side voltage of 120 VAC and a secondary -side
voltage of 24 VAC. The transformer shall have a rating of 20 VA with a 0.5 amps
maximum.
B. The transformer shall be UL and CSA listed.
C. A 25-foot, 2-conductor, 22 AWG cable shall be provided as the electrical interface between
the transformer and the pressure monitor.
2.4 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. The room pressure sensor shall measure the air velocity between the controlled space and
the referenced space. The measurement shall be made using a thermal anemometer with
two velocity sensing elements mounted in -line. The measured velocity between the
controlled space and reference space is then converted to the pressure differential.
B. The pressure differential shall be transmitted to the controller. The display shall indicate
the measured pressure differential. The controller shall also compare the measured room
pressure to the programmed set point. The controller shall then send a 4-20 mA signal to
the Temperature Control system for monitoring and alarm.
C. Calibration:
1. The room pressure controller shall be factory calibrated. No initial field calibration shall
be needed.
0
I
0
D_
I
0
I
0
0
02092 ROOM PRESSURE CONTROL MONITOR 15910 - 2
11 /03
F4
G'
0
E
C
P
r
2. Field calibration shall be available for future use. It shall be done electronically through
the use of the controller keypad on the front panel. Calibration through the use of
potentiometers is not acceptable.
3. Calibration shall consist of calibrating both the sensor zero and sensor span.
D. Configuration:
1. All programming shall be done through the keypad on the controller, or through RS485
communications.
2. The room pressure controller shall have user selectable negative and positive pressure
control set points.
3. The room pressure controller shall have a user selectable flow control set point.
4. The room pressure controller shall have an adjustable display filtering capability.
5. Each menu shall be protected from unauthorized personnel through the use of a
passcode.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The room pressure controller shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
B. The Temperature Control Contractor shall install the pressure sensor and the room
pressure controller in each room.
C. All wiring shall be done by the TC Contractor as specified by the manufacturer.
3.2 EQUIPMENT START-UP, CALIBRATION, AND TRAINING
A. Start-up shall be performed by the manufacturer or a factory authorized representative.
B. Start-up shall include verifying the control of each specified room. Ceilings and doors shall
be installed and the HVAC systems (exhaust and supply fans) shall be properly air
balanced before start-up shall occur.
C. The manufacturer shall include a thermal anemometer based air velocity meter with the
room pressure control system. Specifications are based on TSI, Incorporated Model 8383
Digital Air Velocity Meter. This equipment shall be given to permanent building personnel
who shall be responsible for periodically maintaining and verifying proper pressure in each
specified room.
D. The manufacturer, or authorized factory representative, shall provide 4 hours of training for
building personnel. Note that all training shall be videotaped.
END OF SECTION
02092 ROOM PRESSURE CONTROL MONITOR
11 /03
15910-3
SECTION 15920
COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to describe the commissioning process specific to the
environmental control and energy management systems and equipment. Note that point-
to-point commissioning of all control functions and complete documentation is the
responsibility of the temperature control contractor, and shall be included in his bid.
L:
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Note that the City of Lubbock is entering into an independent contract with a commissioning
agent (CA) for this project. It is the responsibility of the CA, his Test Engineer, and his TAB
subcontractor to commission the building, with the exception of the temperature control
system. The temperature control contractor shall perform point-to-point verification, testing,
and commissioning for the control system. Work with the CA to develop documentation of
the commissioning effort, and submit all documentation of the controls commissioning that
the CA requires.
B. Reference Section 15995 for contractor requirements in support of the commissioning
process. Refer to Division 15 specifications and plans and contractor shop drawings for
system configuration and details of required construction.
C. Reference Section 15042 for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) requirements. TAB
shall be substantially complete before performing FPTs required in this section.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION
A. Retain design documents for overall design intent and the overall required systems
configuration.
B. Retain shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required construction
details, and they support and further define the systems features.
C. The temperature control contractor (TCC) shall make general inspections at the job site
and shall review the following for configuration, quality of construction, adherence to design
requirements, and conformance with shop drawings and submittal information.
D. Review Owner specific data:
1. Set points
2. Alarm points
3. Sequence of operation
E. Prepare list of concerns for resolution or special investigation during commissioning
process (i.e. pressure and temperature locations, valve piping, damper performance, etc.).
F. Check quantity types and locations of hardware:
1. Sensors
02092 COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15920 - 1
11 /03
2. Pressure and temperature taps
3. Field device panels
4. Direct digital control (DDC) panels
5. Dedicated DDC controllers
6. Controlled devices
G. Check quality of installation:
1. Hardware mounting
2. Cabling and/or tubing routing
3. Terminations
4. Conformance with vendor shop drawings.
5. Accessibility after lights and ceiling grid are installed, consistent with OSHA and
WISHA regulations concerning fall restraints.
3.2 CLEANING
A. None.
3.3 TESTS
0
I
U1
i 17
A. A test plan shall be developed individually for each subsystem which will define the tests
required to ensure that the system, functions, and programs meet technical, operational,
and performance requirements. The test plan shall define the schedule for the test
exercises, including initial tests, calibration tests, testing of control sequence, and
simulation programs. The test plan shall identify the equipment and facilities required for
the test. Coordinate the test plan with the CA.
B. Prior to substantial completion of the environmental control system, the system shall
undergo a series of tests to verify its operation and compliance with this specification.
y
These tests shall occur after the Contractor has completed the installation, started up the
U
system, performed their own complete series of tests and debugged the system.
C. The tests described in this section are to be performed in addition to the tests that the
Contractor performs as a necessary part of the installation, start-up, and debugging
process. As a minimum, the TCC shall perform their own set of tests prior to the those
required herein so as to assure the Test Engineer, A/E and Commissioning Agent that the
system can successfully complete the tests required herein prior to their execution. Failure
of the TCC to perform their own set of tests first may be cause for rescheduling the tests
herein and delay of project substantial completion.
D. System Calibration: Upon completion of the installation, the system installer shall start up
the system and perform all necessary testing and diagnostics to ensure proper operation.
Submit to the Test Engineer documentation on the calibration of all equipment, including
each sensor or control device. Documentation shall include:
1. Step-by-step check -off list of the calibration of each sensor, monitoring/control device
and each piece of controlled equipment.
2. Calibration records indicating the actual calibration procedures and all test equipment
used. Calibration test equipment shall have an accuracy at least equal to the tolerance
of the device being adjusted. Test equipment shall provide stabilized field
measurements in no more than 30 seconds per reading, utilizing a digital readout
display where commercially available.
3. The results of all inspections and tests: Documentation shall be accompanied by letter
from the Contractor to the Commissioning Agent stating that calibrating of the system is
complete.
E. System Tests:
1. The system test shall be performed after total system calibration and shall consist of an
operational test of each system in the presence of the Commissioning Agent or
Owner's Representative. The systems will be tested with points selected at random by
the Test Engineer. The executive routine and each application program will be re-
02092 COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15920 - 2
11/03 0
tested, the performance of the Control Sequences shall be demonstrated, and
transmission link accuracy, sensor accuracy and control operation will be reviewed.
2. Systems will not be accepted on a point -by -point or subsystem basis, but only as a
whole complete operating system. All executive routine and software functions shall be
fully functional. Test a statically significant sample of all sensors. The size of the
sample shall be determined to achieve a confidence level in the validity of the sample
of 95%. The Commissioning Agent will select at random the points to be tested.
F. The TTC, Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent shall review all of the software for
proper point-to-point operation. Upon review of software, a point-to-point test of the
environmental control system installation shall commence point-to-point verification. The
TCC shall provide two people equipped with two-way communication and shall test actual
field operation of each control and sensing point. The purpose is to test the calibration,
response, and action of every point. Any test equipment required to provide the proper
operation of the environmental control system shall be provided by and operated by the
Contractor. The Test Engineer will be present to oversee, observe, and review the test.
1. Point-to-point Verification (all points, input and output):
a. Device and Continuity Check:
(1) Sensor to controller check or sensor to operators' control station check as
applies.
(2) Command to output
(3) Control/monitored device response check
(4) Virtual points and loop control points are not tested as part of the point-to-
point testing.
2. Calibration Check (all sensors). Calibrate sensors at both extremes of operating
conditions and at midpoints.
a. Temperature (sensors)
(1) Immersion:
(a) Ice bath
(b) Boiling water (altitude)
(2) Room:
(a) Side -by -side
(b) Independent thermometer check
(3) duct:
(a) Side -by -side
(b) Independent thermometer check
b. Pressure Sensor (Calibrated per NEBB Standards):
(1) Water
(2) Air
(3) Differential pressure
(4) Level
c. Humidity (Calibrated per NEBB Standards):
(1) Room
(2) Duct
(3) Outside air (OSA)
(4) Sling psychrometer
(5) Hand-held digital humidity meter (thin film polymer sensor)
d. Flow:
(1) Ultrasonic flow meter
(2) Differential pressure on Venturi/orifice
G. When the point-to-point test is successfully completed, perform a series of hard/ware
software systems tests shall be performed. The TCC shall provide two people equipped
with two-way communication for these tests. All groups of points that yield a system of
control shall be tested for compliance with the sequences of operation. Included in the test,
but not limited to, shall be:
1. DC Loop response: The TCC shall supply a trend date output in graphical form
showing the step response of each DDC loop. The test shall show the loop's response
02092 COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15920 - 3
11 /03
to a change in set point which represents a change in the actuator position of at least
25 percent of its full range. The sample rate of the trend shall be from one to three
minutes depending on the speed of the loop. The trend data shall show for each
sample the set point, actuator position, and controlled variable values. Any loop that
yields unreasonably under or over -damped control shall require further tuning by the
Contractor. Resubmit trend data following all loop tuning.
2. Interlocks and other sequences for each interlock.
3. Environmental control system control under HVAC equipment failure.
4. HVAC operation under environmental control system equipment failure, including
stand-alone operations during communications systems failure.
5. Battery backup.
6. Environmental control system control under power failure/restart.
7. Each reset schedule.
8. Each environmental control system alarm reporting capability.
9. Environmental control system control during a fire alarm.
10. The Test Engineer will be present to oversee, observe, and review the tests.
H. The TCC will supply the Test Engineer with two (2)-debugged printouts of all environmental
control system software. Also supply all user's programming and engineering manuals
required to interpret the software. Included in the printouts, though not limited to, shall be
the following:
1. Point database.
2. All custom control program written in the environmental control system control and
utility firmware such as start/stop routines, etc.
3. Printouts or plotted copies of the interactive system graphics.
I. The software printout shall be fully documented for ease of interpretation by the Test
Engineer and Owner, without assistance from the TCC. English language descriptions
shall be either integrated with or attached to the environmental control system printout.
The intent of supplying the above software printouts is to determine compliance with
specification requirements. Specifically, the following shall be documented:
1. All point (1/0 and virtual) names.
2. All environmental control system programming language commands, functions, syntax,
operators, and reserved variables.
3. Use of all environmental control system firmware.
4. The intended actions, decisions, and calculations of each line or logical group of liens
in the custom control program(s). Sequences of operation are not acceptable for use in
this documentation requirement.
5. Complete description of and theories explaining all software and firmware algorithms.
The algorithms to be describes include, but are not limited to, PID, optimum start/stop
demand limiting, and chiller and heat exchanger optimization.
6. Provide a table of contents to the documentation which locates the sections of the
documentation and describes which programs or program sections are for each piece
of controlled/monitored equipment.
7. Provide flow charts using IEEE system nomenclature the software's algorithms and
flow logic.
J. The environmental control system will not be accepted as meeting the requirements of
substantial completion until all tests described in this section have been performed to the
satisfaction of both the Test Engineer and Commission Agent. Any tests that cannot be
performed due to circumstances beyond the control of the TCC shall be exempt from the
substantial completion requirements if stated a such in writing by the Commissioning Agent
and Test Engineer. Such tests shall be performed as part of the environmental control
system warranty.
K. Pneumatic Piping: Entire pneumatic piping system shall be tested by placing it under 30
pounds pressure for 24 hours, except piping serving fan pitch controllers, which shall be
tested at 125 pounds pressure. Pressure drop during test shall not exceed five percent.
02092 COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15920 - 4
11 /03
3 .4 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. The primary purpose of this section is to witness and verify all of the operations of the
Environmental Control Systems shown on the drawings and called for in the specifications
of the contract documents.
B. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions which simulate as close to an
actual operating condition as possible. To that end the contractor shall provide all
necessary materials and temporary system modifications to simulate flows, pressures and
temperatures necessary to false load the system being tested in order to prove and verify
proper operation. Reliance on simulated signals from the DDC system or other indirect
indicators is not acceptable. Other than limited use of virtual points to include outside air
temperature, fan discharge temperature and other sensed points whose functionally to the
overall system has been established by other independent test. At satisfactory completion
' of all verified tests, the building system being tested shall be returned to the condition
required by the contract documents as a complete and operational system.
{ C. Demonstrate to the Owner's Representative successful execution of the following FPT's
(functional performance tests) in accordance with approved FPT procedures as described
in Test Procedures in this Section.
1. Environmental Control Systems:
a. Systems / Equipment to be Tested: Mechanical and Electrical environmental
control systems.
Fill b. Functions to be Tested: It is recognized that many of the control functions required
of the Mechanical and Electrical systems will be tested and verified in the course of
commissioning other systems. It is not the intent of this Section to duplicate
previously tested, verified and approved control functions. It is the intent of this
section however, to complete the process of testing and verifying all of the
environmental control system functions not done by other commissioning
processes, and to test the building control functions as they relate the interact with
each other.
c. Conditions of Test:
(1) Operate all of the buildings' environmental control system functions as called
for by the contract drawings and specification, Division 15 and Division 16,
both individually and interactively.
(2) Create the following electrical conditions:
(a) Normal power on to building.
(b) Normal power off, emergency power on to building
(c) Normal power restored to building.
d. Acceptable Results: All environmental control functions operate successfully,
(individually and interactively), as described by the contract documents, and all
emergency backup systems perform as specified.
3.5 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in this Section. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
conditions. List the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices and
acceptable results for each condition tested. Provide a unique alpha -numeric identification
for each FPT procedure.
B. Submit for approval test procedure check -off sheets. Number each procedure check -off
item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
Sign -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Commissioning Agent or other
Owner -designated witness.
02092 COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15920 - 5
11 /03
3.6 TRAINING
A. Coordinate the initial training of maintenance and management personnel. Instruction shall
be provided in adjustment, operation and maintenance, including pertinent safety
requirements of the equipment and systems specified. Orient the training specifically to the
systems installed rather than a general (canned) training course. Instructors shall be
thoroughly familiar with all aspects of the subject matter they are to teach. Note that all
required training shall be videotaped.
B. Coordinate training necessary to ensure competence in the operation of each system by
the operating personnel. Provide instructors, literature, and necessary equipment to train
the personnel. Training shall be completed prior to the system test.
C. Coordinate a training program 30 days prior to the training sessions. Training shall include
the following:
1. General system architecture
2. Operation of computers and peripherals
3. System function and operation
4. System design as installed
5. System initializing procedure
6. Operator commands
7. Failure -recovery procedures
8. Report formats
9. Alarm formats
10. Temperature control sequences
11. System programming
12. Program editing
D. Operator Training: For each subsystem, coordinate classroom instruction and "hands-on"
operational instruction. The hands-on instruction shall be a structured training session.
Training shall be provided at a location provided by the Owner.
E. Supervisory Training: Classroom instruction and "hands-on" instruction shall be
coordinated. The training shall emphasize the general system concepts, reporting, and
customized programming of the system.
F. Review Training Manuals: The training manuals shall be structured to provide an overview
of system operation. Material shall correspond to the information covered in the training
program. Typical section would include the following:
1. General system architecture
2. Operation of computers and peripherals
3. System function and operation
4. System design as installed
5. System initialization procedure
6. Operator commands
7. Failure -recovery procedures
8. Report formats
9. Alarm formats
10. Temperature control sequences
11. System programming
12. Program editing
13. Documents shall be structured to enable training on a self -study basis. The
documentation shall be written in concise terms and in language which is within the
grasp of mechanical/electrical technicians who are not experts in digital electronics.
Provide documents in binders per requirements of Division 1. Provide videotapes of all
training sessions.
G. System Operations Manual: The systems operations manual shall identify the operation
requirements for each system and document, the system design and the specific functions
of the equipment. This manual shall expand the information as presented in the training
manual. Operator machine interactions and all instructions shall be functionally described
02092 COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15920 - 6
11 /03
k
I
0
n
iy
as required for system operation. The manual shall provide complete operating instructions
for each system and shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Computer executive routine and disk operating system manuals
2. Computer and peripheral reference manuals
3. Troubleshooting documentation
4. Field interface device reference and programming manual
5. Alarm assignment
6. Failure -recovery procedures
7. Reports/alarm message/display formats
8. 1/0 summaries, including point number assignments, control and monitoring functions,
and software subscriptions
9. System software subscription organized by software routine
10. Field panel terminal assignments
11. The documentation shall include procedures for:
a. Revising setpoints
b. Adding new direct digital control logic and control loops
c. Editing and revising the program and data files
H. Software and Program Documentation: Supply documentation describing all computer
programs. Simplified block diagrams and written description shall be furnished to facilitate
easy understanding of program operation. Provide description of all data and program files
(data format, record format, and field size). Provide programming procedures for each
program.
I. Control System Documentation:
1. Control system documentation shall describe all control systems and shall describe all
control systems necessary to satisfy control requirements and sequences. Control
diagrams, system diagrams, system interface diagrams, and flow diagrams shall be
provided.
2. Provide one set of diagrams mounted, framed, and under glass adjacent to each
control system.
3. All control valves, dampers and actuators, electronic and pneumatic controls, motor
starters, electric hands -off auto switches, sensors, monitoring devices, manual reset
switches, and devices provided for operator control shall be documented, described,
and locations identified.
3.7 DOCUMENTATION
A. For each subsystem, supply all training manuals, operation manuals, software and program
documentation, control documentation, instruction documentation, and maintenance
manuals as described herein. These manuals shall document all operations and
maintenance procedures in a clear, concise, step-by-step fashion and shall be assembled
under separate covers.
B. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained
and experienced in operations and maintenance of the described items, completely familiar
with the requirements of this Section, and skilled in technical writing to the extent needed
for communicating the essential data.
C. Record Drawings:
1. Ensure that a complete set of redline prints of contract drawings is provided and shop
drawings for record mark-up purposes throughout the contract time are maintained on
the job site. Corrections and changes made during the progress of the work shall be
recorded continuously by the Contractor on a set of prints kept readily available at the
project during construction. Give special attention to work which will be concealed and
difficult to measure and record at a later date, particular items which may require
servicing or replacement during the life of the project, such as vales, traps, dampers,
etc.
02092 COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15920 - 7
11 /03
2. Ensure that all record drawings shall be generated by computer -aided drafting using
AutoCAD Version 12.0 or later.
END OF SECTION
02092 COMMISSIONING ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEMS 15920 - 8�
11 /03
U
c
I
r
SECTION 15995
MECHANICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 15 responsibilities and participation in the
commissioning process. Note that point-to-point commissioning of all control functions and
complete documentation is the responsibility of the temperature control contractor under
Division 15, and shall be included in the Division 15 contract.
B. Commissioning is the responsibility of the commissioning agent (CA) under separate
contract with the City of Lubbock. The CA is responsible to provide a Test Engineer to
commission the facilities. The construction manager (CM) and his subcontractors shall
provide all support required for start-up, testing, and commissioning. This section is
intended to provide an indication of the tests, which must be performed by the Contractor
prior to verification by the Owner's Representative and the Commissioning Agent. The
commissioning process requires Division 15 participation to ensure all portions of the work
have been completed in a satisfactory and fully operational manner.
C. Work of Division 15 includes:
1. Start-up and testing of the equipment.
2. Assistance in testing, adjusting and balancing, including furnishing additional sheaves
and dampers as required.
3. Operating equipment and systems as required for commissioning tests.
4. Providing qualified personnel for participation in commissioning test, including seasonal
testing required after the initial commissioning.
5. Providing equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found
during the commissioning process, which fulfill contract and warranty requirements.
6. Providing operation and maintenance information and as -built drawings to the Test
Engineer for verification, organization, and distribution.
7. Providing assistance to the Test Engineer to develop and edit system operation
descriptions.
8. Providing training for the systems specified in this Division with coordination by the Test
Engineer, Owner's Representative and Commissioning Agent.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. All start-up and testing procedures and documentation requirements specified within
Division 15.
B. Cooperate with the test, adjust and balance (TAB) firm in the following manner:
1. Allow sufficient time before final commissioning dates so that testing, adjusting and
balancing can be accomplished.
2. Put all heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment and systems into full
operation and continue the operation during each working day of testing, adjusting and
balancing and commissioning.
3. Provide labor and material to make corrections when required, without undue delay.
4. Include the cost of exchange sheaves and belts as may be required by the TAB firm.
5. Provide test holes in ducts and plenums where directed or necessary for pitot tubes to
take air measurements and to balance the air systems. Test holes shall be provided
with an approved removable plug or seal. At each location where ducts or plenums are
insulated, test holes shall be provided with an approved extension with plug fitting.
6. Provide pressure and temperature taps as indicated on construction documents in
locations as required by the TAB firm to adequately test and/or balance the hydronic
systems.
02092 MECHANICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING 15995 -1
11 /03
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide test equipment as necessary for start-up and commissioning of the mechanical
equipment and systems. The TAB firm will provide the test equipment required to perform `
their services.
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT - PROPRIETARY
A. Proprietary test equipment required by the manufacturer, whether specified or not, shall be
provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test
equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist the Test Engineer in the commissioning
process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the Owner upon
completion of commissioning.
B. Identify the proprietary test equipment required in the test procedure submittals and in a
separate list of equipment to be included in the operations and maintenance manuals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORK PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING
'
L�1
A. Complete all phases of work so the system can be started, tested, adjusted, balanced, and
otherwise commissioned. Division 15 has primary start-up responsibilities with obligations
to complete systems, including all sub -systems so they are fully functional. This includes
the complete installation of all equipment, materials, pipe, duct, wire, insulation, controls,
etc., per the contract documents and related directives, clarifications, change orders, etc.
B. A commissioning plan will be developed by the Test Engineer and approved by the
Commissioning Agent. Division 15 is obligated to assist the Test Engineer in preparing the
commissioning plan by providing all necessary information pertaining to the actual
equipment and installation. If system modifications/clarifications are in the contractual
requirements of this and related sections of work, they will be made at no additional cost to
the Owner. If Contractor initiated system changes have been made that alter the
commissioning process; the Test Engineer will notify the Commissioning Agent and
Owner's Representative for approval.
C. Specific pre -commissioning responsibilities of Division 15 are as follows:
1. Factory start-up services for the following items of equipment:
a. Air -handling equipment and exhaust fans+
b. Heating equipment
c. Cooling equipment
d. Plumbing equipment
e. Lab airflow control system
f. Pumps
g. Boilers
h. Variable speed drives
2. Normal start-up services required bringing each system into a fully operational state.
This includes cleaning, filling, purging, leak testing, motor rotation check, control
sequences of operation, full and part load performance, etc. The TAB firm will not
begin the TAB work until each system is complete, including normal contractor start-up.
The Test Engineer will not begin the commissioning process until each system is
complete, including normal contractor start-up and the TAB work has been completed.
D. Commissioning is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Commissioning may
proceed prior to the completion of systems, or sub -systems, and will be coordinated with
U
02092 MECHANICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING 15995 - 2
CI
11 /03
# the Test Engineer. Start of commissioning before system completion will not relieve
Division 15 from completing those systems as per the schedule.
3.2 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING
A. Provide skilled technicians to start up all systems within Division 15. These same
technicians shall be made available to assist the Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent
in completing the commissioning program as it relates to each system and their technical
specialty. Work schedules; time required for testing, etc., will be requested and
coordinated by the Test Engineer. Division 15 will ensure that the qualified technician(s)
are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to
complete the necessary tests, adjustments, and/or problem resolutions.
B. System problems and discrepancies may require additional technician time, Test Engineer
time, Commissioning Agent time, redesign and/or reconstruction of systems and system
components. The additional technician time shall be made available for the subsequent
commissioning periods until the required system performance is obtained.
C. The Owner's Representative and Commissioning Agent reserve the right to judge the
appropriateness and qualifications of the technicians relative to each item of equipment or
system. Qualifications of technicians include expert knowledge relative to the specific
equipment involved, adequate documentation and tools to service/commission the
equipment, and an attitude/willingness to work with the Test Engineer to get the job done.
3.3 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES
I, A. In some systems, misadjustments, misapplied equipment and/or deficient performance
under varying loads will result in additional work being required to commission the systems.
This work will be completed under the direction of the Architect and Owner's
Representative, with input from the Contractor, equipment supplier, Test Engineer, and
Commissioning Agent. Whereas all members will have input and the opportunity to discuss
the work and resolve problems, the Architect will have final jurisdiction on the necessary
i work to be done to achieve performance.
} B. Corrective work shall be completed in a timely fashion to permit timely completion of the
commissioning process. Experimentation to render system performance will be permitted.
If the Commissioning Agent deems the experimentation work to be ineffective or untimely
as it relates to the commissioning process, the Commissioning Agent will notify the Owner
indicating the nature of the problem, expected steps to be taken, and the deadline for
completion of activities. If deadlines pass without resolution of the problem, the Owner
reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the
j problem. Costs incurred to solve the problems in an expeditious manner will be the
Contractor's responsibility.
3.4 SEASONAL COMMISSIONING AND OCCUPANCY VARIATIONS
A. Seasonal commissioning pertains to testing under full -load conditions during peak heating
and peak cooling seasons, as well as part -load conditions in the spring and fall. Initial
commissioning will be done as soon as contract work is completed regardless of season.
Subsequent commissioning may be undertaken at any time thereafter to ascertain
adequate performance during the different areas.
B. All equipment and systems will be tested and commissioned in a peak season to observe
full -load performance. Heating equipment will be tested during winter design extremes.
Cooling equipment will be tested during summer design extremes, with a fully occupied
building. Each Contractor and supplier will be responsible to participate in the initial and
the alternate peak seasons test of the systems required to demonstrate performance; as
scheduled by the Test Engineer, with three day (minimum) advance notification.
C. Subsequent commissioning may be required under conditions of minimum and/or
maximum occupancy or use. All equipment and systems effected by occupancy variations
02092 MECHANICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING 15995 - 3
11 /03
0
will be tested and commissioned at the minimum and peak loads to observe system
performance. The Contractor will be responsible to participate in the occupancy sensitive
testing of systems to provide verification of adequate performance.
3.5 RECOMMISSIONING
A. After the initial and peak season commissioning is completed, there may be addition work
required to serve new or revised loads. This work is not part of the contract.
3.6 TRAINING
A. Participate in the training of the Owner's engineering and maintenance staff on each
system and related components. Training, in part, will be conducted in a classroom setting,
with system and component documentation, and suitable classroom training aids. Note
that all training shall be videotaped in VHS format.
B. Training will be conducted jointly by the Test Engineer, Commissioning Agent, Owner's
Representative, the design engineers, the Contractor, and the equipment vendors. The
Test Engineer will be responsible for highlighted system peculiarities specific to this project.
3.7 SYSTEMS DOCUMENTATION
A. In addition to the requirements of Division 1, update contract documents to incorporate field
changes and revisions to system designs to account for actual constructed configurations.
All drawings shall be redlined on two sets. Division 15 as -built drawings shall include
architectural floor plans, elevations and details, and the individual mechanical or electrical
systems in relation to actual building layout.
B. Maintain as -built redlines as required by Division 1. Given the size and complexity of this
project, red -line drawings at completion of construction, based on memory of key
personnel, is not satisfactory. Continuous and regular red -lining of drawings is considered
essential and mandatory.
3.8 MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT
A. Division 15 shall remove and replace covers of mechanical equipment, open access
panels, etc., to permit Contractor, Architect and Owner's Representative to observe
equipment and controllers provided. Furnish ladders and flashlights as necessary.
END OF SECTION
117
I
fl
U
in
02092 MECHANICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING 15995 - 4
11 /03 9
SECTION 16010
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
6 1.3 SCOPE
A. The work shall include furnishing and installing all rigid steel and flexible metallic conduit,
electrical metallic tubing, polyvinyl chloride conduit, wireways, pull and junction boxes and
outlet boxes, together with all supporting devices and other accessories required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUITS
A. Underground Plastic Conduit: Type 40, heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl
chloride (PVC) conduit and fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL
listed for direct burial use; Carlon or equivalent.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or
galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to
Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or
Allied.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick
corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797;
conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial
Greenfield); conforming to UL Standard UL I and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit
and Cable Company, or equivalent.
E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound, galvanized steel strips, as for flexible
metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit
liquidtight; UL listed; Electri-flex type "l-K or equivalent.
2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded
couplings; bushing at all boxes and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or
cabinet.
B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join lengths of EMT with steel
compression couplings. Attach EMT to boxes or cabinets with steel compression -type box
connectors having an insulated throat with locknuts. Where grounding bushings are
required at terminations, they shall be T & B Series 3802, or equivalent. Set screw type
connectors or indent connectors will not be allowed.
02092 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16010 - 1
11 /03
a
C. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 440 Series couplings at
connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series nylon insulated
throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations.
D. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: T & B 5271 Series
adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon
insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations.
2.3 WIREWAYS
A.
Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete
J j
with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or
�J
equivalent.
B.
Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover
which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood.
2.4 OUTLET BOXES
A.
UL listed of sizes and types specified.
B.
Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication;
Raco, Steel City or Appleton.
C.
Cast Metal Boxes: Cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton or
Pyle National.
2.5 PULL
BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers.
B.
Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use
standard outlet boxes.
C.
Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets
as specified for panelboard cabinets with covers of same gauge as boxes, secured with
corrosion resistant bolts or screws.
2.6 SURFACE RACEWAY
A.
As manufactured by Wiremold or Walker/Parkersburg, UL listed and sized as shown on
drawings. Furnish surface raceway with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories as
required for a complete installation. The steel surface raceway shall be finished in the
manufacturer's standard buff finish or aluminum raceway shall be finished in satin anodized
finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION 9,
3.1 EXCAVATION
A. Perform all excavation work required in connection with the installation of the work under
this Division. After the electrical work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all
excavations with suitable material under the direction of the Architect. Include the cutting of
all sidewalks, streets and other pavement and repairing the openings in them to return to
the surface to approximately its original condition.
B. Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances encountered and to
the depths required for installation of the work under this Division.
C. During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an orderly manner a sufficient
distance from the banks of the trenches to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all
excavated material not required or suitable for backfill, or waste as directed. Control
02092 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16010 - 2
11 /03 0
grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and remove any water
accumulating therein by pumping.
D. Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary width for proper installation of
!s the lines with banks as nearly vertical as possible.
E. Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for conduit
or duct on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length.
F. Except at locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of trenches is required, take
care not to excavate below the depths required. Where rock excavation is required,
remove the rock to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the trench depths specified.
Backfill the overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation to the proper level
with 3/4 inch crushed rock or the equivalent in coarse gravel prior to the installation of
conduit or ducts. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly
supporting conduits or ducts is encountered in the trench bottom, remove such soil to a
,] depth required and backfill the trench to trench bottom grade with 3/4 inch crushed rock or
coarse gravel or other suitable material.
3.2 BACKFILLING
�-� A. Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale or other
approved material free from large clods of earth or stone, deposited in thoroughly and
carefully rammed 6-inch layers. Do not use blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, or
large boulders as backfilling material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and
will be a requirement when so directed. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where
settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then refill, mound over and
smooth off.
B. Backfill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved as specified above
except that the entire depth of trench shall be backfilled in 6-inch layers, each layer
moistened and compacted to a density of not less than 95% Standard Proctor in such
manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the
adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and permit paving of the area
immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, grade
the ground to a reasonable uniformity and leave the mounding over the trenches in a
Funiform and neat condition.
3.3 OPENING AND CLOSING PAVEMENT
i A. Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets, drives or other existing
pavement, including "black topping," cut the pavement as required. Hold the size of the cut
to a minimum consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation of the new
work is completed and the excavation has been backfilled, patch the paving using materials
to match those cut out. Take care that the patches are level with the original surfaces and
thoroughly bond with them.
i
} 3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT
A. All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. Wrap such conduit with 3M
r Company 0.020 inch thick No. 51 "scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double
thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with a suitable solvent, and
clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut
and joined on the job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on both sides
of joints.
02092 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16010 - 3
11 /03
3.5 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS
A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless
noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical
rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise
noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat
and orderly manner.
B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized
steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit,
intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed below grade in
slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or PVC coated rigid galvanized steel or wrapped rigid
galvanized steel.
C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or
excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or
offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured.
D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final
connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement
because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at
connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet
locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot
water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep
raceways at least 1" from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever
possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other
like objects operating at high temperatures.
F. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing
raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed,
seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and
moisture condensation within the raceways.
G. Different Systems: In systems operating at more than 300 volts between phase
conductors, where different phase conductors are to be run to a common gang wall switch
box, install a separate conduit for each different phase wire and its return switch leg, and
provide substantial barriers between adjacent switches in the box so that two different
phase wires will not be the same compartment.
H. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after
threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards,
support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with
insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not
acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit
systems.
I. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push
pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into
raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before
pulling in conductors.
J. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill
any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent
passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and installed
to meet requirements of the UL Fire Resistance Directory.
3.6 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space
hangers more closely where required by conditions.
B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or
U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor.
02092 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 16010 - 4
11 /03 0
r
t.
C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized
malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and
larger on Kindonf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as
hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and
plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they
may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are
installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where
present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to
support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient
distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to
hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels.
D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations,
they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels
suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the
number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as
required for the smallest conduit supported.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES
A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which
conduits shall terminate.
B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes.
C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for
incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended.
D. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 4"x4" size with proper
square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction
will not permit or the device requires a larger box.
E. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep, unless otherwise
noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box.
F. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes.
G. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than
required by code where job conditions so indicate.
B. Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit
systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set
box covers flush with finished surfaces for access.
3.9 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface raceway shall be installed parallel to the wall line in a neat and orderly manner.
The surface raceway shall be mounted using only such fasteners that are recommended by
the manufacturer for the type of surface material encountered. Paint steel raceways to
match surface of installation.
END OF SECTION
02092
11/03
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
16010 - 5
SECTION 16110
CONDUCTORS
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3 SCOPE
A. The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices,
connections, identification, bundling, etc., including pulling devices.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld,
splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections;
Okonite, Triangle, United Copper Industries, Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall
be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid.
B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type THHN/THWN, THW, or RHW insulation unless
the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THHN/THWN
or THW. Feeder circuits shall be Type THW. or THHN/THWN
C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type RHH conductors for wiring in proximity to
boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient
` temperature or convection or radiant heat.
D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose.
2.2 JOINTS AND SPLICES
C
A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or
Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connectors. All connectors shall be of
proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with
properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable.
B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL
approved electrical spring connectors of "Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All
connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not
acceptable.
2.3 COLOR CODING
A. Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the
208 volt system. Neutral conductor shall be white and grounding conductor shall be green.
02092 CONDUCTORS 16110 - 1
11 /03
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WIRE PULLING
A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways
or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in
conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by
pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single
conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature
which may cause injury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed cable
pulling compound where necessary.
B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their
manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used.
C. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing
conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future
installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed length
at each end. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information
as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon
or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A.
Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices,
insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on
drawings. Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap
circuit.
B.
Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single
conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase
wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be
installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single
conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching.
C.
Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except
for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code.
D.
Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled
otherwise.
E.
Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where length of run from
panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No.
12 conductors.
(1
F.
Emergency Lighting and Power Conductors: Run in conduits separate from all other wiring.
((��
G.
Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes
and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or
splice is complete, insulate it with Okonite rubber tape, and Manson friction tape to make
the insulation of the joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, 3M
Company's "Scotch" No. 33 vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers
(half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids
being first protected by application of "Scotchfil" insulating putty.
H.
Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor
manufacturer's recommendations.
I.
Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Securely fasten tags
to all cables, feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution
panelboards, etc.
J.
Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets and the like, using
marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than
No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups.
02092 CONDUCTORS 16110 - 2
11 /03 9�d�
I
3.3 CONDUCTOR TESTS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER)
A. Measure the insulating resistance of service entrance conductors and between conductors
! and ground. Resistance shall be 1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by
megger without branch circuit loads. Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the
Architect, and shall be in accordance with the applicable IPCEA standards for the wires and
cables to be installed. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for
testing, and conduct tests in the presence of the Architect. Submit written reports of the
tests and results when requested by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
F1
u
1-1
r,
G
E
J
I
I I
02092 CONDUCTORS 16110 - 3
11/03
SECTION 16211
WIRING DEVICES
j� PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
t A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
I Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with
(� lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be
L� operable.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WIRING DEVICES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell
manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, Bryant, Pass, Seymour and Leviton or
General Electric are also acceptable.
B. Classification: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed.
C. Colors: All wiring devices which are connected to the emergency power system shall have
a red color. Otherwise, devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished
I in light colors, and shall have a brown finish where mounted in wall finished in dark colors.
L
2.2 WALL SWITCHES
A. For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120 volts or 3000 watts at 277 volts:
' DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO
Single pole wall switch 1201 or 1201-1
Three-way wall switch 1203 or 1203-1
Four-way wall switch 1204 or 1204-1
l Pilot -lighted switch 1201-PLC
I Momentary Contact switch 1556 or 1556-1
B. For loads exceeding above listing:
DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO.
Single pole wall switch 1221 or 1221-1
Three-way wall switch 1223 or 1223-1
Four-way wall switch 1224 or 1224-1
LPilot -lighted switch 1221-PLC
02092 WIRING DEVICES 16211 - 1
11 /03
2.3 RECEPTACLES
A. Receptacle, 20 Ampere, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding Duplex: Hubbell No. 5362 or
5362-1 (NEMA 5-20R).
B. Receptacle, 20 Ampere, 125 Volt, 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding Duplex with Self -Contained
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Hubbell No. GF-5362.
2.4 OTHER DEVICES
A. Weatherproof Devices: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast
aluminum or cast alloy coverplate having a lift cover.
B. Multiple Outlet Assemblies: Wiremold No. 2100 Plugmold or equivalent, with No. 2127Ga
3-wire grounding receptacles 18 inches on centers; complete with all fittings, adapters and
accessories.
2.5 COVERPLATES
A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred
devices.
B. For Flush Mounted Devices: Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line" 0.040" stamped satin
stainless steel except in unfinished or machinery spaces, where plates shall be Sierra
"P-Line" smooth plastic to match devices.
C. For Surface Mounted Devices: Zinc -coated sheet metal with rounded or beveled edges, of
same size as boxes, for indoor use; cast alloy plates with gaskets for outdoor use.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. At each wiring device, engrave coverplate with panel and circuit number to which the
device is finally connected.
3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with
the centerline of the device at the indicated height.
B. In general, devices which are shown to be installed at counters or other millwork shall be
installed above the counter or millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be installed on
the strike side of the door as finally hung.
C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the
following heights.
DEVICE
Wall Switch
Receptacle
Telephone Outlet
MOUNTING HEIGHT
4'0"
18"
18"
END OF SECTION
02092 WIRING DEVICES 16211 - 2
11 /03
SECTION 16310
8 ELECTRICAL SERVICE
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
I A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
L Requirements, and the Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings for all equipment items proposed for use
I • under this Section.
1.3 SCOPE
a A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, material and equipment for the
complete electrical service from the power company service point to the building service
entrance equipment.
1.4 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICE
A. Do not interrupt the electrical service. Locate the existing underground feed to the building
j and mark its location in the vicinity of digging operations. Caution the other workers as to
the location of the service. Any service interruptions necessary in parts of the building for
change over to the new service shall be done only with permission of the owner. Submit
requests for power interruptions to the owner 48 hours in advance of when needed.
f
PART2 PRODUCTS
L2.1 UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUITS: As specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS.
2.2 SECONDARY SERVICE CONDUCTORS: As specified under CONDUCTORS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. The Power Company has provided a pad -mounted transformer assembly where shown.
C B. Furnish and install additional service entrance conductors in conduit from the building,
underground to the transformer assembly. Leave sufficient slack in the conductors at the
transformer to facilitate connections by the Power Company.
3.2 METERING
A. All metering for Power Company billing will be done by metering equipment furnished and
installed by the Power Company.
02092 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16310 - 1
11 /03
3.3 SYSTEMS OF WIRING
A. Electrical Service: Combined 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz. service for lighting
and power.
B. Power Feeders: 208 volts, 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire as noted.
C. Lighting Feeders: 208/120 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.
D. Branch Circuits: 2, 3, or 4 wire as is most convenient for the contractor or as required to
properly serve the load.
3.4 LOAD BALANCING
A. The contractor shall carefully balance his electrical loads between the various phases.
When the facilities are under use at their heaviest loading periods, tests shall be run on the
"hot" conductors in each feeder to a panel and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point
that no conductor load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%) in
amperes.
3.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING: As specified under RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT: Install as specified under
RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS.
END OF SECTION
02092 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16310 - 2
11 /03
SECTION 16411
GROUNDING
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's data on all products.
H1.3 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the
National Electrical Code.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Products for grounding systems are specified elsewhere herein.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
A. Grounding connectors shall be equal to Burndy Hyground compression grounding
connectors to make permanent grounding connections for direct burial, embedded in
concrete, or above grade applications.
B. Compression connectors shall be made of pure, wrought copper, meeting ASTM B187.
Cast connectors shall be made of copper base alloy according to ASTM B30.
C. All connectors must be of heavy duty design and must be equivalent in current carrying
capacity to the maximum size copper conductors being joined while maintaining high
mechanical strength and electrical integrity. Terminals and splices may accommodate only
one conductor size. All other connectors must be range taking. All connectors must be
designed to provide high integrity connections. Connectors must be pre -filled with a
corrosion inhibiting compound which is compatible with the conductors being joined.
D. Connectors must be clearly and permanently marked with the information listed below.
1. Catalog number.
2. Conductors accommodated.
3. Installation die index number or die catalog number as required.
4. Underwriters Laboratories "Listing Mark."
5. The words "Suitable for Direct Burial" or, where space is limited, "Direct Burial" or
"Burial" per UL Standard ANSI/UL467 (latest revision).
E. Installation of connectors shall be made in accordance with the connector manufacturer's
recommendations. These should include; cable preparation if required, installation tools
and dies, and the required number of crimps. Connectors must be installable under all
types of weather conditions. Connectors must be installable without the use of hazardous
materials.
a
02092 GROUNDING 16411 - 1
11 /03
0
F. Compression die index number must be permanently marked on connectors during
crimping so that use of the correct crimping dies can be verified. Closed barrel connectors
must have inspection holes at the appropriate location to verify proper cable insertion.
G. All connectors must meet the requirements of IEE Std. 837 "IEEE Standard for Qualifying
Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding." All connectors must be listed by
Underwriters Laboratories for direct burial in earth or embedment in concrete applications
according to ANSI/UL467, "Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment."
3.2 SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance
with the National Electrical Code, and subject to the following additional requirements.
B. Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic
enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of
connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service
and equipment grounding conductor without joint or splice to the main water service pipe
and connect it thereto with an approved bolted pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces
thoroughly before connection, to assure good metal to metal contact. Where a dielectric
fitting occurs on water main, connect the grounding conductor to the street side of the
fitting. Bond the conduit to the grounding conductor at each end. Provide and install with
ground clamps a No. 3/0 copper jumper conductor around the water meter. Supplement
the water pipe ground with an additional electrode which shall be 10' long by 3/4 inch
diameter copperclad steel ground rod. Attach the electrode to the water pipe and to the
service/equipment grounding conductor.
C. Size grounding conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code Tables 250-66 and
250-122.
D. The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the building service grounding
electrode, using the conductor size specified in National Electrical Code Section 250-66.
3.3 GROUNDING RACEWAYS
A. Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits
and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide
bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated
grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated
conductor in each non-metallic conduit.
B. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways terminating within
switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures.
Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the
ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with
NEC Table 250-122.
3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the
same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated.
Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral
conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals
of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a
grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding
bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that there will be
an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of
connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding
conductors per NEC Table 250-122.
END OF SECTION
02092 GROUNDING 16411 - 2
11 /03
I
111
HI
I
I
I
I
L
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
I
SECTION 16510
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
Requirements and Supplemental Requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment.
1.3 MANUALS
A. Include all submittal data in the operation and maintenance manuals.
1.4 SCOPE
A. Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the
complete electrical distribution system.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 SWITCHBOARD
A. General: Furnish and install the switchboard(s) as herein specified and shown on the
associated electrical drawings. The switchboard(s) shall meet Underwriters' laboratories
requirements.
B. Structures: The switchboard shall be totally enclosed, dead front, free standing, front and
rear aligned with front accessibility only required. The switchboard shall be Type 1 General
Purpose. The framework shall be of UL gauge steel and secured together to support all
cover plates, bussing and component devices during shipment and installation. Formed
removable closure plates shall be used on the front, rear and sides. All closure plates are
to be single tool, screw removable. Ventilation shall be provided when required. Each
section shall include a single -piece removable top plate.
C. Finish: All painted parts shall be pretreated and provided with a corrosion -resistant, UL
Listed acrylic baked paint finish. The paint color shall be #49 medium light gray per ANSI
standard Z55.1-1967.
D. Fault Withstandability: The entire switchboard shall be suitable for operation at the
specified available fault current. The switchboard shall be labeled to indicate the maximum
available fault current rating, taking into account the structure, bussing, switchboard
breakers shall not be less than 50,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. The switchboard
branch circuit devices short circuit current rating shall be fully rated.
E. Bussing: The switchboard through -bus shall be tin-plated copper. The switchboard
bussing shall be of sufficient cross sectional area to meet UL Standard 891 for temperature
rise. The through bus shall have a maximum ampacity of 1600 amperes and extend the full
length of the switchboard. The through -bus shall be 100% rated. Provisions shall be
provided for future splicing of additional sections from either end. The neutral bus shall be
100% rated.
02092 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16510 - 1
11 /03
0
F. The switchboard distribution section bus shall be of the same material as the through bus
and shall be rated 1600 amperes. The distribution section neutral plate shall be of copper
provided with Cu/AI lugs for the devices installed and future specified devices.
G. The ground bus shall be sized per UL Standard 891 and of the same material as the
through bus.
H. Group Mounted Branch Devices: The switchboard group -mounted circuit breaker branch
devices are to be totally front accessible and front connectable. The circuit breaker
connections to the distribution panel bussing shall be of a "blow -on" design such that the
connections grip the bus bars firmly under high -fault conditions.
I. Shipping Splits: Switchboards shall be separated into shipping blocks. Each switchboard
section shall be capable of being handled individually with the use of removable lifting bars
or rollers and be clearly labeled with proper handling procedures.
J. Switchboard sections shall be capable of being joined at the job site with the use of internal
splice bars. These splices bars shall be preassembled onto the through bus and not
shipped loose in a splice bars shall utilize two bolts, one on each side of the shipping split,
for each phase. Conical washers shall be used to provide a constant pressure once the
proper torque is achieved. The through bus splice connection shall be capable of being
maintained by the use of a single tool and shall be front accessible.
2.2 PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of
sizes as required to house the panelboards.
B. Cabinet Construction: Rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to
Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned
over to receive trim.
C. Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel;
fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the
cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if
flush mounted. Provide each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch.
On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with
T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike.
D. Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished
in gray lacquer.
2.3 PANELBOARDS, GENERALLY
A. Mount all panelboards in cabinets as specified hereinbefore, arranged for flush or surface
mounting as indicated on drawings.
B. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for
operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper
space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled.
Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device
complete for operation.
C. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic, indicating
type unless noted otherwise. Provide all multiple pole breakers with common trip and
single operating handle; handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Branch circuit
breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units.
D. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing.
E. Where a feeder serves more than one panel, first entering one panel and then proceeding
thru a side gutter to other panels, install the feeder full size in a continuous piece without
joint or splice through the side gutter of the panels to serve the succeeding panels. Make
the gutters on that side and on the top at least 4" greater than normal (more if necessary) to
accommodate the wiring and make the tap from the feeder to the panels with suitable
bolted pressure T-cable tap connectors. Under no circumstances use feed -through lugs on
I
0
0
I
02092 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16510 - 2
11 /03
a panel bus with the current drawn by a panel being carried through the buses of the
preceding panel.
F. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a
cardholder on the inside of the panelboard cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet
plastic.
G. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. and the building main
panel shall be listed as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment."
H. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication;
drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective
devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of
main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine compliance
with the drawings and specifications.
I. Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved nameplate which shall identify the
panelboard name. See detail on plans.
2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit breakers as scheduled.
Panels shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture,
equivalent to the General Electric panels listed below.
B. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent
devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes bolted together and
covered by a common multiple door front; each box containing not more than 42 branch
overcurrent devices.
C. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric Type AQ, with type THQB circuit
breakers.
2.5 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards shall have the number and sizes of bolted -in circuit breakers scheduled on the
drawings, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as scheduled.
B. Panelboards shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture,
equivalent to the General Electric Panelboards specified below.
C. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric Type NAB, Style NCP or Type
CCB, Style CP; type determined by sizes and types of circuit breakers; circuit breakers
shall have minimum RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on
drawings; no subfeed breakers permitted.
2.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall be UL listed and shall
meet NEMA Standard KSI for Type HD heavy duty switches. Switches shall be unfused
unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the
weather; elsewhere in NEMA I general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are
required. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated.
B. Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or ITE manufacture,
equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches.
C. Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within
weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as
unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or equivalent.
D. Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in
switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters.
02092 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16510 - 3
11 /03
0
2.7 FUSES
A. Furnish and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working
order, including a complete set of fuses in each spare switch.
B. Upon completion of the work provide a standard carton (but not less than 3 fuses where a
carton does not contain as many as 3) of each size of each type of fuse used. These spare
fuses are in addition to fuses in spare switches and replacement fuses blown during
construction and testing.
C. Place a fuse identification label, showing type and size of the required fuses, inside the
door of each enclosure requiring fuses.
D. Fuses shall conform to the latest NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed and labeled
(except as noted otherwise) They shall conform to the UL classes listed hereinafter.
Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied.
E. Fuses shall be shipped to the job in boxes, and shall not be installed in any equipment until
the installation is complete, and final tests have been made prior to energizing the
equipment.
F. Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than required by the proper size of
fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to fit the fuses.
G. Fuses shall be of the classes and types listed below, the type designations referring to
those indicated on the plans.
1. Type KRP-C: Class L; Bussman Type KRP-C "Hi -Cap", current limiting with time
delay, interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, current rating
601-4000 amperes.
2. Type LP: Class RK-1; Bussman Type LPN or LPS "Low Peak". Fuses shall be
available in ratings 0-600 amperes, shall be current limiting dual element with tie delay,
and shall have interrupting rating of 200,00 RMS symmetrical amperes. Fuses shall be
equipped with slotted blades, and switch fuse clips shall be provided with matching
NEC fuse rejection feature.
3. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussman, Littelfuse.
END OF SECTION
it
I
I I
11
It
Ill
02092 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 16510 - 4
11 /03
I
I
F,
SECTION 16611
LIGHTING
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review catalog data and drawings on all equipment items.
1.3 SCOPE
A. This section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and
incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish
fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein.
Should any designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as
used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be
provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the
required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for.
B. Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish
scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data
required by the Architect for every type fixture.
C. Electronic Ballasts: As scheduled on plans.
D. Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin
acrylic with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inches or thicker as specified.
E. Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and
acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the sizes and types
specified; General Electric, Westinghouse or Sylvania.
F. Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted unless specified or recommended otherwise by the
fixture manufacturer.
G. Fluorescent Lamps: SPX-41°K.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR FIXTURES
A. Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to
coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the
general construction and securely attached.
B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the
fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through
ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture.
02092 LIGHTING 16611 - 1
11 /03
vi a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture
C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings. Provide p g
recessed in a plaster ceiling.
D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures
are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid
provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be
centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the a
structural members.
E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens
shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible.
F. Reused Fixtures: Where existing lighting fixtures are to be relocated, carefully remove and
store the fixture. When it is ready to be hung, thoroughly wash all dirt and dust from the
fixture and lens, hang the fixture and install new lamps. Should any such fixtures be
damaged in this process replace them with matching new ones at no cost to the owner.
END OF SECTION
41
A
u
10
4
11
11
u
02092 LIGHTING 16611 - 2 11 /03 U
SECTION 16710
MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, the Special Conditions and
the General Requirements.
n 1.2 SUBMITTALS
�j A. Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items.
0 1.3 SCOPE
A. This Section of the Specifications pertains to all other labor, material, equipment and
service necessary for and incidental to motor and equipment wiring and control as shown
on the drawings and/or as specified herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS
A. All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other Divisions of the
specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner. Where motors are mounted integrally with
items of equipment, they will be erected in place with such equipment ready for electrical
connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this Division. Where motors are to
be installed as separate items, their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions
necessary to their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the Division under which
they are furnished; their erection and final setting are a part of the work of this Division, and
shall be done by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen.
2.2 MOTOR STARTERS
A. All motor starters (controllers) will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other
divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner.
B. Install under this Division, including supporting structures, all motor starters and control
equipment which are not shipped integrally mounted with the controlled equipment.
Provide and install all wiring of every character, for both power and control, except that
which is factory installed and shipped as an integral part of assembled equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT WIRING
A. Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, plumbing, and
laboratory equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by the Owner or under
other Divisions of the specifications. Outlets of various types have been indicated at
equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on
the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the
other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the
02092 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16710 - 1
11 /03
exact locations of all items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and
contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in
ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job.
B. Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control
equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect
switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated.
3.2 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls which require electrical
connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor.
END OF SECTION
02092 MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING 16710 - 2 1
11 /03 J
n
SECTION 16810
EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL
PART GENERAL
1.1 NOTE
A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General
Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for review catalog data, wiring diagrams and drawings on all equipment items.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install a complete emergency engine -generator plant to furnish power to
a circuits as shown. All equipment shall be new and unused. The unit shall be the product of
a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. That company and
its authorized dealer shall assume sole responsibility for the performance of the unit and all
its accessories. The unit shall be a standard model in regular production and shall be
selected to operate at a rating recommended by the manufacturer's current catalog
literature. The engine -generator shall be of Stewart and Stevenson, Onan, Cummins, or
Caterpillar manufacture.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. The generating unit offered shall be covered by the manufacturer's standard warranty or
guarantee on new machines, which shall apply for a minimum of two years following
certificate of final payment.
1.5 MANUALS
A. Provide three bound copies of commercial type manuals consisting of operating and
maintenance information, parts, books, dimensional drawings and wiring diagrams of
engine -generator set and all auxiliary equipment.
1.6 PARTS AND SERVICE
A. The supplier offering the engine generator set shall be the authorized dealer of the
manufacturer of the set, and shall be fully qualified and authorized to provide service and
parts for the engine, generator and auxiliary components at any time, day or night.
Availability of parts and service will be considered in reviewing the submittal.
1.7 TESTING
A. The complete engine -generator plant shall be assembled and tested at the factory. The
tests shall be as outlined herein and a certified report of the test shall be submitted for
review. A copy of the report shall be bound in the operation and maintenance manual.
Factory tests shall be as follows:
1. The unit shall be run at 100%, load for two hours. At fifteen minute intervals readings
shall be taken and logged for generator terminal voltage, generator output current,
frequency, engine oil pressure, engine water temperature and average air temperature.
02092 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 16810 - 1
11 /03
I
2. The transient response shall be measured and logged at 100%, 90%, 50%, and 25%
load by single stage switching.
3. Engine overspeed trip, water temperature trip and oil pressure trip shall be tested and
logged.
B. Field test shall be as follows:
1. The unit shall be run at 100%, load for two hours. At fifteen minute intervals readings
shall be taken and logged for generator terminal voltage, generator output current,
frequency, engine oil pressure, engine water temperature and average air temperature.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 RATING
A. The rating of the unit shall be based on operation of the set when equipped with all of the
necessary operating accessories, such as radiator, fan, air cleaners, lubricating oil pump,
fuel injector pump, fuel transfer pump, jacket water pump, governor, charging generator,
main generator, exciter, regulator, muffler and other devices specified herein UL 2200.
B. When operating at an altitude 3250 feet above seal level in an ambient temperature of 114
degrees F. maximum and 0 degrees F. minimum, the unit shall be capable of producing
445 KW at 0.8 power factor continuously for standby power application, regardless of the
duration of the outage of the normal power supply.
2.2 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type: Full diesel, compression ignition; liquid cooled; two or four cycle; either naturally
aspirated, pressure charged or turbocharged; operating on No. 2 diesel fuel.
B. Horsepower: The brake horsepower of the engine at rated RPM with all accessories
attached, shall not be less than required by the full load rating of the generator, taking into
account all efficiency losses.
C. Speed: 1800 RPM
D. Cylinders: Multi -cylinders, vertical in -line or V-type; removable wet or dry type liners of
close grained alloy iron, heat treated for proper hardness to obtain maximum life.
E. Pistons: Trunk type; oil cooled; cast iron or aluminum alloy; fitted with both compression
and oil control rings.
F. Crankshaft: Drop forged, electrically hardened and dynamically balanced; main bearing
journal on both sides of each crankpin.
G. Bearings: Connecting rod and main bearings shall be precision removable shell type.
H. Valves: Heat resisting alloy steel with stellate facing; stellate faced exhaust valve seats.
I. Lubrication: Submerged suction, gear type oil pump to supply forced feed, constant
pressure oil to all important points such as main bearings, crank pin bearings, pistons,
piston pins, timing gears, camshaft bearings, and valve rocker mechanisms; replaceable
element, full flow oil filter; spring loaded bypass valve to bypass oil if filter is clogged;
lubricating oil cooler, engine mounted and water cooled.
J. Fuel Pump: Integral engine -driven fuel transfer pump to supply adequate quantity of fuel
under all conditions to the engine injection system.
K. Governor: Electronic type, to maintain frequency stability of plus or minus 0.33 percent at
any steady state from no load to full load; frequency regulation of 25% load change not
more than 2% with 3 seconds maximum recovery time; frequency transient on 100% load
rejection not more than 8%.
L. Starting Equipment: Electric starting motor with solenoid and Bendix or Dyer drive; hard
rubber cased lead -acid storage batteries mounted on unit or in separate rack beside
engine; all required cables and connections; automatic solid state full wave silicon rectifier
battery charger capable of maintaining battery at full charge; adjustable charge rate with
two steps, trickle charge and fast charge; ammeter and automatic reset thermal overload
I
I �
LI
� 11
0
11
I
in
02092 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 16810 - 2
11 /03
F�
P
I
I
V
a
circuit breaker on charger; charger may be mounted on wall or on generator control panel,
and shall operate from 120 volts normal power.
M. Cooling System: Engine shall be equipped with remote mounted radiator and fan, water
manifold, temperature control valve, and gear or V-belt driven engine water circulating
pump. System shall be adequate to cool engine in an ambient temperature of 122 degrees
F. Provide a permanent type ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant in the cooling system,
suitable for operation at 0 degrees F and approved by the engine manufacturer.
N. Immersion Heater: Provide an electric immersion heater with thermostat in engine cooling
water system to maintain constant temperature when engine is not in operation. Heater
shall operate on 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. current.
O. Exhaust System: Provide hospital type muffler and flexible stainless steel exhaust
connection for each exhaust outlet.
P. Air Cleaner and Silencer: Provide an air cleaner and silencer as recommended by the
engine manufacturer.
Q. Engine Instruments: Provide on an engine control panel the following:
1. Water inlet and outlet temperature gages
2. Lubricating oil pressure and temperature gages
3. Running time indicator
4. Combination alarm and shutdown systems for high water temperature and/or low oil
pressure, with indicating lights.
5. Combination alarm and shutdown with indicating light for engine overspeed.
R. Flywheel: Both statically and dynamically balanced.
S. Fuel and Oil Consumption: State guaranteed fuel consumption at 100, 75, and 50 percent
load at rated speed. Also state guaranteed lubricating oil consumption. Fuel consumption
shall not exceed 0.44 pounds per brake horsepower per hour at full load with fuel rated at
19,350 Btu per pound (high heat value).
2.3 ALTERNATOR AND EXCITER
A. Alternator: Engine -driven, revolving field synchronous generator, direct connected to
engine with steel disc flexible coupling. Generator housing shall bolt to engine flywheel
housing. It shall have a single ball bearing support for the rotor. Rotor shall be dynamically
balanced up to 25% overspeed. Generator shall conform to applicable NEMA Standards. It
shall be open, drip -proof type with amortisseur windings and Class A, B, F or H insulation.
Generator shall be rated 120/208 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz. 557 KVA 445 KW at 0.8 p.f.
for continuous service in standby power application at the altitude and ambient temperature
specified hereinbefore.
B. Exciter: Generator field excitation shall be by permanent magnet generator system (PMG).
2.4 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Voltage regulator shall be of the static magnetic amplifier or transistor type. A voltage
adjusting rheostat shall provide plus or minus 10 percent voltage adjustment. Regulator
shall maintain generator output voltage within plus or minus 1 percent of rated value from
no load to full load at 0.8 p.f. Voltage stability shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent of average
RMS value at any steady state load condition from no load to full load. Stable voltage
operation shall be re-established within 2 seconds following any sudden load change
between no load and full load. On any load addition up to and including 90 percent full load,
the voltage dip shall not exceed 20 percent of rated voltage.
B. Generator Control Panel: Provide a generator control panel in a unit mounted cabinet,
containing the following equipment.
1. AC ammeter
2. AC voltmeter
3. Frequency meter
4. Exciter field rheostat
5. Voltage Regulator
02092 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 16810 - 3
11 /03
6. Current and potential transformers as required
7. Combination ammeter -voltmeter phase selector switches
8. Generator line circuit breaker of proper trip rating and interrupting capacity for the
generator rating.
9. Panel lights
10. Necessary wiring and interconnections in accordance with standard commercial
electrical practices.
2.5 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. Day Tank/Main Tank: UL approved, fuel oil day tank shall be incorporated in sub -base of
generating set; capacity to provide 24 hours operation at full load; fuel level gage; breather
cap; float switch to control operation of fuel transfer pump. Provide dual wall tank with leak
detection system.
B. Diesel Fuel Piping: All piping associated with the diesel fuel system will be furnished and
installed as a part of the work by generator contractor.
C. Contractor shall provide all generator fuel and main tank shall be full at substantial
completion.
2.6 REMOTE ANNUNCIATION
A. Provide and install for the new engine -generator three remote alarm annunciator in Lab
Electric Room, in General Lab 103, and in Reception 103. The annunciator shall be
powered by the engine -generator storage battery to provide a warning of derangement or
alarm conditions in the standby power plant.
B. Visual Alarms: The annunciator shall contain visual signals to indicate:
1. The standby plant is generating
2. Low storage battery voltage
3. High storage battery voltage
C. Audible and Visual Alarms: The annunciator shall contain audible and visual signals to
indicate:
1. Failure to start (OVERCRANK)
2. Low oil pressure
3. High engine water temperature
4. Low water jacket temperature
5. Engine overspeed
6. Low fuel supply in storage tank
D. Construction: The annunciator shall be constructed from a sheet steel enclosure arranged
for flush mounting. The face of the panel shall contain nine lamps, an audible alarm„ a
toggle switch marked NORMAL and OFF (for audible signal) and a lamp test pushbutton
switch. The front face shall be removable to expose the internal printed circuits, wiring,
terminal block and battery voltage sensors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MOUNTING
A. The engine generator set shall be factory mounted on a welded structural steel base of box
type construction.
B. Provide and install a reinforced concrete pad designed for the weight of the unit and set the
steel base on the pad by installing pad type vibration isolators under the base of the unit.
Isolation pads shall be properly selected and installed to minimize noise and vibration
transmission.
C. Submit the following for review:
1. Drawings of engine -generator set and foundation requirements
� 11
0
11
I
In
02092 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 16810 - 4
11 /03
U
0
r
fl
0
I
I
I
2. Literature describing the set and indicating its current production status.
3. Make and type of engine, generator and all auxiliary equipment.
4. Number of cylinders, bore, stroke and displacement
5. Rated RPM
6. BHP of engine at rated speed
7. Generator rating, KVA, KW and p.f.
8. Description of generator, exciter and voltage regulator.
9. Load run by PC software to verify generator is able to handle in rush of mechanical
load.
3.2 SUPERVISION
A. After the engine -generator is installed, and before it is energized, a representative of the
manufacturer shall inspect the installation and perform the prestarting checks on the unit.
After his inspection is complete, he shall crank the unit and test the system for proper
operation. At the time of final inspection, he shall demonstrate the operation of the system
including starting, stopping, exercising, etc. from the transfer switches.
3.3 INSTRUCTION
A. The manufacturer's representative shall allot sufficient time to instruct the owner's
personnel as to the complete operation of the emergency system including the
engine -generator, transfer switches, service recommendations, exercise periods and
procedure, etc.
END OF SECTION
02092 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION AND CONTROL 16810 - 5
11 /03
if
SECTION 16911
FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions Requirements apply to Work
of this Section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The installing contractor and/or equipment manufacturer shall provide complete and
detailed shop drawings and include:
1. Control panel wiring schematics and interconnections.
2. Point to point wiring diagram showing terminal connections to all system devices. This
would include the size of conductors to each device and proposed routing. After review,
this shall become the installation drawing.
3. Riser wiring diagram and conduit sizes.
4. Floor plan drawings locating all devices associated with the Fire Alarm System.
5. Factory data sheets on each piece of equipment to be used and so marked as to
dimensions, size, voltage, style, catalog number, manufacturer's names, and
configuration.
6. Detailed system description and operation describing system functions.
7. Complete Bill of Material for reference.
8. One set of installation, operation and maintenance manuals for submittal review of fire
alarm system. Required number of manuals are still required at project closet.
B. All submittal data shall be in bound form with contractor's name, supplier's name, project
name, and state fire alarm license number adequately identified.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The installing contractor shall be the authorized representative of the fire alarm
manufacturer to sell, install and service the manufacturer's equipment.
B. The installing contractor must be licensed by the state Fire Marshall to sell, install and
service fire alarm systems.
C. The installing contractor shall have on their staff an installation superintendent who is
licensed by the State Fire Marshall's office for such purpose and under whose supervision
installation shall take place.
D. The fire alarm installation firm will have factory -trained personnel performing the control
panel wiring for the system that they were trained for. The firm shall also maintain a stock
of parts and components used in the system.
E. The qualifications of the installation firm, the availability of replacement parts and service
records will be considered.
1.4 CLOSE-OUT MANUALS
A. Provide three sets of operation and maintenance manuals which includes:
1. Complete typewritten operating instructions.
2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all terminals identified.
3. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering numbers.
4. A plan showing conduit size, number and size of conductors and locations of all devices.
02092 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
11 /03
16911 -1
5. Printout of system program with all levels of passwords.
6. Floor plan locating all fire alarm devices with their identification points labeled. Provide
DXF format Cadd disk.
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The installation and testing shall be made under the provisions of the latest National
Electrical Code (NFPA-70); NFPA 101 (Life Safety Code), Vernon Statue. NFPA 71, NFPA
72, UL Standards (1480, 864, 268, 268A, 217, 521, 228, 464, 1638, 38, 346, 1481), and all
other applicable state and local codes and ordinances. The Contractor shall submit the new
fire alarm equipment layout to the local fire alarm authority having jurisdiction for approval.
1.6 SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install and place in operating condition a 24 VDC, fire
detection and alarm system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. It is the
intent to obtain a complete system, which shall operate as described herein, and all
equipment necessary for such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is
enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include, but not be
limited to, all control panels, power supplies, alarm -initiating devices, audible and visual
alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings and all other accessories required to provide a
complete and operable system. The system shall operate as a continuous sounding system
which shall have multiple audible alarm circuits. The system signaling line circuits shall be
wired as style six Class A circuits. The system notification appliance circuits shall be wired
as Style Y (Class B) supervised circuits.
1.7 QUALITY
A. To establish the standards of performance, function, quality, and features of system
desired, the equipment specified is that of the Notifier Company.
B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this
specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be of the
best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or, if
provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers.
C. All equipment and material shall be new and unused, unless directed otherwise.
D. Wiring: All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code, local codes and
the National Fire Protection Association-70, Article 760. The minimum wire sizes shall be
12 gauge for AC power supply connections and auxiliary circuits, 14 gauge for DC power
supply connections, 16 gauge for audible alarm circuits. Cable for SLC loops shall be 18 to
12 AWG twisted pair with a shield jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained. Intelligent
detector wiring must not be routed adjacent to, or in the same conduit with Audio/Visual
power wiring, 120/240 VAC power wiring or other high current circuits. Size SLC
conductors per manufacturers instructions and anticipate all future device additions.
E. Wire shall be UL listed for limited energy (300V) and fire alarm applications and shall be
installed in the BSL-3 lab area in conduit where concealed and a surface metallic raceway
when exposed. All wiring between floors, in mechanical rooms, or in risers shall be installed
in conduit with a minimum size of 3/4". The remain areas can be installed open in plenum
rated cable supported from structure.
1.8 YEAR 2000 CONFORMITY
A. The contractor warrants that any system (including its associated hardware, software, and
firmware) and each hardware, software, and firmware product delivered under this contract
shall provide Year 2000 conformity. Year 2000 conformity shall mean that neither
I
it
T
I
r
� 11
0
I
02092 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16911 - 2
11/03 0
L'
i
F
performance nor functionality is affected by dates prior to, during and after the year 2000.
In particular (1) no value for current date will cause any interruption in operation; (2) date -
based functionality must behave consistently for dates prior to, during and after year 2000;
(3) in all interfaces and data storage, the century in any date must be specified either
explicitly or by unambiguous algorithms or interferencing rules; and (4) Year 2000 must be
recognized as a leap year. The contractor further warrants that any system, component,
hardware, software or firmware product that is found not to meet Year 2000 conformity or
that fails as a result of not meeting Year 2000 conformity shall be upgraded, repaired, or
replaced solely at the contractors expense. Nothing in this warranty shall be construed to
limit any rights or remedies the Owner may otherwise have under this contract with respect
to defects other than Year 2000 performance.
1.9 TESTING, GUARANTEE, SERVICE
A. A factory trained technical representative of the manufacturer shall perform the final
connections, complete system checkout and testing of the system, and it shall be subject to
the final acceptance and approval of the engineer and local authorities. Upon completion
and acceptance, the owner and/or his representative(s) shall be instructed in the proper use
of the system. A written copy of the final system test and checkout shall be provided
detailing the function of each device. Furnish the Owner, Architect, Engineer and all
authorities having jurisdiction a Certificate of Compliance.
B. All equipment and wiring shall be free from defects in workmanship and materials, under
normal use and service, for a period of one year from owner acceptance or beneficial
occupancy, whichever comes first. Any equipment shown to be defective shall be replaced,
repaired, or adjusted free of charge.
C. The manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of
such supplied to the Owner and Engineer.
D. The manufacturer's representative shall be prepared to offer a service contract at the end of
the warranty period.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. It shall be the responsibility of the installing contractor to coordinate all requirements
surrounding installation of the Fire Alarm System with all trades including, but, not exclusive
of: electrical contractor, controls contractor, and mechanical contractor. Adequate
coordination shall be provided to insure proper installation and interface to all peripheral
items required to interact with the Fire Alarm System to provide a complete and functional
system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. The Fire Alarm, Detection System shall be a single integrated system by a single
manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume sole responsibility for its operation. The fire
detection system shall consist of a fire alarm panel and shall contain all power supplies,
relays, modules and batteries as required for the operation described herein. The
equipment described herein is of Notifier manufacture. All components of the system shall
be fully supervised.
2.2 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
A. Operation of manual or automatic initiating device shall cause the following events to occur:
02092 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
11 /03
16911 - 3
0
1. The System alarm LED shall flash.
2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated.
3. The 80-character LCD display and remote LCD annunciators shall indicate all pertinent
information associated with the alarm and its location.
4. All automatic programs assigned to the alarm point shall be executed and the
associated indicating devices and relays activated, such as:
a. The appropriate indication shall appear on the fire control panel.
b. An evacuation horns shall sound and all visual strobes and all exit signs shall flash.
c. Remote Point Annunciation devices shall show an alarm condition if devices
connected to it are in alarm condition.
d. All smoke dampers shall close.
e. Air handling units over 2000 cfm shall shutdown along with any units that supply
corridors or that have smoke dampers in their ductwork.
B. When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating devices, the following
functions shall immediately occur:
1. The System Trouble LED shall flash.
2. A local sounding device in the panel shall be activated.
3. The 80-character LCD display shall indicate all pertinent information associated with the
trouble condition and its location. However, unacknowledged alarm messages shall
have priority over trouble messages, and if such an alarm must also be displayed, the
trouble message shall not be displayed on the LCD.
C. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to a single new trouble or
alarm condition shall silence the panel sounding device and change the System alarm or
Trouble LEDs from flashing to steady -ON. If additional new alarm or trouble conditions
exist in the system, activation of this switch shall advance the display to the next alarm or
trouble condition that exists, and shall not silence the local audible device or change the
LEDs to steady until all new conditions have been so acknowledged.
D. New alarm conditions shall always be displayed before new trouble conditions. Occurrence
of a new alarm or trouble condition shall cause the panel to "resound" and repeat the
sequences previously described.
E. Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all appropriate indicating appliances and
relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating
circuits and relays silenced by this switch shall be fully programmable.
F. Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all electronically -latched initiating devices
or zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to the normal
condition.
G. If alarm conditions exist in the system after the System Reset Switch activation, the system
shall then resound the alarm conditions as previously indicated.
H. Activation of the System Test Switch shall initiate an automatic test of all intelligent
detectors in the system. Such test shall activate the electronics in each intelligent device,
simulating an alarm condition. A report summarizing the results of this test shall be
displayed automatically on the front panel.
I. Activation of the Lamp Test Switch shall turn on all LED indicators, LCD display and local
sounder, and then return to the previous condition.
J. The system shall include a special Automatic Detector Test, which permits a serviceman to
test all intelligent detectors from the main control panel.
K. The system shall include independent "Watch Dog" timers to detect and report failure of any
microprocessor circuit, memory, or software.
L. The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the
need for special tools or PROM programmers and shall not require replacement of memory
ICs. All programming may be accomplished through the standard control panel keyboard.
All programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
M. The programming function shall be entered with a special password that may be selected
when the system is installed. The password may be changed in the field to a new value at
U11
0
I �
I
U
02092 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16911 - 4
11 /03
11
c
U
any time by entering the old password and requesting a password change. In the event that
the programmer may enter a password and then lose or forget it, the system shall be
y designed such that the password may be determined by special procedures available
through the system manufacturer.
2.3 CONTROL PANEL
A. The control panel shall be housed in a cabinet designed for mounting directly to a wall or
vertical surface.
B. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and
future expansion.
C. The control panels shall be provided with the following capacities:
" Intelligent/Addressable Loos 2
P
Intelligent Detectors per loop 99
Addressable Monitor/Control Modules per loop 99
Total Intelligent Points 396
D. Power Supply:
1. The power supply for the panel and all fire alarm peripherals shall be integral to the control
panel. The power supply shall provide all control panel and peripheral power needs. The
audio-visual power may be increased as needed by adding additional modular expansion
power supplies or remote power supplies. All power supplies shall be designed to meet
UL and NFPA requirements for power -limited operation on all external initiating circuits
and indicating circuits.
2. Positive -temperature -coefficient thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over -current
protection shall be provided on all power outputs.
3. This system shall meet the requirements of and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories
r Inc. and shall be a Notifier Model AFP-400.
LE. Battery: The system batteries shall be sealed gelled cell and shall be installed in the control
panel enclosure. The batteries shall provide 24 volt DC for system operation and shall be
sized in accordance with NFPA 72 for 24-hour operation.
F. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1. The Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors shall connect with two wires to one of the
control panel loops. The detectors shall use the photoelectric principal to measure smoke
density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
L representing the analog level of smoke density. The detectors shall be ceiling -mount and
shall include a twist -lock base.
2. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition
and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector
itself, by activating a magnetic switch, or may be activated remotely on command from the
control panel.
3. The detectors shall provide address -setting means on the detector head using rotary
decimal switches. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying code, which the
control panel shall use to identify the type of detector.
4. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under
normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel. Both LEDs may be placed into steady illumination by the control
panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. The detector shall be
supplied with a Notifier BX-501 or B524RB base. The smoke detector shall be a Notifier
SDX-551, or equal and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and the duct detector
shall be a Notifier DHX501 with sampling tubes, SDX-551 smoke detector, and remote
annunciator installed on ceiling.
02092 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16911 - 5
11 /03
0
G. Monitor Module:
1. The Monitor module shall be used to connect a supervised zone of conventional initiating
devices (any n.o. dry contact device, including 2 or 4-wire smoke detectors) to one of the
SLC loops. The Monitor Module shall mount in a 4-inch square 2-1/8" deep electrical box.
The zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation.
2. The Monitor module shall provide address -setting means using rotary decimal switches
and shall also store an internal identifying code, which the control panel shall use to
identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal
conditions, indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel. Monitor Module shall be a Notifier MMX-1 or MMX-2, or equal and
UL listed.
H. Control Module:
1. The Control Module shall be used to connect a conventional indicating appliance circuit
(IAC) of 24 VDC compatible polarized audio/visual-indicating appliances to one of the SLC
loops. The Control Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square 2-1/8" deep electrical
box. The IAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y operation. The control module may also
be wired as a dry contact (from C) relay. Power for the relay coil shall be provided by the
SLC loop to reduce wiring connection requirements. Audio/visual power shall be provided
by a separate loop from the main control panel or from supervised remote power supplies.
2. The Control Module shall provide address -setting means using rotary decimal switches
and shall also store an internal identifying code, which the control panel shall use to
identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal
conditions, indicating that the Control Module is operational and in regular communication
with the control panel. Control Module shall be a Notifier CMX-1, or equal and UL listed.
I. Isolator Module:
1. The Isolator Module shall be used to isolate wire -to -wire short circuits on an SLC loop in
order to limit the number of other modules or detectors that are in capacitated by the short
circuit fault. If a wire -to -wire short occur, the isolator shall automatically open -circuit the
SLC loop. When the short is corrected, the isolators shall automatically re -connect the
isolated section of the SLC loop.
2. The Isolator module shall not require any address setting, although each isolator will
electrically reduce the capacity of the loop by two detector or module address. The
isolator module will mount in a standard 4-inch deep electrical box. It shall provide a
single LED, which shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate
steadily to indicate that a short has been detected and isolated. Isolator module shall be a
Notifier ISO-X, or equal and UL listed. Provide minimum of one plus one for every 20
devices.
2.4 HEAT DETECTOR
A. Heat detector shall be equal to a Notifier FDX-551 with BX-501 base.
2.5 MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A. Manual fire alarm stations shall be non -coded, non-breakglass type equipment with a key to
reset. Each manual stations shall be a Notifier BGX-101L or equal and shall be U.L. listed.
Contractor has option to modify each pull station with monitor module. All pull stations new
and existing shall be keyed alike.
2.6 INDICATING DEVICES
A. The alarm indicating devices shall be UL listed horn/strobes with synchronized strobes
housed in common frame and finished in red. The alarm signals shall be Wheelock #NS-
24MCW-FR flush mounted unit or equal with DSM-12/24-R-SYNC module.
0
0
p
0
u
02092 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16911 - 6 1
11 /03 0
B. The strobe unit shall be a Wheelock #RSS-24MCW-FR with synchronized module.
2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
A. Remote annunciator panel shall be a Notifier LCD-80/ABF-1 D and all require cable and
backbox.
2.8 REMOTE POWER SUPPLY
A. Remote power supply shall be equal to Wheelock PS-12/24-8 with batteries.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The installation of the system shall be made by the Contractor under the supervision of a
representative of the manufacturer who shall make the final connection to the system, perform
the functional tests of the system and place it in operation.
B. Installation shall be in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Consult
manufacturer for all wiring diagrams, schematics, sizes, outlets, etc. before installing conduits
and pulling wires.
C. Fire alarm devices shall be mounted upon and all splices made in Listed Boxes. Wiring
splices are to be avoided to the extent possible and Transposing or changing colors will not be
permitted".
r D. Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum
20 amperes. Circuit shall be labeled as "FIRE ALARM".
E. As indicated on the drawings, each zone shall be labeled on the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Names of the zones shall be coordinated with the Owner, and shall meet with the Owner's
approval.
F. Use only identified conduit entries at Fire Alarm Panel or request approval for other
penetrations in cabinets (certain areas require clear space for interior components). Cabinet
shall be grounded to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod.
G. Heat and Smoke Detectors: The location of detectors shown on the plans is schematic only.
The detector must be located according to code requirements.
H. Smoke detectors should be installed to favor the air flow towards return openings and not
located where air supply diffusers can dilute smoke before it reaches the detector.
I. Mount pull stations at 4'AFF and indicating devices at 80"AFF.
3.2 FINAL INSPECTION
A. After the system has been placed in service and all items are functioning properly, call for a
final inspection. The manufacturer's representative shall be present and shall demonstrate the
operation of the system to the satisfaction of the Owner.
3.3 INSTRUCTION
A. The representative of the manufacturer shall allot eight (8) hours to instruct the Owner's
personnel as to the complete operation of the system.
END OF SECTION
02092 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 16911 - 7
11 /03
F
c
SECTION 16995
ELECTRICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING
PART GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF THE WORK
A. The purpose of this section is to specify Division 16 responsibilities and participation in the
commissioning process.
B. Commissioning is the joint responsibility of the Contractor (including subcontractors and
vendors) and the Commissioning Agent (hired directly by the Owner). The Contractor is
responsible to provide a Test Engineer to commission the facilities and provide all support
required for start-up, testing, and commissioning (see Section 01450). Division 17 is
intended to provide an indication of the tests, which must be performed by the Contractor
prior to verification by the Commissioning Agent. The commissioning process requires
Division 16 participation to ensure all portions of the work have been completed in a
satisfactory and fully operational manner.
C. Work of Division 16 includes:
1. Start-up and testing of the equipment.
2. Assistance in testing, adjusting and balancing.
3. Providing qualified personnel for participation in commissioning tests, including
seasonal testing required after the initial commissioning.
4. Providing equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found
during the commissioning process, which fulfill contract and warranty requirements.
5. Providing operation and maintenance information, submittals, and as -built drawings to
the Test Engineer for verification, organization, and distribution.
6. Providing assistance to the Test Engineer to develop and edit system operation
descriptions.
7. Providing training for the systems in this Division with coordination by the Test
Engineer, Owner's Representative and Commissioning Agent.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. All testing and start-up and testing procedures and documentation requirements specified
within Division 16.
B. All Division 17 commissioning procedures that requires participation of Division 16.
1. 17100 — Commissioning: General Requirements
2. 17600 — Commissioning: Electrical Systems
3. 17800 — Commissioning: Life Safety Systems
C. Cooperate with the electrical testing company (ETC) in the following manner:
1. Allow sufficient time before final commissioning dates so that testing and adjusting can
be accomplished.
2. Provide labor and material to make corrections when required, without undue delay.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The majority of the test equipment will be provided by the ETC firm as part of their service.
Provide test equipment as necessary to assist in the start-up of the electrical systems,
mechanical systems and to test electrical equipment.
02092 ELECTRICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING 16995 - 1
11 /03
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT— PROPRIETARY
A. Proprietary test equipment required by the manufacturer, whether specified or not, shall be
provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test
equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist the Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent in
the commissioning process. Proprietary test equipment shall become the property of the
Owner upon completion of commissioning.
B. Identify the proprietary test equipment required in the test procedures submittals and in a
separate list of equipment to be included in the operations and maintenance manuals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORK PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING
A. Complete all phases of work so the system can be started, tested, balanced, and otherwise
commissioned. Division 16 has primary start-up responsibilities with obligations to
complete systems, including all sub -systems so they are fully functional. This includes the
complete installation of all equipment, materials, conduit, wire, controls, etc., per the
contract documents and related directives, clarifications, change orders, etc.
B. A commissioning plan will be developed by the Test Engineer and approved by the
Commissioning Agent. Division 16 is obligated to assist the Test Engineer and
Commissioning Agent in preparing the commissioning plan by providing all necessary
information pertaining to the actual equipment and installation. If system
modifications/clarifications are in the contractual requirements of this and related sections
of work, they will be made at no additional cost to the Owner. If Contractor initiated system
changes have been made that alter the commissioning process; the Test Engineer will
notify the Commissioning Agent and Owner's Representative for approval.
C. Specific pre -commissioning responsibilities of Division 16 are as follows:
1. Factory start-up services for the following items of equipment:
a. Secondary switchgear
b. Automatic Transfer Switches
c. Emergency power systems
d. Electrical distribution systems
e. Lighting control systems
f. Fire alarm systems
g. Security systems/door access systems
h. Special laboratory electrical systems
i. Variable frequency drives
j. Video systems
2. Normal start-up services required to bring each system into a fully operational state.
This includes cleaning, testing, motor rotation check, control sequences of operation,
full and part load performance, etc. The Test Engineer will not begin the
commissioning process until each system is complete, including normal contractor
start-up.
D. Commissioning is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Commissioning may
proceed prior to the completion of systems, or sub -systems, and will be coordinated with
the Test Engineer. Start of commissioning before system completion will not relieve
Division 16 from completing those systems as per the schedule.
3.2 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING
A. Provide skilled technicians to start up all systems within Division 16. These same
technicians shall be made available to assist the Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent
in completing the commissioning program as it relates to each system and their technical
specialty. Work schedules, time required for testing, etc., will be requested and
I
I
0
0
0
I
U
02092 ELECTRICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING 16995 - 2
11 /03
11
coordinated by the Test Engineer. Division 16 will ensure that the qualified technician(s)
are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to
complete the necessary tests, adjustment, and/or problem resolutions.
B. System problems and discrepancies may require additional technician time, Test Engineer
time, Commissioning Agent time, redesign and/or reconstruction of systems and system
components. The additional technician time shall be made available for the subsequent
commissioning periods until the required system performance is obtained.
C. The Owner's Representative and Commissioning Agent reserve the right to judge the
appropriateness and qualifications of the technicians relative to each item of equipment or
system. Qualifications of technicians include expert knowledge relative to the specific
equipment involved, adequate documentation and tools to service/commission the
equipment, and an attitude/willingness to work with the Test Engineer to get the job done.
3.3 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIEINCIES
A. In some systems, misadjustments, misapplied equipment and/or deficient performance
under varying loads will result in additional work being required to commission the systems.
This work will be completed under the direction of the Architect and Owner's
Representative, with input from the Contractor, equipment supplier, Test Engineer, and
Commissioning Agent. Whereas all members will have input and the opportunity to discuss
the work and resolve problems, the Architect will have final jurisdiction on the necessary
work to be done to achieve performance.
B. Corrective work shall be completed in a timely fashion to permit timely completion of the
commissioning process. Experimentation to render system performance will be permitted.
If the Commissioning Agent deems the experimentation work to be ineffective to untimely
as it relates to the commissioning process, the Commissioning Agent will notify the Owner
indicating the nature of the problem, expected steps to be taken, and the deadline for
completion of activities. If deadlines pass without resolution of the problem, the Owner
reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the
problem. Costs incurred to solve the problems in an expeditious manner will be the
Contractor's responsibility.
3.4 SEASONAL COMMISSIONING AND OCCUPANCY VARIATIONS
A. Seasonal commissioning pertains to testing under full -load electrical conditions during peak
heating and peak cooling seasons, as well as part -load conditions in the spring and fall.
Initial commissioning will be done as soon as contract work is completed regardless of
season. Subsequent commissioning may be undertaken at any time thereafter to ascertain
adequate performance during the different seasons.
B. All equipment and systems will be tested and commissioned in a peak season to observe
full -load performance. Heating equipment will be tested during winter design extremes.
Cooling equipment will be tested during summer design extremes, with a fully occupied
building. Each Contractor and supplier will be responsible to participate in the initial and
the alternate peak season test of the systems required to demonstrate performance; as
scheduled by the Test Engineer, with three day (minimum) advance notification.
C. Subsequent commissioning may be required under conditions of minimum and/or
maximum occupancy or use. All equipment and systems effected by occupancy variations
will be tested and commissioned at the minimum and peak loads to observe system
performance. The Contractor will be responsible to participate in the occupancy sensitive
testing of systems to provide verification of adequate performance.
3.5 RECOMMISSIONING
A. After the initial and peak season commissioning is completed, there may be additional work
required to serve new or revised loads. This work is not part of the contract.
02092 ELECTRICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING 16995 - 3
11 /03
3.6 TRAINING
A. Participate in the training of the Owner's engineering and maintenance staff, as required in
Divisions 1 and 17, on each system and related components. Training, in part, will be
conducted in a classroom setting, with system and component documentation, and suitable
classroom training aids.
B. Training will be conducted jointly by the Test Engineer, Commissioning Agent, Owner's
Representative, the design engineers, the Contractor, and the equipment vendors. The
Test Engineer will be responsible for highlighting system peculiarities specific to this
project.
3.7 SYSTEMS DOCUMENTATION
3.8
A. In addition to the requirements of Division 1, update contract documents to incorporate field
changes and revisions to system designs to account for actual constructed configurations.
All drawings shall be redlined on two sets. Division 16 as -built drawings shall include
architectural floor plans, elevations and details, and the individual mechanical or electrical
systems in relation to actual building layout.
B. Maintain as -built redlines as required by Division 1. Given the size and complexity of this
project, redline drawings at completion of construction, based on memory of key personnel,
is not satisfactory. Continuous and regular redlining of drawing is considered essential and
mandatory.
MISCELLANEOUS SUPPORT
A. Division 16 shall remove and replace covers of mechanical equipment, open access
panels, etc., to permit Contractor, Architect and Owner's Representative to observe
equipment and controllers provided. Furnish ladders and flashlights as necessary.
END OF SECTION
02092
11 /03
ELECTRICAL, FACILITY STARTUP/COMMISSIONING 16995 - 4 rp
SECTION 17100
COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Purpose:
1.
The purpose of the commissioning process is to provide the Owner assurance that
systems have been installed in the prescribed manner and will operate within the
a
performance guidelines. Commissioning is intended to enhance the quality of system
{
start-up and aid in the orderly transfer of systems to beneficial use by the Owner.
2.
Generally, Division 17 Specifications will form the starting point for the commissioning
plan by defining some of the functional performance requirements. The
Commissioning Agent shall incorporate, document, and make part of the
commissioning plan additional performance requirements called for in the contract
documents.
3.
The Commissioning Agent shall perform to the requirements of the RFQ and to his
contract with the City of Lubbock, in addition to the requirements of Division 17.
B. General:
1.
Furnish labor and material to accomplish building commissioning as specified herein.
2.
A qualified Test Engineer as specified in 01650 shall accomplish requirements of
Division 17. Attached at the end of this section is a "Responsibilities Table" that
outlines the responsibilities of each member of the commissioning team.
3.
The requirement for and responsibilities of the Test Engineer are indicated in Section
01650 and Division 17.
4.
The TAB Contractor is an independent contractor and may work under a separate
contract or directly for the Commissioning Agent (CA). The responsibilities of the TAB
Contractor are indicated, for information only, in Section 15042.
5.
A qualified Electrical Testing Company (ETC) shall be provided under the CA's contract
and shall perform all the electrical testing required.
6.
Unless noted otherwise, functional performance tests (FPT's) described under
"Acceptance Criteria" in the various Sections of this Division, apply to all equipment and
systems identified under "Systems and Equipment to be Tested:"
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Related Work: Refer to Sections 15920, 15995 and 16995 for additional contractor
responsibilities relative to the commissioning process.
B. Coordination and Management: Provide overall coordination and management of the
commissioning program as specified herein. The commissioning process will require
cooperation of the Contractor, subcontractors, vendors, Architect, TAB Contractor, Owner's
representative, and Owner
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
1. Commissioning Plan: Submit commissioning plan to the Owner's Representative for
review and approval by the Architect, TAB Contractor, and Owner's representative
within 90 calendar days of Notice to Proceed.
2. Commissioning Schedule: Submit commissioning schedule to the Owner's
Representative for review and approval by the Architect within 90 calendar days of
Notice to Proceed.
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 1
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
3. Start-up Plan: For each piece of equipment or system for which formal start-up is
specified elsewhere in this Division, submit to the Owner's Representative for review
and approval by the Architect. Obtain approval of the start-up plan prior to beginning
start-up activities.
a. Start-up schedule
b. Names of firms/individuals required to participate
c. Detailed start-up procedures
d. Start-up data forms
4. Test Equipment Identification List: For each instrument, sorted according to intended
use, submit to the Owner's Representative for review and approval by the Architect:
a. Manufacturer
b. Model Number
c. Serial Number
d. Calibration certification
e. Range
f. Accuracy
g. Resolution
h. Intended use
5. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Submit to Owner's Representative prior to the
start of training.
6. Start-up Procedures: Submit start-up procedures for equipment for which formal startup
is specified elsewhere, to the Owner's Representative for review and approval by the
Architect. These procedures will be reviewed for technical depth, clarity of
documentation, and completeness.
7. Start-up Data Forms: Submit start-up data forms for equipment for which formal startup
is specified elsewhere, to the Owner's Representative for review and approval by the
Architect and Commissioning Agent.
8. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Data Forms: Submit TAB data forms to the
Owner's Representative for review and approval by the Architect. Coordinate forms to
be used with the TAB Contractor.
9. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Procedures: Submit written TAB procedures to
the Owner's Representative for review and approval by the Architect.
10. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Report: Submit written TAB report to the
Owner's Representative for review and approval by the Architect.
11. Based on the Architect's functional requirements for the building, develop Functional
Performance Test (FPT) Procedures: Submit FPT procedures for FPTs specified
elsewhere, to the Owner's Representative for review and approval by the Architect.
a. Each procedure shall have a unique alpha -numeric designator.
b. The same procedure may be applied to multiple identical pieces of equipment or
systems.
c. Procedures shall reference the applicable specification section upon which the
procedure is based.
d. Procedures will be reviewed for technical depth, clarity of documentation,
compliance with "Acceptance Criteria" specified elsewhere, and completeness.
e. Identify the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices,
valves, dampers and switches.
f. Identify the range of acceptable results for each condition tested.
g. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions, written with sufficient step-by-
step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical conditions with
repeatable results.
12. Functional Performance Test (FPT) Data Forms: Submit FPT data forms for equipment
for which FPTs are specified elsewhere, to the Owner's Representative for review and
approval by the Architect.
a. Identify each FPT test data form by a unique designator consisting of the
applicable FPT procedure designator followed by a dash digit suffix to distinguish
multiple repetitions of the same procedure.
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 2
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
0
I
L
b. Include space to record
i. Description of the procedure
ii. Whether the form is for a retest of a failed procedure
iii. Identification and location of the equipment being tested
iv. Identification of instrumentation used, by serial number
v. Observed conditions at each step of the procedure
vi. "Acceptable Results" as specified elsewhere
vii. Date of the test
viii. Names of technicians performing the procedure
ix. Name and signature of the Test Engineer
x. Name and signature of the Commissioning Agent or Owner -designated
witness. Signature of witness shall only indicate concurrence with reported
results and observations. Acceptance of the results will be reported separately
by the Commissioning Agent after review of the FPT data forms.
13. Functional Performance Test (FPT) Deficiency Report Forms: Submit FPT deficiency
report forms to the Owner's Representative for review and approval by the Architect.
a. Include space to record
i. Associated FPT test data form number
ii. Date of test
iii. Name of person reporting the deficiency
iv. Description of the observations associated with the failure of the test
v. Cause of the failure, if apparent at the time of the test
vi. Date and description of corrective action taken
vii. Name and signature of person taking corrective action
viii. Schedule for retest
1.4 COMMISSIONING PLAN
A. Develop a commissioning plan to identify how commissioning activities will be integrated
into general construction and trade activities. The plan is the key means for the Test
Engineer to inform all parties as to how each system functions, independently and with
respect to other systems. The plan shall be updated regularly and redistributed to the
commissioning team for review and comment. The intent of this plan is to evoke questions,
expose issues, and resolve them with input from the entire commissioning team early in
construction. The commissioning plan shall identify how commissioning responsibilities are
distributed.
B. Include an organizational chart showing lines of communication and authority of the Test
Engineer relative to key General Contractor positions and to key subcontractors.
C. Identify who will be responsible for producing the various procedures, reports, Owner
notifications and forms required in this Division.
D. Include the commissioning schedule.
E. Describe the testlacceptance procedure.
F. Identify which subcontractors will participate in each of the tests.
G. Identify instrumentation required for each test.
H. Identify who will provide instrumentation for each test.
I. Operational Description: This shall include, for example, the design criteria, design intent,
code requirements, specifics of the equipment to be provided, sequences of operation,
operating priorities, protocols, etc.
1.5 SCHEDULE
A. Commissioning Schedule: Integrate functional performance testing and commissioning
requirements into the Critical Path Method (CPM) master construction schedule.
Commissioning scheduling is the responsibility of the CM, in consultation with the CA.
Allow adequate time for all specified tasks to occur.
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 3
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
1. Prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing activities, update the
schedule of commissioning activities monthly.
2. Two weeks prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing activities,
provide a detailed two week look -ahead schedule. Thereafter, update the two -week
look -ahead schedule weekly for the duration of commissioning for that construction
phase. The two -week look -ahead schedule shall identify the date, time, beginning
location, Contractor personnel required, and anticipated duration for each start-up or
test activity.
B. Commissioning of systems shall proceed per the criteria established in the specific sections
that follow, with activities to be performed on a timely basis. Commissioning of systems
may proceed prior to final completion of systems. The Test Engineer must be available to
respond promptly to avoid delay to the CPM schedule.
C. Problems observed shall be addressed immediately, in terms of notification to responsible
parties, and actions to correct deficiencies.
1.6 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE WITNESS
A. The Owner's Representative (or other Owner designated personnel) will witness all start-up
and test activities specified in this Division. The Owner's Representative will designate
witnesses and alternates for each activity.
B. Notify the Owner's Representative in writing of the date, time, location, and anticipated
duration of start-up and test activities as required in "Schedule" above.
C. Provide written timely notice to Owner's Representative of any changes in date, time,
location, or anticipated duration of start-up and test activities. For the purpose of this
paragraph, Owner's Representative shall receive written notice a minimum of 72 hours in
advance to be considered timely notice.
D. CM shall reimburse Owner for actual costs incurred by the Owner as the result of failure to
provide timely notice per preceding paragraph of changes in date, time, location, or
anticipated duration of start-up and test activities.
E. Obtain the signature of designated witness on all data forms. If the witness is unavailable at
the scheduled time and location of the activity, so note, and proceed per schedule without
the witness.
1.7 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS
A. Initial commissioning meeting:
1. Within 60 days after the preconstruction meeting the CM shall schedule a meeting to
review commissioning requirements and schedules for the project.
2. Attendance is required of the following: CM's superintendent, CA's Test Engineer,
mechanical subcontractor, electrical subcontractor, environmental control
system/building automation system subcontractor, Architect, mechanical engineer,
electrical engineer, Owner's Representative, TAB Contractor, and others as may be
appropriate.
3. The Test Engineer will preside and conduct the meeting; and will record, reproduce,
and distribute copies of minutes within seven days thereafter to all meeting participants.
4. The purpose of the meeting is to introduce the key representatives of all parties directly
involved with commissioning the building; to present and discuss the commissioning
schedule; to identify construction completion requirements of the subcontractors which
are "critical path" items in regard to each scheduled
B. Commissioning progress meetings:
1. Attendance shall include the Test Engineer, CM representative, mechanical
subcontractor, electrical subcontractor, Temperature Control Contractor (TCC),
Owner's Representative, TAB contractor, and others as may be appropriate.
2. The Test Engineer will preside and conduct the meetings; and will record, reproduce,
and distribute copies of minutes within seven days thereafter to all meeting participants.
0
11
I
I
a -
I
IJ
I
u
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 4 U
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
3. During the months prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing
activities the Contractor will hold monthly commissioning progress meetings. The
primary discussion will be the commissioning schedule. Thereafter, the construction
schedule shall be revised to reflect any changes in the commissioning program.
4. Two weeks prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing activities
the Contractor will begin weekly commissioning progress meetings; which will continue
thereafter until commissioning is complete.
5. The Owner's Representative may require additional meetings if the commissioning
process appears to be behind schedule or if there are coordination problems. The Test
Engineer may also request, in writing, additional meetings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide industry standard test equipment required for performing the tests specified herein.
B. Instrumentation shall meet the following standards:
1. Be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and measure system performance within
the tolerances required to determine adequate performance.
2. Be calibrated on the manufacturer's recommended intervals with calibration tags
permanently affixed to the instrument being used.
3. Be maintained in good repair and operating condition throughout the duration of use on
this project.
4. Be recalibrated/repaired if dropped or damaged in any way since last calibrated.
C. Immersion Temperature Measuring Instruments, Liquids:
1. Range: 40OF to 120OF
a. Type: Glass partial stem immersion
b. Minimum accuracy: within 1/2 of scale division
c. Resolution: One degree Fahrenheit (1°F)
2. Range: 0°F to 220OF
a. Type: Glass partial stem immersion
b. Minimum accuracy: within 1/2 of scale division
c. Resolution: One degree Fahrenheit (1°F)
D. Air Temperature Measuring Instruments:
1. Range: 40OF to 120OF
p a. Type: Glass partial stem immersion
b. Minimum accuracy: within 1/2 of scale division
c. Resolution: One degree Fahrenheit (1°F)
2. Range: 0°F to 220OF
a. Type: Glass partial stem immersion
b. Minimum accuracy: within 1/2 of scale division
c. Resolution: One degree Fahrenheit (10F)
E. Hydronic Pressure Measuring Instruments:
E 1. Range: Indicated pressure shall be in the middle half of the instrument range.
a. Type: Minimum "Grade A" gauges with stainless steel, alloy steel, Monel or bronze
Bourdon tube
b. Minimum accuracy: Within t0.25% of full scale
A c. Resolution: 0.5-PSI subdivisions on a 4.5" dial with a mirrored scale and knife-edge
pointer.
F. Hydronic Differential Pressure Measuring Instruments:
1. Range: Indicated pressure shall be in the middle half of the instrument range.
a. Type: Dual inlet, minimum "Grade A" gauge with dual stainless steel, alloy steel,
monel or bronze Bourdon tubes and a. single pointer
b. Minimum accuracy: Within t0.25% of full scale
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 5
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
c. Resolution: 0.5-PSI subdivisions on a 4.5" dial with a mirrored scale and knife-edge
pointer.
G. Air Pressure Measuring Instruments:
1. Range: Indicated pressure shall be in the inclined portion of the scale.
a. Type: Inclined/vertical manometer
b. Resolution:
(1) Air velocity less than 1000 FPM; 0.005 inch graduations
(2) Air velocity between 1000 and 4000 FPM; 0.01 inch graduations
(3) Air velocity greater than 4000 FPM; 0.1 inch graduations
2.2 REPORTS
A. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) Progress Reports: After TAB activities have begun,
obtain and submit weekly TAB Progress Reports to the Owner's Representative. Identify.
1. Systems or subsystems for which preliminary balancing is complete
2. Systems or subsystems for which final balancing is complete
3. Status of deficiencies and balancing problems encountered, including corrective
actions taken
4. Updated schedule of remaining TAB activities
B. Installation Verification Audit: Prior to start-up, submit to the Owner's Representative for
review and approval by the Architect a report of installation verification audit activities.
Identity equipment and components verified, deficiencies noted, corrective action taken and
the dates and initials of the persons making the entries.
C. Start-up Deficiency Report: Within five days following start-up of each system or
equipment, submit to the Owner's Representative Start-up Deficiency Report Forms.
Identify systems and/or equipment started -up, deficiencies noted, corrective action taken
and the dates and initials of the persons making the entries.
D. Functional Performance Test Deficiency Reports: At the end of each day in which
functional performance tests are conducted, submit to the Owner's Representative
Functional Performance Test Deficiency Report Forms for tests for which acceptable
results were not achieved during the day.
1. Identify tests for which acceptable results were not obtained by test number and
description, and equipment identification and location. Briefly describe observations
about the performance, which were associated with failure to achieve acceptable
results. Identify the cause of failure if such is apparent,
2. When corrections have been completed, update the Functional Performance Test
Deficiency Report Forms. Identify corrective action taken and the dates and initials of
the persons making the entries.
3. Identify the schedule for retesting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 BASIS OF DESIGN DOCUMENTATION
A. Edit and update basis of design narratives provided by the Owner's Representative.
Incorporate the effect of approved substitution requests, change orders and responses to
construction changes that change the information in the Architect's basis of design
narratives. Basis of design includes design criteria and operations descriptions for systems
itemized below.
B. Design criteria shall include design conditions for each space as follows:
1. Indoor dry bulb temperature
2. Indoor relative humidity
3. Outdoor dry bulb temperature
4. Outdoor wet bulb temperature
5. Occupancy, hours, and degree of activity
0
0
It
U
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 6 r-`
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION JL14
6. Lighting and miscellaneous power
7. Ventilation -- recirculation and outside air
8. Internal loads
9. Special loads
10. Insulating R-values for roof, wall, glass, etc.
11. Percentage of glass -- fenestration
12. Type of glass, including coatings and solar coefficients
13. Building pressurization and infiltration
14. Building mass
15. Code requirements and impact on criteria
16. Air quality design criteria, i.e. ASHRAE 62-91
17. Noise criteria
18. Fire and life safety
19. Energy efficiency and cost
20. Maintainability
C. Operations description includes design intent, basic system type, major components,
interrelation of components, capacity and sizing criteria, redundancy, diversity, automatic
temperature control and sequence of operation, intended operation under all seasonal
loads, changeover procedures, part -load strategies, occupied/unoccupied modes of
operation, design setpoints of control systems with permissible adjustments, operation of
system components in life -safety modes, energy conservation procedures, and any other
engineered operational mode of the systems.
3.2 ONE -LINE DIAGRAMS
A. Provide one -line diagrams for the systems identified below.
B. One -line diagrams are intended to support narrative system descriptions and the overall
commissioning process. Depending on the system in question, the following procedures for
developing the one -line diagrams are to be employed.
1. Update AutoCAD-based one -line diagrams provided by the Architect for the following
systems. Some revisions may be required to match the desired format for
Commissioning Documents.
a. Electrical Power
b. Emergency Power
c. Heating Water
d. Domestic Water and Industrial Water systems
e. Steam and Condensate
f. Chilled Water Systems
g. Supply Air Systems
h. Exhaust Air Systems
2. Update and revise vendor supplied AutoCAD-based shop drawings; revise as required
to match the format for Commissioning Documents. This method shall be employed for
the following systems:
a. Lighting control
' b. Security
c. Environmental Control System
d. Energy Management Control
e. Fire Suppression
f. Fire Alarm/Smoke Evacuation/Life Safety Graphics
3.3 COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE
A. Sequence of Testing: Commissioning shall proceed from lower to higher levels of
complexity. For each discrete subsystem or system, testing at the lower level shall be
completed prior to starting the next higher level of tests. In general, the order of testing,
from lowest to highest is:
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 7
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
1. Static tests (e.g. duct leakage tests)
2. Component functional performance tests (i.e. motors, actuators and sensors) and start-
up
3. Balancing
4. System functional performance tests
5. Intersystem functional performance tests
B. Retesting: Repeat at no additional cost to the Owner, the complete functional test
procedure for each test for which acceptable results are not achieved. Repeat tests until
acceptable results are achieved. Compensate the Owner for direct costs incurred as the
result of tests repeated to achieve acceptable results. Fill out a new functional performance
test data form for each retest.
C. Correction of Deficiencies:
1. Correct functional performance test deficiencies promptly and schedule retest.
2. Corrections during functional performance tests are generally prohibited to avoid
consuming the time of personnel waiting for the test, but not involved in making the
correction. Exceptions will be allowed if the cause of the failure is obvious and
corrective action can be completed in less than five minutes. If corrections are made
under this exception, the failure shall be noted on the functional performance test data
form. A new functional performance test data form, marked "retest," shall be initiated
after the correction has been made. The entire functional performance test procedure
shall be repeated.
D. Owner Witness: Witnesses will be designated by the Owner to observe the commissioning
process under the direction of the Owner's representative. Owner's witnesses shall provide
no labor or materials in the commissioning process. The only function of the Owner's
witnesses shall be to observe and comment on the progress and results of commissioning.
1. Provide access to permit the Owner's witness to directly observe the performance of
the equipment being tested.
2. Provide ladders, scaffolding, and staging as required to permit the Owner's witness to
directly observe the performance of the equipment being tested.
3. Notify the Owner's Representative of commissioning schedule changes at least 48
hours in advance if an Owner's witness will be involved.
3.4 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
A. Review O&M Manuals related to commissioning in accordance with the requirements
indicated in Division 1
B. Incorporate the standard technical literature into a systems -specific document; concise; to
the point; and above all tailored specifically to this facility.
C. Obtain the equipment manufacturer's standard technical literature relevant to the operation
and maintenance of the provided equipment. The literature shall be specifically oriented to
the equipment provided, indicating all operation and maintenance procedures, parts lists,
assembly/disassembly diagrams, and related information. Wiring diagrams must be
complete and specific to the equipment provided.
D. Submit the draft document for review by the Owner's Representative, and Architect to
ensure completeness, proper written communications, and compliance with each
reviewer's knowledge of the significant requirements.
3.5 INSTALLATION VERIFICATION
A. During construction, observe the work of the prime Contractor and subcontractors to assure
that all installations are being made in accordance with the intent of the contract
documents.
B. Before system start-up begins, conduct a final installation verification audit. The Contractor
shall be responsible for completion of all work including change orders and punch list items
to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. The audit shall include, but not be limited
to, a check of:
0
I �
111
0
u
n
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 8 U
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
a
I
I
r
I
1. Piping specialties including balance, control, and isolation valves.
2. Ductwork specialty items including turning devices; balance, fire, smoke and control
dampers, Lab Airflow Control Dampers, and access doors.
3. Control sensor types and locations
4. Identification of piping, valves, starters, gauges, thermometers, etc.
5. Documentation of prestart-up tests performed, including manufacturer's factory tests.
6. Accessibility to equipment in 1-3 above.
C. If any work is found to be incomplete, inaccessible, incorrect, or non-functional, make note
of deficiencies and correct deficiencies before system start-up work proceeds.
3.6 SYSTEM START-UP
A. Develop a start-up plan. Commence with system start-up after approval has been given to
the start-up plan and the prestart-up inspection has been completed by the Test Engineer.
The Test Engineer shall witness system start-up and list all system and equipment
deficiencies noted during start-up. The Contractor shall take corrective action on all system
deficiencies noted and demonstrate to the Test Engineer suitable system operation. Notify
Architect of start-up activities schedule at least five working days in advance. Owner's
Representative and Commissioning Agent will physically witness start-up procedures. Test
Engineer shall obtain signature of the Owner's Representative and Commissioning Agent
indicating successful start-up.
3.7 START-UP DEFICIENCY LISTS
A. Prepare start-up deficiency list forms to report deficiencies discovered in conjunction with
system start-up. Start-up deficiency forms shall indicate the system being started -up; the
location and identification of the deficient equipment/material; date of observation; initials of
the observer; observed deficiency; date of correction; initials of person making the
correction; and corrective action taken.
B. Issue Start-up Deficiency Report Forms to the Contractor for corrective action, and to the
Owners Representative for follow-up. The Contractor shall advise the Test Engineer and
Owner's Representative when all start-up deficiency list items have been corrected.
3.8 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB)
A. Perform and coordinate air and hydronic balancing as required in 15042. Advise the TAB
firm when systems are complete and ready for balancing. Start TAB as early as possible
following systems start-ups and component functional performance tests, in order to be
essentially complete prior to system functional performance tests. Coordinate TAB activities
with other construction schedule activities.
B. Verify the accuracy of the TAB work prior to commencing any FPT activities, which may be
adversely affected by improper balancing.
3.9 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST PROCEDURES
A. Develop start-up procedures and functional performance test procedures and
documentation to be used. Personnel experienced in the technical aspects of each system
to be commissioned shall be engaged if necessary to augment the expertise of the Test
Engineer. Include functional performance test procedures and functional performance test
data sheets for each system based upon actual system configuration. Emphasis shall be
placed on testing procedures, which will conclusively determine actual system performance
and compliance with the design.
B. Test procedures shall fully describe system configuration and steps required for each test;
appropriately documented so that another party can repeat the tests with virtually identical
results.
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 9
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
C. Acceptance test procedures must confirm the performance of systems to the extent of the
design intent and applicable code under which the project was permitted. When a system is
accepted, the must be assured that the system is complete, works as intended is correctly
documented, and that the Owner's staff is trained in the operation and maintenance of the
system.
D. The majority of mechanical equipment requires integral safety devices to stop/prevent
equipment operation unless minimum safety standards or conditions are met. This could
include adequate oil pressure, proof -of -flow, non-freezing conditions, maximum head
pressure, etc. Functional performance test procedures shall demonstrate the actual
performance of safety shutoffs in real or closely simulated conditions of failure.
E. Systems may include safety devices and components that control a variety of equipment
operating as a system. Interlocks may be hard -wired or installed via software. Functional
performance test procedures shall demonstrate these interlocks.
F. Inform appropriate subcontractor(s) and vendor(s) before commissioning is started as to
what the test and expected results will be. Whereas some test results and interpretations
may not become evident until the actual tests are performed, all participants should have a
reasonable understanding of the requirements. The commissioning plan must address the
requirements and be distributed to all participants involved with that particular system.
3.10 REVIEW SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION
A. Review vendor/contractor provided detailed BAS software documentation. This includes
obtaining BAS program documentation, a review of the programming approach, interface
with other systems (e.g. lighting, fire alarm, security, clock, emergency generator
monitoring, sump pumps, and utility metering), and a review of the specific software
routines as applied to this project. Discrepancies in programming approaches will be
resolved to provide the Owner with the most appropriate, simple and straightforward
approach to software routines.
B. Provide copies of all of the preceding material, including electronic copes of all control
system software, to the Owner's Representative so that Owner's technical staff can
simulate system operation and troubleshoot the software.
3.11 TRAINING
A. Prepare and submit for approval a training plan. Training plan shall include for each training
session
1. Dates, start and finish times, and locations,
2. Outline of the information to be presented,
3. Names and qualifications of presenters,
4. List of texts and other materials required supporting training
5. Video of the training session (videotaping by CM)
B. Obtain assistance from appropriate subcontractors and vendors to provide training for the
Owner's operations staff as specified in Divisions 15, 16 and 17.
C. Provide videotape documentation of training of the Owner's staff for each system. Training
will be in a classroom setting with the appropriate schematics, handouts and audio/visual
training aids.
D. Catalog training videotapes and deliver to the Owner with the O&M manuals in accordance
with Divisions 15, 16 and 17.
E. Host each training session.
1. Provide program overview and curriculum guidance.
2. Obtain signatures of attendees on a sign -in list.
F. Equipment vendors provide training on the specifics of each system and philosophy,
troubleshooting, and repair techniques as specified in the relevant sections of this
specification.
G. Installation subcontractors provide training on peculiarities specific to this project and job
specific experience as specified in the relevant sections of this specification.
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 -10
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
3.12 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Review record documents to verify accuracy
3.13 FUNCTIONAL COMPLETION
A. The A/E and Owner's representative will review Contractor's records of completion of
Division 17 requirements. Upon receiving evidence of satisfactory completion of Functional
Completion requirements in Section 01700, the Test Engineer will submit to the Owner a
recommendation to accept Functional Completion.
3.14 EXCLUSIONS
A. The Owner's Representative and A/E are not responsible for construction means, methods,
job safety, or any management function related to commissioning on the job site.
(�[ B. The Contractor shall provide all technician services requiring tools or the use of tools to
�{ test, adjust or otherwise bring equipment into a full operational state.
END OF SECTION
ll
I
C
02092 COMMISSIONING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 17100 - 11
11/03 GUIDE SPECIFICATION
171
i
0
0
P
Fff
0
SECTION 17400
COMMISSIONING, PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to describe the commissioning process specific to the
plumbing systems and equipment.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Reference Section 17100 for primary commissioning requirements and responsibilities.
B. Reference Section 15995 for contractor requirements in support of the commissioning
process. Refer to Division 15 specifications and plans and contractor shop drawings for
system configuration and details of required construction.
C. Reference Section 15042 for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) requirements. TAB
shall be substantially complete before performing FPTs required in this section.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The CA shall provide all tools and equipment required.
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Engineer shall determine safety device check procedures.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION
A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required
systems configurations.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required
construction details, as they support and further define the systems features.
C. The Test Engineer shall make general inspections at the job site and shall review the
following for configuration, quality of construction, adherence to design requirements, and
conformance with shop drawings and submittal information.
1. Proper procedures are used for establishing the grades of grade -critical services such
as waste and vent lines.
2. Plumbing Fixtures set at proper location and height to meet the contract requirements
and satisfy accessibility standards.
3. Proper placement of all lab gas outlets to serve the casework and equipment, including
natural gas and RO outlets.
4. Tempering mixing valves providing tepid water to eyewash and emergency showers
are installed and adjusted by the CM.
5. Knee operated supplies are properly installed and easily operational.
6. Sump pumps serving elevator pits are installed properly with float controls, and high
level alarm
7. Water heaters are set to deliver the desired temperature.
02092 COMMISSIONING, PLUMBING SYSTEMS 17400 - 1
11 /03
8. Safety pop -off valves are installed at all water heater devices in accordance with code
requirements.
9. Isolation valves serving all laboratories are present and accessible.
10. Gas isolation and shutoff valves are present and operational
11. Gas piping is installed to meet code and contract requirements
12. Cleanouts in waste lines are accessible to clean out all portions of the waste system.
13. Vent termination at roof located to avoid entrainment in outside air supply.
14. All valves are properly tagged per the Marking and Identification specification.
15. All piping is clearly marked per the Marking and Identification specification.
16. Fixtures attached to the floor or wall — all joints shall be watertight.
17. Witness certified tests of all backflow prevention devices.
18. Unions are installed as required at all equipment to facilitate removal.
19. Emergency eye wash and deluge showers are properly labeled.
20. Roof drains and overflow drains are properly installed and connected, and are at the
proper elevation.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Witness and verify cleaning as described by Section 15402, Part 3.
3.3 TESTS
A. Piping System Leak Tests: Witness and verify pressure testing as described by Section
15070, Part 3.
3A EQUIPMENT SAFETY DEVICE CHECKS
A. To be determined by the Test Engineer.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. The primary purpose of this section is to witness and verify all of the sequence of
operations of the Plumbing Systems as specified herein and as shown on the "P" series
drawings.
B. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate as close to an
actual operating condition as possible. To that end the contractor shall provide all
necessary materials and temporary system modifications to simulate flows, pressures and
temperatures necessary to false load the system being tested in order to prove and verify
proper operation. Reliance on simulated signals from the DDC system or other indirect
indicators is not acceptable. At satisfactory completion of all verified tests, the building
system being tested shall be returned to the condition required by the contract documents
as a complete and operational system.
C. Demonstrate to the Owner's Representative successful execution of the following FPT's
(functional performance tests) in accordance with approved FPT procedures as described
in Test Procedures in this Section:
1. For each laboratory gas (natural gas), test each outlet for pressure and content to
ensure prevention of cross -connection. List outlets by name and location.
2. Tempering mixing valves providing tepid water to eyewash and emergency showers
shall be tested according to the following procedure:
a. Open both hot and cold supplies to the mixing valve, and operate the eyewash or
emergency shower. Record temperature vs. time plot to 2 minutes duration.
b. Close the cold water valve to approximately 50% open position and repeat test.
c. Open cold water valve fully and close hot water valve to 50% open position and
repeat the test.
I
I
1_1
0
0
L
hl
I
0
02092 COMMISSIONING, PLUMBING SYSTEMS 17400 - 2
11 /03
0
I I
i
L.
3. Water heaters: For each heater, perform the following tests:
a. Measure the discharge temperature of the water heating system by utilizing a
recording type thermometer at the supply of the heater.
b. Gradually open faucets in the system (full hot) until the GPM capacity of the heater
is reached.
c. Close faucets that are open, recording the results.
d. The temperature leaving each heater should not vary more than 5 deg. F. from
setpoint during the entire test.
4. Return circulators for hot water system:
a. Using a recording thermometer, measure the return water temperature at each
return circulator for a 24-hour period. The controls should start the pump when the
temperature in the return line drops below 110 deg. F.
b. For each lab, at a single sink per lab, record temperature vs. time for the hot water
being delivered to the sink. Start this test in the morning, before any sinks have
been turned on the previous evening. Hot water at design temperature should be
delivered at every sink within fifteen seconds.
5. Fixtures attached to the floor or wall: Grasp the fixture with both hands and forcibly
attempt to move the fixture. All fixtures shall be anchored securely where they are not
allowed to move, and shall be fully grouted to the floor or wall.
6. Backflow preventers: Perform certification tests required for backflow prevention.
3.6 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in this Section. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
conditions. List the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices and
acceptable results for each condition tested. Provide a unique alphanumeric identification
for each FPT procedure.
B. Submit for approval test procedure check -off sheets. Number each test procedure check -off
item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
Sign -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Commissioning Agent or other
Owner -designated witness.
END OF SECTION
02092 COMMISSIONING, PLUMBING SYSTEMS 17400 - 3
11 /03
SECTION 17410
DCOMMISSIONING, PURE WATER SYSTEMS AND PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to describe the commissioning process specific to the Pure
Water Systems.
a1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Reference Section 17100 for primary commissioning requirements and responsibilities.
a B. Reference Section 15995 for contractor requirements in support of the commissioning
process. Refer to Division 15 specifications and plans and contractor shop drawings for
system configuration and details of required construction.
C. Reference Section 15042 for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) requirements. TAB
j shall be substantially complete before performing FPTs required in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The CA shall provide all tools and equipment required.
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Test Engineer shall determine safety device check procedures.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION
A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required
systems configurations.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required
construction details, as they support and further define the systems features.
C. The Test Engineer shall make general inspections at the job site and shall review the
following for configuration, quality of construction, adherence to design requirements, and
conformance with shop drawings and submittal information.
1. All return lines from each lab shall be balanced to provide proportional flow such that all
circulation lines are proportionally balanced and adequate circulation is achieved.
2. Proper placement of all lab gas outlets to serve the casework and equipment, including
RO outlets.
3. Verify that cleaning procedures specified in Section 15080 have been accomplished.
4. Verify that the softener, filters, RO unit, and recirculating pumps have been installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
5. Verify that the pressure -reducing valve is properly set to maintain a minimum of 20 psi
to all outlets.
02092 COMMISSIONING, PURE WATER SYSTEMS AND PIPING 17410 - 1
11 /03
I
3.2 CLEANING
A. Witness and verify cleaning as described by Section 15080.
3.3 TESTS
A. Piping System Leak Tests: Witness and verify pressure testing as described by Section
15080, Part 3.
3.4 EQUIPMENT SAFETY DEVICE CHECKS
A. To be determined by the Test Engineer.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. The primary purpose of this section is to witness and verify all of the sequence of
operations of the pure water systems as specified herein and as shown on the "P" series
drawings.
B. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate as close to an
actual operating condition as possible. To that end the contractor shall provide all
necessary materials and temporary system modifications to simulate flows, pressures and
temperatures necessary to false load the system being tested in order to prove and verify
proper operation. Reliance on simulated signals from the DDC system or other indirect
indicators is not acceptable. At satisfactory completion of all verified tests, the building
system being tested shall be returned to the condition required by the contract documents
as a complete and operational system.
C. Demonstrate to the Owner's Representative successful execution of the following FPT's
(functional performance tests) in accordance with approved FPT procedures as described
in Test Procedures in this Section:
1. For each laboratory outlet, verify adequate pressure.
2. For the RO Unit, verify that the inlet makeup is adequate.
a. Check the pressure and flow rate available from the makeup system, which
consists of the softener and carbon filter.
b. Set the timer on the water softener such that the unit is regenerated between 1:00
am and 5:00 am.
3. For the RO unit, verify that the effluent and product rates are adequate.
a. Measure the effluent discharge from the RO unit to ensure that the backwash
function of the unit is properly set. Adjust the unit such that the effluent discharge
(and product discharge) is consistent with the unit rating.
4. For the RO unit, verify that the quality of the water is consistent with the rating.
a. At outlets in two laboratories on each floor (one at each end of each wing), collect a
sample of the water. The sample shall be analyzed for impurities, including
bacteria. The conductivity of the water shall be measured.
b. Provide water analysis report for each outlet tested. The quality shall be consistent
with Reagent grade II specifications.
5. For the makeup float valve in the storage tanks, verify that the RO unit is responding to
a call for RO generation.
a. Drain the RO storage tanks to the low (makeup) level of the system. Verify that
makeup of RO water from the RO unit is occurring. Record the time required for
the float mechanism to reach the high (shutoff) level.
6. Verify that the RO pumps are performing to their rating.
a. Perform a dead-end shutoff test on these pumps.
b. With the system completely balanced, mark the submitted pump curve to actual
operation condition.
7. Verify that the Biological UV filters are performing to their rating.
a. Witness the startup of these units.
I
fJ
02092 COMMISSIONING, PURE WATER SYSTEMS AND PIPING 17410 - 2
11 /03
C
b. Verify that an and all manufacturer recommendations and settings are correct
Y
prior to acceptance.
3.6 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in this Section. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
7 conditions. List the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices and
I acceptable results for each condition tested. Provide a unique alphanumeric identification
for each FPT procedure.
B. Submit for approval test procedure check -off sheets. Number each test procedure check -off
a item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
Sign -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Commissioning Agent or other
Owner -designated witness.
r
END OF SECTION
02092 COMMISSIONING, PURE WATER SYSTEMS AND PIPING 17410 - 3
11 /03
SECTION 17500
COMMISSIONING, HVAC SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
iA. The purpose of this section is to describe the general commissioning process specific to
l the HVAC systems and equipment. HVAC systems include hot water heating, chilled water,
steam/condensate, supply air and exhaust air systems.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Reference Sections 15042, 15920, 15995, 16995, 16995 and 17100 for primary
` commissioning requirements and responsibilities.
B. Reference Section 15995 specifications for specific mechanical contractor related work and
Divisions 15 and 16 for overall subcontractor requirements. Section 17500 is the overall
a requirement for HVAC commissioning, whereas other sections relate to specific procedures
relative to supply air, exhaust air, hot water heating, central cooling water, steam and
condensate, and environmental control systems, etc. Refer to Sections in the 17400 and
17500 series.
C. Refer to Section 15042 for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) requirements. TAB shall
be substantially complete before performing FPTs required in this section.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Section 15042 for tools and equipment required. The CA shall provide all
necessary test equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION
A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required
systems configurations.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required
construction details, as they support and further define the systems features.
C. Make general inspections at the job site and review the following configuration, quality of
construction, adherence to design requirements, and conformance with shop drawings and
submittal information.
D. The Test Engineer shall provide periodic observations of the HVAC systems equipment,
ductwork, and piping systems as constructed. Observations shall commence with arrival of
major components on the job site, and continue through the construction phase and into
the start-up phases of work. In addition to general observation services, the Test Engineer
will make note of, or obtain, the following specific system features:
1. Prime Movers/Major Equipment:
[ a. Fans, Pumps, Air Units, Condensing Units, Boilers:
(1) Condition of equipment as delivered/installed
(2) Equipment data/compliance with specifications and shop drawings
(3) Performance curves
02092 COMMISSIONING, HVAC SYSTEMS 17500-1
11/03
(4) Installation per design documents
2. Accessories:
a. Supply and Exhaust Air Systems:
(1) Balancing dampers/fit and integrity
(2) Fire dampers/fit and integrity
(3) Control dampers/fit and integrity
(4) Isolation dampers/fit and integrity
b. Chilled and Hot Water Systems:
(1) Balance cocks/location and accessibility
(2) Flow stations/location and accessibility
(3) Strainers/location and accessibility and strainer mesh
(4) Isolation valves/location and accessibility
(5) Control valves/location and accessibility
3. Distribution Systems:
a. Duct:
(1) Size and configuration
(2) Fittings/transitions and takeoffs
(3) Seams and joints/integrity and sealing
(4) Hangers and bracing. Connections
(5) Sealing/sealers and joints
(6) Thickness per specifications/SMACNA standards
b. Pipe:
(1) Size and configuration
(2) Fittings
(3) Connections
(4) Hangers and bracing
(5) Materials per specifications
4. Terminal Units:
a. Lab Airflow Control Dampers:
(1) Number, size configuration per plans and specifications
(2) Controls components and configurations
b. Coils:
(1) Supply and return piping connections
(2) Ductwork transitions
(3) Sealing of ducts penetrations
(4) Fin integrity and straightness
5. Controls:
a. Components and configurations per shop drawings
b. Organization and layout of control panels
c. Sensors in proper locations
d. Wiring and pneumatic piping per specifications
e. Labeling and identification/all components, wiring, and piping
3.2 CLEANING
A. See individual subsections. Witness and verify that all systems and equipment have been
cleaned per the requirements of the contract documents.
3.3 EQUIPMENT SAFETY DEVICE CHECKS
A. See individual system commissioning procedures. Submit for approval safety device check
procedures in accord with manufacturer's recommended start-up instructions.
I
I
I
III
I
11
02092 COMMISSIONING, HVAC SYSTEMS 17500 - 2 U
11 /03
r�
3.4 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
8 A. The primary purpose of this section is to witness and verify all of the sequence of
operations of the systems shown on the mechanical drawings and additionally called for in
the specification section 15900 of the contract documents. Verify that all points called for in
a the point chart are installed and functional.
B. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions, which simulate as close to an
actual condition as possible. To that end, the Contractor shall provide al necessary
materials and temporary system modifications to provide flows, pressures, temperatures,
etc necessary to false load the system being tested in order to prove and verify proper
operation. Reliance on simulated signals from the DDC system or other indirect indicators
is not acceptable. At satisfactory completion of all verified tests, the building system being
tested shall be returned to the condition required by the contract documents as complete
and operational systems.
C. Demonstrate to the Owner's Representative successful execution of the following FPTs
(functional performance tests) in accordance with approved FPT procedures as described
in Test Procedures in this Section.
D. See Section 17510 for testing of the Supply Air Systems and 17520 for testing of Exhaust
Air Systems. It is the intent of this section to test any air -based systems and functions,
which have not been tested in the other sections. See Sections 17510, 17520 and 17560
for requirements.
E. Generic Laboratory with CV, EV, HV and Reheat Coils:
1. Generic Laboratory with FVAV and FCU - Simultaneous Heating and Cooling:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: CV/RHC's, their associated piping, distribution,
and controls. A random selection of 10% of the spaces shall be tested. Failure of
any randomly selected system in the first set, shall require an additional equally
selected quantity to be tested. Failure of any of the second set shall result in all
remaining systems to be tested. Retest all failed systems until passed. These tests
may be performed in conjunction with section 17510.
b. Functions to be Tested: Proper lab air pressure.
c. Conditions of the Test: The space shall be "cooled" to 50°F. Monitor and record
operation of primary air flow at each box, primary air temperature, control valve
position, entering and leaving water temperatures, leaving air temperature; fan coil
fan operation, cooling coil valve position, entering and leaving water temperatures,
and room temperature. "Heat" the space to 850F and test cooling cycle.
d. Acceptable Results: The space operates per the control sequence with
simultaneous heating and cooling without deviating from the specified pressure
relationships. Monitor and record each mode for 20 minutes.
3.5 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in this Section. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
conditions. List the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices and
acceptable results for each condition tested. Provide a unique alphanumeric identification
for each FPT procedure.
B. Submit for approval test procedure check -off sheets. Number each test procedure check -off
L item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
r Sign -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Owner -designated witness.
END OF SECTION
02092 COMMISSIONING, HVAC SYSTEMS 17500 - 3
11 /03
121
SECTION 17510
COMMISSIONING, SUPPLY AIR SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to describe the commissioning process specific to the supply
air systems and equipment.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Reference Sections 17100 and 17110 for primary commissioning requirements and
responsibilities.
B. Reference Section 15995 for contractor requirements in support of the commissioning
process. Refer to Division 15 specifications and plans and contractor shop drawings for
system configuration and details of required construction.
C. Reference Section 17595 for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) requirements. TAB
shall be substantially complete before performing FPTs required in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Section 17595 for tools and equipment required. The Contractor shall provide all
necessary test equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION
` A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required
systems configurations.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required
construction details, as they support and further define the systems features.
C. Make general inspections at the job site and shall review the following for configuration,
{ quality of construction, adherence to design requirements, and conformance with shop
1 drawings and submittal information.
D. The Test Engineer shall provide periodic observations of the HVAC systems equipment,
ductwork, and piping systems as constructed. Observations shall commence with arrival of
major components on the job site, and continue through the construction phases and into
the start-up phases of work. In addition to general observation services, the Test Engineer
will specifically observe the following specific system features:
1. Prime Movers/Major Equipment:
' a. Fans:
(1) Conditions of equipment as delivered/installed/damage/cleanliness
(2) Equipment data/compliance with specifications and shop drawings
(3) Performance curves/configuration per submitted documents
(4) Installation per design documents/plans and specifications
(5) Equipment mounting and anchoring devices
(6) Vibration isolation devices
02092 COMMISSIONING, SUPPLY AIR SYSTEMS 17510 - 1
11 /03
b. Accessories/Supply Air Systems:
(1) Balancing dampers/fit and integrity/locking quadrants
(2) Fire dampers/fit and integrity/fusible links
(3) Control dampers/fit and integrity/seals/linkage/motor mounting
(4) Smoke dampers/fit and integrity/linkage motor mounting
(5) Isolation dampers/fit and integrity/seals/linkage/motor mounting.
c. Distribution Systems/Ductwork:
(1) Size and configuration
(2) Fittings/transitions and takeoffs
(3) Seams and joints/integrity and sealing
(4) Hangers and bracing
(5) Flexible connections
(6) Sealing/sealers and joints
(7) Thickness per specifications/SMACNA standards
(8) Lining (if applicable) per SMACNA standards
d. Terminal Units:
(1) Air Terminal/Boxes:
(a) Number, size configuration per plans and specifications
(b) Balance dampers (if applicable)
(c) Controls components and configurations
(d) Entrance and exit conditions per requirements
(e) Sound attenuation per plans and specifications
(f) Entrance conditions to box/length of straight runs
e. Coils:
(1) Components and configurations per shop drawings
(2) Organization and layout of control panels
(3) Sensors in proper locations
(4) Wiring and pneumatic piping per specifications
(5) Labeling and identification/all components, wiring, and piping.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent shall witness and verify. See Division 15
requirements.
3.3 TESTS
A. Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent shall witness and verify tests performed under
Section 15810.
3.4 EQUIPMENT SAFETY DEVICE CHECKS
A. Submit for approval safety device check procedures in accord with manufacturers'
recommended start-up instructions.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. The primary purpose of this section is to witness and verify all of the sequence of
operations of the supply air systems shown on the M9 drawings and additionally called for
in the specification section 15900 of the contract documents; and equipment capacities
submitted. Provide trend logs for each test, recording data every 2 minutes.
B. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions, which simulate as close to an
actual condition as possible. To that end, the Contractor shall provide al necessary
materials and temporary system modifications to provide flows, pressures, temperatures,
etc necessary to false load the system being tested in order to prove and verify proper
operation. Reliance on simulated signals from the DDC system or other indirect indicators
I �
Lfi
it
I I
I
0
I
U
02092 COMMISSIONING, SUPPLY AIR SYSTEMS 17510 - 2
11 /03
1
j is not acceptable. At satisfactory completion of all verified tests, the building system being
tested shall be returned to the condition required by the contract documents as a complete
and operational system.
C. Demonstrate to the Owner's Representative successful execution of the following FPTs
(functional performance tests) in accordance with approved FPT procedures as described
in Test Procedures in this Section.
D. Air Handling Units:
1. Air Handling Units - Mixed Air Monitoring:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All units and fans and their associated air
distribution, piping and control systems.
b. Functions to be Tested: air flow maintenance.
c. Conditions of the Test: all makeup air being provided, and exhaust flows being
a maintained at low speed and high speed.
2. Air Handling Units - Cooling and Heating Coil Capacity and Control:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All units and fans, and their associated control
systems.
b. Functions to be Tested: capacity of the heating and cooling coils.
c. Conditions of the Test: the mixed air temperature is equal to the scheduled
entering cooling coil condition. Measure and record leaving heating and cooling coil
a temperatures, humidifier status and output, room temperature and relative humidity
for a period of 20 minutes; repeat test while increasing coil entering conditions by
40F DBT and maintain 40% relative humidity. Monitor and record leaving coil
conditions and room conditions (dry and wet bulb), air flow, entering air
temperature (dry bulb and wet bulb) valve positions, water flow, air differential
pressure, heater water flow, humidifier output, makeup air temperature, fan
horsepower, discharge static pressure, face and bypass damper positions. Test
system at 100% 75%, 50% and 25% cooling load. Check dehumidification capacity
by increasing space humidity level to 65% and then changing setpoint to 40% while
maintaining dry bulb setpoint. Contractor shall provide load during test conditions.
d. Acceptable Results: coils provide the scheduled/submitted capacities at design
conditions 100% air flow, and supply air temperature (t0.50F) and humidity is
maintained throughout the test (t2%).
3. Air Handling Units - Humidity Control:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All units and fans, and their associated control
systems.
b. Functions to be Tested: capacity and control of steam humidifiers.
c. Conditions of the Test: the mixed air temperature is equal to the scheduled
entering air condition at humidifiers, set room setpoint to 68°F, 40% RH.; measure
and record air flow, leaving heating and cooling coil temperatures (dry bulb and wet
bulb); calculate % RH; humidifier status and output, room temperature (dry bulb
and wet bulb); calculate relative humidity for a period of 20 minutes. Repeat test
while increasing room setpoint in 20F DBT increments while maintaining 40%
relative humidity. Test system up to 78°F, 40% RH. Test high limit alarm by calling
for high humidity (with internal source of humidity if necessary).
d. Acceptable Results: coils provide the scheduled/submitted capacities at design
conditions 100% air flow, and room setpoint humidity level is maintained within
design tolerances. Confirm activation of high limit alarm.
4. Air Handling Units - Automatic Fire Alarm Operation:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All units and fans, their associated air distribution
and control systems and variable speed drives and fire alarm system. This test
shall be performed in conjunction with Division 17800.
b. Functions to be Tested: stopping of supply air fans as per control drawings.
c. Conditions of the Test: begin the test with all the associated fans of the system (as
described on the control diagrams) "ON". Activate AHU smoke detector.
a d. Acceptable Results: the control system is confirmed. Reset AHU operation. Record
events.
Q 02092 COMMISSIONING, SUPPLY AIR SYSTEMS 17510 - 3
11 /03
0
5. Air Handling Units - Supply Fan Tracking Control and Exhaust Fan Control:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All units and fans, their associated air distribution
and control systems and variable speed drives.
b. Functions to be Tested: modulation of the fan speeds as filter loads build up.
c. Conditions of the Test: begin the test with clean prefilters and final filters; monitor
and record pressure drops, supply air volume and fan speed. Reduce face area
across each prefilter (cover with card board) until differential pressure equals
scheduled "final' pressure condition is achieved; monitor and record pressure
drops, air volumes, fan horsepower, discharge static pressure (before and after)
and fan speed for 20 minutes.
d. Acceptable Results: The fan speed alters to provide constant air volume. Verify
dirty filter alarm.
6. Air Handling Units - Loss of Control Power:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All units and fans, their associated air distribution
and control systems.
b. Functions to be Tested: fail safe position of control dampers and valves when
control power is lost at panel and the return to normal operation once power is
restored.
c. Conditions of the Test: begin the test with all systems operating; disengage control
power.
d. Acceptable Results: drives, valves and dampers fail to their "safe" positions.
Restore power and monitor their return to "normal'
7. Air Handling Units - Loss of Power:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All units and fans, their associated air distribution
and control systems.
b. Functions to be Tested: shutdown of the unit in an emergency power mode and its
return to normal operation once power is restored.
c. Conditions of the Test: begin the test with all systems operating; disengage power,
switch to emergency power and then restore normal power.
d. Acceptable Results: Unit cycles off, per the control sequence, outside air dampers
close; and return to normal operation upon power restoration.
E. Electric/Mechanical Room Supply Fans:
1. Electric/Mechanical Room Supply Fans - Temperature Control:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All fans and their associated air distribution and
control systems.
b. Functions to be Tested: Activation of fans and opening of outside air dampers in
order to maintain space temperature setpoint.
c. Conditions of the Test: prior to beginning the test each space shall be heated to
92°F, the outside air temperature shall be 60OF or less. Monitor and record fan
operation and space temperature for one entire cycle, including; cooling to 70°F,
and then rewarming to 90°F. Provide heat source as necessary.
d. Acceptable Results: dampers and fans cycle to control space temperature (+2°F)
per the control sequences, confirm alarm condition.
2. Electric/Mechanical Room Exhaust Fans - Supply Fan/Exhaust Fan Interlock:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All fans and their associated air distribution and
control systems.
b. Functions to be Tested: confirm interlock function between supply fans and their
associated exhaust fans.
c. Conditions of the Test: begin the test with all the associated fans of the system (as
described on the control diagrams) "ON". Repeat test for each fan.
d. Acceptable Results: the unit confirms the interlock function when each of the fans
is individually shut off while the remaining are "ON".
3. Electric/Mechanical Room Supply Fans - Loss of Control Power:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested: All fans and their associated air distribution and
control systems.
If
I
I
02092 COMMISSIONING, SUPPLY AIR SYSTEMS 17510 - 4
11 /03
0
�i
b. Functions to be Tested: fail safe position of control dampers when control power is
lost; and the return to "normal" operation once power is restored.
f c. Conditions of the Test: begin the test with all systems operating; disengage control
l power.
d. Acceptable Results: dampers fail to their "safe" positions and return to normal
j operation upon restoration of power.
u 3.6 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in this Section. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
conditions. List the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices and
acceptable results for each condition tested. Provide a unique alphanumeric identification
for each FPT procedure.
B. Submit for approval test procedure check -off sheets. Number each test procedure check -off
item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
Sign -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Commissioning Agent or other
8 Owner -designated witness.
END OF SECTION
c
C.
02092 COMMISSIONING, SUPPLY AIR SYSTEMS 17510 - 5
11 /03
SECTION 17520
COMMISSIONING, EXHAUST AIR SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to describe the commissioning process specific to the
exhaust air systems and equipment.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Reference Sections 17100 and 17500 for primary commissioning requirements and
responsibilities.
B. Reference Section 15995 for contractor requirements in support of the commissioning
process. Refer to Division 15 specifications and plans and contractor shop drawings for
system configuration and details of required construction.
C. Reference Section 17042 for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) requirements. TAB
shall be substantially complete before performing FPT's required in this section.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Section 15042 for tools and equipment required. The CA shall provide all
necessary test equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 COSTRUCTION OBSERVATION
A. Obtain and review design document s for overall design intent and the overall required
systems configurations.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required
construction details, as they support and further define the systems features.
C. The Test Engineer shall make general inspections at the job site and shall review the
following for configuration, quality of construction, adherence to design requirements, and
conformance with shop drawings and submittal information.
D. The Test Engineer shall provide periodic observation of the HVAC systems equipment,
ductwork, and piping systems as constructed. Observations shall commence with the
arrival of major components on the job site, and continue through the construction phase
and into the start-up phases of work. In addition to general observation services, the Test
Engineer will specifically observe the following specific system features:
1. Prime Movers/ Major Equipment:
a. Fans:
(1) Conditions of equipment as delivered/ installed/ damage/ cleanliness
(2) Equipment data/ compliance with specifications and shop drawings
(3) Performance curves/ configuration per submitted documents
(4) Installation per design documents/ plans and specifications
(5) Equipment mounting and anchoring devices
(6) Vibration isolation devices
02092 COMMISSIONING, EXHAUST AIR SYSTEMS 17520 -1
11 /03
2. Accessories/ Exhaust Air Systems:
a. Balancing dampers/ fit and integrity/ locking quadrants
b. Fire dampers/ fit and integrity/ fusible links
c. Control dampers/ fit and integrity/ linkage/ motor mounting
d. Smoke dampers/ fit and integrity/ linkage/ motor mounting
e. Isolation dampers/ fit and integrity/ seals/ linkage/ motor mounting
3. Distribution Systems/ Ductwork:
a. Size and configuration
b. Fittings/ transitions and takeoffs
c. Seams and joints/ integrity and sealing
d. Hangers and bracing
e. Flexible connections
f. Sealing/ sealers and joints
g. Thickness per specifications/ SMACNA standards
h. Lining (if applicable) per SMACNA standards
4. Terminal Units:
a. Air Terminal/ Boxes:
b. Number; size configuration per plans and specifications
c. Balance dampers (if applicable)
d. Controls components and configurations
e. Entrance and exit conditions per requirements
f. Sound attenuation per plans and specifications
g. Entrance conditions to box/ length of straight runs
3.2 CLEANING
A. Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent shall witness and verify
requirements.
3.3 TESTS
A. Test Engineer and Commissioning Agent shall witness and verify
requirements.
3.4 EQUIPMENT SAFETY DWEVICE CHECKS
See Division 15
See Division 15
A. Insure interlocks operate per design requirements.
B. The majority of mechanical equipment requires integral safety devices to stop/prevent
equipment operation unless minimum safety standards or conditions are met. This could
include supply fan interlocks, fume hood exhaust fan interlocks, proof -of -flow, etc. The
Test Engineer must observe the actual performance of safety shutoffs in a real or closely
simulated condition of failure.
C. Systems may include safety devices and components that control a variety of equipment
operating as a system. Interlocks may be hardwired or installed via software. These
interlocks shall also be verified by the Test Engineer. Refer to design documents for
required interlocks and test each as required.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. Demonstrate to the Owner's Representative successful execution of the following FPTs
(functional performance tests) in accordance with approved FPT procedures as described
in Test Procedures in this Section.
3.6 EXHAUST AIR CONSTANT VOLUME UNITS (EV and HV)
A. Exhaust Constant Air Volume Boxes (EV and HV) —Tracking of Supply Air
02092 COMMISSIONING, EXHAUST AIR SYSTEMS 17520 - 2
11 /03 0
1. System/Equipment to be Tested: Exhaust constant air volume boxes, their associated
supply air systems, controls, snorkel exhaust systems, laboratory exhaust and fume
hoods.
2. Functions to be tested: Differential airflows are maintained within individual
laboratories.
3. Conditions of the Test: All air systems within the space being tested are operational,
doors to the spaces are closed, monitor and record operation of air flow from the all EV
and HV within the laboratory for 20 minutes during both occupied and unoccupied
modes.
4. Acceptable Results: Differential airflows are maintained within the space proven by a
smoke bomb. Pressure relationships are maintained within individual laboratories.
B. Exhaust Constant Air Volume Units — Control Power and Normal Power Failure
1. System/Equipment to be Tested: Exhaust and supply constant volume units (EV, HV
and SV), air distribution and associated control systems. All exhaust boxes shall be
tested.
2. Functions to be Tested: proper operation of constant volume EV, HV and SV under
power failure condition and control power failure.
3. Conditions of the Test: begin the test with all Systems operating, disengage control
power and normal power
4. Acceptable Results: Dampers recover from momentary power outage and maintain
pressure relationship under emergency power conditions.
3.7 EXHAUST FANS — EF-1 and EF-2
A. Exhaust Fans — Backup
1. System/Equipment to be Tested: EF-1 and EF-2 and their associated air distribution
and control systems. Each fan shall be tested in the "lead" position.
2. Functions to be Tested: Automatic switch over of back up fans.
3. Conditions of the Test: Both fans shall be operational. Power to the lead shall be
disrupted at disconnect.
4. Acceptable Results: The fans operate per the control sequence and all alarm
conditions are confirmed.
B. Exhaust Fans — Control Power Failure
1. System/Equipment to be Tested: EF-1 and EF-2, air distribution and associated control
systems. Each fan shall be tested.
2. Functions to be Tested: Fail safe position of control dampers, operation of fans when
control power is lost.
3. Conditions of the Test: Begin the test with all systems operating; disengage control
power.
4. Acceptable Results: Dampers fail to their "safe" positions and fans operate per the
specifications.
C. Exhaust Fans — Power Failure
1. System/Equipment to be Tested: EF-1 and EF-2 and their associated air distribution
and control systems.
2. Functions to be Tested: Operation of the fans in emergency power mode and
continuation of operation once power is restored.
3. Conditions of the Test: Begin the test with all systems operating; disengage Normal
power.
4. Acceptable Results: Fans operate per the specifications.
3.8 OTHER EXHAUST FANS
A. Exhaust Fans — Control Power Failure
1. System/Equipment to be Tested: EF-3, 4, 5 and SF-1, air distribution and associated
control systems.
2. Functions to be Tested: Operation of fans when control power is lost.
02092 COMMISSIONING, EXHAUST AIR SYSTEMS
11 /03
17520 - 3
3. Conditions of the Test: Begin the test with all systems operating; disengage control
power.
4. Acceptable Results: fans operate per the specifications.
B. Exhaust Fans — Power Failure
1. System/Equipment to be Tested: EF-3, 4, 5 and SF-1, and their associated air
distribution and control systems.
2. Functions to be Tested: Fan shutdown in an emergency power mode and their return to
operation once power is restored.
3. Condition of the Test: Begin the test with all systems operating; disengage power.
4. Acceptable results: Fans return to operation per the specifications.
3.9 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in the Section. FPT procedure shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
conditions. List the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices and
acceptable results for each condition tested. Provide a unique alphanumeric identification
for each FPT procedure.
B. Submit for approval test procedure check -off sheet. Number each test procedure check -off
item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
Sign -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Commissioning Agent or other
Owner -designated witness.
END OF SECTION
02092 COMMISSIONING, EXHAUST AIR SYSTEMS 17520 - 4
11 /03
SECTION 17530
COMMISSIONING, HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS GUIDE SPECIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to describe the commissioning process specific to the hot
water heating systems and equipment.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Reference Section 17100 for primary commissioning requirements and responsibilities.
B. Reference Section 15995 for contractor requirements in support of the commissioning
process. Refer to Division 15 specifications and plans and contractor shop drawings for
system configuration and details of required construction.
C. Reference Section 15042 for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) requirements. TAB
q shall be substantially complete before performing FPTs required in this section.
TZAaM739Ioil Z4&&I
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Section 15042 for tools and equipment required.
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Submit for approval safety device check procedures in accord with manufacturers'
recommended start-up instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION
A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required
systems configurations.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required
construction details, as they support and further define the systems features.
C. The Test Engineer shall make general inspections at the job site and shall review the
following for configuration, quality of construction, adherence to design requirements, and
4 conformance with shop drawings and submittal information.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Witness and verify cleaning as described by Section 15700, Part 3.
3.3 TESTS
A. Piping System Leak Tests: Witness and verify pressure testing as described by Section
15090, Part 3.
02092 COMMISSIONING, HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS 17530 -1
11/03
3.4 EQUIPMENT SAFETY DEVICE CHECKS
A. To be determined by the Test Engineer.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. The primary purpose of this section is to witness and verify all of the sequence of
operations of the Heating Hot Water called for in the specifications.
B. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions, which simulate as close to an
actual operating condition as possible. To that end the contractor shall provide all
necessary materials and temporary system modifications to simulate flows, pressures and
temperatures necessary to false load the system being tested in order to prove and verify
proper operation. Reliance on simulated signals from the DDC system or other indirect
indicators is not acceptable. At satisfactory completion of all verified tests, the building
system being tested shall be returned to the condition required by the contract documents
as a complete and operational system.
C. Demonstrate to the Owner's Representative successful execution of the following FPT's
(functional performance tests) in accordance with approved FPT procedures as described
in Test Procedures in this Section:
1. Primary Hot Water Loop:
a. System Equipment to be Tested:
(1) Primary hot water pumps, HWP- 1 and 2.
(2) Associated controls.
b. Functions to be Tested:
(1) Pump sequencing upon failure of lead pump.
(2) Converter heat exchanger capacity at full load and steam control valve
sequencing as load varies.
(3) Pressure and Temperature monitoring.
(4) Loss of control power: fail safe position of valves when control power is lost,
and return to normal operation once power is restored.
c. Conditions of the Test: With HWP- 1 operating as the lead pump, open the lead
pump electrical disconnect.
d. Repeat test with HWP-2 operating as the lead pump.
e. Acceptable Results:
(1) Primary pumps, HWP-1 and HWP-2 operate as the lead pumps. Failure of
HWP-1 or HWP-2 to operate results in the other to automatically assume the
lead pump position.
(2) Boiler Maintain leaving water temperature required over entire range of reset
schedule from minimal load to maximum load and back to minimal load.
Demonstrate outdoor reset by simulating outdoor air temperature sensed.
(3) All control valves, temperature sensors and pressure sensors function per
design parameters. DDC accurately reads (t0.5% of independently measured
reading) each monitoring point over full range of test. Verify with print out for
each monitoring point at each 10% increment.
(4) Loss of control power: valves fail to their "safe" positions. Once power is
restored, automatic control resumes and all control functions required by the
sequence of operations are verified
3.6 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in this Section. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
conditions. List the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices and
acceptable results for each condition tested. Provide a unique alpha -numeric identification
for each FPT procedure.
in
III
0
0,
U
02092 COMMISSIONING, HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS 17530 - 2 r ,
11 /03 jj J�
} B. Submit fora approval test procedure check -off sheets. Number each test procedure check -off
PP P
item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
Sign -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Commissioning Agent or other
Owner -designated witness.
I
I
0
0
P
END OF SECTION
02092 COMMISSIONING, HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEMS 17530 - 3
11 /03
F.,
r
1
SECTION 17540 - COMMISSIONING CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The purpose of this section is to describe the commissioning process specific to the chilled
water system and equipment.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Reference Sections 15700, and 17100 for primary commissioning requirements and
responsibilities.
B. Reference Section 15995 for contractor requirements in support of the commissioning
process. Refer to Division 15 specifications and plans and contractor shop drawings for
system configuration and details of required construction.
C. Reference Section 15042 for testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) requirements. TAB
shall be substantially complete before performing FPTs required in this section.
D. The chiller shall be started by a factory -authorized agent. The Commissioning Agent shall
witness this process and shall provide documentation.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. The CA shall provide all necessary test equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION
A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required
systems configurations.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required
construction details, as they support and further define the systems features.
C. Make general inspections at the job site and review the following for configuration, quality
of construction, adherence to design requirements, and conformance with shop drawings
and submittal information.
1. Risers: Support, proper fittings, sizes and materials.
2. Lateral lines: Support fittings, materials and sizes.
3. Coil Connections: Proper piping connections at chilled water coils.
D. Each system and all components shall be installed per construction documents, or per
approved changes and in accordance with the reline drawings.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Witness and verify cleaning as described by Section 15090.
11 3.3 TESTS
A. Piping System Leak Tests: Witness and verify pressure testing as described by Section
15090, PART 3.
02092 COMMISSIONING, CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS 17540 - 1
11 /03
3.4 EQUIPMENT SAFETY DEVICE CHECKS
A. Submit for approval safety device check procedures in accord with manufacturers'
recommended start-up instructions.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. The primary purpose of this section is to witness and verify all of the sequence of
operations of the CHILLED WATER COOLING SYSTEM shown on the drawings and called
for in the specifications.
B. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions, which simulate as close to an
actual operating condition as possible. To that end the contractor shall provide all
necessary materials and temporary system modifications to simulate flows, pressures and
temperatures necessary to false load the system being tested in order to prove and verify
proper operation. Reliance on simulated signals from the DDC system or other indirect
indicators is not acceptable. At satisfactory completion of all verified tests, the building
system being tested shall be returned to the condition required by the contract documents
as a complete and operational system.
C. Demonstrate to the Owner's Representative successful execution of the following FPT's
(functional performance tests) in accordance with approved FPT procedures as described
in Test Procedures in this Section:
1. Pump Control Sequence:
a. System/Equipment to be Tested:
(1) Secondary Chilled water pumps:
(a) CHP-1
(b) CHP-2
(c) CHP-3
b. Function to be Tested: Response of pump operation from HVAC control system.
c. Conditions of Test: Upon a command from the HVAC control system, verify the
following events occur in sequence:
(1) Verify pump interlocks are established between respective air handlers and
chilled water circulating pumps.
(2) Verify secondary pumps perform as follows:
(a) Pumps CHP-1 or 2 operate as the lead pumps.
(b) The lead pump is operating continuously.
(c) The lag pump is off and is in standby mode.
(d) The lead pump is stopped by the DDC system when the pump's
respective current transformer senses a no flow condition and the lag
pump is started.
(e) An alarm signal has been received by the DDC system indicating failure
of a lead pump.
(f) The log pump is commanded to start.
(3) Emergency Power: Pumps designated to run on emergency power shall be
tested and verified that they maintain same control and operating functions as
if they were on normal power.
d. Acceptable Results:
(1) Alarm is received by the DDC system for each primary pump if a no flow
condition exists when pump is supposed to be on.
(2) All pump motors start as programmed by the DDC system after a power
interruption is restored. Maximum restart shall not exceed 6 minutes.
(3) CHP-1 is on and operates as the lead pump, CHP-2 is off.
(4) The lead secondary pump stops when a no flow conditions is sensed. An alarm
signal is received by the DDC system indicating failure of a lead pump.
(5) The backup pump is started to provide flow.
(6) All systems required to function on emergency power operate properly.
11
�I
I
I
02092 COMMISSIONING, CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS 17540 - 2
11 /03
U
F
3.6 TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in this Section. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
conditions. List the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices and
acceptable results for each condition tested. Provide a unique alpha -numeric identification
for each FPT procedure.
B. Submit for approval test procedure check -off sheets. Number each test procedure check -off
item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
Sign -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Commissioning Agent or other
Owner -designated witness.
END OF SECTION
02092 COMMISSIONING, CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS 17540 - 3
11 /03
0
C
F
SECTION 17600
COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide commissioning and testing of the electrical systems.
B. Provide electrical Power System Studies
C. Test and provide written certification that the entire electrical installation complies with
contract documents, code and proper system operation. Perform acceptance tests in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, NFPA 70B and International Electrical
Testing Association (NETA) testing specifications NETA ATS-1991. It is the intent of the
acceptance tests to assure that all electrical equipment, both Contractor and Owner
supplied, is operational and within industry manufacturer's tolerances, complies with all
applicable codes, and is installed in accordance with design specifications.
D. Electrical Testing Company. The following testing shall be performed by a third party ETC
(Electrical Testing Company):
1. Service Grounding Test
2. Automatic Transfer Switch Test & Calibration
3. Switchboards, Switchgear
4. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers
5. Power System Protective Device, Calibration
6. Variable Frequency Drives
7. Infrared Thermographic Scanning
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Reference Sections 01650 and 17100 for primary
responsibilities.
B. Reference Section 16995 for contractor requirements
process. Refer to Division 16 specifications and plans
system configuration and details of required construction
1.3 TEST PERFORMANCE RESPONSIBILITY
commissioning requirements and
in support of the commissioning
and contractor shop drawings for
A. The Test Engineer shall be responsible for the performance of all specified installation and
commissioning tests.
B. The Test Engineer shall hire the services of a third party, ETC (Electrical Testing Company)
to inspect and test all electrical equipment systems as specified in 17600 1.1 C above and
other specialized equipment as specified in this section.
C. Any questions and concerns identified by the ETC shall be promptly addressed to the City
of Lubbock.
PART PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL TESTING COMPANY
A. Retain the services of Third Party ETC (Electrical Testing Company) that is qualified to test
electrical equipment, and is an approved testing company by City of Lubbock. The ETC
shall not be associated with the manufacturer of equipment or systems under test.
B. ETC shall prepare test reports on the systems they test.
02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600-1
11 /03
2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. All shall be furnished by and remain property of the contractor. The following test
equipment shall be provided and shall include as a minimum:
1. Amprobe
2. Voltmeter
3. Circuit Tracer
4. Power Factor Meter
5. Dranetz 901 or equal
6. Insulation resistance tester
7. Earth ground resistance tester
8. Circuit breaker tester
9. Thermovision infrared scanning equipment
10. Receptacle testers
11. 2-way radios
B. Test Instrument Traceability: The ETC shall have a calibration program which maintain all
applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy. The accuracy shall be traceable to
the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) in an unbroken chain.
Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule and
dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment:
1. Field instruments: 6 months maximum
2. Laboratory instruments: 12 months
3. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months (where accuracy is guaranteed by lessor)
2.3 ELECTRIC SYSTEM POWER STUDIES
A. Short -Circuit Analysis:
1. Calculation of the maximum rms symmetrical three-phase short-circuit current at each
significant location in the electrical system shall be made using a digital computer.
2. Appropriate motor short-circuit contribution shall be included at the appropriate
locations in the system so that the computer calculated values represent the highest
short-circuit current the equipment will be subjected to under fault conditions.
3. A tabular computer printout shall be included which lists the claculated shourt-circuit
currents, X/R ratios, equipment short-circuit interrupting or withstand current ratings,
and notes regarding the adequacy or inadequacy of the equipment.
4. The study shall include a computer printout of input circuit data including conductor
lengths, number of conductors per phase, conductor impedance values, insulation
types, transformer impedances and X/R ratios, motor contributions, and other circuit
information as related to the short-circuit calculations.
5. Include a computer printout identifying the maximum available short-circuit current in
rms symmetrical amperes and the X/R ratio of the fault current for each bus/branch
calculation.
6. The system one -line diagram shall be computer generated and will clearly identify
individual equipment busses, bus numbers used in the short-circuit analysis, cable and
buys connections between the equipment, calculated maximum short-circuit current at
each bus location and other information pertinent to the computer analysis.
7. A comprehensive discussion section evaluating the adequacy or inadequacy of the
equipment must be provided and include recommendations as appropriate for
improvements to the system.
8. The contractor shall be responsible for supplying conductor information (lengths, types,
numbers per phase, etc.) in a timely manner to allow the short-circuit analysis to be
completed prior to final installation.
9. Any inadequacies shall be called to the attention of the engineer and recommendations
made for improvements as soon as they are identified.
III
i�
I
I
U
02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600 - 2
11 /03
0
I
V
I
[I
B. Protective Device Time -Current Coordination Analysis:
1. The time -current coordination analysis shall be performed with the aid of a digital
computer and will include the determination of settings, ratings, or types for the
overcurrent protective devices supplied.
2. Where necessary, an appropriate compromise shall be made between system
protection and service continuity with system protection and service continuity
considered to be of equal importance.
3. A sufficient number of computer generated log -log plots shall be provided to indicate
the degree of system protection and coordination by displaying the time -current
characteristics of series connected overcurrent devices and other pertinent system
parameters.
4. Computer printouts shall accompany the log -log plots and will contain descriptions for
each of the devices shown, setting of the adjustable devices, the short-circuit current
availability at the device location when known, and device identification numbers to aid
in locating the devices on the log -log plots and the system one -line diagram.
5. The study shall include a separate, tabular computer printout containing the suggested
device settings of all adjustable overcurrent protective devices, the equipment where
the device is located, and the device number corresponding the device on the system
one -line diagram.
6. A computer generated system one -line diagram shall be provided which clearly
identifies individual equipment buses. Bus numbers, device identification numbers and
the maximum available short-circuit current at each bus when known.
7. A discussion section which evaluates the degree of system protection and service
continuity with overcurrent devices, along with recommendations as required for
increasing system protection or device coordination.
8. Significant deficiencies in protection and/or coordination shall be called to the attention
of the engineer (architect) and recommendations made for improvements as soon as
they are identified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION BY TEST ENGINEER
A. Obtain and review design documents for overall design intent and the overall required
systems configurations.
B. Obtain and review shop drawings and submittals for installation criteria and the required
construction details, as they support and further define the systems features.
C. The Test Engineer shall make general inspections at the job site and shall review the
following for configuration, quality of construction, adherence to design requirements, and
conformance with shop drawings and submittal information.
1. Service entrance switchboard
2. Main distribution switchgear
3. Sub -distribution panels
4. Branch circuit panelboards
5. Ground systems
6. Variable frequency drives
D. The Test Engineer shall make general inspections at the job site and shall also review the
following:
1. Assembly of the accessory equipment, and the interconnecting wiring for control
circuits and fire alarm interface.
2. General Inspection of: Appearance, finish, alignment of doors, covers and similar parts;
quality of workmanship; possible shipping and other damage; missing, broken or
incorrectly applied devices; loose, or missing accessories, bushings, or hardware;
loose or broken wires; proper installation of all equipment; equipment to verify that shop
drawings and instructions have been shipped with all equipment and are available.
02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600 - 3
11 /03
G
E. Electrical Nameplates: Review submittals for correct nameplates. Inspect and check all
electrical equipment and devices above and below ceiling spaces for the correct
nameplate. Prepare and submit checklist that identifies each electrical device with a sign off
column for Test Engineer's initials.
F. Fire Stopping. Inspect all raceways for proper installation of fire stopping after installation of
voice, data, video, audio, and security cables.
G. Emergency Off Switches: Test all emergency off switches and verify shut down and reset of
equipment.
H. Spare Fuses: The Test Engineer shall inspect and verify spare fuse inventory.
I. Lighting. Verify operation of all lamps one week prior to substantial completion.
J. Air Stopping. Inspect all raceways for proper installation of air stopping after installation of
voice, data, video, fire alarm, power, and security cables.
3.2 ELECTRICAL TESTING COMPANY
A. The Test Engineer shall deliver the following project documents to the ETC eight weeks
prior to testing:
1. Division 16 Specifications
2. Electrical Floor Plans showing equipment to be tested.
3. Electrical one Line Diagrams
4. Submittals of Manufacturers Data and Shop Drawings including engineers review letter
of all systems to be tested.
5. Coordination Study
6. Fault Current Study
B. The ETC shall prepare test reports including description of project, description of
equipment tested, description of test, test results, conclusions and recommendations,
retesting results and list of test equipment used and calibration date. Calibration shall be
traceable to the National Bureau of Standards and shall not be more than 6 months since
last calibration.
C. One copy of each test report shall be delivered directly to the electrical engineer and Owner
within 7 calendar days of the test.
D. Insert a copy of each test report in the operation and maintenance manuals.
3.3 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
A. The primary purpose of this section is to witness and verify operation of electrical
equipment and systems as shown on electrical drawings and as specified in Division 16 of
the contract documents.
B. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions, which simulate as close to an
actual operating condition as possible. To that end the contractor shall provide all
necessary materials and temporary system voltages, currents to simulate fault conditions
on the system being tested in order to prove and verify proper operation. At satisfactory
completion of all verified tests, the building electrical systems being tested shall be returned
to the condition required by the contract documents as a complete and operational system.
C. Demonstrate to the Owner's Representative successful execution of the following FPT's
(functional performance tests) in accordance with approved FPT procedures as described
in Test Procedures.
3.4 RECEPTACLE AND DEVICE TEST
A. Receptacle Polarity Test: The Test Engineer shall test every receptacle installed or
reconnected under this contract with a receptacle circuit tester. Tester shall test for open
ground, reverse polarity, open hot, open neutral, hot and ground reversed, hot or neutral
and hot open. Rewire receptacles with faults and retest. Submit test report signed by Test
Engineer that performed the test.
0
0
I
u
a
0
I
0
0
02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600 - 4 r�
11/03 Il
fl
U
B. Ground -Fault Receptacle Circuit Interrupter Tests: The Test Engineer shall test each
receptacle or branch circuit breaker having ground -fault circuit protection to assure that the
ground -fault circuit interrupter will not operate when subjected to a ground -fault current of
less than 4 milliamperes and will operate when subjected to a ground -fault current
exceeding 6 milliamperes. Perform testing using an instrument specifically designed and
manufactured for testing ground -fault circuit interrupters. Apply the test to the receptacle.
"TEST' button operation will not be acceptable as a substitute for this test. Replace
receptacles that do not shutoff power with 5/1000 of an ampere within 1/40th of a second
and retest. Submit test report signed by Test Engineer who performed this test.
C. Operational Tests: Demonstrate the operation of each switch, circuit breaker and other item
of electrical control with the systems fully energized and operating. Each shall be
demonstrated three times.
a3.5 600 VOLT WIRING
n
r
A. Scope: The Contractor shall test all electrical feeders and exterior branch circuits whose
operating voltage is 600 volts or less that are installed under this contract and exterior
branch circuits. The Test Engineer shall verify tests and submit a test report.
B. Test for continuity of each circuit.
C. Test for grounds in each circuit which shall consist of the physical examination of the
installation to ensure that all required ground jumpers, devices, and appurtenances do exist
and are mechanically firm.
D. Perform a 500-volt megohm meter test on each circuit between the conductor and ground.
The insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms for circuits under 115V, 6
megohms between conductor and ground on those circuits (115V-600V) with total single
conductor length of 2,500 feet and over, nor less than 8 megohms for those circuits (115V-
600V) with single conductor length of less than 2,500 feet. If conductor fails test replace
wiring or correct defect and retest.
E. Perform torque test for every conductor tested and terminated in an overcurrent device or
bolted type connection; torque all connections per manufacturers recommendations and
tabulate the results on a tabular form.
3.6 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Scope: Test and adjust occupancy sensor system in each space.
B. Adjust the location, sensitivity and time delay such that the controlled lighting turns ON
instantly when someone enters the room and remains ON while the space is occupied.
C. Adjust location or settings such that activity outside the space, such as persons walking
down the corridor does not turn the lights ON.
3.7 POWER SYSTEM TESTS
A. Scope: The Test Engineer shall inspect and test entire electrical systems provided by this
contract to verify equipment and controls are correctly operating.
B. Load Balance Tests: Checks all panelboards for proper load balance between phase
conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15%
of average load.
C. Motor Tests: Check all motors for proper rotation and measure actual load current. Submit
tabulation of motor currents for all motors 1 HP or more after the HVAC system has been
balanced.
D. Phase Relationship Tests: Check connections to all new and existing equipment for proper
phase relationship. During such check, disconnect all devices, which could be damaged by
the application of voltage or reversed phase sequence.
02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600 - 5
11 /03
3.8 SERVICE GROUNDING TEST
A. Perform three point fall -of -potential tests on main grounding electrode system per IEEE
Standard No. 81, Section 9.04. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 5 ohms. If
this resistance cannot be obtained with the ground system shown, notify the Architect
immediately for further instruction.
B. Perform the two -point method test per IEEE Standard 81, Section 9.03 to determine the
ground resistance between the main ground system and all major electrical equipment
frames, system neutral, and/or derived neutral points. Resistance shall be no greater than 5
ohms.
C. Confirm that the neutral is grounded only at the service equipment by removing the service
neutral grounding conductor and meggering the neutral bus.
D. Take ground readings as follows:
1. Phase I. Prior to connection of exterior ground system to building equipment.
2. Phase I. Prior to building occupancy, after connection to building ground system.
3. Retest exterior ground system after Phase II exterior ground system is interconnected
to Phase I system.
4. Phase II. Prior to building occupancy after connection to building ground system.
5. Phase III. Prior to building occupancy after ground system is complete.
3.9 MOLDED -CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Scope. Test all circuit breakers 100 amps and over.
B. Inspect each breaker, operate manually, and electrically. Test shunt trips and alarm
devices manually and electrically.
C. Adjust breaker trips to settings furnished by the coordination study and verify settings of the
manufacturer's rating by passing controlled current through the trip devices. Record values
and report deficiencies. The trip characteristics when adjusted to setting parameters shall
fall within the manufacturer's published time - current characteristics tolerance band.
D. Circuit Breaker Electrical Tests:
1. Contact resistance shall be measured.
2. Time -current characteristic tests shall be performed by passing three hundred percent
(300%) rated current through each pole separately. Trip time shall be determined.
3. Instantaneous pickup current shall be determined by run-up or pulse method. Clearing
times should be within four (4) cycles or less.
4. Insulation resistance shall be determined pole to pole, across pole and pole to ground
and across open contacts. Test voltage shall be 1000 volts D.C.
5. Check trip unit reset operation.
3.10 SWITCHBOARDS
A. Scope. Test all switchboards.
B. Inspect equipment and each breaker, fused switch and report installation or shipping
damage, loose material, shipping blocks, contamination or unfavorable environmental
conditions that must be corrected. Check equipment for operation of doors, security of
mounting. Report deficiencies.
C. Check the equipment ground and record the number and size of ground bus and straps.
Report deficiencies.
D. Inspect the bus assembly for deficiencies and torque test all bolted connections. Test
insulation of each bus phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground and all control circuits to
ground with a suitable megohmeter. Record values and report deficiencies.
E. Inspect for proper identification of protective devices.
F. Surge Suppressors:
1. Test surge suppressors per the following procedures:
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
(1) Inspect for physical damage.
U
I
0
I
fl
11,
02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600 - 6
11 /03
L
(2) Inspect ground connections for integrity.
2. Electrical Tests: Perform ground continuity test to ground system.
3.11 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Scope. Test Automatic Transfer Switches.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Inspect for physical damage, anchorage and grounding.
2. Perform manual transfer operation.
3. Clean and lubricate transfer mechanism as required. Check alignment and operation in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Verify proper operation of all interlocks.
(-j C. Electrical Tests:
u 1. Monitor and verify correct operation and timing of the following applicable items:
a. Normal voltage sensing relays.
b. Emergency voltage sensing relays.
c. Test switch.
d. In -phase monitor.
e. Time delay upon transfer.
t
f. Alternate voltage sensing relay.
g. Interlocks and limit switch function.
h. Timing delay and re -transfer upon normal power restoration.
i. Contact resistance shall be measured across main contacts.
D. Perform insulation resistance tests phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with switch in both
source positions.
E. Set and calibrate in accordance with specifications:
1. Voltage sensing relay.
2. Frequency sensing relay.
3. Transfer time delay relay.
3.12 METERING TEST & CALIBRATION FOR METERS
A. Scope: Test all analog and digital meters provided by this contract.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
1. Examine all devices for broken parts, shipping damage, and tightness of connections.
2. Verify that meter types digital scales, and connections are in accordance with
manufacture's drawings and specifications.
C. Instrument Transformers:
1. Test transformer polarity electrically
2. Verify connection at secondary CT leads by driving a low current through the leads and
checking for this amount at applicable devices
3. Confirm transformer ratio by primary current injection.
4. Measure insulation resistance primary -to -ground, secondary -to -ground and primary -to -
secondary.
L 5 Overpotential test primary insulation
6. Measure potential transformer ratio.
D. Metering and Instrumentation:
0 1. Calibrate all analog meters at midscale
2. Calibrate watt-hour meter to one-half percent
3. Verify all instrument multipliers
4. Verify operation of each installed function (volt amps, etc.) on digital meters.
5. Determine accuracy at 50/75/100% of full scale for digital meters for each function.
6. Verify operation of alarm contacts if installed.
E. Verify and test operation of electronic metering communication links.
r( 02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600 - 7
0 11/03
3.13 SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES 1000A OR GREATER
A. Perform complete inspection for assembly, fit, anchoring and grounding. Inspect the bus
assembly for deficiencies and torque test all bolted connections.
B. Perform insulation resistance test on each bus section, phase -to -phase, and phase -to -
ground, and on control wiring. Minimum test voltage and insulation resistance shall be as
follows:
TABLE 16000.1
Voltage
Minimum
Minimum
Rating
Test Voltage
Insulation
0-250V
500 VDC
25
250-600V
1,000 VDC
100
601 - 5,000 V
2,500 V DC
1,000
5,001-15,000v
2,500VDC
5,000
C. Electrical operation of the circuit breaker shall be checked in the test and connected
position.
D. The control power source shall be checked.
E. The circuit breaker control scheme shall be tested.
F. A phasing check shall be made on double -ended and/or emergency source switchgear at
tie points to ensure correct bus phasing.
G. Test Values: Bolt torque levels are checked in accordance with U.S. Standards or
manufacturer's specifications.
3.14 POWER SYSTEMS PROTECTIVE DEVICE AND CALIBRATION
A. Scope: It is the intent of these tests to assure all protective devices are operational,
correctly applied, within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, and installed in
accordance with the specifications. This effort should minimize the damage caused by any
electrical failure. The ETC shall verify and certify that the electrical system and electrical
equipment configuration matches the contract documents, electrical equipment shop
drawings, and the electrical system coordination study recommended settings.
B. Adjustments, Settings and Modifications: The ETC shall calibrate necessary field settings,
adjustments and minor modifications to conform with the coordination study without
additional cost. (Examples of minor modifications are trip sizes within the same frame, the
time curve characteristics of induction relays, ranges etc.) Adjust protective devices to the
values provided in the coordination study. Test the minimum pickup and delay, ground fault
pickup and delay. Demonstrate the zone interlock feature. The trip characteristics, when
adjusted to setting parameters, shall fall within the manufacturer's published time -current
characteristic tolerance.
C. Certifications: Two weeks prior to final inspection, the ETC shall deliver four copies of the
following certifications to the Owner's representative:
1. That the protective devices have been adjusted and set in accordance with the
approved protective device study.
2. That tests and settings have been witnessed by the Test Engineer.
3.15 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. Scope: Test variable frequency drives.
B. Mechanical and Visual Inspection
1. Visually inspect for obvious indications of physically damaged or overheated
components.
2. Verify all static switch and jumper settings are applicable to the input and load.
3. Inspect for loose terminations.
11
11
I
I
0
11
Et
H1
I
It
u
02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600 - 8
11 /03
c
f
11
f
r
n
4. Verify stop and safety circuits are properly terminated.
5. Verify the motor terminations are consistent with the drive output.
C. Electrical Tests
1. Test and record the line volts and amps. Observe for balance within 10%.
2. Inspect for proper jumper or switch settings for given drive parameters if so equipped.
3. If possible, start and run the drive while observing the test metering or fault indicators if
so equipped.
4. Test and record output volts and amps while the drive the drive is at 25%, 50%, and
100% speed and attached load. Observe for balance and within manufacturers'
specifications.
5. Set adjustable parameters to match the settings provided.
6. Activate the various safety devices when possible to ensure proper operation.
7. Record harmonic distortion at two levels of common coupling, each level is to be at the
next upstream feed.
8. After completion of air balancing, record final drive settings of the vfd's.
3.2 INFRARED THERMOGRAPH SCANNING:
A. In general, the scan shall be made when the equipment is energized and is operating at its
normal capacity. It is intended that the scan be made after the equipment has been in full
operation as follows:
1. Phase I: One month after occupancy
2. Phase II: One year after occupancy
B. Test equipment, miscellaneous tools, and materials shall be transported properly, moved,
and set up by trained personnel. Equipment used in testing shall be capable to perform all
recommended procedures required by the apparatus and related equipment. All test
equipment shall have certification of calibration and be in working order.
C. All hot spots shall be marked, identified and an infrared thermographic scanning report
prepared and furnished to the Test Engineer.
D. The report shall contain infrared photos of trouble spots with temperature readings.
E. All sources of heating problems shall be promptly reported to the owner for corrective
action by the Division 16 contractor.
F. Infrared scanning equipment shall be an AGA (or approved equal) thermovision set
capable of viewing an entire bus or equipment assembly at one time and have a sensitivity
of 0.20°C. with a liquid nitrogen reference.
3.3 FIRE ALARM ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. Testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72. The recommended tests in NFPA 72 shall
be considered mandatory and shall verify that all previous deficiencies have been
corrected. The test shall include the following:
1. Test of each function of the control panel.
2. Test of each circuit in both trouble and normal modes.
3. Tests of alarm initiating devices in both normal and trouble conditions.
4. Tests of each control circuit and device.
5. Tests of each alarm notification appliance.
6. Tests of the battery charger and batteries.
7. Complete operational tests under emergency power supply.
8. Visual inspection of all wiring connections.
9. Opening the circuit at each alarm initiating device and notification appliance to test the
wiring supervisory feature.
10. Ground fault.
11. Short circuit faults.
12. Stray voltage.
13. Loop resistance.
02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600 - 9
11 /03
3A TEST PROCEDURES
A. Submit for approval detailed FPT procedures corresponding to the FPT criteria in
Acceptance Criteria in this Section. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions,
written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical
conditions. List the value for all setpoints and electrical values and acceptable results for
each condition tested. Provide a unique alpha -numeric identification for each FPT
procedure.
B. Submit for approval test procedure check -off sheets. Number each test procedure check -off
item with the same number as the corresponding FPT procedure.
C. Demonstrate successful execution of FPT's listed under Acceptance Criteria in this Section.
Sigh -off each successful test and obtain the sign -off of the Commissioning Agent or other
Owner -designated witness.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Perform all testing after installation and before energizing. All systems shall pass tests prior
to placing in service
B. The Test Engineer shall submit to the City of Lubock a schedule of all tests to be performed
one month prior to the scheduled performance of the first test. Items to include summary of
project, description of test, conclusions and recommendations, appendix including sample
test forms.
C. Confirm test schedule with Construction Coordinator one week prior to test. The Test
Engineer shall coordinate the test schedule so that the representatives of the City of
Lubbock can witness all testing.
D. The Test Engineer shall deliver to the construction coordinator, owners representatives and
the engineer, within 5 working days of test the test results. The owner shall have the tests
for a two -week review prior to energization.
3.6 TEST REPORTS
A. The ETC shall prepare test reports including description of project, description of
equipment tested, description of test, test results, conclusions and recommendations,
retesting results and list of test equipment used and calibration date.
B. Insert a copy of each test report in the operation and maintenance manuals.
3.7 RETESTING
A. Any fault in material or in any part of the installation revealed by these tests shall be
investigated, replaced or repaired by the Contractor and the same test repeated by the
ETC at Contractor's expense until no fault appears.
3.8 LABELS
A. Upon completion of the tests a label shall be attached to all tested devices. These labels
shall indicate date serviced and the ETC.
END OF SECTION
0
11
411
I
I
02092 COMMISSIONING, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 17600 - 10 �l
11 /03 I